JP7405180B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have conventionally been known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting slot and display on a liquid crystal screen a variable performance or a jackpot performance according to the lottery results. In such performances, various patterns of performances are carried out, such as performances to create a sense of expectation among players and performances to increase the players' desire to participate in the game, in order to improve the interest of the game. .

Among this type of pachinko machines and the like, a game machine has been proposed in which the volume of sound effects, voices, etc. output as effects can be varied and set by a player's operation, a game parlor's settings, etc.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2011-200511

However, in this type of gaming machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that allows more suitable volume control.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform suitable volume control.

To achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 provides a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, and a benefit that is advantageous to the player when a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means. a sound output means capable of outputting sound as part of the performance executed by the performance execution means; and a sound output means capable of outputting a sound from the outside of the gaming machine. a volume setting means that can be set based on an operation; a first state in which the audio output means outputs audio based on the volume set by the volume setting means; and a volume set by the volume setting means. output control means for switching between a second state in which the sound output means outputs sound at a predetermined volume regardless of the state of the sound; and initial setting means for setting the second state when a return state in which power supply is started, and in the second state, the gaming machine is set to the highest level set by the volume setting means. A specific volume that is lower than a low volume can be set, and a predetermined display mode can be displayed during a period in the second state, and a predetermined display mode can be displayed in the first state. During the period, a specific mode can be displayed to indicate that the volume can be changed by the volume setting means, and during the period in the second state, the specific mode is configured not to be displayed. ing .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to provide a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, and a benefit that is advantageous to a player when a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means. A bonus granting means, a sound output means capable of outputting sound as part of the performance executed by the performance execution means, and setting a volume output by the sound output means based on an operation from outside the gaming machine. a first state in which the audio output device outputs audio based on the volume set by the volume setting device; and a first state in which the audio output device outputs audio based on the volume set by the volume setting device; output control means for switching between a second state in which the sound output means outputs sound at a volume; and power supply to the gaming machine is started from a power-off state in which power supply for operating the gaming machine is cut off; and initial setting means for setting the second state when the game machine returns to the return state, and the gaming machine has a volume that is lower than the lowest volume set by the volume setting means in the second state. It is possible to set a specific volume which is the volume, and during the period in the second state, a predetermined display mode can be displayed , and during the period in the first state, the A specific mode can be displayed to indicate that the volume can be changed by the volume setting means, and the specific mode is not displayed during the second state.

Therefore, there is an effect that suitable volume control can be performed.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating device. (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6(a). (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7(a). 7 is a front perspective view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device. (a) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and (c) is a side view of the tilting device in the direction of arrow FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the tilting device along line XIVc. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the tilting device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. 17(a) is a front view of the drive device, and FIG. 17(b) is a side view of the drive device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (a) is a side view of the left disc cam as seen in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disc cam as seen in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 18. (a) and (b) are front views of a release member and a rotating claw member. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. (a) is a side view of a slide claw member in a second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotary plate member, and (c) is a side view of a release member. (a) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). It is a side view of the tilting device in a 3rd embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. It is a side view of the tilting device in a 4th embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operating device. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of an operating device in a fifth embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibrating device. (a) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial sectional view of the lower frame member taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and (c) is a side view of the lower frame member in FIG. 59(a). FIG. 3 is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibrating device taken along the line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59(a). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a). FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device. (a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (a) is a front view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a sectional view of the right disk cam along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. c) is a sectional view of the right disk cam taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). (a) is a front view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a sectional view of the right disk cam along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). (a) is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). It is. (a) is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). It is. It is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device in a 6th embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member, the ring member, and the 2nd transmission member of the left disk cam. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). (a) is a front view of the right disc cam in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam taken along the line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74(a), and (b) is a partial side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). It is. (a) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a). 77(a) is a front view of the engaging member, and FIG. 77(b) is a side view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a). (a) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam as seen in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in Fig. 78 (a), and (c) is a side view of the right disc cam. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c), (e) is a front view of the right disc cam, and (f) is a front view of the right disc cam. 78(e) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e). (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the inner frame is opened (developed) with respect to the outer frame. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the inner frame is opened to the outer frame and the back pack is opened to the inner frame (deployed). It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the inner frame is closed with respect to the outer frame and the front frame is opened (expanded). It is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window portion of the front frame are shown exploded. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window portion of the front frame are shown exploded. (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of the movable binding member in which the released state and the fixed state of the movable binding member are illustrated side by side. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94(a). (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). (a) is a rear schematic diagram schematically illustrating the movable binding member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and (c) is a schematic diagram of the movable binding member and the harness. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c); FIG. (a) and (b) are top schematic views of a front frame, an inner frame, a movable binding member, and a harness, schematically illustrating the movable binding member and the harness. FIG. 3 is a front view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. 115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and FIG. 115(b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member taken along the line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 115(a). FIG. 3 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly. (a) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along the CXXIVb-CXXIVb line in FIG. 124(a), and (c) is a rear view of the speaker assembly in FIG. 124(a). FIG. 124(d) is a top view of the speaker assembly as seen in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124(d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly as seen in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a). (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly, the rear assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame, and the upper side plate member taken along the CXXVa-CXXVa line in FIG. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly, rear assembly, upper frame member, main body frame, and upper side plate member taken along the line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (a) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame along the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line in FIG. 127(b). (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of the board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) is a front perspective view of the board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the board support device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball firing unit. (a) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the ball firing unit showing the ball sending situation by the ball sending device in chronological order. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (a) is a front view of the ball firing unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball firing unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a). 147(a) is a front view of the ball firing unit, and FIG. 147(b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147(a). FIG. 3 is a partial front view of the ball firing unit, inner rail, and outer rail after firing the ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a performance operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a performance operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a performance operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal motion device taken along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of a flower petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and the loose fitting device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and the loose fitting device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device, the driving arm member, and the driven arm member. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a 2nd presentation member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide board, and a 2nd presentation member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, a forward-backward movement unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and a forward-backward movement unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, a forward-backward movement unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and a forward-backward movement unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, a forward-backward movement unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and a forward-backward movement unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central axis rotation device omitted and the petal operating device seen through. FIG. 3(d) is a front view of the slit member and the rotary plate. (a) is a front view of the rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of the petal and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear view of the petal operating device. FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central axis rotation device omitted and the petal operating device seen through. FIG. 3(d) is a front view of the slit member and the rotary plate. (a) is a front view of the rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of the petal and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear view of the petal operating device. FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device with the central axis rotation device omitted and the petal operating device seen through. FIG. 3(d) is a front view of the slit member and the rotary plate. (a) is a front view of the rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of the petal and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear view of the petal operating device. FIG. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the ball firing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the ball firing unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage forming member in an 11th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. (a) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device in 12th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are front views of the petal operating device. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (a) and (b) are front views of the petal operating device. It is a front view of a petal operation device. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operating device in a 13th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the operating device. (a) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operating device, (d) is a partial sectional view of the operating device taken along the line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203(a), and (e) is a sectional view of the operating device taken along the line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203(a). (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the fourteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) schematically represents an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in region CCVIc of FIG. 206(a); FIG. 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206(a), and (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIe of (a). It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode in which three reserved balls are set while the third symbol is fluctuating, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in which four reserved balls are set while the third symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display mode in which the character J0 appears from the display area C. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode in which four reserved balls are set during the variation of the third symbol and the recommended value does not increase due to no vacancies, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode from the state of FIG. 6(a). It is a figure showing a display mode when the number of reserved pitches further increases and exceeds the recommended value. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls increases in a short period of time, and (b) is a diagram in which character J0 in display area C instructs the optimal number of reserved balls according to the state. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode when character J1 is displayed in the display area C while the third symbol is changing, and (b) is a diagram showing a change to a reserved ball while the third symbol is changing. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display mode when character J2 is further displayed in display area C. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode when the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum number, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode in which the character displayed in the display area C changes when the number of balls is exceeded. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode when the player is allowed to accumulate up to 6 balls during reach, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when the number of balls on hold is accumulated up to 6, and the symbol arrangement changes. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode when (a) is a diagram showing the display mode of the lucky display of the previous jackpot pending, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when the player presses the button after the number of pending balls has accumulated to 6. This is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode of a long opening performance, and (b) is a diagram showing a display format of a fluctuating performance of a long opening prize. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in a first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing part of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special symbol jackpot random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the first control example. and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal winning random number table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special drawing 1 jackpot type selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the 1st control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a normal variation pattern selection table that is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the variation pattern selection table for time saving which is a part of variation pattern selection table in a 1st example of control. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning command table in a first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a holding change selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a holding effect mode selection table in the first control example. . (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the holding lid range selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal holding lid range selection table in the first control example. FIG. 3(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the advance notice A mode retention lid range selection table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a selection table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a holding lid range selection table during short-term winning in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a holding lid range selection table during reach effect in the first control example. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a holding lid command selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a holding lid color change selection table in the first control example. It is. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lucky pending command table in a first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a background mode selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a reserved character selection table in the first control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a pending character change table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a speech balloon selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal speech balloon selection table in the first control example. , (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a notice A balloon selection table in the first control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a notice B balloon selection table in the first control example. It is. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a short-term prize winning speech bubble table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a speech bubble table during reach effect in the first control example. be. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lucky hold balloon selection table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a reach effect lottery table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a reach start time calculation table in the first control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lucky hold lottery table in the first control example. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images when the power is turned on. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in a first control example. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 12 is a flowchart showing a variation execution determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol 1 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol 2 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the prefetching process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the through gate passing process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st example of control. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern reception process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the lucky display judgment process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flow chart which showed hold performance setting processing during reach performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the hold lid setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing the pending character setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the balloon lid setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing winning command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the short-term winning prize determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 12 is a flowchart showing a lucky hold storage process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 12 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing short-term winning management processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which showed hold production management processing during reach performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which showed sensor input processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st example of control. 7 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing a preview effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the preview effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing mode switching processing. (a) is a flowchart showing the hold lid command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the hold lid command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing a pending character display process. 12 is a flowchart showing balloon display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which showed display setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st example of control. (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a second control example. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of special symbol fluctuation and continuous performance in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the relationship between continuous production and background display in a 2nd control example. (a) is a display mode showing a display screen during continuous performance in the second control example, and (b) is a display mode showing a display screen during special performance in the second control example. This is a display mode showing a background change during continuous performance in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart showing the start-up winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the prefetch process 2 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 2nd control example. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing stop command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the time saving process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. 12 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the production setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart showing the continuous effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart showing the special effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the production return process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd example of control. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in a third control example. It is a flowchart which showed the production|presentation setting process 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous production return process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart showing special effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a third control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 4th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a display screen when the power is turned on in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen when the power is turned on in the fourth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen after power-on in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a variable game screen for the first rotation after power-on in the fourth control example. . It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a volume table in a fourth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing startup processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing initial volume setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing a volume setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing stop command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing volume-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a storage error A screen when the power is turned on in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a storage error B screen during a gaming operation in the fifth control example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a fifth control example. It is a timing chart when performing a retry operation in the tilting device. It is a timing chart when a touch sensor is detected in a tilting device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a fifth control example. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in a fifth control example. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in a fifth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an operation effect selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting motion scenario table in the fifth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting motion scenario A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting motion scenario B table in the fifth control example. be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the origin detection operation A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the origin detection operation B table in the fifth control example. , (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting initial operation table in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 5th example of control. 12 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fifth control example. It is a flowchart which showed sensor input processing 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the retry process during touch input performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flow chart which showed tilting device control processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the operation production setting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the tilting initial operation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the process during operation production performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the performance backtracking operation process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 5th control example. 12 is a flowchart showing retry operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fifth control example. 346(a) is a diagram showing the display mode when the held ball has a fluctuation of jackpot A and the third symbol is changing, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when the held ball is further changed from the state of FIG. 346(a). It is a figure showing a display mode when one is digested and it becomes jackpot A. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode during super time when one more reserved ball is consumed from the state of FIG. ) is a diagram showing the display mode when one more is digested and the current fluctuation results in a jackpot. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode of chance, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode during probability change. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode when the jackpot has started, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the jackpot 1Rth performance. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode when notifying that there is a button effect during a jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when the button is pressed from the state of FIG. 350(a). It is a diagram showing a display mode when notifying a player that a probability change has been given. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode when the jackpot ends, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when the jackpot ends and the game enters the probability variable mode. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a promotion lottery table in the sixth control example. FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in a sixth control example. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a sixth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop symbol switching process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop symbol change process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart showing jackpot related command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the opening process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 6th example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the big prize winning ball process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 6th example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the ending process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 6th example of control. 12 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a sixth control example. It is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring/presentation process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a sixth control example. (a) is a flowchart showing a stop symbol replacement process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop symbol replacement process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart showing the game state setting process performed. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related display process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the big prize winning process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a seventh control example. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode during the performance when the long opening is won in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode in the case of the long opening performance in the seventh control example. This is a diagram. It is a figure which showed the display mode during the long open performance regulation in the 7th control example. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in a seventh control example. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a seventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the long opening production process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a seventh control example. 12 is a flowchart showing long release related processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in a seventh control example.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, Figures 1 to 4
4, the present invention will be described as a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply "pachinko machine") as a first embodiment.
10) will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12.
An inner frame 12 is supported as an opening/closing axis on the side where the inner frame 12 is provided so as to be openable/closeable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15,
(See Fig. 1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side, and the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15 are supported as opening/closing shafts on the side where the hinges 19 are installed so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side. ing. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is, for example, the third symbol display device 81 (FIG.
It is operated by the player when changing the stage of the performance displayed in (see) or changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Around the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are illumination portions 29 to 3 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs.
3 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. In addition, a front view of the front frame 14 (Fig. 1
(See) In the upper left part, there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 1
When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) placed on the side of the ball, balls will be rented according to the operation. It will be done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. Return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of a card etc. inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300, which are operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13, are arranged. Note that the operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, and a firing stop switch 51 that stops firing the ball during the period of being pressed.
b, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotation amount (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding the ball, there are rails 61, 62, general prize opening 63, first prize opening 64, second prize opening 640, variable prize winning device 330, and a through hole. gate 67,
It is constructed by assembling a variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).
It can be attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. General winning hole 63, first winning hole 64, second winning hole 640, variable display unit 8
0 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 is connected to the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1).
can be visually recognized from the front side. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
is erected, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a band-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is erected at the inner side of the outer rail 62. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The gaming area is the area in front of the gaming board 13 that is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a winning opening etc. is arranged,
(area in which the fired ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 61 (Fig. 2
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the game board 13 to prevent a ball that has been guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B display whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or not.
It is configured so that it can be used depending on whether a prize is won in the prize opening 640. in particular,
When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and on the other hand,
When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. In addition, multiple L
The ED is configured such that the LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B include
Not only will the stop symbol after the fluctuation indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot,
In the case of a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R regular jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15,
This is a jackpot in which the game moves to a low probability state and is in a time-saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol described later increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol increases and the second prize opening 640 is reached. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in normal mode, it means that the gaming state (
Neither the jackpot probability nor the second symbol's probability of winning has increased).

During probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the second prize opening 64
The time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is released is also changed, and a longer time than normal is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 640 more easily than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released than usual. Also, during the probability change and time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol will not change, and the second winning hole 640
It is also possible to change at least one of the time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with the game is released and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per win. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in one win is not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 has first symbol display devices 37A, 37B triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640.
A third symbol display device 81 is configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the third symbol, and the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 is used as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays a second symbol is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for displaying fluctuations. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640
is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so it is possible to give the player more opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 640.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, you can also enter the second prize opening 640 during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the open time or number of openings of the electric accessory 640a per win, etc. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device.
37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second
The symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Also, through gate 67
The number of assemblies is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be located below the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, the first symbol display device 37A
, 37B indicate the number of reserved balls, so the second symbol retention lamp may not be lit.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main controller 110 (See Figure 4) A jackpot lottery is held, and the display according to the lottery result is the first one.
It is shown by the symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. Note that in this embodiment,
Although the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same, The number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the prize and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 are different numbers, for example, the prize paid out when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of balls may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball enters the second winning hole 6.
It will be easy to win to 40.

As mentioned above, during fixed change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal.
Also, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, a state can be created in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 640, and balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640, so it is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting").
), it is more advantageous for the player to obtain many opportunities for jackpot drawings by winning the first winning slot 64 and aiming for a jackpot.

On the other hand, during the probability change or time saving period, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second prize opening 64
Since the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is likely to be in the open state and it is easy to win in the second winning opening 640, the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640. It is better to aim for a 15R jackpot by firing the ball at the right hand (so-called "right-handed hit"), letting it pass through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory, and winning the second prize opening 640. , it is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 by "hitting the right hand" and aiming at the second winning hole 640 by "hitting the left hand". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the game into "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state,
The specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64 or the first The location is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be located to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out openings 71 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are housed in substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100-10
4 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel it off to open the board boxes 100, 102,
If an attempt is made to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, they will be cut into a box base side and a box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the dispensing control device 111
2 is provided with an operating knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM203
In addition, various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
7A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing of display results on the second symbol display device, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. The work area where the values are stored (
work area). Note that the RAM 203 is supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and retains data (backup).
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (FIG. 255) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process (FIG. 254) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 253) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 has
Payout control device 111, audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, second symbol display device, second symbol holding lamp, drive to open and close to the front side around the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large-opening solenoid for driving, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc. is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a power supply device 1.
A RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in 15 is connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erase signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is similar to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/Os, etc. are stored. have. RAM213 is pachinko machine 10
The configuration is such that data can be retained (backed up) by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 receives a power outage signal SG from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc.
1 is input, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing at the time of power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. In addition, the prize ball detection switch is the payout control device 1.
11, but is not connected to the main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
This is to control a. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (
(not being operated), the firing solenoid is energized in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51. .

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). Display control device 114 such as display) and preview presentation
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, etc. performed in . The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. Input/output port 22
5, the main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected, respectively. Other equipment 2
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and to change the presentation content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the audio lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio output device 226 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and also outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Controls turning on and off of the lamp display device 227.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and controls the third symbol display device 81 based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.
This controls the display of the variation effect of the third symbol, etc. In addition, the display control device 11
4 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby controlling the third symbol display device 8.
1 display and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be combined.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (Fig.
(see) RAM erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 is an AC 2
It takes in a voltage of 4 volts and is used for various switches such as various switches 208 and solenoid 20.
Generates 12 volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9, motors, etc., 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and uses these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage. Necessary voltage is supplied to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like.
201 and each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and detects a power outage (when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts).
A power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be successfully executed and completed.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operating device 3
00 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 when viewed from the front (that is, the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operating device 300 includes a tilting device 310 that can be tilted when pushed by a player, and is located in an area formed by a housing recess 17a that is recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper tray 17. will be placed. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

A gap is provided between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a, such that at least the fingers of a hand can comfortably fit therein. Thereby, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by placing his fingertips on the back side of the top surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Note that since the player holds the operating handle 51 with his right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, the following description will be made on the premise that the player operates the tilting device 310 with his left hand.

6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6(b) is a VI of FIG. 6(a).
7(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along line b-VIb, and FIG.
FIG. 7(b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7(a).

6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state (initial state in this embodiment) with the operation surface 312a1 facing in the vertical direction, and FIG. A state in which the operating surface 312a1 is placed in a second state in which it faces upward and backward by rising around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. Note that in FIG. 7, an example of the player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be able to automatically operate between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. Note that details of the drive device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by, for example, displaying a specific display (for example, a display saying "Press the button") on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
This is what the player does when the appears.

Here, if the tilting device 310 is pushed in by dropping the hand forcefully downward, for example, when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 will move toward the front depending on the degree of tilting. This causes the palm of the hand to easily rub against the operating surface 312a1. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing a pushing operation in a manner in which the hand is dropped forcefully downward.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertips near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm of the hand using the fingertips as a fulcrum, the palm of the hand remains integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be pressed and operated comfortably.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform the operation by lowering the palm of the hand using the fingertips as a fulcrum, rather than forcing the player to forcefully drop the hand downward. Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility that the tilting device 310 will be damaged can be reduced.

With reference to FIGS. 8 and 9, differences in how the tilting device 310 looks from the player's perspective will be described. 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 as seen in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 as seen in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated with imaginary lines. Further, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible in the first state from the player's viewpoint, but in the second state, the area is reduced to such an extent that it becomes invisible. (the operation surface 312a1 is directed outside the player's viewpoint). This allows the first
The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the state and the second state.

In this embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protective lens member 31
1i is configured in such a manner that the area thereof gradually increases, and accordingly, the amount of light of the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12) disposed inside the operation device 300 becomes gradually larger.
The difference in the amount of light visible to the player (degree of brightness) becomes large between the first state and the second state, and the way the tilting device 310 is seen can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state. .

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
By placing the outer side of the little finger near the shaft 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and lowering the palm downward using the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum (by rotating around the wrist), The tilting device 310 can be pressed and operated comfortably while the palm of the hand is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform an operation by lowering the palm of the hand using the outer side surface of the little finger as a fulcrum and not allowing the player to forcefully drop the hand downward.
Thereby, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility that the tilting device 310 will be damaged can be reduced.

Next, the operating device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. Figure 10
is a front perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operating device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft portion 314 on which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rear end.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 applies an impact in a straight direction to the tilting device 310, and detection sensors 324L and 32 detect a push operation from the first state.
4R is arranged on the outside of the lower frame member 320 that surrounds the tilting device 310 from below.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that provides the driving force, etc. on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the inner area of the lower frame member 320 is largely used, and the tilting device 310 can be tilted. The device 310 can be housed in a lower frame member 320. This results in
A large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300.
0 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vehicle. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operating device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including a ring member BR1 disposed at the left and right ends at the rear end (the end on the back side of the plane of the paper in FIG. 12), and A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing part 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member having a recessed part arranged opposite to the lower frame member 320 and having a large opening in the center, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in such a manner that the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. together with the tilting device 3
A driving force is applied to the tilting device 310 through an upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the device in the second state of the device 10, and an arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and forms a link mechanism with the tilting device 310. A transmitting drive device 340, and a protective cover device 3 that is fastened and fixed to the drive device 340 and protects the drive device 340 by covering it from three sides, left and right and rearward.
Mainly equipped with 50.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member in which the left and right portions of the bottom slope downward toward the front, and includes a bottom plate portion 321 that slopes downward toward the front; A horizontal part 3 composed of a plate-like member horizontally arranged at the upper end on the back side of the horizontal part 3
22, a lower bearing part 323 which is a semicircular receiving part opened upward near the rear end of the horizontal part 322 and receives the shaft part 314 of the tilting device 310 from below, and a bottom part 321 of the bottom plate part 321. A left side detection sensor 324L and a right side detection sensor 324R are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides.
and an opening 325, which is an opening created by cutting a portion disposed below the horizontal portion 322 at the center position of the bottom plate portion 321 in the left-right direction.

The bottom plate portion 321 determines the end of movement of the tilting device 310 by coming into contact with the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings through which the portion of the tilting device 310 is connected to the bottom plate portion 3.
21.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L, 324R, and an opening 325.
It mainly includes insertion holes 321c that are drilled symmetrically on the left and right sides.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed in a size that allows the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass therethrough. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 extends below the bottom plate portion 321, driving force in the linear direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b includes detection pieces 311gL and 311 protruding from the lower surface of the tilting device 310.
This is a through hole configured to allow insertion of gR. Detection piece 31 protruding from detection hole 321b
1gL and 311gR are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, so that the attitude of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c disposed on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 to be inserted therethrough, and also allows the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 to be inserted when the drive device 340 is operated. The through hole is formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a plane for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, extends upward from the upper surface thereof, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open portion on the front side. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so that it does not move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in a direction to move the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. Note that the detection sensors 324L and 324R are connected to the bottom plate portion 32 of the lower frame member 320.
1 (the position of the detection groove) is arranged at a position where the left and right sides are the same.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor is equipped with a light emitting part that emits light and a light receiving part that receives the light from the light emitting part, and has a gap (slit, detection groove) into which the detection part can be inserted. This means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole that allows the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotary claw member 347, etc. to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, its horizontal width is made larger than the horizontal width of the pair of rotating claw members 347.

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the driving device 340 has a configuration in which the LED device 341f is arranged so as to protrude to the upper front side (see FIG. 17(b)), the LED device 341f is arranged in the opening 325.
By pushing up the driving device 340 after passing through the LED device 341
f can be placed above the opening 325, and the rotary claw member 34 can be connected from the LED device 341f to
The vertical width of the opening 325 can be shortened compared to the vertical width including up to 7.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged to face an opening 331 that is large enough to catch the extension portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 toward the front side, and a lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. The tilting device 310 mainly includes an upper bearing portion 332 that is configured in a semicircular shape with an open bottom and supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured to be vertically divisible so that three directions except the front side are covered. A voice coil motor 352 supported by the bottom plate and arranged on the front side with its vibrating surface directed diagonally forward and upward; a left detection sensor 353L which is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351; and a right side detection sensor 352. It mainly includes a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially torn in order to make visible the right side detection sensor 353R, which is disposed on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L with respect to the left-right center.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the voice coil motor 352 has a vibration surface aligned with the lower frame member 3.
It is disposed in an attitude substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of No. 20. Thereby, by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 extends the protruding convex portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disc cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. Disc cam 344L, 3 of drive device 340
44R is arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R.
Detection holes 344eL, 344eR of disc cams 344L, 344R are detection sensors 353L, 3
It is possible to detect whether or not the disc cams 344L and 344R are arranged in the detection groove of 53R, and to detect that the disc cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the left and right disc cams 344L, 344R of the drive device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL, 344eR in different phases, the detection sensors 353L, 35
There are two types of specific phases that can be detected by 3R.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. Figure 14 (a
) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. 14(c) is a front view of the tilting device 310. ) of XIVc
FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the tilting device 310 taken along the line -XIVc. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 includes a case body 311 that is a box-like body with fan-shaped sides and openings at the top and bottom, and a lid on the upper opening of the case body 311. A lid 312 fastened and fixed to the case body 311, a spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hanging downward, and sandwiched between the case main body 311 and the rear end of the lid 312. A shaft portion 314 disposed in
11 and a lid 312 inseparably.

The case body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311a that is tilted downward from the back side toward the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened at the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and a left and right side of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extends from a flange extending downward along the edge toward the center in the left-right direction, and a recessed portion 311d is a recess with a semicircular cross section that supports the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. , an insertion groove 311e that is a groove arranged in a position where both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f that is formed in a hook shape and that locks the center portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. , a pair of left-side detection pieces 311gL and a right-side detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) extending below the bottom plate part 311a by a predetermined amount toward the front side. a protective lens member 311i arranged above the front end of the bottom plate part 311a and shaped along an arc centered on the shaft part 314 and made of a light-transmitting material; and a bottom plate part 311h. It mainly includes an overhanging protrusion 311j that protrudes downward from the center in the left-right direction at the front end of 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is configured to support the lower frame member 3 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by the player.
This is a portion that makes surface contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of 20.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is connected to the guide hole 3 of the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 (see FIG. 17(b)).
45b, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force to and from the drive device 340.

The left side detection piece 311gL and the right side detection piece 311gR are parts that are inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively, and the left side detection piece 311gL is The overhang length is made longer than that of the right detection piece 311gR.

In this embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right side detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left side detection piece 311gL about the shaft portion 314 is about 3 degrees (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the pushing end (see FIG. 22). The left side detection piece 311gL is jutted out compared to the right side detection piece 311gR so that the tilting device 310 rotates up to the rotation angle (see 23).

The extension portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and extends to a position where it is locked in the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). It consists of aspects.

The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from above (FIG. 14(a)
In addition, since the tilting device 310 is curved in the horizontal direction (see FIG. 14(c)), the tilting device 310 is easily released from the load when the player presses the tilting device 310.
Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The protruding convex portion 311j protrudes from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a at right angles, and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320, so that the player can
When pushed in (see FIG. 29), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321a, and the tip is extended below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 31.
2b to the top plate member 312a and the LED device 34 in the first state (see FIG. 6).
It mainly includes a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape with a size surrounding 1f.

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 due to its axial rigidity, and in the first state (see FIG. 6), due to its positional relationship, the cylindrical member 312c directs the light emitted from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 through the cylinder. While being held inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such limitation is released and the LED device 341f is disposed in such a manner that light can be irradiated over a wide area.

The lens member 313 is made of a light-transmissive material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has an extended end having a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape is provided at the center.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 with a pair of left and right twisted portions, and includes both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the twisted portions, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , is provided.

Next, the drive device 340 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. Figure 17(a)
is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17(b) is a side view of the drive device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a), and FIG. 18 is a front exploded perspective view of the drive device 340. It is.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disc cams 344 (non-rotatably fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343).
left disc cam 344L, right disc cam 344R) and connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344
an arm member 345 that is pivotally supported by the arm member 345; and a release member 346 that is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341 and abuts the first projecting portion 344c1 and the second projecting portion 344c3 of the disc cam 344 in the rotational direction. , a rotating claw member 347 that is coaxially supported with the release member 346 and moves relative to the release member 346 as the release member 346 rotates, and a coil spring-like member that generates a biasing force in a direction to cause the rotating claw member 347 to fall down. The first spring SP1, which is a spring member, and the release member 34
6 and the rotary claw member 347, the second spring SP2 is a torsion spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in a direction that causes the rotary claw member 347 to move away from each other.

The main body member 341 has a motor accommodating portion 3 which is bent rearward on the left and right sides and formed into a U-shape when viewed from above.
41a, and a shaft support hole 341b that is bored at the same position in the opposing plate portion of the motor accommodating portion 341a and that pivotally supports the disc cam 344, and a shaft that is parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. a shaft portion 341c that protrudes in the left-right direction at a position offset from the shaft support hole 341b to the front side; an extension portion 341d that extends from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c; A lighting support portion 341 extending from the housing portion 341a toward the front and upper direction.
e, and an LED device 341f disposed at the upper end of the illumination support portion 341e and having an LED light source disposed therein.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on its upper surface that refracts light (
(a part that refracts light). Thereby, the light from the LED device 341f can be evenly irradiated upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 is attached to the motor housing part 34 inside the U-shape of the motor housing part 341a.
A fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to 1a is provided.

The fixed member 342a pivotally supports the rotating gear of the drive motor 342, and also supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotating gear.

The arm member 345 has a shaft support hole 345a formed in a perfect circle shape at one end and pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and a rectangular shape formed at the other end. It also mainly includes a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end opposite to the shaft support hole 345a abuts the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end is formed at a position where the disc cam 344 rotates for more than one rotation. formed in a position sufficient to allow rotation.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be explained with reference to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 includes a cylindrical member 343a to which a disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18) is fixed at both ends, and a drive motor 342 that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
A transmission gear 343b that meshes with the rotating gear of the transmission gear 343b, a movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction, and the movable clutch 343c. It mainly includes a coil spring 343d that presses the transmission gear 343b against the transmission gear 343b.

The cylindrical member 343a has a fixing part 3 with a D-shaped cross section that fixes the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof.
43a1 and 343a2, and the right side fixing part 343a2 is formed longer toward the center than the left side fixing part 343a1. Here, in detail, the fixed part 343a2 is the movable clutch 3
It is formed with a length that allows it to move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the coil spring 43c moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b has a perfectly circular insertion hole 343b1 into which the columnar member 343a is inserted;
The clutch portion 343b2 includes a clutch portion 343b2 in which unevenness along the axial direction is formed at a circumferential position around the shaft center from a surface facing the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle rotation) relative to the columnar member 343a even when the columnar member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section into which the columnar member 343a is inserted.
43c1, and a clutch portion 343c2 that is configured to have an unevenness along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the shaft center from a surface facing the transmission gear 343b, and is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the clutch parts 343b2 and 343c2 have an angle of about 100 at the top.
It consists of a chevron-shaped convex part and a concave part.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a, so the clutch portion 343b of the transmission gear 343b
2 and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transferred to the columnar member 34 via the movable clutch 343c.
3a. As a result, by rotating the drive motor 342, the disc cam 3
44 (see FIG. 18).

Note that the movable clutch 343c normally moves the transmission gear 3 by the urging force of the coil spring 343d.
43b, and the engagement relationship between the clutch parts 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed portion 3
43a2, it is configured to be movable in a manner away from the transmission gear 343b.

The disc cam 344 will be explained with reference to FIG. 20. Note that the disc cam 344 has a shape in which the left disc cam 344L and the right disc cam 344R are roughly mirror images, and the only difference is the detection hole 3.
Since only the positions 44eL and 344eR are shown, only the left disc cam 344L will be explained, and the description of the right disc cam 344R will be omitted.

20(a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as seen in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20(b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as seen in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. be. Note that FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b) illustrate a state in which the drive device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG. 18.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the left disc cam 344L is a member having portions that protrude from both sides of a perfectly circular disc, and is located at the center position of the disc. A central shaft portion 344a that protrudes inwardly in a cylindrical shape; a circular rib 344b that protrudes inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a; The ribs are lower in height than the circular ribs 344b and protrude inwardly.
An engagement rib 344c having a portion projecting outward in the radial direction at a location, and a circular rib 344b
The arm member 3 is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding outwardly between the engagement rib 344c and the engagement rib 344c.
45 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL drilled near the outer periphery.

The right disc cam 344R differs only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position forming an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other difference is that the right disc cam 344R has a shape that mirrors the shape of the left disc cam 344L. .

The central shaft portion 344a has a cross section D in which the inner periphery engages both ends of the columnar member 343a (see FIG. 19).
The outer periphery is configured to fit into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). That is, the disc cam 344 is rotatably supported by the support hole 341b.

The circular diameter rib 344b is provided in a protruding manner to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor accommodating portion 341a (see FIG. 18) when the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 341b. Thereby, misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c has a first rib that extends outward in the radial direction at a position shifted by 80° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20(a)) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is disposed. An overhanging portion 344c1, a first retracting portion 344c2 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a position offset from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (angle θ1 = 50° in this embodiment), and a first retracting portion 344c2 that retracts inward in the radial direction from the first overhanging portion 344c1. At a position shifted by an angle θ2 (angle θ2=150° in this embodiment), the second projecting portion 344c3 extends outward in the radial direction again, and the second projecting portion 344c
3, and a second retracting portion 344c4 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a position shifted by an angle θ3 (angle θ3=20° in the present embodiment) from the second retracting portion 344c4.

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at a position with the longest distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

With reference to FIG. 21, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described. Note that the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are arranged as a pair on the left and right, and since their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one will be described.

21(a) and 21(b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. Note that FIG. 21(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 has rotated to the final position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. In contrast, a small angle state is shown in which the rotating claw member 347 has rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2.

Note that the state in which the release member 346 rotates when it comes into contact with the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (see FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the release member 346 is formed from a generally rectangular plate member, and includes a shaft support hole 346a that is supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18). A convex pin 346b that has an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a and is provided in the plate thickness direction, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and a shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting out at its maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is connected to the engaging rib 34 of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10).
4c (see FIG. 20). In this embodiment, the engaging portion 346
By forming the outer circumference of d to be curved, contact with the engagement rib 344 can be made smoothly.

The rotating claw member 347 is formed from a generally rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is rotatably supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide elongated hole 347b (drilled with a size that includes the locus of movement of the protruding pin 346b inside) is drilled to guide the protruding pin 346b of the release member 346, and a second spring SP2.
an insertion hole 347c through which the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18) is inserted, a hook-shaped portion 347d projecting downward in a hook shape at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 347a, and an end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). It mainly includes a pull-down hole 347e that is inserted through the hole 347e.

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21(a), the release member 346 is disposed at the end position in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21(a)) with respect to the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, when a load is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the downward direction in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate in the backward rotation direction as a unit, while in the large angle state, the engaging portion 346d When a load is applied in the upward direction to 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 can be maintained until the angle reaches the small angle state shown in FIG. 21(b).

Next, an example of the operation of the operating device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of the operation when the player performs a pushing operation with the tilting device 310 placed in the first state will be described. Note that in the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for ease of understanding.

22 to 24 show the operating device 300 along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a).
FIG. Note that FIG. 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 22, and FIG. Here, the state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state shown in FIG. 23 to the first state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 by repeatedly hitting the tilting device 310 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is rotated by the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347.
can be hooked to. Thereby, the attitude of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, a biasing force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left side detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right side detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L.
It is placed in front of the 4R detection groove (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player performs an action of pushing in the tilting device 310, the tilting device 31
0 is rotated approximately 3° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left detection piece 3
11gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining a change in the detection states of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pressed by the player from the first state.

Here, when operating the tilting device 310 repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated.
5, the tilting device 310 is not returned in time, and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this could be solved by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in this embodiment, increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 causes the tilting device 310 to resist the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) that pushes down, and there is a need to increase the size of the drive motor 342. Therefore, there were problems such as an increase in product cost and an inability to save space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing effects through vibration motion is disposed at a position facing the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving this voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG.
The return operation to 0 can be performed quickly.

Here, if the voice coil motor 352 is driven whenever the tilting device 310 is pressed, for example, when the player presses and holds the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the player Since this imposes an unnecessary load, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state during a predetermined period is calculated, and if the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil By driving the motor 352, it is possible to increase the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs a continuous hitting operation. This results in
The player can comfortably operate the tilting device 310.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down from the first state (a tilting operation) will be described. Figures 25 to 3
0 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a).

Note that FIG. 25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 26 shows that the tilting device 310 is in the first state.
A state in which the disk cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 25 and the rotating claw member 347 changes its posture is illustrated, and in FIG. 27, the disk cam 344 rotates a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 28 shows a state in which the rotary claw member 347 has returned to its original position after rotating in the forward rotation direction.
The state in which the tilting device 310 rotates back and forth is illustrated, and FIG. 29 illustrates a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the final position, and FIG. When the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount, the engagement rib 34
The figure shows a state in which the second projecting portion 344c3 of the release member 346 reaches a second initial state in which it comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. In addition, in FIG. 28, the tilting device 3 in the state of FIG.
10 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of the player's hand pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the cylindrical member 31 of the lid 312
The upper end (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the LED device 2c. Therefore, while the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, it is possible to ensure a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction. Thereby, the cylindrical member 312c can have the effect of improving the strength as a rib of the lid 312 and the effect of adjusting the irradiation intensity of the light from the LED device 341f when the tilting device 310 is in the first state.

As shown in FIG. 26, from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the first initial state, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 26). direction), the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 presses down the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, causing the release member 346 to rotate in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26), and Accordingly, the rotating claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where it disengages from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310.

The posture change of the release member 346 is caused by the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c and the engaging portion 34.
6d until the disk cam 344 is rotated until it faces each other, during which time the tilting device 310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 (rotated clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is disposed at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is regulated by the arm member 345, the upward movement of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27),
When the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, the urging force of the first spring SP1 causes the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 to rotate forward in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 27). rotational direction), and the rotary claw member 347 returns to a state in which it can engage with the tilting device 310 (the state shown in FIG. 25). At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction that increases the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), so the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the area where the protective lens member 311i is visible from the player's viewpoint is the tilting device 31 in the first state.
Since it increases compared to 0, the light of the LED device 341f is directed toward the front (direction toward the player).
It is also possible to irradiate the area. Therefore, by changing the attitude of the tilting device 310, the LED device 3
The traveling direction of the light irradiated from 41f can be changed, and the effect of the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the starting point of the up-and-down reciprocating movement can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, from the state shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 28), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( Figure 2
By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise), the angle D1 shown in FIG. 28 is obtained.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of . Thereby, the way the tilting device 310 is viewed by the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Furthermore, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 that projects upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in response to the movement of the tilting device 310 that repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 28, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is
Since it is placed on the front side of the LED device 341f (on the left side in FIG. 28), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 28). I can do it.

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state, the light from the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed down by the cylindrical member 312c. (See Figure 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light from the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to this embodiment, as the attitude of the tilting device 310 changes, not only the direction of light irradiation can be changed, but also the range of light irradiation can be changed at the same time. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c moves only through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. This prevents a large load from being placed on the player when the player presses the tilting device 310, allowing the player to comfortably operate the operating device 300.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the pushing end of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw When the member 347 rotates backwards (clockwise in FIG. 29) and the tilting device 310 is subsequently pushed in, the bottom plate portion 311a is moved to the hook-shaped portion 347d.
After passing through, the rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the movement of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction is restricted by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player moves the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG.
If the player releases his/her hand after pressing down 0, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation that repeats movement in the expansion direction and movement in the contraction direction). Thereby, after the tilting device 310 has been pushed to the final end, it is possible to perform an effect in which vibrations are transmitted to the player who continues to place his/her hand on the tilting device 310.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force to assist the tilting device 310 to rise (see FIG. 24), and to produce a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 310 disposed at the pushing end position. It can be used for.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases his/her hand from the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 touches the lower frame member 320.
, and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end.

Therefore, compared to a game machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilting device 310 is pressed, it is difficult to determine whether or not vibration is generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of the pressing operation.
Only the player who pushed the tilting device 310 can grasp it.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a jackpot does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means will be reduced.

In contrast, the present embodiment is configured in such a manner that the player can only feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to produce a vibration effect when a jackpot is confirmed, it is possible to improve the feeling of anticipation when the player presses the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 can improve its value as a means of pre-reading.
This makes it easier for the player to operate the tilting device 310, and increases the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG.
By rotating the disk cam 344 by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) until it comes into contact with the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, the drive device 340 can be brought into the second initial state. .

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction, similar to the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first projecting portion 344c1 contacts the engagement rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second projecting portion 344c3 contacts the engagement rib 344c.

Note that from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) so that the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engagement rib 344c passes the engagement portion 346d, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated in the reverse direction. The driving device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. 25 by the method shown in FIG. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 is rotated forward in the forward rotation direction (see FIG.
(counterclockwise).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (tilting operation) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the second initial state ( The second operation mode) will be explained. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down (tilting operation) after passing through the second state.

31 to 34 show the operating device 300 along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a).
FIG. In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 31) is illustrated, and in FIG. 32, the disk cam 344 is rotated from the state shown in FIG.
is rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state.
34 shows how the disk cam 344 reciprocates from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the final position from the state shown in FIG. 3 is illustrated.
Further, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by an imaginary line,
In FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. The device 310 moves in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 to the disc cam 345. The tilting device 310 can be raised with low resistance without being pulled, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, by rotating the disk cam 344 by approximately 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 310 in the second state (disc cam 344 is moved 180° from the first initial state)
(rotated position). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 increases rapidly and attempts to reach the second state from the state shown in FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the disc cam 344 obstructs the state change ( This can prevent a situation in which the cam 344 is slow to rotate by a predetermined angle and it takes a long time for the tilting device 310 to reach the second state.

As shown in FIG. 33, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) from the state shown in FIG. 32, and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( Figure 3
By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise), the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is obtained.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of . Thereby, the way the tilting device 310 is viewed by the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Furthermore, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 that projects upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in response to the movement of the tilting device 310 that repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is
Since it is placed on the front side of the LED device 341f (left side in FIG. 33), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 33). I can do it.

That is, according to this embodiment, as the attitude of the tilting device 310 changes, not only the direction of light irradiation can be changed, but also the range of light irradiation can be changed at the same time. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in this embodiment, the vertical movement shown in FIG. 28 as the vertical movement of the tilting device 310;
Two types of up-and-down movements (fanning movements), including the up-down movement shown in FIG. 33, can be performed immediately after the rotation claw member 347 releases the restriction on movement of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction. Therefore, two types of modes can be created in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342.

As a result, compared to the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a jackpot), and the tilting device 310
It is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

As shown in FIG. 33, while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied to the tilting device 310 from the arm member 345 is only the load in the direction of pulling down the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft 311
c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated to lift the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. This prevents a large load from being placed on the player when the player presses the tilting device 310, allowing the player to comfortably operate the operating device 300.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 into the state, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate backward. (clockwise direction in FIG. 34), and then by pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a passes the hook-shaped portion 347d. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the movement of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction is restricted by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player moves the tilting device 310 from the state where the tilting device 310 shown in FIG.
If the player releases his/her hand after pressing down 0 (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310
can be maintained in the first state.

Next, referring to FIGS. 35 to 37, after the player performs a pushing operation, the rotary claw member 3
The operation of bringing the disc cam 344 into the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the tilting device 47 will be described. With this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of up and down movements (tilting movements) of the tilting device 310, or to perform one of them continuously.

35 to 37 show the operation device 300 along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a).
FIG. In FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is moved in the backward direction (FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the release member 346 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) is shown, and in FIG. 36, the rotating cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (in FIG. The disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) to a position where it abuts the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, and FIG. The disc cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the left side detection sensor 353L of 50 is in the ON state is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disc cam 344 is rotated backwards (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 changes as the engagement rib 344c pushes the release member 346 up; The rotating claw member 347 is shown in FIG.
It is maintained in the position shown in 5.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 and releasing the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the Regulation of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, by further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and then rotating the rotary cam 344 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35), The drive device 340 can be placed in a second initial state as shown in FIG.

Note that in this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disc cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but the process goes through the second initial state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it becomes possible to perform the vertical movement (swinging movement) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2, as described above.

Here, the player who presses the tilting device 310 may perform an action of leaving his hand on the tilting device 310 after pressing the tilting device 310, even if there is no special display such as "long press". be.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, when the user forgets to release the hand that pressed the tilting device 310 because he was so focused on the performance, but in this case, even if the restriction by the rotary claw member 347 is released, the tilting device 310 will continue to rise. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward/reverse switching operation) to move the tilting device 310 up and down (tilting operation) within the range of the angle D2,
The attitude of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if this rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the disc cam 344 is rotated forward in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
5) maintains the ON state (while the tilting device 310 is tilted below the first state), the disc cam 344 is not reversely rotated, and the protective cover device 350 is turned on as shown in FIG. In the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the left side detection sensor 353L (see FIG. 14) is in the ON state, the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped).

In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the player's hand is placed above the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 does not move upward, so in this case, from the state shown in FIG.
The change to the state shown in 7 occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, even when the player's hand continues to be placed above the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up or down, the drive motor 342 is operated in a reciprocating manner (forward/reverse switching). The load placed on the drive motor 342 can be reduced and the life of the motor can be extended.

Note that when the disk cam 344 is rotated a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, if the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) remains in the ON state, Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately rotate it in the opposite direction to return to the state shown in FIG. 36. Thereby, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and there is no need to apply unnecessary load to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

With reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, a method for preventing destruction of the drive device 340 will be described. 38 is a sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 39 is a partial sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. Note that in FIG. 38, the tilting device 310 is shown in the second state.
The player's hand grasping and fixing the player is shown in imaginary lines, and the upper member of the main body cover 351 is not shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grasps and fixes the tilting device 310, the arm member 34
Since the movement of the disc cam 344 is restricted, the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, the drive motor 342
A high load is generated between the transmission gear 343b and the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), and if left unchecked, there is a risk that the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) will break down.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to freely rotate with respect to the transmission shaft rod 343a that fixes the disc cam 344, so it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is biased in the rotational direction, so that the clutch portion 343b
2,343c2, and the movable clutch 343c moves in the direction away from the transmission gear 343b. Thereby, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. As a result, the drive motor 3
42 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

Note that if the player does not grip the tilting device 310, due to the configuration of the operating device 300, if the disc cam 344 is rotated once, the tilting device 310 will go through the first state. Therefore, in this embodiment, while rotating the drive motor 342 by a predetermined angle (for example, 360°), the lower frame member
If the left side detection sensor 324L of 20 is not in the ON state (tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player is intentionally performing an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310. Then, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while giving a notification to stop the gripping operation, for example, by displaying it on the third symbol display device 81.

This makes it possible to select the case where the player is intentionally performing an erroneous operation, and only then to notify the player to stop the erroneous operation, and to stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage.
Breakdowns can be prevented.

Note that when the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated and a phase shift occurs,
The initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disc cam 344, which has the same phase as the movable clutch 343c, deviate from each other. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled continuously (by the number of steps, etc.) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disc cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is ON.
By detecting that the drive device 340 is in the first initial state, it is possible to specify that the drive device 340 is in the first initial state, so the control of the drive motor 352 is resumed with that state as the initial position (the drive motor 342 is in the first initial state). By resetting the initial phase), even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, control is performed so that the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 are aligned again. It can be performed.

As a result, when performing a performance by operating the tilting device 310, the drive motor 342
The rotation control prevents a deviation from occurring between the operation that the tilting device 310 is intended to perform and the operation that the tilting device 310 actually performs. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be operated appropriately to perform the performance.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c has a shape that rotates idly relative to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotational direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity of this will be explained below.

40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). In addition, in FIG. 40, the disc cam 3 is changed from the state shown in FIG.
44 is shown rotated by 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (in the direction of arrow CCW), and FIG. 41 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is further rotated in the direction of arrow CCW from the state shown in FIG. 40. In addition, in FIG. 42, the disc cam 344 is rotated backward (in the direction of arrow CW) from the state shown in FIG.
43 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been further rotated in the direction of arrow CW from the state shown in FIG. 42.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 31
0 performs a standing motion toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. On the other hand, Figure 4
3, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG. 42.

This is not only due to the fact that the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as it moves from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG.
This is because when rotating in the direction of arrow CW, even if the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below, but in this case, the release member 346 is lifted by the engagement rib 344c, and the rotating claw Part 3
No load is generated in the direction of pushing up 47. Therefore, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is never released.

Here, when viewing the operation of the tilting device 310 from the player's perspective, FIGS. 38 to 40 and 42
Up to the first state shown in FIG. 43 , both appear to have the same motion, and the motion after the first state is a different motion as shown in either FIG. 41 or FIG. 43 .

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state can be determined by the drive motor 342.
(See FIG. 39), but the difference in the drive sound due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 makes the player aware of the mode of control being performed, and the performance that will be executed from now on. There is a risk that the player will understand this and lose interest in the player. In addition, the tilting device 3
10 by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load placed on the drive motor 342 increases, and there is a risk that the durability of the drive motor 342 may deteriorate.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is made different, the drive motor 342
The only difference in the rotations is the direction, so the driving manner (vibration, sound, etc.) can make it difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction. Therefore, for example, when the degree of expectation of the performance changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 rises from the first state or whether the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is in operation toward the first state. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the level of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, by confirming whether the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state.
Since the player can grasp the change in the level of expectation of the performance, the player can be informed that when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved by the drive motor 342 toward the first state, The movement of the tilting device 310 can be caused to be monitored.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 and the drive may be damaged due to the player's erroneous operation when driving the drive motor 342. Overloading the device 340 can be prevented.

Furthermore, in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, there is no need to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39).
42 can be eliminated, and the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotary claw member 347 even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). In addition, in FIG. 44, the disc cam 3 is changed from the first initial state of the drive device 340 (see FIG. 25).
44 is shown rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 44), and the first
The disc cam 344 is set at an angle such that the protruding portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346.
The external shape of the tilting device 310 after being rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 44, when the release member 346 is pressed down by the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are connected to the engaging portion of the releasing member 346. By reciprocating the disc cam 344 while maintaining a positional relationship in which the release member 346 does not pass through, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the attitude of the rotating claw member 347 changes in the backward rotation direction (
Since the tilting device 31 is maintained in a rotated state (clockwise in FIG. 44), the tilting device 31
0 moves up and down, even if the player presses the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 do not engage, and when the player releases his/her hand, the tilting device 310
can move upward from the first state (the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the rotating claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310) and continue the vertical movement. .

Therefore, for example, by providing a difference in effect between the operation modes of the tilting device 310, the first operation mode and the second operation mode described above, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can be given a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 does not move up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode until the player presses the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the robot was moving up and down in the third operation mode.

The difference in performance is that when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode and the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 remains in the first state. ) is better than when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if you release your hand after pressing the tilting device 310). If a difference is made in that the player has a high expectation of a jackpot, then the player recognizes the expectation of a jackpot or not not only when pushing the tilting device 310 but also when releasing the player's hand from the tilting device 310. Since this opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings in which the player pays attention to the operating device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operating device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. In the first embodiment, the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up. In addition, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 23
48 is configured in such a manner that it slides. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

FIG. 45(a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, and FIG.
5(b) is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and FIG. 45(c) is a side view of the release member 2346.

46(a) and 46(b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. .

In FIG. 46(a), the rotary plate member 2347 is connected to the second spring S with respect to the release member 2346.
A large angle state in which P2 has rotated to the terminal position in the biasing direction is illustrated, and in FIG. 46(b), the rotary plate member 2347 has rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 2346. A small angle state is illustrated. Note that the state in which the release member 2346 rotates when it comes into contact with the disc cam 344 is between the large angle state and the small angle state (when the protruding pin 3
46b is disposed at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) has a shaft portion 341c (
As functional members that are pivotally supported by the release member 2346 and the rotary plate member 2347, which are disposed on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the rotary plate member 2347 in between, the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47) It mainly includes a slide claw member 2348 that is configured to be slidable along an arcuate trajectory centered on the rotation axis of (see). In addition, in the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed of a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted into the rail portion 2347f, and a front end portion of the curved portion 2348a at the upper end of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b that protrudes in a hook-like manner toward the left side in FIG. Mainly, a reinforcing part 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the curved part 2348a, and a protruding pin 2348d protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing part 2348c. Be prepared.

The width of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348
347f, it is configured to be slidable relative to the rotary plate member 2347.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is disposed on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is used for the bottom plate portion 2311 of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.
It is a magnetic material for generating magnetic force that attracts a.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion that faces the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 opposite to the surface that faces the sliding claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , a portion that reinforces the slide claw member 2348.

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is made of a metal rod that is inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. Release member 234
6 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347, the protruding pin 2348d moves into the functional elongated hole 23.
Pushed by the side surface of 46e, the slide claw member 2348 slides.

The rotating plate member 2347 has a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c,
In addition to the pull-down hole 347e, it includes a rail portion 2347f that guides the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348, and a support elongated hole 2347g into which the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted.

The rail portion 2347f is formed from a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end of the rotary plate member 2347, and the opposite side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions are arranged so that the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (Fig. 46 counterclockwise) in the terminal position of the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47).
It is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered at .

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). Protruding pin 2348 in support long hole 2347g
When sliding the slide claw member 2348 in a state where d is inserted, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and it is possible to suppress the slide claw member 2348 from wobbling. can.

The release member 2346 includes, in addition to a shaft support hole 346a, a protruding pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, and an engaging portion 346d, a functional elongated hole 2346e that is an elongated hole drilled in the thickness direction. .

The functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length that is curved along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. a hole 2346e1; a second elongated hole 2346e2 extending from one end of the first elongated hole 2346e in a direction inclined toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a;
Mainly equipped with

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348
It slides along the curved shape of 7f.

Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the movement speed of the releasing member 2346 is the same as the movement speed of the protruding pin 2348d without any time delay for the movement of the releasing member 2346. reflected in speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide claw member 2348 will slide quickly, but if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is slowed down, the operating speed of the slide claw member 2348 will also be slowed down.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 is shaped along the arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, no force is generated to rotate the release member 2346, and the sliding claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding.

That is, in the present embodiment, the slide claw member 2 is rotated by the release member 2346.
347 may slide, but the slide claw member 2347 will not slide due to the slide claw member 2347 being pulled when the angle is large. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310 when the tilting device 2310 is placed in the first state, it is possible to restrict the tilting device 2310 from rising.

47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). In addition, in FIG. 47, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is connected to the release member 234.
In FIG. 48, the disk cam 344 is rotated backwards (clockwise in FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. 47 to engage the release member 2346. A state in which the portion 346d is pushed up is shown, and in FIG. 49, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) from the state shown in FIG.
The state returned by the biasing force No. 2 is shown in the figure.

In this embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 made of a magnetic material and fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 2310
Since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are no longer attracted to each other due to the attitude change of 10, a large load is not applied to the slide claw member 2348 from the tilting device 2310.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with this movement. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, if the release member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved upward at a speed different from the upward movement when the upward movement of the tilting device 2310 is lifted by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the upward direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) due to the biasing force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes, including the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the number of operation modes increases, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of looking ahead by associating the operation modes with the expected level of jackpot. Attention level can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG.
8b and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310, the tilting device 2310
will rise, so by ensuring a large magnetic force, the load applied to the tilting device 2310 can be increased compared to the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315.

That is, normally, when the player places his hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. (Even if the biasing force by the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, then
In the state shown in , the tilting device 2310 can be raised by lifting the player's hand.

Thereby, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the upward direction (force to maintain the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his hand on the top of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the expectation level of a jackpot, it becomes easier for the player to use the operating device 2300 as a means of looking ahead, so the degree of attention of the operating device 2300 to the player can be adjusted. can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state where it is pushed in by the player, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment is configured in such a manner that detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in an intermediate state between the first state and a state in which it is pushed in by the player, or in a state in which it is pushed in by the player. Ru. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has a right side detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311 and a left side detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). A left side detection piece 3311gL extends at a position on the opposite side of the right side detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane perpendicular to the axis and located at the center position in the direction of the rotation axis. The left side detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right side detection piece 311gR,
Compared to the left side detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment, its extended length is shorter.

51(a) and 51(b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Furthermore, Figure 5
1(a), the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 51(b), the tilting device 331 is in the first state.
A state in which 0 is being pressed is illustrated. Also, FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b)
In order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, upper frame member 330, and protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines, while the respective detection sensors 324L, 324R and voice coil motor 352 are illustrated with solid lines. In addition, portions where each detection sensor 324L, 324R and each detection piece 3311gL, 311gR overlap are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3
311gL is not inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L, and the right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in an OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in an OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is connected to the left detection sensor 324L.
On the other hand, the right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).
.

By detecting changes in the state of each of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and a state in which it has been pushed to the end of pushing, it is possible to determine whether it is in the middle of pushing. It is possible to detect whether the state is on the way back or not.

That is, if the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and the state in which it is pushed to the end of pushing. The left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324
By detecting that R has changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of a pushing operation.

52(a) and 52(b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Furthermore, Figure 5
2(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the push-in, and FIG.
2(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is on its way from the pushing end to the first state. In addition, in FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, upper frame member 330, and protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines; The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR overlap are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, and the right detection piece 3
11gR is inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in an ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in an ON state).

As shown in FIG. 52(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state disposed at the push-in end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L while , the right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

If the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and the state in which it has been pushed to the end of pushing. Sensor 324L is ON and right side detection sensor 324R is ON
By detecting that the state has changed, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of returning to the first state.

Here, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to
310, the voice coil motor 352 is tilted while the tilting device 3310 is moving upward, rather than colliding the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving downward. By colliding with the device 3310, it is possible to more effectively apply a load to raise the tilting device 3310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the operating direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each detection sensor 324L, 324R, and if the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of rising and has not reached the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when the voice coil motor 352 is not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the tilting device 3310 after the tilting device 3310 is pressed from the first state
310's rising speed becomes slower. In this case, even if the player performs a repeated tapping operation on the tilting device 3310, the upward movement of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, making it impossible to comfortably perform the repeated tapping operation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 can be moved up by only the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. The tilting device 3310 can improve the rising speed.
You can comfortably perform repeated tapping operations.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state where it is pushed in by the player, but the operating device 4300 in the fourth embodiment This is a mode in which the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 is detected while it is changing from the second state to the first state, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed based on the detection result. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of a tilting device 4310 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is protruded from the front side of the projecting protrusion 311j of the case body 4311 in a plate shape.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through detection grooves (slits) of an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) provided on the bottom plate part 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and each detection This is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

54(a) and 54(b) are side views of the operating device 4300 illustrating the push-down operations of the operating device 4300 in chronological order. Note that in FIG. 54(a), the tilting device 431
0 is the second state, and in FIG. 54(b), the tilting device 4310 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 54(a).
A state in which the front detection piece 4311k passes the lower detection sensor 4321e in a downward direction is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines; Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are arranged with the detection groove oriented in a direction that allows the front detection piece 4311k to pass through. Note that in this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at 20° intervals on a circular arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the state shown in FIG. 54(a) changes to the state shown in FIG. 54(b) by the player pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k
321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e in order. By detecting the interval between the timings of the passage, it is possible to determine the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310, and based on this determination, it is selected whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352.

Here, when pressing the tilting device 4310 from the second position, since the pressing length becomes long (because the period during which acceleration is applied is long), the tilting device The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 becomes higher. Therefore, if the player does not have any means of deceleration, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 strong as a safety measure in case the player presses with all his might, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

Further, it is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is disposed near the end of the push-in, and to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for players with weak force or players who decide to press gently, the reaction force always increases near the pressing position, which puts a burden on the pressing operation, making it easy to feel fatigued. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 cannot be performed comfortably.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e
By determining whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 based on the timing interval at which the voice coil motor 352 switches between the ON state and the OFF state, a strong reaction force can be applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary. can be prevented.

That is, for example, if the interval between the timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are respectively switched between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned off. While the voice coil motor 352 is not driven, if the above-mentioned timing interval is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in a manner that it is driven.

As a result, when the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315, and even a weak force can easily push the tilting device 4310. Can be operated by pushing.

Furthermore, if the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is fast, the tilting device 4310
As a reaction force against this, not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of pushing can be applied. Therefore, the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
11j extends below the lower frame member 4320, the voice coil motor 352 is driven and the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in advance to be pushed out toward the side closer to the tilting device 4310. Ru.

As a result, the tilting device 4310
The impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed compared to the case where the voice coil motor 352 collides with the tilting device 4310.

55(a) and 55(b) are side views of the operating device 4300. Furthermore, Figure 5
5(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end.

In addition, in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), for ease of understanding, the lower frame member 4
320, while the outer shapes of the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines,
Each detection sensor 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 35
2 is illustrated with a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, when the tilting device 4310 is in the middle of reaching the end of pushing from the first state, the tilting device 4310 protrudes. The installation portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the protruding convex portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is moved in the contraction direction. The force of the pushing operation can be consumed in moving the object. Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure that applies a load by friction like a disc brake, but has a structure that applies a load by electromagnetic force, so damage to the members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55(a), the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 is already in contact with the voice coil motor 352, so the state shown in FIG. 55(a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other, the deceleration of the tilting device 4310 on the way from the first state to the pushing end is suppressed. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the tilting device 4310 is placed at the pushing end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 contacts the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 using the voice coil motor 352.

In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55(b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the expansion direction and movement in the contraction direction). This results in
After pushing the tilting device 4310 to the final end, an effect can be performed to transmit vibrations to the player who continues to place his/her hand on the tilting device 4310.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of producing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 disposed at the pushing end position.

Next, the operating device 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68.

In the first embodiment, by vibrating the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 31
Although a case has been described in which vibrations are transmitted to a player who presses 0, the operating device 5300 in the fifth embodiment has a weight member 5 disposed in a lower frame member 5320 at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric.
The player is provided with a drive motor 5411 that rotates the lower frame member 5320, and is configured in such a manner that vibrations are transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, compared to the operating device 300 in the first embodiment, the operating device 5300 has a lower frame member 5320 instead of the lower frame member 320, and a driving device 340.
is used as the drive device 5340, and the voice coil motor 35 is connected from the protective cover member 350.
2 is omitted. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disc cam 5344 that is fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 includes a transmission device 5 that rotationally drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412.
410, a transmission device 5410, a flexible member 5420 that accommodates the drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410 and is made of a flexible material, and a flexible member 5420 that is formed in a bottomed dish shape with an open upper surface and that is connected to the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420. The lower frame member 53 is accommodated in separate sections.
It mainly includes a housing member 5430 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate part 5321 of 20.

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed from a rotationally driven electric motor, and a weight member 5412 whose outer shape is fan-shaped and whose portion corresponding to the key point of the fan is supported on the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411. The main preparation is as follows.

The drive motor 5411 includes fixing portions 5411a arranged in a pair on the left and right sides and formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on which the shaft extends.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra, and is eccentrically supported on the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 rotates, the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 changes, and the drive motor 5411 is configured to vibrate.

The flexible member 5420 includes a main body part 5421 in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction, and a main body part 5421 formed of a cylindrical container shape having a bottom on the opposite side to the inserted side. A pair of rib-like leg portions 5422 protruding from the left and right in the radial direction and downwardly, respectively, and a rib-like leg portion 5422 protruding from the left and right on the open portion side of the main body portion 5421 are connected. Posture maintaining part 5423 in which the fixing part 5411a is embedded
and a pair of protruding legs 5424 that protrude upward from the upper surface of the main body 5421 in the shape of a column.

The main body portion 5421 has a container-shaped depth equal to the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is fully inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end surface of the drive motor 5411 on the shaft side and the end surface of the main body portion 5421 on the opening side are formed on the same plane. Furthermore, in this state, the fixing part 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining part 5423.

The rib-like leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-like leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are larger because the posture maintaining portions 5423 are provided on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is greater than that of the lower rib-like leg 5422.

Since the projecting leg portion 5424 is provided in a columnar manner, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point when it comes into contact with the tilting device 310, which will be described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the flexible member 5420 corresponds to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310.
The resolution of 20 degrees of deformation can be made finer.

In the assembled state, the accommodating member 5430 includes a first accommodating part 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated, and is provided adjacent to the first accommodating part 5431 and the weight member 5.
412 is housed in the second housing part 5432, and the first housing part 5431 and the second housing part 5
The connecting surface of 432 mainly includes a groove 5433 recessed downward from the upper surface.

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is such that the flexible member 54
20 and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (assembly load released state), the protruding leg portion 5424 extends from the upper surface to a depth.

The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is such that it is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load released state, while the player applies a load to the convex leg portion 5424 and the flexible member The depth is such that it interferes with the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412 when the weight member 5420 is deformed (assembly loaded state).

The groove 5433 has a width dimension slightly wider than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411, and a depth dimension extending slightly below the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled load state. Ru.

59(a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 59(b) is a partial sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and FIG. 59(c) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320. )teeth,
59(a) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc. FIG. Note that in FIG. 59(a), a portion corresponding to the vibrating device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Also,
In FIG. 59(a), the first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and the first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and A terminal region S52, which is a region occupied by the tilting device 310 when placed at the terminal position, is illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), a protruding leg portion 5424 is provided in a protruding manner in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the tilting device 310
(See FIG. 56) The amount of deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change can be ensured to the maximum extent.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in an assembly load released state in which no load is applied to the protruding leg portion 5424.

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the protruding legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left-right center line of the lower frame member 5320 when viewed in the extending direction. Therefore, since the protruding legs 5424 can be pushed in evenly on the left and right sides of the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting left and right (tilting left and right in the paper of FIG. 59(b)) when being pushed in. 59(b), and the protruding leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59(b).

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 has a convex leg portion 5424.
A pair of through-holes 5321d are provided to allow insertion of the through-holes 5321d. Since the width dimension of the through hole 5321d in the left and right direction is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the convex leg portion 5424, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the player, the lower side of the tilting device 310 becomes convex. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.
Therefore, deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424 is suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 together with the protruding leg portion 5424 is
can be easily translated downward (downward in FIG. 59(b)).

60(a) and 60(b) are cross-sectional views of the vibrating device 5400 taken along the line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59(a). In addition, in FIG. 60(a), the assembly load release state is illustrated, and FIG.
0(b), the assembly load state after the protruding leg portion 5424 is pushed into the first housing portion 5431 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal area S52 (see FIG. 59(a)) is Illustrated. Note that the external shapes of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), the vibration device 540
0 is applied to the assembled load state, the protruding leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5
422 is deformed, and the drive motor 5411 and weight member 5412 are also displaced downward.

In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and this force becomes larger as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. The impact when 310 collides with lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be alleviated.
Furthermore, since the load is based on elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rising end, see FIG. 38) The rising speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed is slowed down. In this case, even if the player performs a repeated tapping operation on the tilting device 310, the upward movement of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, making it impossible to comfortably perform the repeated tapping operation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 is moved upward compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves upward only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the repeated operation of the tilting device 310 can be performed comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 regardless of its orientation. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in a state where the assembly load is released, vibrations due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 do not occur.

In addition, vibrations of the drive motor 5411 itself and minute vibrations generated in the drive motor 5411 due to movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and
transmission to 0 is prevented. This can make it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the assembled load state, the main body portion 542 of the flexible member 5420
1 is configured in such a manner that vertical displacement is permitted by deforming the upper convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg portion 5422 disposed below the main body portion 5421 changes to a state where it is more compressed vertically, and the rib-like leg portion 5422 becomes slightly hardened. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-like leg portions 5422 can be weakened, and the vibrations generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like leg portion 54
22 extend along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and are arranged in a pair on the left and right at even intervals left and right from the central axis. The radially outer end of 5422 is deformed in such a manner that it moves outward to the left and right (the one with the smaller resistance at the connection position between the main body part 5421 and the rib-like leg part 5422) (see FIG. 60(b)).
In this case, the direction in which the rib-like legs 5422 disposed below the main body 5421 protrudes has a left-right component, so the elastic force of the rib-like legs 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembled load state, the load in the left and right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second housing part 5432 collide is absorbed by the lower rib-shaped legs 54 of the main body part 5421.
It can be partially absorbed by the elastic force of 22. Thereby, displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

61(a) and 61(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a).

61(a) and 61(b) illustrate an assembly load state, and FIG. 61(a) illustrates a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis, and FIG. In b), a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. In addition, Figure 6
1(a) and FIG. 61(b), the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player and the end area S52
The state of the vibration device 5400 in a state where it is occupied is illustrated.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be explained. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is placed on the upper side under an assembly load state, the drive motor 5411 is rotated at a position where the distance from the bottom of the second housing part 5432 is the distance Q1. The axis is placed. Note that in this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates under assembly load, the outer circumferential side surface of the weight member 5412 contacts the second accommodating portion 543.
Contact (rubbing) with 2. Therefore, compared to the assembly load released state, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes, and a different type of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432, the weight member 5412 is generated as a repulsive force.
A force is generated that moves the object upward (upward in FIG. 61(b)). Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating part 5432 approach and separate from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. ). Due to this repulsive force, the flexible member 5 along with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412
420 moves upward, and the force of the flexible member 5420 to push back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (in the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310) can be reinforced.

In this way, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is applied to the flexible member 542.
The force that pushes back the tilting device 310 is adjusted by combining the forces that are generated separately, that is, the force that occurs as an elastic recovery force of 0, and the force that occurs due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432. be able to.

That is, after the tilting device 310 starts contacting the protruding leg portion 5424, the end region S52 (FIG. 59
(a)), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is generated as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and after the tilting device 310 reaches the terminal area S52, the weight member 5412
The repulsive force of the second housing portion 5432 is added to the force that pushes back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased near the end region S52, so that the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made easier and the impact during the pushing operation can be better alleviated. This adjustment can be performed while the drive motor 5411 continues to rotate. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57), and due to the difference in detection timing, the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) ) is larger than a specific speed (for example, 40 km/h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed based on the determined operating speed.

For example, if it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420
It is desirable to increase the load applied to the tilting device 310 by the tilting device 310. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance so as to take a downward attitude (see FIG. 61(b)).

As a result, the end of the descending movement of the drive motor 5411 is controlled so that the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411
It can be raised upward from the lower end of the inner wall of No. 2 by a radius Ra. As a result, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61(a)) (the case where it can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61(a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 is The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the protruding leg portion 5424 is pushed down by the same amount by the tilting device 310, the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 above the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although the description is omitted in this embodiment, by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped in the upward direction (see FIG. 61(a)), a force pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible to prevent the generation of force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432.

Here, the contact between the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310, and to expand the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, a portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the player presses the tilting device 310, vibrations can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pressing, or a part of the side of the hand, can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320. Vibration can be transmitted to the player via the player. This makes it possible to avoid a situation where vibrations are not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), the player uses the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56).
Only when the vibration device 5400 forms an assembled load state by pushing the weight member 5
412 and the housing member 5430 come into contact with each other, and vibration is generated.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which vibrations are transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pressed, so that the player's pressing operation can be detected. The vibrations can be transmitted to the player more easily than when the vibrations are generated from the ground.

In other words, when the player presses the tilting device 310 and immediately releases the hand (pushing in a pulsed manner), the vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pressed. If so, there is a possibility that the vibrations cannot be generated before the player releases his/her hand (the vibrations may not start in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect caused by the vibrations. In contrast, in this embodiment, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance and ready to generate vibrations before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that vibrations can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pushed in. This allows the player to experience the effects of vibration.

Furthermore, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first housing part 5431. Therefore, the drive motor 5411
Even if the tilting device 310 is driven, vibrations can be prevented from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Therefore, by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pressing the tilting device 310, it is possible to create a state in which vibrations are transmitted when the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Next, the drive device 5340 will be explained. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the first embodiment is a disc cam 5344 and a transmission shaft rod 5343. The rest is the same as the drive device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the explanation is omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed in the center of a pair of disc cams 5344 consisting of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 63(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. In addition, the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 534
4L has a symmetrical shape, so only the right disc cam 5344R will be explained and the explanation of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disc cam 5344R and the right disc cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of clamping arms A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connection part with the transmission shaft rod 5343. It is.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R has a circular rib 344 extending from the disk portion at its center position.
A support cylinder part P1 extends in a cylindrical shape toward the side where b is arranged, and an axially symmetrical elongated hole is formed along the axial direction of the support cylinder part P1 to a position approximately half of the extension distance. A long hole concave portion C1 recessed from the disk portion and an axial end of the support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole concave portion C1 extend toward the disk portion side along the axial direction. It mainly includes a pair of clamping arms A1.

The support cylindrical portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a because its inner diameter is equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the elongated hole recessed portion C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed in the elongated hole recessed portion C1.

The deformable portion P1a is a portion of a pair of connecting rods arranged with the elongated hole recessed portion C1 in between, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in an axially tilted manner with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part that

The elongated hole recess C1 has a recessed cross section that is slightly longer than the width of the holding arm A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is arranged in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (
It is configured so that it can be displaced in the longitudinal direction).

Further, the opposing surfaces of the elongated hole recess C1 have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from a circular arc shape that follows the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. As a result, the cylindrical member 5
343a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344.

The clamping arm portion A1 is formed of a pair of arm portions, from the side facing the other arm,
An engaging convex portion A1a is provided that protrudes in a direction approaching the arm of the other party. Engagement convex portion A1a
engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off from the disc cam 5344.

The tip shape of the engagement convex portion A1a is the engagement groove 5343a of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64).
It is composed of a shape that matches the circular arc shape of 4. As a result, the overlap length in the radial direction when the engagement convex portion A1a is engaged with the engagement groove 5343a4 is greater than when the tip shape is flat or the center is a curved surface with a convexity (see Fig. 65). (b) horizontal length) can be ensured to be long.

In the axial direction, the engagement convex portion A1a has a side surface near the connecting pin 344d that is a side surface of the right disk cam 5344R, and a concave surface portion C2 (elongated hole concave portion) recessed along the axis near the axis. It is arranged at a position that is in plane with the side surface on the opening side of C1.

Thereby, the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engagement convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63(b)) than the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65(b)) reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63(b)), the length of the cylindrical member 5343a protruding from the recessed surface portion C2 is
It can be shortened by the thickness of the e-ring (see FIG. 65(b)).

Additionally, there is no need to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (the space required for sliding the e-ring against the surface) in the extending direction of the right disc cam 5344R (direction parallel to the surface). Therefore, the recessed width (radial width) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced.
Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disc cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 shows the transmission shaft rod 5343
FIG. The difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is the cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has a fixing part 5343a1 with a D-shaped cross section that fixes the disc cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof, and a fitting groove 5343a3 from the fixing part 5343a1 on the left side in front view.
A clutch actuating part 5343a2 with a D-shaped cross section formed from the same cross-sectional shape as the fixing part 5343a1 and a disc cam 534 formed by the e-ring, which is a groove into which an e-ring is fitted.
When the disc cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the fitting groove 5343a3 for positioning in the axial direction of the gripping arm 5343a3 and the e-ring fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3, the engagement convex of the clamping arm A1 It mainly includes an engagement groove 5343a4, which is a groove in which the portion A1a engages. In addition, the fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the left-right direction outer side of the pair of plates in which the shaft support hole 341b is bored in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides due to the biasing force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

By fitting the e-ring into the fitting groove 5343a3 later, the columnar member 5343a is formed with a part where the diameter becomes partially large. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter being uniform, insert a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then fit the e-ring into the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a relative to the shaft support hole 341b. In addition to preventing displacement along the axial direction, the e-ring can also prevent displacement of the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction.

Due to the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343, the disc cam 5344
can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when assembling the disc cam 5344 to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is connected to the end of the support cylinder part P1 of the disc cam 5344 on the side where the engagement convex part A1a is disposed. From the opposite end, engage groove 5
343a4 until the engagement protrusion A1a fits into the position. At this time, the engagement groove 5343a4
Before the engagement protrusion A1a is inserted into the engagement protrusion A1a, the distal end of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engagement protrusion A1a, so that the distance between the pair of engagement protrusions A1a is expanded. The clamping arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in this manner. Thereafter, when the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engagement convex portion A1a, the engagement convex portion A1a and the engagement groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and as the engagement convex portion A1a fits into the engagement groove 5343a4, Then, the holding arm A1 elastically recovers, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65(b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 not only allows for one-touch assembly, but also functions as a structure for preventing destruction in this embodiment. This will be explained with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

65(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65(b) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 65(a).
44R, and FIG. 65(c) is a sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66(b) is a front view of
It is a sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R along the line XVIb-LXVIb.

Note that FIG. 66 shows the right disk cam 5344R after deformation when the player applies an overload to the right disk cam 5344R in the no-load state shown in FIG. 65.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in this embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended distal end portion of the support tube P1 at a position spaced apart from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R, and In the vicinity of the portion, the engagement convex portion A1a only engages with the engagement groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disc cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be able to pivot around the extended tip portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), since the space of the elongated hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of clamping arms A1 face each other, the resistance to the axial tilting displacement of the columnar member 5343a becomes small. on the other hand,
As shown in FIG. 65(c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected,
Since the columnar member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R are in contact with each other in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R, the resistance to the axis tilting displacement of the columnar member 5343a becomes large.

Therefore, if an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R by forcibly holding down (pulling up) the tilting device 310, etc. (the displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62) (when a load is applied to restrict the deformation of the right disc cam 5344R with respect to the columnar member 5343a), it is possible to restrict the direction in which the right disc cam 5344R deforms with respect to the columnar member 5343a.

In other words, the right disc cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of smaller resistance, so as shown in FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), when an overload is applied to the right disc cam 5344R,
The disk portion is axially tilted and deformed about the support shaft r1 that connects the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 on a plane parallel to the surface of the disk portion. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is moved along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R compared to the position shown in FIG. 65(a).
Displace.

67(a) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 67(b) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). FIG. 53 is a partial rear view of device 5300. Note that in FIG. 67(b), illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disc cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 67(a), for ease of understanding, the outline of the right disc cam 5344R in a state where it is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown as a solid line, and when an overload is applied, the shaft collapses. The outline of the state is shown with imaginary lines.

In FIG. 67(a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310 is illustrated, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is illustrated in an enlarged manner. .

In the state shown in FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disc cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but the displacement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the player. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345, which is trying to stay in place, and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L, which is trying to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disc cam 5344R can undergo the above-mentioned axis tilting deformation, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67(a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after its shaft tilting deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to shaft tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating and the outer periphery of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by a dimension Rd, by this dimension Rd,
The shaft support hole 345a of the arm member 345 and the connecting pin 344d will be misaligned,
In order to absorb this, the right disk cam 5344R undergoes axis tilting deformation.

Due to the axis tilting deformation, the connecting pin 344d will fall with respect to the direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. The plate cam 5344R is displaced along the circumferential direction. This misalignment causes the right disc cam 534
Since the positional deviation between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of 4R can be partially absorbed, the drive motor 342 (
(see FIG. 62), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be alleviated.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting its axis, so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other with their surfaces. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed due to the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344, so the player cannot drive the drive motor 342 while holding and fixing the tilting device 310. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by frictional force, but the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, since the rotating claw member 347 is stopped from moving and stopped by the bottom plate portion 5321,
The state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed down by frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 counteracts this. is released from the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347.
It acts on In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344 come into contact and the release member 346 moves along the operating direction of the disc cam 5344, the first
Among the elastic forces of either the spring SP1 or the second spring SP2, the disc cam 5344
The elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 can be increased in the opposite direction to the rotational direction of the disc cam 5344.
Thereby, the load that the release member 346 applies to the disc cam 5344 can be increased,
Since the amount of consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased, the arm member 34
The load applied to the disc cam 5344 can be reduced regardless of the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the right disc cam 5344R is formed in a shape that is line symmetrical to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (in the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point) Therefore, regardless of the direction of rotation of the right disc cam 5344R (regardless of the direction in which the connecting pin 344d is misaligned with respect to the arm member 345), the right disc cam 5344R is deformed in the same way. The axis can be deformed by resistance.

68(a) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 68(b) is a sectional view of the operating device 5300 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). FIG. 53 is a partial rear view of device 5300. Note that illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted in FIG. 68(b). In addition, in FIG. 68(a), for ease of understanding,
The outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state where it is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown in solid lines, and the outer shape in a state where the shaft is tilted due to an overload is shown in imaginary lines.

In FIG. 68(a), a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and tilted downward by an angle D2 is illustrated, and the tilting device 310 is A player's hand is shown grasping a .

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the player grasps the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 5344
The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R due to the axis tilt of R, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disc cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

Note that the matters described for the right disc cam 5344R are also applicable to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67(b) and 68(b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, causing an overload. and,
The right disc cam 5344R is tilted in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting movement in this axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of overload at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, the drive motor 34
2 is driven during one rotation of the right disc cam 344R, the detection hole 3 of the right disc cam 344R
44eR passes through the right side detection sensor 353R, but if the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 344R will not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated.
Since the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the input to the right side detection sensor 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, by the time the occurrence of overload is detected, the right disk cam 3 is
Since it requires a period of time to rotate 44R by a predetermined angle, there is a problem in that overload detection is delayed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when an overload occurs on the right disc cam 5344R and the right disc cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction (see FIG. 66(b)), the overload is detected. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a method of detection, for example, the engagement rib 34c is detected between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c.
A method using the notification device E1 fixed to 4c is exemplified (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 66(a)).
.

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input section, and is arranged as a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of clamping arms A1 intersects the engagement rib 344c. At the same time, the input section is arranged in such a manner that it protrudes toward the support cylinder section P1 side. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support tube P1 are separated (see FIG. 65(b)), and in the overload condition, the notification device E1 and the support tube P1 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 65(b)). 66(b)). Thereby, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it can be determined at an early stage whether or not an overload has occurred in the disc cam 5344.

Next, an operating device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed, but the operating device 6300 in the sixth embodiment 344c are constructed from separate members, and are configured to be able to rotate relative to each other. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, ring member 6344L2, and second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. It is. Although the right disc cam 6344R also has a different configuration from the first embodiment, the right disc cam 6344R has a shape that is a mirror copy of the left disc cam 6344L, so the description of the left disc cam 6344L will be The explanation of the right disc cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disc cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disc cam 6344L includes a circular rib 344b, a connecting pin 344d, and
and a disc member 6344L1 provided with a detection hole 344eL and pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
and a ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially supported with the disk member 6344L1 and rotates relative to the disk member 6344L1.

In the disc member 6344L1, the central shaft part 344a of the first embodiment is arranged at the center position of the disc part, and an annular shaped shaft part 344a is arranged in the axial direction at a position spaced apart from the outer peripheral part of the circular rib 344b in the radial direction. An annular rib 6344f is provided to protrude along the circumferential direction.

The ring member 6344L2 includes an annular main body 6344g having a ring shape having the same outer diameter as the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b; A cover plate part 6344h is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate part 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. and receiving gear teeth 6344i that are formed in the thickened portion and are disposed radially outward.

The annular main body 6344g has an inner circumferential diameter larger than the outer circumferential diameter of the circular rib 344b, so in the assembled state, the annular main body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b, so that the central shaft portion 344a The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around the center.

Note that the end surface of the annular body 6344g on the axial disk member 6344L1 side is the annular rib 63.
44f. As a result, the annular rib 6344f is not formed, and the surface of the disk member 634f is not formed.
Compared to the case of contacting with 4L1, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be performed smoothly.

The receiving gear teeth 6344i mesh with a deceleration transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348, the ring member 6344L2 rotates. In addition, in this embodiment, the rotation speed of the ring member 6344L2 is the same as that of the disc member 6344L1.
(While the ring member 6344L2 rotates three times, the disc member 63
The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, deceleration transmission gear 6348c, and receiving gear teeth 6344i are set in such a manner that 44L1 rotates once).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported on the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343, and is an auxiliary column member 6348 arranged in a posture parallel to the columnar member 343a.
a, and a second column fixed to the auxiliary column member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348b and the ring member 63 are fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348.
It mainly includes a deceleration transmission gear 6348c meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of 44L2.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be explained that the tilting device 310 can be raised in a plurality of ways after the tilting device 310 is released from the first state by the rotary claw member 347.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). Note that FIG. 71 shows a state similar to that shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a state in which the ring member 6344R2 has rotated once in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. , after rotating for more than one rotation, the disc member 6344R1 is in a posture in which it has rotated in the opposite direction by the amount exceeded, and the disk member 6344R1 is in a posture in which it has rotated 1/3 in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction). is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 73, FIG.
A state in which the ring member 6344L2 rotates by a predetermined angle in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in , and the tilting device 310 moves upward is illustrated.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is It rises instantly and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operating device 300 according to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves upward instantly (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) after releasing the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the reached position is in the second state. It was limited to the position where it was placed (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is the support portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engagement rib 344c The relative relationship between the tilting device 31 and the tilting device 31 can be changed.
The types of 0 arrival positions can be increased.

That is, when releasing the fixation by the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 3
10 is instantly raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and reaches a state where it is tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state (see FIG. 73). In this way, the tilting device 310 instantly (disc cam (without waiting for 344 rotation)
The position it reaches can be changed.

As a result, for example, when configuring a gaming machine in such a manner that the level of expectation of the performance changes depending on the height at which the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 can be adjusted. can be improved. In this case, there is no limitation as to whether the expectation level is higher for the tilting device 310 to rise higher or the expectation level is higher for the tilting device 310 to reach a lower ascending position.

However, by keeping the normal upward reach position of the tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and making it reach the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation level reaches the maximum, the expectation level The magnitude of the tilting device 310 can be associated with the magnitude of the displacement amount by which the player presses the tilting device 310, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the difference in expectations due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, since the player can be motivated to check to what position the tilting device 310 will rise, the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the timing for operating the tilting device 310. You can induce them to do so. Therefore, the tilting device 3
Regardless of the ten presentation modes, it is possible to prevent a gaming method in which the tilting device 310 is operated in a disorderly manner.

Next, the operating device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85.

In the first embodiment, the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed. However, in the operating device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, the disc cam 7344 is a disc member. 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged as separate members, and these separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.
The explanation will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the characteristics of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 74(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, and FIG.
(b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 75(a) is the LX of FIG. 74(a).
It is a sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R along the line XVa-LXXVa, and FIG. 75(b) is
74A is a partial side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). FIG. Note that the right disc cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disc cam 7344R, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disc cam 7344R has a central shaft portion 344a into which the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state.
1 and a ring member 73 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1.
44R2, and an engagement member 7 that is immovable in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1 in the assembled state and has an engagement portion 7630 that fits into the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2.
344R3.

The disc member 7344R1 is formed into a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center,
A detection hole 344eR is located in a flange-shaped portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup.
In addition, the engaging rib 344c is partially omitted (the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first
This is a member having a shape (the space between it and the retracting part 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 on its surface in an assembled state, and also has a first circular recessed portion 7 that is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a.
410, a second circular recessed part 7420 which is a circular recessed part smaller in diameter and deeper in the axial direction than the first circular recessed part 7410, and a first projecting part 344c1 and a first retracting part 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 is bored in the radial direction in between, and a hole is formed in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430 from the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (the outer peripheral side of the disc member 7344R1) to the outside in the radial direction. It mainly includes a protruding fixing protrusion 7440.

The insertion hole 7430 extends from the intermediate position between the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2.
At the shifted position, the first elongated hole 7431, which is a long rectangular elongated hole portion, extends along the axial direction of the disc member 7344R1, and from the bottom end of the disc member 7344R1 of the first elongated hole 7431. The second long hole 74 is a rectangular long hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disc member 7344R1.
32 and a second elongated hole 74 with the first elongated hole 7431 side at the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum.
It mainly includes a return portion 7433 that is configured to protrude toward the 32 side.

The width direction (short side direction) dimension of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the width direction (short side direction) size of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. direction(
(in the lateral direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable about the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 (the lower end in FIG. 75(b)) as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433
2 is movable outwardly.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engagement member 7344R3, and has a height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the ring member 7344R2 will be described. Figure 76(a)
is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76(b) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2.
FIG. 76(c) is a side view of the ring member 7344R2 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a).

As shown in FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c), the ring member 7344R2 is connected to the connecting pin 3.
A ring-shaped plate portion 7510 having a ring plate shape in which 44d is provided protrudingly, and the ring-shaped plate portion 7510
The thick wall portion 7520 extends in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along the inner circumferential surface of the ring plate portion 7510 and has a star-shaped through hole formed in the center thereof.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a thickness equal to the depth of the first circular recess 7410 and an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the first circular recess 7410. Ru. Thereby, in the assembled state, the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disc member 7344R1 can be made to coincide with each other, and the resistance to relative rotation can be prevented from becoming excessive.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so that it approaches (does not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75(a)), and has an outer circumferential diameter. is made slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. This allows the engaging member 7344R3 to move in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75(a)) in the assembled state, while preventing the relative rotational resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disc member 7344R1 from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 has an irregularly shaped through hole 7521 bored along the axial direction, and recesses in the irregularly shaped through hole 7521 radially outward at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (in this embodiment, divided into five equal parts). It mainly includes equally divided recessed portions 7522 provided therein.

The irregularly shaped through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outward from the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3, which will be described later, is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1. configured.

FIG. 77(a) is a front view of the engagement member 7344R3, and FIG. 77(b) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3.
) is a side view of the engagement member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), in the assembled state (see FIG. 74(b)), the engaging member 7344R3 is located outside the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the radial direction. An arcuate plate portion 7610 disposed on the side and an end portion on the back side of the arcuate plate portion 7610 (FIG. 77(
b) An extension part 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the right end (right end) and an engagement extending in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 77(b)) from the extending tip of the extension part 7620 7630, and a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring disposed on the side of the arcuate plate portion 7610 facing the engaging portion 7630.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611, which is a protrusion into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the tip of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner circumferential side surface.

The extending portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state,
When pushed inward in the radial direction against the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extended tip thereof is configured to have an extended length that extends inward from the inner circumferential surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction that is slightly shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends to a length that passes through the irregularly shaped through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75(a)).

As will be described later, the engagement member 7344R3 has both the function of a member that is displaced by receiving a load from the release member 346 and the function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disc member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

Referring to FIG. 78, a method for assembling the right disc cam 7344R will be described. Figure 78(a)
is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(b) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG.
78(c) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction VIIIb.
78(e) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction d, and FIG.
78(f) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e).

In addition, in FIG. 78(a), FIG. 78(b), FIG. 78(c), and FIG. 78(d), the disk member 7
78(e) and 78(f), the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344 are inserted into the disc member 7344R1.
A state in which R3 is inserted is illustrated. In addition, for ease of understanding, FIG. 78(b),
In FIGS. 78(d) and 78(f), illustration of the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 is omitted.

To assemble the right disk cam 7344R, first insert the engaging member 734 into the first elongated hole 7431.
Insert the engaging portion 7630 of 4R3 (see FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b)). As described above, since the widthwise dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is made shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion 7630 from being accidentally inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. It can be prevented. Therefore, assembly errors can be prevented.

Next, along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, in the depth direction of FIG. 78(d), the engaging portion 7
The engagement member 7344R3 is slid to a position where the position of the engagement member 630 and the fixed protrusion 7440 match.

At this position after the movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engagement member 7344R3 suppresses displacement of the disc member 7344R1 in the circumferential direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 78(d)) and engages The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1.

Moreover, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction is restricted by the return portion 7433. This will be explained. First, in a state in which the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven to the outside of the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the barbed portion 7433 is released, and the barbed portion 7433 returns to the second position due to the elastic recovery force. It enters inside the elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(d)).

When inserted into the second elongated hole 7432, the tip of the barbed part 7433 contacts the extension part 7620 of the engagement member 7344R3, but the contact direction is in the longitudinal direction of the barbed part 7433 (where the deformation resistance is large). (see FIG. 78(d)), the movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78(f)) is suppressed. As a result, the engaging member 73
Since the movement of the engagement member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 7344R3 from shifting its position during operation.

After holding the engagement member 7344R3 on the disk member 7344R1, the engagement member 734
4R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1, and the disk member 734
Insert the ring member 7344R2 from the opening side of 4R1. By releasing the load from the engagement member 7344R3, the engagement portion 7630 moves along the radially outward direction D7 due to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. This movement causes the engaging portion 7630 to be accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, thereby fixing the ring member 7344R2 to the disk member 7344R1.

Through the steps described above, the right disc cam 7344R can be easily assembled. In addition,
The right disc cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engagement member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward rotation direction will be described. 79(a), FIG. 79(b), FIG. 80(a), FIG. 80(b), and FIG. 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 79(a), FIG. 79(b), FIG. 80(a), FIG. 80(b), and FIG. 81, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347
and a disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

The rotating claw member 7347 in this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the length of the guide elongated hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the convex pin 346b is configured to reach the end of its movement in the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes through.

The release member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the rear upper part of the main body portion (upper right corner in FIG. 80(a)) is shaved obliquely in order to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b), and 81, the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79(a)). are illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 79(a), the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R is attached to the release member 7346.
79(b) shows a state in which the right disk cam 7344R has further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 79(a), and FIG.
(a) shows a state in which the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed into the disc member 7344R1 to the end, and in M6-2 (b), the disc member 7344R3 is moved from the state shown in FIG.
81, the right disc cam 7344R rotates in the backward direction from the state shown in FIG.
The state after separation from 346 is illustrated. Note that FIGS. 79(a), 79(b), and 80
80(a) and 80(b) illustrate a state in which the release member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which it can rotate relative to the rotating claw member 7347 (small angle state).

As shown in FIG. 79(a), immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start contacting each other, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward,
The outwardly extending state is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), a release member 734 is attached to the outermost side surface of the engagement member 7344R3.
In the state in which the engagement portions 346d of No. 6 are in contact, the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 are brought into a small angle state.

In this embodiment, when the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320, the angle is small, and the arcuate plate portion 7610 The inner peripheral surface and the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 3 of the engaging rib 344c
The disc cam 7344 is arranged in such a position that the outer circumferential surface of the engagement member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 while the engagement member 7344R3 is in contact with the release member 346 (see FIG. 80(a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), when the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disc cam 7344 and becomes unable to rotate any further (the small angle state), the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state. 7346 applies a load to the engagement member 7344R3 to push the engagement member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disc cam 7344.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the engagement member 7344R3 extends outward in the radial direction, it is impossible to continue rotating in the backward rotation direction. , the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward (see FIG. 80(a)). In this pushed-in state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the irregularly shaped through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is no longer transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, so that the disk member 7344R2 changes from the state shown in FIG. 80(a) as shown in FIG. 80(b).
Even if 4R1 is rotated, ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains its posture.

Due to this deviation in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 is moved from one equally divided concave portion 75 that was originally arranged.
22 to another equally divided concave portion 7522, the phases of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other by one concave portion (72 degrees).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disc cam 7344R further rotates, the engagement member 73
44R3 and the release member 7346 are released, the engagement member 7344R3 is extended radially outward, and the engagement portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, the equally divided concave portions 7522 in which the engaging portions 7630 are accommodated are shifted by one.

That is, by going through the steps shown in FIG. 79(a) to FIG. can be relatively shifted by the distance between the recessed portions (72 degrees).

Referring to FIG. 82, engagement member 73 when disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction.
The operation of 44R3 will be explained. Figure 82(a), Figure 82(b), Figure 83(a) and Figure 8
3(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are mainly illustrated, and illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

82(a) to 83(b) chronologically illustrate how the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)). In FIG. 82(a), the release member 734
82(b), the engagement member 7344R3 starts to descend when it comes into contact with the release member 7346 from above. 83(a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 has further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 82(b), and FIG. 83(b) shows a state in which the release member 7346 and The state after the engagement member 7344R is separated is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b), when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward direction, the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 move in the backward direction (see FIG. 82(a) clockwise). When rotating in the rotation direction), there is no member to restrict the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 734 are moved by the elastic force of the first spring SP1.
7 is only loaded in the forward rotation direction.

Therefore, a load that would push the engagement member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction is not generated, and the engagement member 7344R3 remains in contact with the release member 7346 until the engagement member 7344R3 is separated from the release member 7346.
R3 maintains a state in which it extends outward in the radial direction. Therefore, when rotating the disc cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, relative rotation between the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented.

From these configurations, by switching the rotation direction of the disc cam 7344, the disc member 7
It is possible to switch whether or not the ring member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width, as in the first embodiment. In the rotation direction that causes relative rotation (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81), the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed, unlike the first embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, the rotation direction of the disc member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disc member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is the opposite direction to the direction in which the fixation by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixation is not released). Since they match, the tilting device 310 is in the first state (FIG. 84).
The disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be rotated relative to each other while the ring member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 are maintained at a constant position (see).

As a result, a state where the tilting device 310 stops attracting attention from the player can be changed to
This can be used as a state for changing the relative postures of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place that cannot be seen by the player.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be explained that according to this embodiment, it is possible to form a plurality of modes in which the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. In addition, in FIG. 84, by releasing the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is immediately changed from the first state to the second state shown in FIG.
A state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that allows the ring member 7344R2 to be displaced (without rotating the ring member 7344R1) is illustrated, and in FIG. 85, from the state shown in FIG. 84,
A state in which the ring member 7344R2 has been rotated relative to the disc member 7344R1 by one equally divided concave portion 7522 through the process described in FIG. 79 is illustrated, and FIGS. 84 and 85 show that
In both cases, a state in which the second projecting portion 344c3 is in contact with the engaging portion 346d is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to this embodiment, the rotating claw member 347
By releasing the fixation, the range of movement of the tilting device 310 can be changed immediately (without rotating the disc cam 7344R2).

That is, when the rotation claw member 347 is rotated to release the fixation from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the top end of the movement range).

On the other hand, when the rotating claw member 347 is rotated to release the fixation from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted rearward and lower than the position shown in FIG. Move to a state that is lower than state 2.

Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 3 is changed from the first state.
The position that 10 reaches immediately (without rotation of disc cam 7344) by the upward movement can be changed. Thereby, the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the attention of the operating device 7300 as an effect device can be improved.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front side of the operating device 300 is exposed, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operating device 300 from the front side. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Note that in the following description, the front side of the page is assumed to be the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is assumed to be the rear (rear) side of the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86. Furthermore, for the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 86) indicate the pachinko machine 8010.
The vertical direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction are shown respectively. Also, the definition of this direction is shown in Figure 8.
The same applies to the explanation with reference to the drawings before 6.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a
88 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (expanded) with respect to the outer frame 11, and FIG. Inner frame 1
89 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing an open state (deployed) for 2, and FIG.
90 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (expanded). FIG. FIG. 8 is a front view of the machine 8010. In addition, in FIG. 90, the reference numerals of the internal structure of the game board 13 are omitted for convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed into a fixed frame shape with four fixed sides, with wooden planks as the top and bottom sides and aluminum plates as the left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game parlor by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component in the pachinko machine 8010, and has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has the inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18, etc.) and locking structure of the outer frame 11. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the component is installed in a game hall.

As shown in FIG. 89, the inner frame 12 rotatably supports the front frame 14, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side), and the right side is the rotation tip side. (opening/closing tip side) and can be rotated forward.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88, a back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end (opening/closing base end) when viewed from the front, and the right side is the rotation base end. It can be rotated rearward as the moving tip side (opening/closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 8010, as shown in FIG. As a result, each is canceled.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the metal plate (having holes) with the inner frame 12 .

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end to the back side of the inner frame 12. It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) that is large enough to fit. The front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped cylindrical shape (in a configuration in which cylinders with different diameters are arranged vertically, the diameter of the upper cylinder is It is pivotally supported by being externally fitted onto the support pin 19a (which has a small shape).

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed into a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed of a metal plate into a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape. Various members (illumination parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) are provided on the front and back sides of the main body frame 14a.
The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing units (operating device 300, operating handle 51, etc.).

The front frame 14 is provided with a window 14c having an opening smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed when viewed from the front (see FIG. 86). This window part 1
4c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, so that almost the entire area of the front side of the inner frame 12 is covered by the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached. Therefore, game board 1
3 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89).

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a, 16b that have a larger outer diameter than the window portion 14c and are transparent, and a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates these transparent glasses 16a, 16b. It is equipped with. The fixed frame is made of transparent glass 16a made of synthetic resin.
, 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to a fixed frame, so that the glass unit 16 is an integrated double-glazed glass.

Although the glass unit 16 is made of transparent glasses 16a and 16b to be colorless and transparent, it is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored and transparent instead of being colorless and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illumination parts 8029 to 8033 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window part 14c in the front frame 14. These illumination parts 8029-8
At 033, lighting or blinking is performed in response to changes in the gaming state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a predetermined reach is reached. Further, the illumination section 8030 above the window section 14c includes a light emitting means that lights up in the event of a predetermined error such as a shortage of balls to be paid out, and a light emitting means that lights up while the prize balls are being put out.

Furthermore, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member made of punched metal) is provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c to cover a speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects depending on the game state. . Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, an upper tray 17 and a lower tray 50 are disposed to bulge out toward the front side and are arranged vertically in parallel.

The upper tray 17 has the function of temporarily storing the game balls put out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball firing unit 112a while arranging them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 50
has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 17. A ball guide opening 53 is formed in the rear side surface of the lower tray 50 and is open in the front-rear direction and allows the ball to be guided to the lower tray 50.

It should be noted that there is no need to separate the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 50 and provide multiple locations for storing game balls; instead, it is possible to eliminate the lower tray 50 and use only the upper tray 17, which has only one storage section. Also good.

An operating device 300 that is manually operated by players is provided on the front side of the upper tray 17 (game ball storage area). The operating device 300 is an operating device used when an effect corresponding to a player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. This operating device 300 may be provided at another location other than the upper tray 17, such as around the lower tray 50,
They may be provided at a plurality of locations, and may be operated by a push-button type switch, or may be configured to allow information input using another operating method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact type sensor.

A passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. The passage forming unit 140 is molded from synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper plate passage part 141 communicating with the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage part 142 communicating with the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage part 145 ( (see FIG. 92).

A put-out ball socket 143 that projects rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14). 143 is partitioned left and right by a partition wall 144, thereby forming a passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage part 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage part 142, respectively.

The foul ball passage section 145 (see FIG. 92) is a part that forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a and discharge them to the lower tray 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 that is open upward. The foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and then is discharged into the lower tray 50. Note that the foul ball passage section 145 may be connected to the upper tray 17 instead of the lower tray 50, and foul balls may be discharged to the upper tray 17.

The foul ball passage section 145 merges with a ball extraction passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which unlaunched balls flowing down from the upper tray 17 to the lower tray 50 are guided when the player performs a ball extraction operation. It is formed like this.

Attached to the back side of the front frame 14 are multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 made of resin that are fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper part and bulge toward the back side. On the front side of the multi-functional cover members 171 and 172, there are connectors for wiring that conducts electricity to the illumination section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the internal board of the illumination sections 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14 and one end thereof. An electronic board is provided to which the other end of the connector is connected, and the electronic board and connector are covered by multifunctional cover members 171 and 172.

In the portions of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171, 172, there are wiring through grooves 14h that communicate with the left and right illumination sections 8031, 8032, and through the wiring through grooves 14h, the illumination sections 8031, An electronic board 14i is formed to which the wiring drawn out from the 8032 is connected (see Fig. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are drawn out backward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. It will be done.

Therefore, when the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the illumination section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper in FIG. 89). A connector for conductive wiring or a connector whose one end is connected to the internal board of the illumination parts 8031, 8032 can be easily inserted into and removed from the electronic board 14i.

The multifunctional cover member 171 attached to the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 is arranged as a pair above and below the rotating tip side of the inner frame 12, and is connected to a board support device 60 that grips the base plate 60 of the game board 13.
0 (see FIG. 126), and can come into contact with each other depending on the situation, but details will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, there is a container-shaped member made of a resin material and having an open front side, which is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and is formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 that accommodates wiring in the space is attached from the back side. The elongated cover member 173 has a cross-sectional area that decreases as it moves from the rotating tip side to the rotating base side of the front frame 14, and the lower wall portion 173a that constitutes the lower side of the space that accommodates the wiring is The upper wall part 173b, which is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, is arranged oppositely above the lower wall part 173a, and forms the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, matches the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 in a plane. Composed of shapes.

The elongated cover member 173 is a wall portion that is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 similarly to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and is a wall portion that is arranged in contact with the front frame 14, and is connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. An upwardly extending wall portion 173c is provided that extends upward from the wall portion 173b.

The upwardly extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that an end thereof connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b extends in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end of the front frame 14. , is constructed by securing a space that can be further curved into a semicircular shape in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (corresponding to one period of a sine wave) while the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upper extending wall 173c. Extends toward the proximal end. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the change in the position of the wiring that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed (see FIG. 96), so it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and causing a load. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will be disconnected.

On the back side of the front frame 14, an upwardly extending wall portion 173c of the elongated cover member 173 (front frame 14
(the part closest to the rotation base end side) and a vertically elongated plate part that is a part of the main body frame 14a and is located on the rotation base side of the front frame 14, and is formed of a resin material. An inverted cup portion 178 having an inverted cup shape and opening downward is provided.

The inverted cup part 178 is a part that takes countermeasures against fraudulent acts, for example, where the front frame 14 is illegally pushed apart, a piano wire is inserted from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, and the piano wire is entered into the gaming area. It is. That is, even if the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from around the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. , since the progress of the piano wire can be obstructed, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Furthermore, since the inverted cup portion 178 and the elongated cover member 173 are formed from a resin material,
It is possible to take measures against fraud committed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is introduced and pressed against the inverted cup part 178, the heat causes the inverted cup part 178 to
Similarly, the elongated cover member 173 can be melted and passed through the inverted cup portion 178.
It also dissolves. When the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the elongated cover member 173, the wiring housed on the front side of the elongated cover member 173 is burnt out, so that by detecting that the wiring is disconnected, , it is possible to make it easier to detect fraudulent activities.

In particular, in this embodiment, the wall portion 178a of the inverted cup portion 178 on the elongated cover 173 side has a shape that matches the shape of the elongated cover member 173, and abuts (close to) each other on the surface. Moreover, since the normal line of the lower surface of the inverted cup part 178 in the wall part 178a is shaped to face downward, when the piano wire enters the inverted cup part 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall part 178a. Furthermore, if the inverted cup portion 178 is melted, there is a high probability that the elongated cover 173 will also be melted, making it easier to detect fraudulent activity.

The wall portion 178a has the effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. In other words, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forcibly opened on the rotating proximal end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, if the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip ends up in the wall portion. It is pressed against 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire moves. It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Furthermore, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire advances through the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 (
Therefore, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the gaming area while preventing the reaction force exerted on the person who commits the fraud through the piano wire from increasing. By arranging a detection device that detects the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act before the person committing the fraudulent act escapes, making it easier to secure the person committing the fraudulent act. .

In other words, even if the piano wire is guided into the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person committing the fraudulent act will not be able to tell, and will therefore think that the piano wire is on its way to the gaming area. . Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the gaming area (for example, the window 14c
This allows the person who commits the fraud to naturally insert the piano wire deeper (until the end of the piano wire is visible from the front side through the cable) (without raising suspicions that the piano wire has not been inserted properly). . Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for a person who commits a fraudulent act to realize that the fraudulent act has been discovered and to attempt to escape.

Note that the detection device may be a device composed of a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be disposed on the locking mechanism 20RK or on the back side of the operating handle 51. When disposed on the operating handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally disposed on the operating handle 51 may also be used to determine whether the piano wire has entered.

As shown in FIG. 89, the ball firing unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, this ball firing unit 112a includes an electromagnetic firing solenoid 701 provided as a firing device, and a game ball launched by the firing solenoid 701 between an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. A launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so that it is launched toward the area between
and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 moves the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 89) to a shooting rail 730.
Supply one piece at a time on top. In this case, the supplied game ball is placed on the projecting path of the plunger 702 provided as a launching portion in the firing solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701, the plunger 702 is activated to the firing rail 7.
The game ball moves toward the game ball above 30, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. Note that the electric actuator of the ball firing unit 112a is not limited to the firing solenoid 701, and a firing motor or the like may be used. Note that the detailed configuration of the ball firing unit 112a will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 90, on the left side of the inner frame 12 and on the left side of the firing rail 730, a board 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is disposed. It is set up. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction through a portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover this through hole from the front side. Fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage part 161 and a main body side lower dish passage part 162. The main body side upper plate passage section 161 and the main body side lower plate passage section 162 are
A passage is provided inside so that one end is opened toward the back side so as to be able to communicate with a through hole penetrated through the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction, and the other end is opened toward the bottom. A curved passage is formed in which the direction changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-rear direction to the up-down direction). In this configuration,
The balls discharged from the dispensing device 133 pass through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enter the tray passage forming member 160 from one end of the tray passage forming member 160, and are discharged from the other end.

When the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the front frame 1 is attached to the lower part of the dish passage forming member 160.
The ball receptacle 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided at 4 enters. A front door side upper plate passage 141 is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage 161, and a front door lower plate passage 142 is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 162.

As shown in FIG.
A shutter 163 is provided to restrict the outflow of game balls from the main body side lower tray passage section 162. The shutter 163 has a blocking position where the exit portions of both passages are narrowed to prevent the game balls from flowing out;
It is provided so as to be switchable between the allowable position and the allowable position that allows the outflow of game balls.

Further, a biasing member (coil spring, etc.) that biases the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and when the front frame 14 is opened relative to the inner frame 12, the biasing member is The shutter 163 is configured to remain in the blocking position depending on the force. This avoids the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out when the front frame 14 is opened with game balls stored in the main body side upper tray passage section 161 or the main body side lower tray passage section 162. There is.

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 resists the urging force by the outer peripheral portion of the dispensing ball receptacle 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the upper tray passage section 161 on the main body side and the upper tray passage section 141 on the front door side communicate with each other, and the lower tray passage section 162 on the main body side and the lower tray passage section 142 on the front door side communicate with each other to prevent the game balls from flowing down. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. Note that the board 167 is configured such that a location where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are provided and a location where the connector CN3 is provided are separate boards. This means that the connectors CN1 and CN2 are connected to the main control device 1.
10, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, so the purpose of transmission is different, so using a separate board is intended to prevent malfunctions. by.

The portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14c will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window 14c of the front frame 14 are exploded, and FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the window of the front frame 14. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are shown exploded.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the main body frame 14
On the front side of c, an operating device 300 is disposed on the front side of the upper tray 17, diagonally above the right side of the lower tray 50, and at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction.
A covering cover 370 is disposed on the front side of.

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower part of the operating device 300 from the front side, and has a horizontal width comparable to the horizontal width of the front frame 14 . That is, the left and right ends of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the illumination parts 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least on the left and right ends, and has a main body curved portion 371 configured in a curved shape with left and right center portions protruding toward the front side, and They extend downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left and right center portions and the left and right ends of the portion 371 toward sides that are close to each other in the width direction, and merge at the lower end of the extension when viewed from the front V A hanging part 372 configured in a letter shape, a main body curved part 371 and a hanging part 3
A light-transmitting part 373 is a plate-like member that closes the opening surrounded by 72 and is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is fastened and fixed to at least one of the main body curved part 371 or the hanging part 372, and the main body curved part 371 A left side plane support part 374 is formed as a plane on the upper surface of the left end of the main body curved part 371, a right side plane support part 375 is formed as a plane on the upper surface of the right end of the main body curved part 371, and a right side plane support part 375 is formed as a plane on the upper surface of the right end of the main body curved part 371. It mainly includes a support groove 376 which is a recessed groove and whose recessed width becomes larger (tapered) toward the back side.

The main body curved portion 371 has a front side edge formed in a rounded curved shape, and a rear side edge formed in a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper plate 17, so that the upper plate does not fit in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). 1
The rear left edge 371a abuts the front side edge of 7 in the front-rear direction, and the rear left edge 371a is connected to the rear left edge 371a and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operating device 300. A back middle edge 371b that contacts the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and a back middle edge 37
1b on the opposite side of the back left edge 371a, a back right edge 371c that has a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball rental operation section 40 and comes into contact with the ball rental operation section 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state; Mainly equipped with

The hanging portion 372 and the main body curved portion 371 cover the operating device 300 from the front side, and the right corner cover 38 is a plate portion on which the operating handle 51 is supported and is disposed at the right corner of the front frame 14.
This part prevents access to the operating device 300 from the front side by having a shape that does not create a gap between the right corner cover 380 and the right corner cover 380 (a shape in which the abutting positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). Note that the hanging portion 372 is located closer to the front than the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later.
A screw inserted from below is inserted into the bottom plate in which the recessed portion 15a is formed, so that it is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate in which the recessed portion 15a is formed.

The light-transmitting portion 373 is a portion that allows light emitted from the operating device 300 to pass through to the front side to create effects using light, and is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operating device 300. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320 are arranged close to each other.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is a matter that can be arbitrarily determined, and in this embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upwardly and downwardly. Specifically, light is irradiated upward (disposed on the upper surface of the illumination support part 341e).
Six LEDs emit light downward (disposed on the bottom surface of the lighting support part 341e)
Two pieces are placed respectively.

Light emitted from the LED of the LED device 341f that emit light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operating device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the transparent section 373. do. On the other hand, the tilting device 3
When 10 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then passes through the transparent section 373. .

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be seen through the transparent portion 373 is compared to when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The force is stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emit light downward (while reducing the control burden by omitting control to change the amount of light), it is possible to It is possible to perform an effect in which the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the transparent portion 373 is changed.

Furthermore, as another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from an LED that emit light downward in accordance with changes in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is increased (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22). By controlling the amount of light to change weakly (in steps) as the state changes from the first state to the second state, the light that can be visually recognized through the transparent portion 373 as the state of the tilting device 310 changes. The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the settings).

In the assembled state (FIG. 86), the left side plane support portion 374 abuts the lower end of the illumination portion 8031 at the top and bottom. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illumination section 8031 and the illumination section 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support section 374 toward the illumination section 8031. . Thereby, downward displacement of the illumination section 8031 can be suppressed.

In the assembled state (FIG. 86), the right plane support portion 375 abuts the lower end of the illumination portion 8032 at the top and bottom. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illumination part 8032 and the illumination part 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right plane support part 375 toward the illumination part 8032. . Thereby, downward displacement of the illumination section 8032 can be suppressed.

Although the details will be described later, the illumination section 8031 and the illumination section 8032 are connected to the upper panel unit 40.
0 and the upper panel unit 400 shifts downward, the illumination portion 803
1,8032 generates an upward reaction force toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore,
According to this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illumination parts 8031, 8032, and the covering cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support can be distributed over a wide area.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove into which the lower end of the illumination part 8032 enters from the back side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the illumination part 8032 is in the deepest position in the support groove 376, and in this state, the lower front corner end of the illumination part 8032 and the front end of the right plane support part 375 are The position matches.

Details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the illumination portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 through the engagement relationship described later, an assembled state can be constructed by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. A separate fixing part for fastening the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is attached to the main body frame 14a (or a separate member (upper plate 17 The passage forming unit 140 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. A sheet metal member 150 in the shape of a metal plate is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17) across the main body frame 14a, and a metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 is attached to the main body frame 14a or the plate in such a manner that the passage forming unit 140 is covered from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or to another member (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17) disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a with the main body frame 14a in between).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 made of synthetic resin is penetrated (for example, a hot wire or piano wire is pressed against the tip and melted), the sheet metal member 150 will not be able to maintain the front frame. 14 functions as an entry prevention member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side. That is, even if a wire with a heated tip is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 made of metal, it will not penetrate, and it is possible to prevent the exemplified wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed in such a manner as to cover the upper, lower, left and right sides of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage section 145 in the left side when viewed from the front, and the open front side is connected to the passage forming unit. 140, and a planar plate-like part 152 that covers the back side of the lower side of the foul ball passage part 145 and the ball extraction passage 147.

The fitting box part 151 covers the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage part 142 and the lower end part of the foul ball passage part 145 from top to bottom and left and right, so the fitting box part 151 covers the lower end part of the front door side lower plate passage part 142 and the foul ball passage part. Not limited to the case where the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the passageway 145,
Even if the wire is penetrated in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction, the illustrated wire is
It is possible to prevent the vehicle from entering beyond 40 degrees.

Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back side of the foul ball passage section 145 and the ball extraction passage 147, when a wire such as the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 and a through hole is made. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent unauthorized members from entering the back side of the passage forming unit 140. When such a situation occurs, for example, the operating device 300 may be removed and the exemplified wire may be pressed against a location where the thickness of the front and back becomes thinner (a location diagonally above the rear of the recessed portion 15a). An example is illustrated in which a through-hole is opened by being inserted, and the illustrated wire enters the hole.

Furthermore, the front frame 14 includes an operating section back member 155 that is fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the back side, and the operating section back member 155 has the cylinder lock 20 disposed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge of a left and right long plate member. There is a through hole 156 formed in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can pass therethrough, and the through hole 1
A pair of insertion holes 157 are formed at the top and bottom of the passage forming unit 140, and a pair of insertion holes 157 are inserted through which screws are inserted for fastening and fixing the operation unit back member 155 to the main body frame 14a. It mainly includes a pair of connection insertion holes 158 that are bored in parallel with each other, and an opening/closing regulating part 159 that projects toward the back side at the rotation base end side of the through hole 156.

The connection insertion hole 158 is connected to the connection part 1 formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140.
48 in the front-back direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is connected to the connecting through hole 1 at a position that matches the upper connecting through hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
The protruding part 148a has a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connector 58 and protrudes from the back side, and is inserted into the coupling insertion hole 158 at a position that matches the lower coupling insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a threaded portion 148b that is bored as a hole into which a screw can be inserted.

With this configuration, when the operating section back member 155 is stacked on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the protruding portion 148a is passed through the upper coupling insertion hole 158. By aligning the position with the member 155 and then screwing the screw passed through the lower connection insertion hole 158 into the threaded part 148b, the operation unit back member 1 can be easily removed.
55 can be fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140.

Note that the L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left side edge of the left end portion of the operation unit back member 155, in which the connection insertion hole 158 is formed, and the lower side edge at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to partition the area. 148c is
In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), it is formed into an L-shape that can make surface contact with the wall portion 158a at the top, bottom, left and right.

Therefore, for positioning when assembling the operating section back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the protruding portion 148a through the connection insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is moved vertically relative to the extending wall portion 148c. By bringing the left and right surfaces into contact with each other, the position and posture of the operating section back member 155 relative to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The opening/closing regulating portion 159 is a portion disposed front and back to face the panel support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and the details will be described later.
Under predetermined conditions, the front frame 1 is brought into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13.
4 is in a closed state.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing regulating part 159 is a part that extends toward the back side of the operation part back member 155 and is made of synthetic resin, and in order to ensure rigidity, the opening/closing regulating part 159 has a cross section when viewed in the extending direction. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is more difficult to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same thickness, and the required amount of material is maintained while ensuring rigidity compared to when it is installed in a block shape that fills a U-shaped opening. can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as that of other parts of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength can be relied on the body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the part is formed as thin as possible). The strength of the opening/closing regulating portion 159 can be ensured while improving the moldability by forming the opening/closing regulating portion 159 with a thickness of 150 mm.

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing regulating portion 159 may be any shape that can ensure rigidity and maintain the shape, and is not limited to the U-shape. For example, compared to a flat cross section, the cross section may be curved (wavy), stepped, rectangular, or cylindrical.

In addition, the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is not provided as a part of the operation portion back member 155, but rather as a part of the main body frame 15.
It may be constructed from a metal part that is bent and extended from a to the back side, or that is extended from another member fixed to the back side of the main body frame 14a to the back side. However, as in this embodiment,
Forming the opening/closing regulating portion 159 from synthetic resin prevents the panel support device 600 from being chipped or dented when it comes into contact with the panel support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed from a metal member. can do. This can reduce the risk that an operator who changes the state of the board support device 600 to attach and detach the game board 13 will touch a chip or a dent made in the board support device 600 and be injured.

Here, since the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is arranged closer to the rotation base end of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock that is arranged further to the rotation tip side It is possible to ensure a long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 locations. Therefore, when the opening/closing regulating section 159 is in contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotating tip side will be locked by mistake. can.

As a route through which a foreign object such as a wire may enter, for example, a route passing through a gap in the operating device 300 is assumed. In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operating device 300 is configured to be completely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operating device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, the configuration is such that it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if you follow the gap between the operating device 300.

Note that the harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies power to the operating device 300 is connected to the wiring through hole 14 that is bored in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the elongated cover member 173.
a1 (see FIG. 103), the harness HN3 is inserted into the protective cover device 350 (
(See FIG. 57) is connected to the operating device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall.

As a result, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the inside of the operating device 300 through a gap in the operating device 300, the wire or the like will not reach the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operating device 300, which is configured in a substantially case shape. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

Note that a liquid can be considered as a foreign substance that enters the operating device 300. For example, a player who feels bad about a game result may pour drinking water or the like onto the pachinko machine 10. that time,
Operating devices 300 that are conveniently located are easy prey for being splashed with drinking water, and if no precautions are taken, drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) or voice coil motor 352 (see FIG.
3) may be damaged.

Furthermore, if liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board, etc. However, as described above, in this embodiment, the operating device 300 is placed on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since they are separably independent, liquid such as drinking water applied to the operating device 300 can be prevented from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

Note that a recessed portion 15a is recessed in the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower tray unit 15 (the surface facing the operating device 300) in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep recessed portion.
It is not completely case-shaped, and gaps are formed here and there (for example, see Figure 13,
The transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the clearance gap) through the inside of the operating device 300,
The recessed portion 15a plays the role of temporarily storing the liquid that falls below the operating device 300.

In the operation device 300, the drive motor 342 is arranged near the rear side of the opening 325, so the tilting device 310 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)), and furthermore, the drive motor 342 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)) Since the portion is disposed below the horizontal plate portion disposed between the motor accommodating portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17(b) and 18), liquid such as drinking water may be
42 and can prevent it from malfunctioning.

In addition, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a risk that liquid such as drinking water may come into contact with the voice coil motor 352. The liquid remains attached to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the attached liquid flows down toward the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, voice coil motor 352 can be prevented from breaking down.

With the above-described configuration, even if a player on his way home splashes a liquid such as drinking water on him, the next player can play the game normally as long as he wipes off the top surface of the operating device 300 that he touches. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operating device 300 from compressing business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a movable binding member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the movable binding member 180 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. In addition, FIGS. 93 to 9
6 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14, as in FIG.

93(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93(b) is a front perspective view of the movable binding member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the movable binding member 180 are illustrated side by side. be. In addition, in FIG. 93(b), the movable binding member 180 in a released state is shown on the upper side, and the movable binding member 180 in a fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The movable binding member 180 is in a fixed state in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 extended leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c.

In addition, in this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92)
and the harness HN2 connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are each guided to the movable binding member 180 without a relay board, and each is tied to the movable binding member 180.

On the other hand, each illumination section 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300 or the frame button 22 (Fig.
The harnesses to be connected to (see) are once connected (collected) to a relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the elongated cover member 173, and a bundle of extension harnesses HN are connected to the relay board from the relay board.
3 heads toward the movable binding member 180, and its extension harness HN3 is bound to the movable binding member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The movable binding member 180 is a member formed from a synthetic resin material, and includes a main body portion 181 that is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side, and a screw that is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotably supported, and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotational direction along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93(a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extending from the side opposite to the movable arm 182
is a U-shaped part in a top view disposed on the other side surface in the rotational direction (the side surface facing the main body part 181 in FIG. 93(a)), and is capable of locking the binding arm part 183. A pair of locking parts 184
and a temporary fixing part 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm part 182 at a position (intermediate position) between the pair of binding arms 183 and having an opening.

In addition, in the binding movable member 180, while the binding arm portion 183 is formed to have high flexibility, the other portions are formed to have less flexibility (higher rigidity) than at least the binding arm portion 183.

The main body part 181 has a fixed part 181a whose upper side has a substantially horseshoe-shaped cross section and a through hole in the center for passing a screw, and a fixed part 181a that protrudes from the left and right lower corners of the fixed part 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b are provided, and an intermediate stop portion extends downward from the lower edge of the front side end of the fixed portion 181a, and the extending tip thereof curves close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, and a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending to the left along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a.
(See FIG. 96(a)) and a cylindrical fastening part that is disposed on the upper part of the support plate part 181d and is formed from a cylindrical shape whose outer diameter is smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened. 181e and
Mainly equipped with

The plate member 14d is provided with a hole group 14d1 at a position where the movable binding member 180 is fixed, which is made up of through holes arranged to match the arrangement of the fixed part 181a and the pair of rotation prevention parts 181b.

When the screws passing through the fixed portion 181a are fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening holes of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b fit into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. This makes it possible to prevent the movable binding member 180 from rotating around the screw passing through the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and also to prevent the movable binding member 180 from rotating around the screw that passes through the fixed portion 181a.
The attitude with respect to d can be determined.

The intermediate stop portion 181c maintains each harness HN1 to HN3 between it and the plate member 14d.
In this embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extended ends (lower ends) and the plate member 14d, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from slipping downward, and the center is placed on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape curved along the arranged circle, the region (plate member 14d and intermediate stop 18) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is
It is possible to secure a large cross-sectional area of the region sandwiched between 1c and 1c.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181
The outer circumferential surface of e fits inside the proximal end portion of the movable arm portion 182, and pivotally supports the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a proximal end portion that is shaped to smoothly connect to a plane OS1 that is offset from the pivot position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the portion that is externally and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as a base end. 182a, and a thin elongated thin plate portion 182b connected to the opposite side of the pivot position of the base end portion 182a.

The base end portion 182a is located at the left and right end portions (the portion where the straight line connected to the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end portion (the portion where the straight line connecting to the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion that is fitted onto the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. side walls in the direction of rotation each extend from the approaching portion). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape with the center of the radius of curvature disposed on the same side, and the distance between them gradually becomes shorter as they approach the plane OS1, and when reaching the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a maintains higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In this embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a (high rigidity) design concept that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a (low rigidity) design concept with the intention of elastic deformation depending on the situation. .

Since a pair of binding arm portions 183 are configured to have the same shape, one will be described, and a description of the other will be omitted. The binding arm portion 183 has a narrow portion 183a formed near the tip with a width equivalent to the width of the base, and a wide portion 183b formed wider than the narrow portion 183a, which are alternately spaced at equal intervals. It is formed. Note that in the fixed state, the binding arm 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking part 184 and the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 93(b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, by forming the thickened portion on the outer circumferential side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 93(b)), a space can be secured on the inner circumferential side of the binding arm portion 183.

The locking portion 184 includes a large opening 184a formed on the movable arm 182 side, and a large opening 1 of the large opening 184a.
It mainly includes a small opening 184b that is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm 182 with 84a in between and has a smaller opening width than the large opening 184a (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a has a size that allows the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the narrow width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. , the large width portion 183b is sized so that it cannot pass (locked).

According to this embodiment, when the binding arm 183 is desired to move relative to the locking part 184, it is placed on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 is smaller). ,
When you want to lock the binding arm 183 to the locking part 184, you can easily adjust the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 by placing it on the small opening 184b side. can do.

The temporary fixing portion 185 includes a through hole in the center thereof through which a binding band can be inserted. Even if the binding arm 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be tied together, a commercially available binding band can be inserted into the through hole of the temporary fixing part 185 and fixed. , the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

The movable range of the movable binding member 180 will be explained. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94(b) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14.
95(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95(b) is a partial sectional view of the front frame 14 taken along the line -XCIVb. a) XCV
FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame 14 taken along the line b-XCVb.

Note that FIGS. 94(a) and 94(b) illustrate a state in which the movable arm portion 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95(a) and 95( In b),
A state in which the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with a vertically elongated metal portion that constitutes the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range) is illustrated. .

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 has an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (
It is configured to be able to rotate approximately 160 degrees around an axis that points in the vertical direction. This angle is suitable for normal use, considering the situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are installed in game parlors (pachinko machines 8010 are installed side by side on the left and right, and if the pachinko machines 8010 are rotated more than 90 degrees, there is a risk of collision with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010). This is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for the front frame 14 when opening and closing.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm section 182 cannot rotate beyond the range in which it can rotate relative to the main body section 181 without being elastically deformed (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Therefore, the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 deteriorates and breaks due to elastic deformation can be reduced.

Next, the manner in which the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported will be explained. Harness HN1~HN
3 is supported by the movable binding member 180, so that its arrangement is regulated, so that, for example, it is possible to prevent the wire from being accidentally caught between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and being broken.

96(a) is a schematic back view schematically illustrating the movable binding member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. c) is a schematic back view schematically illustrating the movable binding member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c).

Note that FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b) illustrate one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIGS. 96(c) and 96(d) illustrate the other limit state of the movable binding member 180. is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is disposed at a position moved toward the rotation base end of the front frame 14 from the opening opened toward the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. Ru. That is, since the horizontal line between the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened toward the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is the same, The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop part 181c near the cylindrical fastening part 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm part 182, the upwardly extending wall part 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop part 181c
The shapes of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 18 of the movable binding member 180
It can be made to conform to the shape of 2. As a result, FIGS. 96(b) and 96(d)
), the bending portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 have a curved shape, which can prevent extreme bending deformation from occurring.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18
3 can be placed on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 in between. Therefore, especially when the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. Thereby, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

97(a) and 97(b) schematically show the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3.
FIG. 3 is a schematic top view of No. 3. Note that FIG. 97(a) shows one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIG. 97(b) shows the other limit state of the movable binding member 180.

Further, in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically illustrated. The members fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported at the rotation center point P57 are schematically illustrated by solid lines in imaginary lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the movable binding member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also rotates with respect to the inner frame 12 around the rotation center point P57, similarly to the front frame 14. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97(b),
When the base end 182a of the movable arm 182 rotates around the cylindrical fastening part 181e, the inner frame 12
Since this corresponds to the opening and closing of the front frame 14, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, thereby improving durability (Fig. 9
6(b), see also FIG. 96(d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the movable binding member 180 are attached to the front frame 14 regardless of whether the front frame 14 is opened or closed relative to the inner frame 12.
A vertically elongated metal portion that constitutes the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (in FIG. 96(d),
The movable arm portion 182 is routed along a route that passes near the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182. In other words, by forcibly routing harnesses HN1 to HN3, harnesses HN
It is possible to prevent the curved portions 1 to HN3 from coming closer to the rotating tip side of the front frame 14.

This prevents the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the worker's work when opening and closing the front frame 14, and also prevents the harness HN1 from interfering with the worker's work when the front frame 14 is closed.
It is possible to improve the fit of N1 to HN3 (the fit that is curved only once on the rotation base end side) (see FIGS. 96(b) and 97(a)).

In this embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). Due to the support mode in which the intermediate stop portion 181c disposed vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3, for example, the tip of a wire or piano wire may be heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the inverted cup portion 178. , it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which a wire enters between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when a wire is pressed against the lower surface of the inverted cup part 178, melted and penetrated, and the wire is advanced to the gaming area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom part of the inverted cup part 178, it becomes high temperature. Harness H in which the tip of the heated wire is supported by the intermediate stop 181c
It is pressed against N1 to HN3. As a result, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned out and electrical continuity is disabled.

Improper conduct can be quickly discovered by controlling to output an error signal and sound an alarm (display an error screen) when the continuity of harnesses HN1 to HN3 becomes disconnected. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who commits a fraudulent act from obtaining fraudulent profits.

In detail, the harness HN1 is connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, so if the harness HN1 burns out, the ball cannot be fired even if the operating handle 51 is rotated. It disappears. Therefore, the period from when a fraudulent act is committed until the fraudulent act is discovered can be shortened (the fraudulent act can be detected early).

In this case, after entering the wire into the gaming area and tampering with the gaming area (for example, after bending the nail to make it easier to win illegally), the ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. Since it is possible to prevent a person who commits a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize from being able to shoot a ball, it is possible to prevent a person from receiving illegal profits. In other words, it is possible to make it impossible to perform a specific fraudulent act.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation section 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN2 burns out, the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) can be operated and the return button 43 (see FIG. 89) becomes impossible. Therefore, a person who commits a wrongful act shall
Because there is a risk that the players themselves will not be able to collect the remaining amount of balls on the banknotes and cards inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to their own fraudulent activities, the deterrent force against fraudulent activities should be exercised. be able to.

Furthermore, if the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is used to carry out fraudulent acts without the risk of being unable to collect the banknotes or balls equivalent to the remaining balance of the card, the card unit (ball lending unit) Since the player commits the fraudulent act without leaving his/her seat even though the balance of the game machine (unit) is 0 yen, the gaming machine store can easily notice the fraudulent act.

In the first place, if the connection of harness HN2 is cut off, the card unit (ball lending unit) (
At a game machine store where a disconnection error (CR error) (not shown) is output, the disconnection error (CR error)
By checking the error (R error), it is possible to easily identify the possibility of fraudulent activity.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. Note that in FIG. 98, the sheet metal member 15
0 and the outline of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated in imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage section 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage section 145. In addition, in this embodiment, the front door side lower plate passage section 1
The lower end of the foul ball passage section 145 occupies about 2/3 of the left-right width of the ball guide opening 53 on the left side of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage section 145 occupies the remaining area on the right side of the ball guide opening 53. The partition plate portion 53a is arranged so as to occupy an area (an area approximately 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53).
partitioned by.

The front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the foul ball passage section 145 are passages extending from the put-out ball receptacle section 143 and the foul ball receptacle section 146, respectively, so that the balls can flow down toward the lower tray 50. S-shaped paths SL1, S whose extension directions are directed (switched) at least once to the left and right sides.
L2 is provided respectively.

The S-shaped path SL1 makes it possible to increase the flow path length of the front door lower plate passage 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short. The number of possible balls can be increased. As a result, the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86)
The number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower tray 50 can be increased while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the lower tray 50 (and its Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily stored on the upstream side, players are under stress when replenishing balls (when the lower tray runs out of balls for 50 minutes, players are required to replenish balls from the senryo box, etc.) ) It is possible to configure a pachinko machine 8010 that can suppress.

The front door side lower plate passage section 142 and the foul ball passage section 145 each have bending areas NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as areas whose extension directions are bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and these bend areas are common. Equipped with characteristics. That is, the front door side lower tray passage section 142 has a first bending area NEa1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending area provided upstream of the first bending area NEa1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion reversed. A region NEa2 is provided.

Further, the foul ball passage section 145 includes a first bending area NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending area NEb1 provided upstream of the first bending area NEb1 with the left and right of the characteristic portion reversed.
b2. In addition, in the description of the characteristic parts, the characteristics of the first bending area NEa1 will be explained, and the description of the other bending areas NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, the first bending area NEa1 includes a side wall Na that is disposed on the opposite side of the left and right side walls of the front door lower plate passage section 142 in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. , a ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner that intersects the extending direction of the side wall Na, and a ceiling wall Nb extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and closer to the side wall Na toward the extension end. It mainly comprises a nearby wall Nc, and each wall Na,
Nb and Nc extend from the bottom plate on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed so that the surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb is curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface for the sphere. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 opposite to the surface Nc1 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) regulates the direction of movement of the illegally inserted wire HM (a thin metal such as wire or piano wire). The details will be explained later. Note that the gap Nin between the proximal wall Nc and the side wall Na at the lower end of the extension is equal to the wire H.
It is set larger than the width dimension (diameter) of M.

As shown in FIG. 99, due to the shape of the first bending area NEa1, the incorrectly inserted wire HM
can be prevented from penetrating deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that is illegally inserted can enter the lower tray passage section 14 on the front door side using the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance.
2. In this case, the person who commits the fraudulent act has to use the wire H.
M is moved forward while being pressed against the side wall of the lower plate passage section 142 on the front door side.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1 by the person committing the fraud, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1. Even if the wire HM moves to the right due to the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door lower tray passage section 142, the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending area NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It turns out. That is, a pair of bending regions NEa1,
By arranging NEa2 in a horizontally inverted manner, the wire HM can completely enter the gap Nin.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling route of the wire HM when it enters the gap Nin. Note that the position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is illustrated by a black circle, and the direction of movement of the wire HM at that time is illustrated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM gets caught (caught) here, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from moving further, prevent the wire HM from being held, and quickly discover fraudulent activity. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM is not caught and advances further, if the wire HM overhangs from the gap Nin, it will overhang with the tip facing downward, so the wire HM cannot be moved any further.
Even if the wire HM advances, the tip of the wire HM will advance downward. Therefore, the wire HM
The dispensing device 133, which is disposed upstream of the dispensing ball receiving section 143, and the foul ball receiving section 146.
It is possible to prevent the game area from reaching the gaming area located upstream of the game area.

As a result, it is possible to make the wire HM reach the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and cause the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining an illegal payout ball, or to cause the wire HM to reach the gaming area and cause the electric accessory 64 to malfunction.
By forcibly opening the movable device such as 0a (see Figure 2) and making it easier to win illegally, it is possible to prevent those who commit fraudulent acts from obtaining illegal profits by obtaining illegally paid out balls. .

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 98. The foul ball passage section 145 is formed so that the vertical width of the downstream portion from the confluence region CE where it merges with the ball extraction passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the ball (in this embodiment, more than twice the diameter). As a result, when the ball flowing down the ball extraction passage 147 is placed in the merging area CE, the ball flowing down the foul ball passage 145 enters the merging passage CE (the balls enter the merging area CE at the same time). Even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility of the balls being caught between the upper and lower walls and interlocking with each other can be extremely reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from being obstructed in the downstream portion from the confluence region CE.

The foul ball passage section 145 includes a passage section 145a that is formed between the first bending area NEb1 and the second bending area NEb2 and vertically connecting the bending areas NEb1 and NEb2. The passage portion 145a is set so that the left and right width is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage forming unit 1
The rear side bottom plate portion of 40 is formed to protrude toward the front side as it goes downward.

In the area upstream of the passage part 145a, the back side bottom plate part of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the upstream end of the passage part 145a, and in the area downstream of the passage part 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of is flush with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, in the foul ball passage section 145, the area on the upstream side of the passage section 145a is closer to the area on the upstream side of the passage section 145a.
The longitudinal width is set larger than that of the region on the downstream side of 5a. In this embodiment, the foul ball passage section 145 is set so that the front-rear width is slightly larger than the diameter of the ball downstream of the passage section 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the foul ball passage section 145 is set to have a longitudinal width slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball upstream of the passage section 145a. Therefore, the foul ball passage section 145
When balls accumulate in the upstream of the passage section 145, a plurality of balls can be arranged with their positions shifted back and forth, so the number of balls that can stay can be increased, and the center of the balls can be adjusted in the front and rear direction. Since they are prevented from lining up (they will be slightly shifted horizontally and vertically), it is possible to prevent two balls from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, the entry of balls into the passage portion 145a can be restricted to one ball at a time. As a result, even if two or more foul balls enter the foul ball passage section 145 in a row, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the confluence area CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of the upper and lower walls being caught and interlocking.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the bottom plate on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, and has a left end connected to the left side wall, and a downward flow surface of the ball faces rightward. An inclined plate part 146a that slopes downward as much as possible, and a foul ball receiving part 1 vertically below the inclined plate part 146a.
46 and the passage forming unit 1 below the inclined plate part 146a.
It mainly includes a curved guide plate part 146c that extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate part of 40 toward the back side, and is curved in such a manner that the extending direction thereof is directed upward toward the back side.

While the ball is guided toward the foul ball passage section 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate section 146c, the foul ball receiving section 1
46 toward the front side can be moved to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the ball rolling down on the upper surface of the inclined plate part 146a can be caused to flow to the right, and the blocking part 146b can prevent the ball from passing through the left side of the foul ball receiving part 146. I can do it.

Thereby, it is possible to lengthen the period until the ball that passes through the foul ball socket 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be completed by the time the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage section in the S-shaped path SL2 While setting the width of the ball 145 to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball), it is possible to make the ball flow smoothly.

The foul ball passage section 145 has a range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage section 145a
), since the passage width is set small (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball), it is possible to prevent illegal tools with a larger external shape from passing through the foul ball passage section 145.

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be explained. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIGS. 100 and 101 illustrate a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 that constitute the illumination section 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed to be elongated from side to side, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500, which constitutes an illumination section 8031 and an illumination section 8032. In this support structure, a tapered support groove 417 is provided at the lower end of the right side end of the upper panel unit 400, and is recessed from the back side to the front side, similar to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370. (see FIG. 118) are formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 fit into the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. By doing so, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 50
0 are concatenated.

Thereby, it is not necessary to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500, and by fastening and fixing them to the main body frame 14a, they can be connected and fixed to each other. Note that, from the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembly to the main body frame 14a is defined as the order in which the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed after the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed. Note that details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

In addition, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500, which are divided into left and right parts, are connected to the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. Due to the configuration in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted, the heavy plate units 500R, 5
It is possible to prevent 00L from separating left and right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. 102 and 103, on the front side of the main body frame 14a, the main body frame 14a
The upper side plate member 14e, which is sandwiched between the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, are shown disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101).
1 and FIG. 122).

The fastening part 14e1 has a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back side, and by fastening the screw passed through the through hole to the second fastening part 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, the upper frame This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. In addition, in FIG. 104, the main body frame 14a
The right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by screws inserted from the back side into insertion holes drilled in the main body frame 14a, is shown disassembled from the main body frame 14a, and the upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e While illustration of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 is omitted, the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

Note that, as an actual assembly procedure, the covering cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Further, the right side wall portion of the right panel unit 500 forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate section 510.
108 and 109 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Note that FIG. 108 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left heavy plate unit 500L and a right heavy plate unit 500R that are overlapped in the left-right direction, and these heavy plate units 50
It mainly includes a vertically elongated plate-shaped support plate portion 510 to which 0L and 500R are fastened and fixed and also fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate unit 500 is inserted into the support plate part 510 from the back side to the front side.
L, 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate part 510, and in this state, the support plate part 510 is attached to the main body frame 1.
It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by screws inserted into the main body frame 14a from the back side to the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed into an L-shaped cross section by extending a plate-shaped extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right side edge) of the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side, and also has an L-shaped cross section. (Fig. 86
), the inner wall (left side wall) of the extension portion 511a abuts the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, a fixing plate 511, a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511, and A plurality of cover-side through holes 513 are formed in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, and a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 are formed in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512. It mainly includes a pin support hole 515 bored in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 includes a base portion 511b having a shape that overlaps with the substrate member 512 in a front view, and a portion on the side of the substrate member 512 protrudes toward the front side in a table-like shape. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the base portion 511b has the heavy plate units 500L and 500R.
Since the heavy plate units 500L and 50 can be brought into contact with each other in the width direction (see FIG. 115(b)),
It is possible to suppress the tilting of the 0R in the left-right direction. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the posture of the heavy plate units 500L, 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

In this embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extension portion 51 is lower than the base portion 511b.
1a is shifted to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560, so that the extension portion 511
While the outer cover member 560 contacts the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction on the front side of a, the fixing plate 5
11, the rear side end of the inner cover member 520 is formed as a surface substantially flush with the side surface of the base portion 511b, so that the rear side end of the inner cover member 520 is aligned with the rear side end of the support plate portion 510. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the inner surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 contacts the left side surface 511c of the support plate portion 510.

The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed board) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In this embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged in a row that curves in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540, with a predetermined interval (in this embodiment, an interval of 11 [mm]) between adjacent LEDs. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape of the light guide member 540 projected from the front, and emit light from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540 with their optical axes parallel to each other. irradiate (see Figure 107).

Since the width of the end face of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (the width of the light emitting portion from side to side) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak through the light guide member. The light enters the light guide member 540 and exits from either surface of the light guide member 540, and the entry and exit of the light and its path will be described later.

The cover-side through hole 513 is a hole that positions the back surface fastening section 527 disposed on the inner cover member 520 and through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening section 527 is inserted from the back surface side. By fastening the screws to the back surface fastening portion 527, the inner cover member 520 is connected to the support plate portion 51.
Fixed to 0.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole that positions the back surface fastening section 556 disposed on the outer lens member 550 and through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening section 556 is inserted from the back surface side. By fastening the screw to the back surface fastening portion 556, the outer lens member 550 is attached to the support plate portion 51.
Fixed to 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole into which the protrusion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The pin support hole 515 has a horizontal width set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, and a vertical width approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560, it is possible to improve the working efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed.

That is, in the fastening preparation state where the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are in contact with the support plate part 510 from the front side, if the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly misaligned vertically with respect to the support plate part 510 (the protrusion 566 Even if the protrusion 566 is vertically misaligned by about the diameter of , the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515. As a result, the protrusion 566
is inserted into the pin support hole 515, and then the heavy plate unit 500L,
By moving 500R up and down by the amount of positional deviation, positional deviation can be eliminated and fastening and fixing can be easily performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L has a window portion 14c (FIG. 86).
The inner cover member 520 is made of a resin material that does not transmit light and constitutes the right edge of the
and an inner lens member 530 which is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed from a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

The right heavy plate unit 500R has a light guide member 540 disposed opposite to the left heavy plate unit 500L.
, an outer lens member 550 that is in surface contact with the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction, the front end portions of which are arranged opposite to each other in the front-rear direction, and is made of a light-transmissive white resin material; The light guide member 54 is disposed on the right side of the light guide member 550 and is made of a resin material that does not transmit light.
0 and an outer cover member 560 to which the outer lens member 550 is fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be explained. 110 and 111 show the heavy plate unit 50
It is an exploded front perspective view of 0L and 500R. Note that FIG. 110 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side, showing the five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. is shown exploded.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 52 disposed at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560.
2, a lower fastening part 523 which is disposed at the lower end of the main body plate part 521 and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate part 521, and an inner lens member 5.
A plurality of short fastening parts 525, which are cylindrical parts that are inserted into the inner lens member 530 and into which screws are screwed to fix the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520, are formed longer than the short fastening parts 525, and the inner The outer cover member 560 is a cylindrical portion inserted into the lens member 530 and the inner cover member 520
A plurality of long fastening parts 526 into which screws are screwed to fix the supporting plate part 510 are inserted, and a plurality of back fastening parts which protrude from the right side of the main body plate part 521 and into which screws to fix the support plate part 510 from the back side are screwed. 527
The main preparation is as follows.

The main body plate portion 521 has a front side end portion 521a having a wave shape, and a connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front side end portion 521a and the back side base portion 521b at a short width portion of the wave shape (a portion closer to the back side). Equipped with

The back side base portion 521b is attached to the base portion 511 of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that comes into contact with (matches in shape) the left side surface.

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion that is arranged in a posture that tilts to the left toward the back side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In this embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals vertically, but are arranged so that the intervals gradually become wider from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 114). As a result, the aperture widths of the plurality of apertures 524 are made different, and the production effect of light can be created using the apertures 524.
It can be different for each.

The upper fastening part 522 is a cylindrical part into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is inserted, and is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface with a pair of fastening parts 522a arranged in parallel in the front-back direction. A fitting groove 522b is provided.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a, which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 through screws inserted at two places at the upper end and at one place at the lower end.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged in parallel at four locations above and below, and the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state.
It functions as a window for viewing. Each external portion of the opening 524 is formed into a curved shape that extends to the right with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is arranged to be recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at the boundary between the back side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design shape of the inner cover member 52 in this embodiment.
The surface (left side surface) of 0 corresponds to the part that protrudes to the left (see FIG. 111). Back side base 52
The surface of 1b is concave and curved to the right in design between the above-mentioned boundary portions.
That is, the surface of the back side base portion 521b is formed in a wave shape that waves from side to side as it progresses in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back side of the portion that projects toward the front side of the design. When the inner cover member 520 is formed to have a uniform thickness, conversely, a depression is formed on the back surface of the design-shaped projecting portion, which tends to become a dead space. In contrast, in this embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back side of the inner cover member 520 (on the inner lens member 530 side) Efficiency can be improved.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 is formed to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 has a main body plate portion 5 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape.
The front end 531a of the inner cover member 520 has a wave shape that almost matches the shape of the front end 521a of the inner cover member 520.

The front side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531, and is perforated in the front and rear direction at a switching position of the curve forming the wave shape in the front and rear direction. and a support hole 531 into which the convex portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.
b, 531c.

The support hole 531b is formed in the wave-shaped front portion of the front end 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the back side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in the wave-shaped rear part of the front end 531a, and an inclined rib part 532 is provided on the back side of the support hole 531c to extend to a position where it can come into contact with the light guide member 540. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531c, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531c from being deformed or displaced.

Note that the main body plate portion 531 includes a through hole 531d that is bored in the left-right direction and has a size that allows the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted therethrough, at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and is connected to a pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending rightward from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c.
2a and a plurality of reinforcing plate parts 532 that vertically connect between the pair of upper and lower plate parts 532a.
It mainly comprises b.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended so as to fill the gap between them and the light guide member 540. That is,
Like the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes to the left as it goes toward the back side, so the left and right width becomes longer as it goes toward the back side (when viewed from above, the front end is the tip). Triangular shape).

The inner lens member 530 includes a projecting portion 533 extending leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524 . The projecting portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the projecting side, which is protruded in a wavy manner and has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

The light guide member 540 is made of thermoplastic resin, and has a halftone dot pattern on both left and right sides in which concave portions are arranged in a lattice pattern to redirect the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED 512a disposed on the back side in the left and right directions. This is a so-called light guide plate. That is, at least a portion of the light irradiated from the LED 512a to the back side end of the light guide member 540 is redirected in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is irradiated onto the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. Ru. The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width in the thickness direction is from the end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to the end face on the front side. It is formed in a shape that gradually tapers toward the end surface.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512a
) is a processed part that converts the light from the surface into uniform surface emitting light. The concave portion is a notch-like concave portion recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512a, thereby guiding the light guide member 5.
The light is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of 40.

In this embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is made of a thermoplastic template having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of approximately 1 mm are distributed in a grid pattern at approximately 3 mm intervals. It is formed by pressing it against resin (hot pressing). Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially perpendicular direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but it is preferably transparent, and includes acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), polycarbonate resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, amorphous polyester resin, and amorphous olefin resin. Resin, polystyrene resin, AS resin (
(acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compound). Among these, the light guide member 540 has high average brightness and less deterioration in brightness distribution by using acrylic resin.
can be obtained.

In this embodiment, the light guide member 540 has a thickness of 5 mm at the end on the LED 512a side. By setting the thickness between 3 mm and 8 mm, light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after heat bending can be improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 has a front end shaped like a wave whose front end is slightly shifted toward the back side than the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530, and the light guide member 540 has a wave shape that is slightly shifted toward the back side from the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530. It is also formed from a wavy wave shape.

In the present invention, the waveforms on the left and right sides are not strict. Regarding the degree of waveform,
There are no particular restrictions, but the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portion is 200 mm or more and 700 mm.
It is preferable that it is below. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design that has less distortion after heat bending, maintains good practical mechanical properties, and can provide three-dimensional degrees of freedom. .

The details of the horizontally undulating wave shape will be described later (see FIG. 114), but the inner cover member 520
In an embodiment, the cover is located to the left at a position corresponding to the connecting plate part 521c, and is located to the right at a position between the positions corresponding to adjacent connecting plate parts 521c (located away from the inner cover member 520). It is said to have a wave shape.

As described above, the wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material in which the concave portion is formed. The heat bending method of the present invention involves heating a thermoplastic resin as a base material to a heating temperature of +10 to 40°C, and forming a curved concave surface (female mold) and a convex surface (
It is made by pressing the base material into a mold with a male mold). More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin has an acrylic resin as its main component, the heating temperature can be 110°C or higher and 150°C or lower. Specifically, the temperature is preferably 130°C or higher and 150°C or lower.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is below the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By keeping the temperature of the base material during heating below the load deflection temperature + 40°C and below the melting point, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed, and the light source light is fluctuations in the reflection angle can be suppressed. This can prevent a decrease in brightness and uneven brightness distribution on the light guide plate. Moreover, by setting such heating temperature conditions, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 includes a main body plate portion 541 having a curved plate shape and a main body plate portion 541 constituting the light guide plate.
It mainly includes a fastening part 542 extending in the vertical direction from the top and bottom ends of the outer cover member 560 and into which a screw fastened to the outer cover member 560 is inserted.

The light guide member 540 includes a fastening portion 542 and a recessed portion 541a for retreating from the long fastening portion 526.
At any other position, there is no part that penetrates in the left and right direction. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate without holes at least on the inside of the projection surface on which the opening 524 is projected in the left-right direction, the effect of the production by light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear end of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 includes a main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is fitted and supported within the body plate portion 551. Inner fitting part 5
52, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region that extends to the right in an area surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 and extends beyond the outer cover member. A visible overhang portion 554, a plurality of through holes 555 into which the long fastening portions 526 of the inner cover member 520 are inserted, and a support plate portion that protrudes from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and are inserted into the support plate portion from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of rear fastening parts 556 into which screws for fixing 510 are screwed.

The outer lens member 550 has its front and rear ends shaped to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540 . That is, the outer lens member 550 has a front end 551a extending leftward from the front edge of the main body plate 551 and forming a curved surface, which almost matches the shape of the front end of the light guide member 540. The light guide member 540 has a wavy shape and is arranged slightly shifted toward the front side with respect to the front end portion of the light guide member 540 . In this embodiment, the front end of the light guide member 540 and the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front and back direction at any position in the up and down direction. Ru.

The front side end portion 551a is located at a position where the curve forming the wave shape changes in the front-rear direction.
A plurality of protruding portions 551b are provided that protrude toward the front side and are fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

On the surface of the front end 551a opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540, there is a
Numerous bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 115(a)) that bulge in a semicircular shape when viewed from the side are formed vertically. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are spaced apart from each other at a predetermined interval, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front end surface can be in a vertically continuous band-like light emission mode.

The insertion hole 553 is disposed in a deep recessed part of the projecting part 554 that is recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate part 551). As a result, the outer lens member 550 can be firmly fastened to the outer cover member 560, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, a back surface fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing the supporting plate portion 510 is screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550 and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate part 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (it can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the screw arrangement). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be expanded.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 facing the light guide member 540 is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 5
40 and the main body plate portion 551 are in surface contact (see FIG. 114(b)).

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from shifting in the direction in which it is disposed opposite to the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, the LED 512a disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate part 510,
It is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being misaligned, and the light can be made to enter the light guide member 540 from the LED 512a with high accuracy.

The outer cover member 560 includes a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end of the main body plate portion 561. The fastening portion 522a has an elongated hole portion formed in an oval shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and a plurality of holes through which screws are inserted from the opposite side. A receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper fastened portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561,
The lower fastened part is formed in the shape of an elongated hole with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening part 523a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and has a screw receiving part 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side. portion 563 and the front end of the main body plate portion 561, the long fastening portion 5 of the inner cover member 520
26, and is formed in the shape of an elongated hole with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening part 526, and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 into which screws are inserted, an opening portion 565 formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the protruding portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a protruding portion from the main body plate portion 561 toward the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of protrusions 566.

The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is connected to the covering cover 3.
70 (see FIG. 92) is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions forming the support groove 376 are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, the right panel unit 500 makes surface contact with the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), so the cover 370 causes the right panel unit 500 to protrude toward the front side. The upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape into which the protrusion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (
(formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhang 554). Therefore, the path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening 565 and the projecting portion 554 can be narrowed, and therefore, unauthorized acts of peeling off the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

With reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, left heavy plate unit 500L and right heavy plate unit 500
The method of assembling R will be explained. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 113(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113(a).

Note that FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b) illustrate a state in which the protruding portion 551b is arranged on the back side of the support hole 531b, and FIG. 113(a) and FIG. Part 55
1b is shown inserted into the support hole 531b.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled with the main body plate 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end of the front end 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R in contact with each other in the left-right direction (Fig. 11
2(b)), this can be done by bringing the left heavy plate unit 500L close to the right heavy plate unit 500R from the front side and inserting the protrusions 551b and 551c into the support hole 531b.

In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the protrusions 551b, 551
By adopting a configuration in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting the left heavy plate unit 500L into the support hole 531b, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 is improved. be able to.

For example, in this embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the front end of the right panel unit (
The number of screws that are arranged on the front side of the light guide member 540 and fasten and fix the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R can be reduced, and thereby the screws block light. Since the area can be reduced, the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 can be easily seen as a strip extending in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, for example, in this embodiment, the number of screws (fastening locations) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, which may lead to incorrect guidance when fastening. When a load is applied to the light member 540, the light guide member 540
can reduce the range where there is a risk of damage. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

Note that when approaching the left heavy plate unit 500L from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and inserting the convex portions 551b and 551c into the support hole 531b, the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and , and the light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R,
The surfaces are parallel to each other along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship that allows them to come into contact with each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 is the same as that of the left heavy plate unit 500L.
Since the right panel unit 500R functions as a guide when moving in the front-rear direction with respect to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the right panel unit 500 can be assembled easily.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, the right panel unit 500 has the left heavy plate unit 5 on the support plate portion 510.
00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are respectively assembled by fastening and fixing, and there are at least two possible assembly procedures.

The first procedure is to fasten and fix the left heavy plate unit 500L and right heavy plate unit 500R to each other, and then fasten and fix them to the support plate part 510. is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate part 510, and then the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the protruding parts 551b and 551c are inserted into the support hole 531b.
This is a method of fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L to the right heavy plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. These two procedures can be similarly adopted when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

In this way, it is possible to assemble and disassemble the right panel unit 50 in two ways, so workers performing maintenance etc.
It is possible to select whether to disassemble or assemble the 0, thereby reducing work time.

In addition, regardless of which procedure is used for disassembling, in order to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R must be
need to slide horizontally into each other. Convex portions 551b, 551c and support hole 531b
This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the two. When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid relative to each other in the plane direction, it is necessary to disassemble at least one of them from the support plate portion 510.

In this way, the configuration in which the protruding portions 551b, 551c and the support hole 531b are fitted can be achieved by prying (disassembling) the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and then This is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that may occur through the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and fraudulent acts can be easily committed. As in this embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 5 of the right panel unit 500
00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate part 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate part 510, and unless the screws are removed from the back side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 104), the left By configuring the heavy board unit 500L and the right heavy board unit 500R to be difficult to disassemble, it is possible to make it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from outside the pachinko machine 8010. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity that involves passing through the inside of the right panel unit 500 and entering the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guiding member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect on presentation will be described. 114(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . Note that in FIGS. 114(a) to 114(c),
Illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the back side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is directed to the left and right sides by the action of the light guide member 540. be redirected. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that waves in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(b)), light is focused on the side forming the concave shape, and diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guiding member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the light member 540 toward the opening 524 can be focused and produced. Thereby, the intensity of light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, from the light guide member 540 to the outer lens member 550 side. It can diffuse the light emitted to the area and use it for production.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the upper and lower positions are the same, there are differences in the manner of light production (whether the light is focused or diffused) on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It is possible to improve the presentation effect.

Note that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 into different regions, or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 into different regions, the appearance of light on both the left and right sides can be made different. .

The light guiding member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes depending on the size of the opening 524. In other words, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 also increases as the openings 524 move upward from the top. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is made shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1
>R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is made shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2>R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light differs for each opening 524, so that the LEDs 512a can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of light emitted can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the amount of visible light can be made larger in the upper opening 524 than in the lower opening 524.

Furthermore, the radius of curvature R4 at the position corresponding to the bottom opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1), and the center of the concave surface The normal line emanating from it is shaped slightly upward. Therefore, the amount of light that is visible through the openings 524 at the upper and lower ends can be increased, making it possible to add sharpness to the light production, and directing the light emitted through the openings 524 at the bottom to the player's line of sight. It can be emitted upwards.

The vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as lengths connecting the midpoint of the upper side of the opening 524 and the midpoint of the lower side in a side view, as shown in FIG. 114(c). The width of the opening 524 that is placed opposite to the portion with the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, and the width of the opening 524 that is placed opposite to the portion with the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2, and the width of the opening 524 that is placed opposite to the portion with the radius of curvature R3 is The width of the openings 524 disposed opposite to each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the openings 524 disposed opposite to the portion of the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In this embodiment, the lower openings 524 among the openings 524 are formed in such a manner that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the portions of curvature radii R1 to R3, the magnitude relationship of the curvature radii R1 to R3 is related to the magnitude relationship of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524. As a result, areas where the degree of light condensation is weak (for example, radius of curvature R
In the part 1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is made large so that enough light can enter the opening 524, while in the part where the degree of light convergence is strong (for example, the part with the radius of curvature R3), The vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to prevent too much light from entering the opening 524. Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, the light emission mode for each opening 524 can be made uniform.

Note that the center point of each radius of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. It is placed approximately in the middle of the

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the boundary area KE of the opening 524 . Here, the region KE is defined as a band-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, and a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114(c), the area K
The upper end of the region E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent to it above, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 adjacent to the lower side. Therefore, in the area KE, the LED 512
The light irradiated in the front and back direction from a is shown in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (FIG. 114(c)
(see), the vehicle advances while being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is transmitted to the inner cover member 520.
Therefore, even if the light condensing effect is reduced, the difference in the amount of light visually recognized by the player is small.

On the other hand, by making the region KE convex to the left instead of a flat surface, the light guide member 54
Since the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed from a curved shape without corners and stress concentration can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

Furthermore, by forming a convex shape toward the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. can be formed. Thereby, the effect of the light effect visually recognized through the opening 565 can be improved.

That is, depending on whether or not the light is incident on the area KE from the LED 512a, it is possible to suppress the change in the light visible through the opening 524 while causing a change in the light visible through the opening 565. .

For example, the LED 512a that makes light enter the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5
12a is also turned on, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with light without any gaps. At this time, since the right side of the light guide member 540 has a concave shape in the upper and lower portions of the region KE, the light emitted to the right from the upper and lower positions of the region KE intersects on the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being visually recognized darkly in the area KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and the edge is visible to the player. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the overhanging portion 554 (FIG. 106)
It is possible to add sharpness to the light emitting mode (see ).

Note that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary between the openings 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the corresponding part (corresponding to the area KE) of the overhang part 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a band shape. can be done.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) compared to the upper and lower parts thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end even if the amount of light is weak. Effects may be performed using the light that reaches this front end.

That is, although it cannot be seen through the connecting plate portion 521c, the front end portion 5 of the inner lens member 530
By preparing a light effect that can be seen through 31a (see FIG. 105) (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) and by setting a high jackpot expectation level for that effect, the position of the player's eyes can be adjusted. , the right panel unit 500 can be moved further away from the game board 13 than the front end thereof. As a result, the degree of eye fatigue of the player can be reduced, and the player can play games for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, but is visible to the player from the right side through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Therefore, the notification is made using light that is not visible to the player sitting on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and playing the pachinko machine 8010, but is visible to the store clerk who views the right panel unit 500 from the right side. be able to.

As a result, it is possible to issue an error notification that can be easily noticed by the clerk while the player committing the fraudulent act is not noticed, thereby preventing the fraudulent player from attempting to escape. It can be prevented.

Note that by reversing the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the area KE may be made visible only to the player and invisible to the clerk.

115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115(b) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540.
FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 taken along the line CXVb-CXVb in FIG.

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers toward the front side from the end surface (about 5 mm thick) on the LED 512a side. Note that the largest end on the front side of the light guide member 540 (LED 512
The part farthest from a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the left and right width dimensions are reduced with a similar slope over the entire area in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is more sensitive to the LED 5 than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111).
Since the distance from the end face on the 12a side becomes longer, it becomes more tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thinner. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

Here, in this embodiment, the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the upper and lower parts of the vicinity of the support hole 531b, and is arranged in a recessed position on the back side.
Due to the shadow created by the nearby parts, the part near the support hole 531c is darker and easier to see than the part near the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light guide member 54 in the portion facing the support hole 531b
Since the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531c is formed to have a larger width dimension (thickness) than the end face of the light guide member 540, it receives light emitted from the LED 512a. It is possible to secure a large area of the light-emitting surface.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any LED 512a among the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visible in the vicinity of the support hole 531c is
The amount of light visible in the area near 1b can be increased, and the difference in distance in the front-back direction and the degree of darkness caused by shadows can be reduced. As a result, the front end 531 of the inner lens member 530
With point a as the frontmost side, it is possible to easily make the level of light emitted visually recognized at the front end of the right panel unit 500 uniform across the top and bottom (reducing the difference in intensity).

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. Note that in FIG. 116, illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 is made visible. Further, in FIG. 116, an example of the path (progressing direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as a result of the curved light guide member 540, and as it passes through the inner lens member 530, the light is slightly It spreads and progresses to the outside.

Conversely, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as a result of the curved shape of the light guide member 540. Therefore, the LED 51 that generates the light that enters the light guide member 540
While the arrangement of the light guide members 2a is kept constant, the light emission mode (denseness, brightness and darkness) can be made different on both sides of the light guide member 540. In other words, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light in a light emission manner different from the light emission manner expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Furthermore, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side)
0 is curved as shown in FIG. 115(b), so that it is bent toward the player rather than directly to the side (see the imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115(b).Imaginary FIG. 115(b)) The line arrow is
An example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540 is shown). Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emission performance.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 100 and 101. The upper panel unit 400 includes the upper side plate member 14
Fitting grooves 522b and 562b are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via e, and are disposed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof (see FIGS. 108 and 109).
This unit is fitted into the front frame 14 and supported from below, and is disposed at the upper end of the front frame 14.

117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 includes an upper frame member 410 that is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 sandwiched therebetween (see FIG. 100), and the front side of the upper frame member 410. An illumination unit 401 is arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and a speaker assembly 450 is arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and is sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. ,
Mainly equipped with Note that illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted in FIGS. 117 and 118 (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit whose front side is decorated with a model name, etc.
A substrate on which a plurality of EDs are arranged is included. By the included LED emitting light,
Create a performance using light.

The illumination unit 401 includes a main body part 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall part 403 formed in a wavy shape on the rear outer wall of the main body part 402, and a wavy wall part 403 of the wavy wall part 403. A plate-shaped portion 404 extending from the lower edge to the back side in a horizontally long plate shape, and a portion above the plate-shaped portion 404 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side, which is a cylindrical inner side. A cylindrical part 405 whose shape is formed by penetrating the wavy wall part 403, and a plurality of fastening parts 406 arranged on the back side of the main body part 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , is mainly provided.

The main body part 402 is formed into a box shape with front and rear dish-shaped members overlapping their open sides, and a space is formed inside. In addition, the included LED is arranged on the electronic board,
The electronic board is fixed to the main body part 402.

The wavy wall portion 403 meshes with the wavy wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, thereby easily determining the installation position in the left and right direction, and attaching the illumination unit 4 to the upper frame member 410.
This is a part that improves the workability of assembling 01.

The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. Note that the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 is recessed with a horizontally long groove shape that vertically sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 .

The cylindrical part 405 has a function as a through hole for passing the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED included in the main body part 402 is disposed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by screws passing through the upper frame member 410 and fastening to the plurality of fastening parts 406 . Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), it forms a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 with the upper side plate member 14e, making it difficult to access the inside. Formed in such a way that it becomes difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410.
FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of 0. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is
A main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a lower edge plate member formed from a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411 and fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge of the main body member 411 420, a right corner support member 430R that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, and a right corner support member 430R that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, and the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411. The left corner support member 430L is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411, and the left corner support member 430L is fitted into the main body member 411 from the back side to a position protruding from the opening 414 to the front side, and is pressed by the right corner support member 430R from the back side. It mainly includes a lens member 440 that is restricted from falling off to the back side and that constitutes the illumination section 8033.

The main body member 411 is a longitudinally elongated member in which openings are formed on both left and right sides through which vibration waves (audio) generated from the speaker assembly 450 pass, and the speaker cover 27 is disposed to cover the openings. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 is formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the cylindrical portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 is larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical portion 405. A support through hole 413 formed through the support hole 413 with a slightly larger inner shape;
It mainly includes an opening 414 that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the illumination unit 401. Thereby, positioning in the left-right direction when fitting the illumination unit 401 into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 can be easily performed.

The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted into the support through hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
Thereby, the wiring extending through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. This can prevent the other end of the wiring from being attached or detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the cylindrical portion 405 when the cylindrical portion 405 is inserted therethrough.
Thereby, the support through hole 413 can be used for positioning the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be viewed from the front. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) has an LED 14 at a position that coincides with the lens member 440 in the front and back direction.
e2 is provided, and the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the LED 14e2 through the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has, on the back side, a wavy side portion 416 that is formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, a supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side at the lower end surface of the right corner, and a supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side at the lower end surface of the left corner. a fastening portion 419 arranged at symmetrical positions near the upper end and formed into which a screw can be screwed; and a second fastening portion 419 formed at a vertical position into which a screw can be screwed. It mainly includes a fastening part 419b.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end of the lower edge). Thereby, positioning in the left-right direction when fastening and fixing the lower edge plate member 420 to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

The supported groove 417 has a shape that allows the right and left claws to fit into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the supported groove 417
), the load (weight, etc.) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface in which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end of the illumination part 8031, and the fitted state (
(see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 40
It is configured such that a load (weight, etc.) given from 0 can be applied to the illumination section 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where screws inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and is provided in a rib-like manner so as to protrude from the base to a position that does not reach the tip. It has an enlarged rib 419a.

As will be described later, the enlarged rib 419a allows the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper plate member 14e to be connected to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. (see FIG. 125(a)), details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are ribs of the same shape arranged at three locations around the fastening portion 419 at 120° intervals along the direction in which the screw is fastened to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) includes the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) and the concave portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450 at the lower position of the main body member 411.
2,482 (see FIG. 122), and is formed at a position that matches the recessed portions 462, 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the main body member 411. Details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by a curved long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wave shape when viewed from below at the lower front side edge of the main body member 421, and After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 toward the front side, the wavy wall portion 422 is extended from the extended end portion upwardly to form the cross section L.
An L-shaped extension portion 423 formed in a letter-shaped shape, and a plurality of L-shaped extension portions 423 that are disposed at positions equidistant from the left-right center position (upper end position of the curved shape) of the main body plate portion 421 and that penetrate in the vertical direction. The opening 424 is mainly comprised of a small-diameter through hole.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other in the front and back, the lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back side, A portion of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the location where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut vertically, and it is possible to improve the strength.

The opening 424 is connected to the speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123).
This is an opening through which vibration waves (sound) output from the back side of the speaker assembly 450 into the speaker assembly 450 are passed (released to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1, which are circular openings through which vibrations generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450 pass.

The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally elongated rectangular through hole 430R2 formed to penetrate in the front and back direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front and back direction. Through hole 430R2
The light irradiated onto the lens member 440 through the opening 414 is made visible to the player.

121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. Note that in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated with an imaginary line for easy understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connecting holes 469, and the left and right ends, The lower end portion is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Note that the speaker assembly 450 includes a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450R, 45 having substantially symmetrical shapes.
0L, we will explain the speaker assembly 450R, and then explain the speaker assembly 450R.
50L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone-shaped speaker) 451, which is an audio device that converts an electrical signal into an audible sound wave so that it can be heard, and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 that is inserted into a through hole 466. It is formed with a front assembly 460 that is fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape that almost matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front,
The rear assembly 48 forms a space between it and the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).
0 and .

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460.
The speaker 451 is attached to the speaker 451 and emits sound effects related to the game.
A through hole is formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102) through which a speaker connection wire 453 (e.g., an electric wire consisting of a copper wire and a sheathing part that covers the copper wire) is connected to and extended at one end. The terminal connector of the speaker connection line 453 is connected to the electronic board 14i (FIG. 102).
(see FIG. 4).

The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the sound emitted from the speaker 451 to pass through. And this protective cover 4
The speaker 451 with the cover 54 covered is attached to the front assembly 460 with its front portion aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the sound reproduced from the speaker 451 is not enclosed. High quality sound can be played back and output without any loss of performance. Moreover, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front part of the speaker 451 without deteriorating the sound quality.

The front assembly 460 includes a main body portion 46 formed in the shape of a cup with an elongated left and right side and an open back side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the vertical width, and a rear surface of a recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portions 462. An extension plate 463 that extends in a plate shape from the side edge toward the upper and lower width outer sides to the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461;
A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the rear side end to the front side; a light passage through hole 465 formed through the front and back direction at the upper right corner of the main body 461; and a speaker 451 on the right side of the main body 461. A circular through-hole 466 is inserted through the main body 461, a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extend in a rib shape from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the rear side, and the rear assembly 480 is inserted through the through-hole 466. a plurality of fastening portions 468 into which screws are fastened and fixed, a connecting hole 469 into which screws are inserted to fasten the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), and a distal end main body. It mainly includes a front recessed part 471 that is recessed from the back side to the front side at the lower end of the part 461T.

The main body part 461 is divided in the left-right direction, and includes a proximal main body part 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a center side in the left-right direction of the proximal main body part 461B (FIG. 12).
It mainly includes an intermediate body portion 461M that is connected to the left side of the intermediate body portion 461M, and a tip side body portion 461T that is connected to the center side of the intermediate body portion 461M in the left-right direction (left side of FIG. 121). Note that a space is continuously formed between the proximal main body part 461B, the intermediate main body part 461M, and the distal main body part 461T with the rear assembly 480.

The main body part 461 includes a rear side wall part 461H formed as a wall part surrounding almost the entire circumference of the outer shape when viewed from the front. The rear side wall portion 461H includes an edge without a barb on the inside (an edge without a flange or the like formed on the inside).

The recessed part 462 is a recessed part in which the fastening part 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning between the fastening part 14e1 and the fastening part 14e1. be done.

The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. Through hole 463
The screw inserted into a is inserted into the joint tightening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1 from the back side of the main body frame 14a.
4e through the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102), and the through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480.
and the through hole 463a, and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw is inserted into the main body member 411 from the back side of the main body frame 14a through the upper side plate member 14e and into the through hole 463a, so that the extension plate 463 becomes larger as the screw is tightened. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e in between (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material in between). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wire passing recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 is passed. The width of the wiring passage recess 464 is smaller than the cross-sectional outline of the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453. This applies pressure to the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453 passing through the wire passage recess 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from forming between the wire passage recess 464 and the speaker connection wire 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is degraded due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 is passed. Note that in FIGS. 121 and 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage recess 464 is shown so as to be visible.

Here, in this embodiment, since the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, The speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wire passage recess 464. Thereby, the workability of assembling the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passage through hole 465 is connected to the LED 14e disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
This is a through-hole through which light emitted from lens member 2 to lens member 440 passes.

The passage-forming rib 467 contacts the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without a gap in the front and back, and forms a bent passage (which bends multiple times) into the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480.
123)). This bent path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side pass. The front side end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front side plate of the main body part 461. This prevents a gap from forming on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds (slightly protrudes outward from) the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120).

The rear assembly 480 includes a main body portion 48 formed in the shape of a cup that is elongated from side to side and has an open front side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width, and a rear surface of a recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portions 482. An extension plate 483 extends in a plate shape from the side edge toward the upper and lower width outwards to the upper and lower side edges of the main body part 481, and the main body part 481
from the cup-shaped bottom plate (rear side plate) of the main body 481 to the wiring pressing protrusion 484 protruding toward the front side of the main body 481; A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape toward the front side and the fastening portion 4 of the front assembly 460
68 and a plurality of through holes 488 formed as through holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to the front and back direction of the front assembly 460, and a plurality of through holes 488 that are formed as through holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to the front and back direction of the front assembly 460, and from the front side to the back side at positions that correspond to the front side recessed part 471 of the front side assembly 460 in the front and back direction. It mainly includes a rear recessed portion 491 that is recessed toward.

The main body part 481 extends in a plate shape toward the front side in such a manner as to surround the outer periphery of the main body part 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the main body part 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. The front side wall portion 48 is formed into a shape that fits inside the inner surface of the rear side wall portion 461H of
Equipped with 1H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R includes a double wall portion that is fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H around the entire outer periphery, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is deteriorated due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H includes a pair of auxiliary protrusions that protrude toward the front side beyond the wiring pressing protrusion 484 at positions sandwiching the wiring pressing protrusion 484 on the left and right with an interval that allows the speaker connection wire 453 to pass through. It has 481 Ha.

The auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are a pair of convex portions that prevent the position of the speaker connection wire 453 temporarily secured to the wire passing recess 464 from shifting when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are tapered to widen left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124(c)), the speaker connection line 45
3 comes off from the wiring passage recess 464 and begins to shift from side to side, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha.

Thereby, the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wire passage recess 464 during the assembly process, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wire passage recess 464 and the wire pressing protrusion 484. It can be easily accommodated in any opening.

The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 includes a through hole 483a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. Through hole 483
The screw inserted into a is inserted into the joint tightening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1 from the back side of the main body frame 14a.
4e is inserted into the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102), and the through hole 483a and the front assembly 46
It passes through the through hole 463a of No. 0 and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw is inserted into the through hole 483a from the back side of the main body frame 14a through the upper side plate member 14e and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411, so that the screw is extended as the screw is tightened. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex portion 484 is provided in a convex manner along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481, and is formed with a width that is fitted into the wiring passage recess 464, and has a width that is larger than the depth of the wiring passage recess 464. The protruding length is slightly shorter than the outer circumferential diameter of the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453.

That is, the speaker connection wire 4 is inserted into the opening surrounded by the wire pressing convex portion 484 and the wire passing recess 464.
53, the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and a gap is created between the speaker connection wire 453 and the opening surrounded by the wire pressing convex portion 484 and the wire passing recess 464. This can be prevented. As a result, the speaker connection line 453
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is deteriorated due to sound leakage from the opening for passing through.

The light passage through hole 485 is connected to the LED 14e disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
This is a through-hole through which light emitted from lens member 2 to lens member 440 passes. The light passage through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that is large enough to surround one LED. Note that the light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape whose cross section becomes larger toward the front side. ), the light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage-forming rib 487 is formed at the same position as the passage-forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, and abuts each other without any gaps in the front and rear. This is a rib that forms a curved passage (see FIG. 123) that bends around. This bent path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side pass.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall 481H, and is also fixed to the front side wall 481H.
It is formed at the front and rear ends and surface position of. That is, the back end of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the main body 48.
Connect with the back side plate of 1. This prevents a gap from forming on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the front end of the passage-forming rib 487 comes into contact with the passage-forming rib 467, and is designed to have dimensions that generate a compressive force in the front-rear direction. That is, the passage forming rib 487 is loaded with a compressive force from the passage forming rib 467 toward the back side, and the compressive force causes the passage forming rib 4 to be compressed.
67 and 487 close the gap while elastically deforming in the front-back direction (Figure 124(b)
reference).

At this time, if the passage-forming rib 487 has low rigidity in the left-right direction and may bend left and right, the compressive force may not work properly and the gap may not be closed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall 481H, the rigidity in the left and right direction is reduced to the strength of the front side wall 481H (furthermore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall 481H). The strength can be reinforced by the strength reinforced by the side wall portion 461H. Therefore, the rigidity of the passage-forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage-forming rib 487 can be prevented from flexing in the left-right direction, so that the gap between it and the passage-forming rib 467 can be effectively closed. I can do it.

The rear recessed portion 491 has a shape that is reversed from front to back than the front recessed portion 471, and together with the front recessed portion 471 forms an opening. The opening is formed in a size that surrounds (slightly protrudes from) the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the opening 424 is It is placed in a position surrounding the outline.

123(a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123(b) is a rear view of the rear assembly 48.
FIG. In FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), for ease of understanding,
The speaker connection line 453 is shown as an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, which are arranged opposite to each other, are shown unfolded with their opposing surfaces facing toward the front in the drawing. That is, by folding FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the left-right center of the paper, the abutting positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be determined. Can be matched. That is, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e can be brought into contact with each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e in the front-back direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), the proximal body portion 46 of the front assembly 460 is inside the speaker assembly 450
An acoustic chamber is formed on the back side of 1B. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic path serving as a passage for the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the tip side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by passage-forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the passage-forming ribs 467 are formed inside (on the left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are staggered vertically toward the left side. Rib portions 467a, 467b arranged at multiple locations (in this embodiment, 5 locations).
, 467c, 467d, and 467e.

By forming each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inside (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passing recess 464 through which the wiring passes, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e is
a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, and each rib portion 487a of the rear assembly 480,
Wiring can be prevented from being pinched between the wires 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

Each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e is connected to the main body portion 461 and the back side wall portion 461H, so each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d
, 467e can strengthen the rigidity of the main body portion 461.

Each of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e together with the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 forms a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, if there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally elongated cavity is formed, the speaker 451
The vibration wave generated from the passageway travels linearly, but in this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws travels avoiding the passage forming rib 467.

That is, as shown in FIG. 123(a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws moves toward the left side (arrow When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is located on the L side and is closest in the left-right direction is placed on the lower side, the direction of movement between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrow L, U direction).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is generated after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is placed on the lower side, and then the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is placed on the left side (arrow L side) and closest in the left-right direction (for example, , rib portion 467c) are arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (direction of arrows L and D).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 4
67e are alternately arranged vertically, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a vertically curved path, and the traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws is ensured to be long compared to the left and right width of the space. can do.

This makes it easy to adjust the traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws until it passes through the opening formed from the pair of recesses 471 and 491, and suppresses the generation of standing waves due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have the same effect as the passage forming rib 467.
It can also be caused by That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted in the upper left direction between the recessed part 462 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed part 471 and the recessed part 463b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be made to advance in the directions of arrows L and U.

Therefore, the recessed portions 462, 463b not only have an effect during assembly, but also have an effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws.

As shown in FIG. 123(b), the passage forming rib 487 has a wiring pressing convex portion 4 that presses the wiring.
Rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 4 are formed on the inside (left side) of 84 in the left-right direction and are arranged at multiple locations (5 locations in this embodiment) alternately vertically toward the left side.
87d and 487e.

Each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, so each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d
, 487e can strengthen the rigidity of the main body portion 481.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is
60 rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e in the front-back direction, and are arranged opposite to each other in the front-back direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).

Note that the actions of each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to those of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have the same effect as the passage forming rib 487.
It can also be caused by That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted between the recessed part 482 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed part 491 and the recessed part 483b disposed above it and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be made to advance in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portion 48
2,483b has the effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect produced during assembly.

Here, the vertical width of the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R decreases as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and the space is narrowed once at the position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are arranged vertically. , the vertical width is suddenly expanded at a position further away from the speaker 451 , and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491 . Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the speaker 451
Since the proximal main body 461B side where is assembled is sealed by the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is
In search of an exit, it advances toward the front end main body portion 461T, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction. Tip side main body part 4
The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached 61T passes through the opening formed by the front recessed part 471 and the rear recessed part 491, and the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120), and then passes through the speaker assembly. The sound is emitted outside the solid body 450R (outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the rear surface of the speaker 451 is connected to the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 and the recessed portion 47.
1,491 and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120), the pachinko machine 8010 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside, so the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is It is possible to reproduce and output high-quality sound without creating a clutter.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 and inverts the phase, so that the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 is in the same phase as the sound output from the recessed portions 471, 491. It becomes possible to emit sound from the opening formed by. In other words, in the bass reflex speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel out the sound output from the front side due to the opposite phase, but can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify deep bass sounds. This results in
The pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment is able to perform a realistic performance,
It is possible to increase the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is placed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), so that the bass sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is transmitted to the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and the liquid is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (it is discharged downward from the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86)). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide a game performance using the bass sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side to a player who plays a game on the front side of the front frame 14.

The sound tuning of the vibration wave Ws (sound) is performed by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450,
This can be done by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in this embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48
The path of the vibration wave Ws is defined as a path that avoids each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e. Therefore, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 46
7d, 467e and the respective rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the vertical extension length thereof can be individually set to tune the sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice).

In addition, in this embodiment, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 4 of the front side assembly 460
67d, 467e and each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487 of the rear assembly 480
In addition to the above-mentioned purpose, the portions d and 487e are provided at a portion to which a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, and serve to reinforce the speaker assembly 450.

For example, each of the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d can reinforce the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 by being arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged due to the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are inserted.

Furthermore, in the assembled state, the extension plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e and are pressed (see FIG. 125(a)).
7c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing into the fastening portion 468, the extension plates 463, 48
When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the screws are screwed into the fastening portions 419 inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a of No. 3, and the respective rib portions 467c, 4
By bringing 87c, 467d, and 487d into contact with each other, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48 are assembled.
0 deformation can be prevented. That is, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 48
7d allows the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 to be reinforced.

Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions on which the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is aligned with the upper side plate member 14e. In the state before being fastened and fixed to 14e, the speaker assembly 45
The recessed portions 462 and 482 of 0 will ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, the recessed portion 462
, 482, an upward load is applied from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is thought that the recessed portions 462, 482 are likely to be damaged, but in this embodiment, the rib portions 467b, 487b are connected to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462, 482, so that the recessed portions 462, 482 are easily damaged. It is possible to reinforce against the load applied to the portions 462, 482, and the durability of the recessed portions 462, 482 can be improved.

The opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through-hole, fraudulent acts such as trying to illegally infiltrate wire, piano wire, etc. into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 are more difficult. It can be easily suppressed.

In addition, in such a fraudulent act, a wire, piano wire, etc. is illegally entered into the gaming area and a nail or the like is deformed. In this embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is inserted into the front recessed portion 471 In addition to being formed in a sealed box shape except for the opening formed by the rear concave portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage concave portion 464 and The opening gap formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connection wire 453. Therefore, when a wire, piano wire, etc. enters the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front recessed part 471 and the rear recessed part 491, the speaker assembly is inserted through an opening different from where it entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, piano wire, etc. to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connection wires 453 through the upper side plate member 14e are arranged closer to the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speakers 451, so that wires or piano wires can be passed through the through holes. It is possible to increase the distance between the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, which is a place where the speaker assembly 450 is allowed to enter the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even if such a fraudulent act is committed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, making it easier to prevent fraudulent profits from occurring.

124(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 124(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R along the CXXIVb-CXXIVb line of FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(c) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R. is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a), and FIG.
FIG. 4 is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the Vd direction. Note that FIG. 124 (a
) and FIG. 124(c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated as an imaginary line for ease of understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124(c), illustration of the speaker connection line 453 is omitted. .

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124(b), the inner surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that slopes inward toward the rear side. , the outer surface 481Ho of the front side wall 481H of the rear assembly 480 (FIG. 124(b)
The upper surface) has a tapered shape that slopes inward toward the back side, and the inner surface 461H
It has a shape that fits with the i in the assembled state. Thereby, the work efficiency of inserting the front side wall part 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear side wall part 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124(b), the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. The restoring force generated by this elastic deformation causes compressive force to act from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c, so that the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed in such a dimensional relationship that a compressive load is generated between the rib portions that abut each other.

As shown in FIG. 124(c), the intermediate body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter longitudinal dimension than the proximal body portion 461B and the distal body portion 461T. Therefore, the tip side main body portion 46
Compared to 1T, it is possible to reduce (narrow down) the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration waves Ws can pass in the intermediate main body portion 461M. Thereby, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect.

As shown in FIG. 124(d), the internal space of the distal main body part 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front recessed part 471 and the rear recessed part 491 is inside the intermediate main body part 461M. A large amount of space is secured by bulging out in the front-rear direction compared to the space. Thereby, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal end main body portion 461T, and can be emitted at a low speed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, such as making it easier to hear deep bass sounds due to the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 125(a) shows the front assembly 46 along the CXXVa-CXXVa line in FIG. 124(a).
125(b) is a partial sectional view of the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e, and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the side assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e.

As shown in FIG. 125(a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has a through hole 463a,
483a is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419, so that the front assembly 460
, the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are sandwiched between the main body frame 14a.
That is, by arranging the enlarged rib 419a on the front surface of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper plate member 14e from shifting in the front-rear direction. , the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125(b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly It is formed at a position that coincides with the recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450.

The second fastening part 419b and the fastening part 14e1 are arranged inside the recessed parts 462, 482 (they do not come into contact with the recessed parts 462, 482 in the fastening direction, but pass through them), so that the front assembly 460
It is configured as a part that fastens and fixes the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e without using the rear assembly 480.

The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member 14e is fastened and fixed, and the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, in the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (the portion extending toward the back side is disposed inside). At the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is connected to the recessed portion 462,
482 (the part extending toward the front side is arranged inside).

Note that in this embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, so that the speaker assemblies 450R and 450L on the other side are connected to each other.
Conflict with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 disposed in the speaker 450L is avoided, and the reproduced sound can be reproduced with high quality as transparent sound without being muddy.

In this embodiment, at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are in plane contact with each other (see FIG. 125(a)). In the lower part, the back surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated, and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e is provided to protrude toward the front side at a portion facing the lower end of the rear side assembly 480, The protruding portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is,
The speaker assembly 450 does not have a structure in which the entire surface is in contact with the upper side plate member 14e, but in a contact mode in which the speaker assembly 450 makes a line contact, particularly at the lower end portion.

In this case, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper side plate member 14e (made of synthetic resin).
However, it is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member made of ebony, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete, a soft resin material, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when a metal member is provided, it is desirable that the metal member has a high specific gravity. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, etc. By using these metals, it is possible to add depth to the sound.

Further, it is desirable that the material be a member with high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics, etc. are applicable. By using these members, it is possible to improve the sound rise performance.

Regarding the shape, the protrusions may be in the form of a long plate, in the form of a spike, or in a dotted manner with rounded ends. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, but may be connected in a floating manner.

Note that the arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is different from that of the speaker assembly 45.
It is not limited to the back surface of the lower end portion of 0. For example, the rear surface of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450 may be used, the rear surface of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450 may be used, or the rear surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be
50 side or front may be used.

For example, when disposing it on the back side of the upper end, the member functioning as an insulator is made into a cylindrical shape, and is disposed between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted therethrough. You can also determine the position by doing this. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator is not required, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function depending on the tightness of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the acoustic effect by adjusting the degree of contact (load applied to each other) with the other members.

At this time, even if the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 will not be able to handle the screw inserted into the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123(a)) or the connecting hole 469.
A through-hole having the same shape as that and disposed on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction, or a screw inserted into a through-hole disposed at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through-hole is disposed. Since the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e.

Further, regarding fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 41
In addition to the screw inserted into the through hole 483a, the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (FIG. 1
00) from the back side is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125(b)) to be fastened and fixed. As described above, when fastening and fixing the fastening part 14e1 and the fastening part 419, the structure is such that no load is applied to the speaker assembly 450, so by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening part 14e1 and the fastening part 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the fastening condition).

Further, the same relationship as the above-described relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e,
This also applies to the relationship between the main body frame 14a, which is connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and contact relationship can be designed in the same way as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . In addition, Fig. 127
In (b), the inner frame 12 is shown with the game board 13 removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the supporting parts 12a,
12b will be explained. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, there are a left end front support part 12a and a left end rear support part 12b spaced apart in the front and back for the purpose of supporting the left end part of the game board 13. will be placed.

The left end front support part 12a has an inclined surface 12a1 that is inclined rearward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is disposed opposite to the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the left is formed. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 come into contact with each other.

The left end rear support portion 12b has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, a front end surface that is formed on one surface so as to be able to come into contact with the back surface of the game board 13, and a cup shape with an open center portion. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a state of natural length so as to protrude toward the front side as it goes leftward. That is, the elastic support part 12b1 works with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support part 12a,
A tapered shape is formed that expands in the left-right direction toward the side where the game board 13 is arranged (to the right). Thereby, work efficiency when the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129.

128(a) and 128(b) show CXXVIIIa-CXXV of FIG. 127(b).
129(a) and 129(b) are side views of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the board support device 600 and the game board 13. FIG. It is. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128(a) shows the game board 13 whose left end has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12. , FIG. 128(b) and FIG. 129(a) show the game board 13 just before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and FIG. 129(b) shows the game board 13 after completing the assembly to the inner frame 12. Illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 128 and Z39, for easy understanding,
Part of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted from the illustration.

When a worker assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, temporarily place the game board 13 on the top surface of the tray passage forming member 160, adjust the vertical position of the game board 13 to some extent, and then remove the game board 13.
Slide the left end portion between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128(a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a rotated position around the axis pointing in the vertical direction, so the left end front support on the near side Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere, in this embodiment, the inclined surface 12 is provided on the left end front support portion 12a.
a1 is formed, so the range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support part 12b interfere
can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(b), the left end of the game board 13 (in detail, the inclined surface 12a
The game board 13 is rotated so as to approach the inner frame 12 around the abutting position between the back side edge of the game board 1 and the front surface of the game board 13. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is placed opposite the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied toward the game board 13 from the elastic support portion 12b1. That is,
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is determined by the support bottom 1 of the inner frame.
2c. The support bottom part 12c is a plate-shaped part formed in the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction with an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 90).
A guide rib 1 that supports the game board 13 from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface.
A plurality of 2c1 are provided in the left and right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128(a) to FIG. 128(b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 when viewed from above. At the same time, the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1, so by making the game board 13 ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side, the rotation of the game board 13 can proceed smoothly. . Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

Note that the angle of inclination of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to approximately 15°, which is a larger angle than the backward inclination (approximately 10°) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game parlor. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inclination of the sloped surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 when installed, so the pachinko machine 8013 when installed
It is possible to improve the workability when assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without relying on the rear tilt of 013.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slope angle of the slope of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at the same slope angle as the rear slope when the game parlor is installed. In this case, the guide rib 1 on which the game board 13 rides
The inclined surface of 2c1 can be made horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128(b), as shown in FIG. 129(a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 arranged vertically and in a released state, which will be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 is rotated. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the released state, the board surface support device 600 is configured such that the front rotation claw member 620 and the front regulation claw member 630 (a portion disposed on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) are attached to the game board 13.
Since it is configured to retreat from the approach path of the game board 13, it is possible to improve work efficiency in assembling the game board 13.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotation claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board support device 60
0 changes to a fixed state, which will be described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, the game board 13
When fixed, the states of the upper and lower board support devices 600 change almost simultaneously.

Note that the game board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c and its vertical position is regulated. Figure 129(a
) and FIG. 129(b), between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600, the board support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 (the game board 13 does not touch the board surface). The game board 13 is not pushed up by the support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, by changing the state of the panel support device 600 between the released state and the fixed state, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably attached and detached.

Here, when pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 toward the back side, the game board 13 is rotating with the vicinity of the left end as a fulcrum, so the claw member 64 rotates via the game board 13 due to the principle of leverage.
The force required when applying a load to the 0 can be weakened by the long width of the game board 13, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is attached to the left end front support portion 12a.
Since it is supported at two places, upper and lower, by the left end rear support part 12b (see FIG. 126), for example,
When the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed to the inner frame 12 when the right end of the game board 13 is insufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not fixed). Even if the game board 13 falls forward, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the game board 13 is pushed in by the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12. It is possible to reduce the degree of tilting back and forth. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board support device 600 from changing due to the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 toward the inner frame 12 to close it (the possibility can be reduced).

When the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is connected to the support part 12a.
, 12b, the right end part is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end part is regulated in vertical position by the support bottom part 12c.

In the state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129(b)), the game board 13
It is arranged at the lower end of the back side of the game board 13, is connected to wiring connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13, and is supported by the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13. The floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d are arranged on the inner frame 12 in the vicinity of the lower panel support device 600, and to which wiring connected to the control board unit 91 (see FIG. 3) etc. is connected on the back side. They are connected in the rotational direction of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d are arranged in an inclined position so that the connection direction is oriented along the rotational direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotational direction of the game board 13. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board support device 600 that is disposed near the right corner of the inner frame 12 with a pair of upper and lower sides facing each other. Note that since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 have the same configuration and are disposed facing each other, one of the board support devices 600 will be described, and a description of the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

130(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600, FIG. 130(b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 131(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. 131(b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. In addition, Fig. 130
130(a) and 130(b) illustrate a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b) show the game board 13 fixed by the board support device 600.
A released state in which the fixation of No. 3 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the front rotation claw member 620 and the rear rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board support device 60
0 is a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, a front rotation claw member 620 that is rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 that is inserted through and fixed to the frame member 610, and a rotation thereof. A pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged on the front side of the front claw member 620 and is rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 that is inserted and fixed to the front claw member 620, and a pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged on the back side of the front claw member 620. A post-rotation claw member 6 is rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 which is inserted through and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620.
Mainly equipped with 40 and.

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate part 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a pair of main body plate parts 611 that are part of the main body plate part 611 and are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate part 611a in a straight line, and an arcuate hole 613 bored in the plate part 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. , on the back side of the support hole 612, the plate portion 6 extends along an arc centered on the support hole 612.
11a from below, and the plate portion 61 at a position vertically above the support hole 612.
The inner frame 12 is controlled by a rod-shaped regulating rod 615 that is inserted through and fixed to the plate portion 611a, and a screw that extends from the plate portion 611a in the form of a flange to the left and right and is inserted into the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127(b)). It mainly includes a pair of fixing plates 616 that are fastened and fixed to.

The support hole 612 is a through hole into which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. First shaft member P61
is formed as a cylindrical metal rod member whose diameter is expanded at the end on the proximal end of the insertion, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the distal end of the insertion is pressed, thereby forming the support hole 612.
Fixed. This fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are as follows: the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P
63 is also similar, so the explanation will be omitted. Note that when the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Like the frame member 610, the front rotation claw member 620 includes a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 are formed to penetrate in a straight line through the plate portion 621a arranged to face each other on the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and a pair of supported holes 622 are formed to penetrate in a straight line in the upper corner of the front side of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 that are formed and into which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a plate portion 621
It mainly includes a pair of support holes 624 formed in a straight line on the back side of a and into which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

Note that when the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the pre-regulation claw member 63 is inserted at the same time.
The second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of No. 0, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624.
At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the claw member 640 after rotation.
is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion disposed opposite to each other on the left and right, and has an elongated portion 621a1 that is long in the front and back.
and an extension part 621a2 extending vertically from the front end of the elongated part 621a1 to connect a pair of plate parts 621a formed in a T-shape in side view and the upper edge of the plate part 621a. A connecting plate portion 621b to be fixed, a rear side extension plate 621c extending from the rear side end of the connecting plate portion 621b at a downward slope of about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b, and an extending plate 621c. Part 621a
A drooping back plate part 621d extends perpendicularly to the plate part 621a from the back side end of 2 toward the opposite plate part 621a. It mainly includes a front side extension plate 621e that extends at an angle of about 45 degrees toward the front side.

The downward hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane perpendicular to the elongated portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the elongated portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the elongated portion 621a1 and the rear side surface of the drooping back plate portion 621d are formed at right angles to each other.

The rear side extension plate 621c is arranged so that its lower surface can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, in the released state, the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb comes into contact with the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134(a)), while in the process of changing to the fixed state, the torsion spring By retracting above NBb, the torsion spring NBb
begins to come into contact with

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated toward the worker, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the end of the rotation, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, while reducing the force required at the start of pushing, the rotational momentum of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600.

The drooping back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front side extension plate 621e functions as a guide when inserting the game board 13 into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates a biasing force in a direction that brings the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the downwardly downward rear plate portion 621d closer to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates a biasing force in a direction that causes the lower end portion of the rotational claw member 640 to move away from the rear side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

The pre-regulation claw member 630 includes a main body plate portion 631 that is formed into a letter-shaped shape when viewed from the side by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a part of the main body plate portion 631 that is arranged opposite to each other on the left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 are formed to pass through the plate portion 631a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and a front connecting plate 631b that connects the plate portion 631a is inclined toward the front side from the lower end of the front connecting plate 631b. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 633 that extends in a horizontal direction, and a curved surface 634 that is curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion disposed opposite to the front frame 14, and is a plate portion that is disposed opposite to the front frame 14, and is connected to the plate surface support device 600.
This is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the front frame 14 is in the released state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the restriction rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), thereby restricting the free attitude change of the pre-restriction claw member 630.

The post-rotation claw member 640 includes a main body plate portion 641 that is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape in side view by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a part of the main body plate portion 641 that is arranged opposite to each other on the left and right. A pair of supported holes 642 are formed to penetrate through the plate portion 641a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the third shaft member P63, and from the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of plate portions 641a to the back side. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 643 that extends at an angle.

The front connecting plate 641b is a part that comes into contact with the back side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-back position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a part that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and has an inclination angle such that it touches the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 129(a)). It is formed.

134(a), FIG. 134(b), FIG. 135(a), and FIG. 135(b) are side views of the board support device 600. Note that in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b), the process in which the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order. In addition, FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135
In (b), the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed close to the board support device 600 and the arrangement of the game board 13 fixed to the board support device 600 are illustrated with imaginary lines.

That is, in FIG. 134(a), the board support device 600 is in the released state, and in FIG. 135(b),
The fixed state of the board support device 600 is illustrated in each figure. In addition, in the fixed state shown in FIG. 135(b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the back side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much around the first shaft member P61 (the third This can prevent the shaft member P63 from moving upward relative to the first shaft member P61. Therefore, the claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the fixed position after rotation.

Here, as described above, the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is applied with a biasing force in the direction of approaching the drooping back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is disposed close to the drooping back plate portion 621d. on the other hand,
When the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the regulation rod 615 come into contact with each other, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is regulated.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b), as the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the pre-rotation claw member 6
20, the front side where the extension part 621a2 is arranged is tilted, while the front side of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is raised up in a manner separating from the drooping back plate part 621d.

To be more specific, the regulating rod 615 is located on the front side of the curved surface 634 and is located on the front side of the second shaft member P.
134 (a) to 13
5(a)), the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises as the pre-rotation claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistance part 634b, which is a part connected to the back side of the resistance part 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged opposite to the regulating rod 615,
When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 no longer come into contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising motion of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is released, and the inclined extension plate 633 side of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is released. The tip portion is disposed close to the drooping back plate portion 621d (FIGS. 135(a) to 135).
(see (b)).

The angular range in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises and moves (from FIG. 134(a) to FIG. 135(a)
), even if a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630, which is a load in the direction of tilting the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the pre-regulation claw member 630 will operate due to the downward load. The change in the posture of the pre-regulation pawl member 630 at this time is a change in posture in the direction opposite to the downward load (change in posture in the rising direction), so the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the pre-regulation pawl member 630 responds to the downward load. Changes in the posture of 630 are regulated.

In addition, since the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the rotation front claw member 620 is regulated by the game board 13 unless the game board 13 is pushed inward.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630, so that the pre-rotation claw member 620
rotation can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the front frame 14, it is possible to suppress the tilting operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620. In the present embodiment, the positional relationship is such that when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 comes into contact with the inclined extension plate 633 of the pre-regulation claw member 630. , the shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 134(b), the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate 621c 621c
Rubbing friction occurs between the player and the game board 13. As a result, the game board 1 is in the state shown in FIG. 134(b).
3 can be prevented from moving (tilting) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13,
It is possible to suppress the movement (tilting) of the upper end portion of the game board 13 toward the front side due to the reaction.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the board support device 600, in the case of a structure in which the front rotation claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14, Depending on the manner of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630, the board support device 600 may reach the fixed state, or the board support device 600 may not reach the fixed state and may be stabilized at a halfway angle. There may be cases where this occurs.

The board surface support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle, and in that state the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89)
If the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) can be closed, the distance between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 will be shortened, which may hinder the game.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multifunctional When the cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. Thereby, the store clerk who was working on closing the front frame 14 can be made aware that the board support device 600 is not in a fixed state.

Once the clerk notices this, he or she will push the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state, and the back of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 will overlap when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135(a), when the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 and the pre-regulation pawl Depending on the manner of abutment of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the board support device 600 will reach the fixed state, or the board support device 600 will not reach the fixed state and will be stabilized at a halfway angle (exclusively (The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, the multifunctional cover member 171 is extended to a position where it can come into contact with the pre-regulation claw member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that its posture is not restricted by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the back side of the back side extension plate 621c is no longer in contact with the game board 13, and the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is not regulated by the game board 13. None.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulation front claw member 630 in a state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 becomes the fixed state, the front end of the rotation front claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

As a result, when the game board 13 is placed at the position immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the store clerk pushes the game board 13 with slightly insufficient force,
This eliminates the situation where the front frame 14 does not close even when the front frame 14 is installed in a stable manner.
When a load is applied to the panel support device 600, the load can change the panel support device 600 to a fixed state.

Therefore, the workability of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged on the board support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact (see FIG.
34(a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 toward the back side. That is, the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is rotated accordingly, and the board support device 600 is changed to a fixed state. According to this method, since no downward load is applied to the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the state of the board support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board support device 600, which faces the game board 13, are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. In this state, game board 13
When moving (tilting) toward the front side, the torsion spring NBb applied to the front rotation claw member 620 via the post-rotation claw member 640 moves (tilts) while pushing away the drooping back plate portion 621d. The biasing force is applied as resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. This can reduce the possibility that the game board 13 will move (tilt) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, when the lower board surface support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the reaction force causes the game board 13 to
It is possible to suppress movement (tilting) of the vicinity of the upper end toward the front side.

Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is disposed facing the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 135(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the pre-rotation claw member 620 rotates as the game board 13 pushes the downwardly downward rear plate portion 621d, the first shaft member P61 is the center. The non-resistance portion 634b comes into contact with the regulating rod 615 in the direction along the circular arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases accordingly.

As a result, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b),
It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 will move (tilt) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the upper end of the game board 13 moves toward the front side (tilts) due to the reaction. can be restrained from doing so.

Furthermore, the non-resistance portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is connected to the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(a).
A curved surface is formed in such a manner that the radius around the second shaft member P62 gradually increases from the part that contacts the regulating rod 615 to the part that contacts the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(b).

As a result, the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed toward the back side by the multifunctional cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG.
When is displaced, the non-resistance portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are momentarily separated. Therefore, the resistance applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the regulation rod 615 is momentarily reduced, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves forcefully close to the downwardly downward rear plate portion 621d due to the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, as shown in FIG. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, in the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. However, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position in the state immediately before the fixed state of the panel support device 600 shown in FIG. After that, the board support device 600 can be placed in a fixed state.

In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be placed in the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600.
That is, in a state where the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not come into contact with the game board 13 and the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is in contact with the multifunctional cover member 171. (For example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134(a) to the state shown in FIG. 135(a).) Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not placed (for example, when the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed when replacing the board). , it is possible to improve the work efficiency of workers.

In addition, when changing the board support device 600 from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633
is pulled toward the upper front side, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 is rotated against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 6
15), the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force.
By continuing the rotation, the board support device 600 can be brought into the released state.

Note that when the board support device 600 is released with the game board 13 fixed, the game board 13 is pushed toward the front side by the displacing post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 134(a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved compared to the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is in the released state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 134(a), in the released state, the game board 1
3 comes into contact with the lower surface of the rear side extension plate 621c of the board support device 600. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 will fall to the front side when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

Note that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be operated to switch between a released state and a fixed state one by one. Here, in a configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support device 600 changes, as in this embodiment, if the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and back positions of the game board 13 will be different from top to bottom. , there is a risk that the load applied to the game board 13 will become excessive.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 that is operated when the board support device 600 is released, the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 64,
0 operation does not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b), compared to the amount by which the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced, the pre-rotation claw member 6 that supports the game board 13 is
20 and the amount by which the pawl member 640 is displaced after rotation are smaller.

Therefore, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to the extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (the return is regulated by the regulation rod 615), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress displacement of the longitudinal position of the game board 13 at the portions supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, since the post-rotation pawl member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation pawl member 620, a similar effect is produced. That is, from the fixed state (see FIG. 135(b)) to the released state (see FIG. 13
4(a)), the post-rotation pawl member 640 can be displaced in a direction that widens the angle between the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation pawl member 640 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb. It is said that

Therefore, compared to the amount of displacement of the pre-rotation claw member 620, the amount of displacement of the game board 13 pushed out by the post-rotation claw member 640 can be suppressed, so the game board at the locations supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be suppressed. 13 can be suppressed from shifting in the front and rear positions. As a result, game board 1
The load applied to 3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, the relationship between the panel support device 600 disposed on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are shown in FIG. 86 CXXXVI-
It is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 8010 along the line CXXXVI. In addition, in FIGS. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape, and the front frame 14 is illustrated in a closed state.

Further, FIG. 136 shows the released state of the board support device 600, FIG. 137 shows the fixed state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 138 shows the board support device 600 moved at a predetermined angle (approximately 25 ) The rotated state is shown in FIG. 139, and the state immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed is shown in FIG. be done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the panel support device 600 and the opening/closing regulating portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. In addition, for ease of understanding, FIGS. 136 and 1
138 and 139, the opening/closing regulating portion 159, which is viewed in cross section at 37, is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the panel support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136), interference between the opening/closing regulating portion 159 and the panel support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operating section back member 155 above the opening/closing regulating section 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13
When the front frame 14 is removed, it is allowed to close the front frame 14, but when the game board 13 is placed, closing the front frame 14 is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening/closing regulating portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, by arranging the game board 13 on the back side compared to the position when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, interference between the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 above the opening/closing regulating part 159 is reduced. is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board support device 600, the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG.
38), the opening/closing regulating portion 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the panel support device 600.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the front rotational claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation direction of the front rotational claw member 620 is affected by the action of the regulating rod 615. (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and rotational direction of the pre-regulation claw member 630 (clockwise direction in FIG. 138).
As described above, it is difficult to apply a normal load because the reaction force becomes excessive when the counterclockwise direction is opposite to the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 134(b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, closing of the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is installed, there is a risk that the lower end of the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side extension plate 621c will come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The effect of regulating the closing of the frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is in the state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the opening/closing regulating portion 159 , and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interferes with each other.

Further, in this state, when trying to rotate the front rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is caused by the action of the regulating rod 615. direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and rotation direction of the pre-regulation claw member 630 (FIG. 13).
8 (counterclockwise direction) is never in the opposite direction, and it can be easily pushed in with a normal load, as described above (see FIG. 135(a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG.
Since the front frame 14 can be kept in a fixed state, it is permissible to close the front frame 14.

140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. Note that FIGS. 140 and 141 show a state in which the ball firing unit 112a and the cover member that closes the back side of the back pack 92 are disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball firing unit 112a will be explained with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142(a) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 142(b) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a.
is a rear perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a. FIGS. 143(a) and 143(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143(a) shows a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143(b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then reversed. . That is, in FIG. 143(b),
Only the back side of the ball receiving member 731 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball firing unit 112a includes a base member 710 made of metal or die-casting, and a base member 711 assembled to the base member 710, with the right side of the resin base member 711 as the center. A closed state in which the front surface of the base member 710 is partially covered (see FIG. 142(a)) and an open state in which the front surface of the base member 710 is opened (see FIG. 23(a)).
A ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721 rotatably supported by a shaft between the
The main preparation is as follows.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721, and is secured to the base member 710 with an elastically deformable hook or the like, and is disposed on the front side of the base member 710, and is made of synthetic resin or the like. and a firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, a firing rail 730 that guides the ball P8 launched by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and a ball receiving member 731 for regulating the posture. A plurality of fastening portions 716 are provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the front side at an intermediate position of a bulging portion 716a that bulges out in a straight line from the base member 710 toward the front side, and into which screws for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 are screwed. It mainly includes a mounting hole 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719.

The base member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 at the right corner through which the rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted, and a locking portion 7 that is bored on the opposite side of the receiving portions 712 in the left-right direction so as to be able to lock the hook portion 723.
13, a protruding portion 714 protruding from the front side adjacent to the right side of the locking portion 713, and a protruding portion 714 disposed opposite to the suction force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see FIG. 142(a)). It mainly includes a defect determination convex portion 715 that is provided in a convex manner.

The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see FIG. 142(a)), and is located inside the left side of the ball passage opening 724 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state. An opposing plane 714a that is arranged to face the side surface 724c and is parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a surface that is left and right opposite to the opposing plane 714a and is inclined toward the right toward the back side. It mainly includes a surface 714b.

When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the malfunction determination protrusion 715 does not come into contact with the suction force generation solenoid 741, but when the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened ( When the cover member 721 is floating above the cover member 721, the cover member 721 comes into contact with the cover member 721 and has a convex height that restricts rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosely fastened, and by creating a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, the store clerk can use the suction force. It can be noticed that the connection of the generation solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, before a malfunction occurs in the ball firing unit 112a, it is possible to perform repair (fastening and fixing the attraction force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening).

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably supported by a shaft on the base member 711;
Switching controlled to change the state between a regulation state that restricts the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721 from flowing down, and a permissible state that allows the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) to flow down to the launch rail 730. It mainly includes a device 740.

The cover member 721 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material into a cup shape with an open back side (the front side in the drawing in the orientation shown in FIG. 143(a)), and is a pair of covers that are loosely fitted into the receiving portions 712 of the base member 711. A rod-shaped portion 722, a hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the opposite left and right sides of the rod-shaped portion 722, and a ball P at a position displaced from the hook portion 723 toward the rod-shaped portion 722.
8 (see FIG. 144) and a ball passage opening 724 that is bored in the front-rear direction and has a size that allows the ball to pass through. A cutting metal member 725 and a shaft rod portion 72 that pivotally supports a ball guide arm member 742 of a switching device 740.
6 and are mainly provided.

The switching device 740 includes an attraction force generating solenoid 741 which is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and a synthetic resin member whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft portion 726.
A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not 41 generates magnetic force, and a sheet metal member that is fixed to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the attraction force generating solenoid 741. A metal plate 743 , a guide slope 744 that is a part of the ball guide arm member 742 and is arranged below the ball passage opening 724 and slopes downward as the distance from the ball passage opening 724 increases; It is extended by a distance that can accommodate the ball P8, and the extended end is connected to the shaft portion 72.
It mainly includes a regulating protrusion 745 that protrudes toward the ball passage opening 724 side along a plane orthogonal to 6 .

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage through which the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be guided, and is a drop plate portion 724 that slopes downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotation radial direction.
a, and a rib portion 724b that is disposed oppositely above the flow plate portion 724a and extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib shape, and whose extending tip surface slopes downward as it goes toward the back side.
A left inner surface 724 that is connected to the left end of the downstream plate portion 724a and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction.
It mainly comprises c. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passing opening 724 flows down toward the back and to the right.

When the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passing opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142(a)), the ball P8 comes into contact with the sloped surface 714b, and the slope of the sloped surface 714b It flows down to the back side while shifting to the right along the . Therefore, ball P8
flows down in a manner that separates from the cutting metal member 725 in the left and right direction, so that the cutting metal member 7
Even though the ball P8 is disposed in such a manner that it projects inside the ball passage opening 724, it is possible to prevent the ball P8 from colliding with the cutting metal member 725.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member that extends from an intermediate position of the base member 710 toward the left side so as to be inclined upward. Near the lower end of the rail member, the ball P8 (Fig. 14
Ball receiving members 731 are arranged at intervals shorter than the diameter of the ball bearing members 731 (see 4).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 is parallel to the elongated direction, and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a formed as a long hole along the direction and through which a fastening screw passes.
Like the bulging part 716a, it is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the long hole direction of the through hole 731a), and has a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging part 716a and a bulging part of the bulging part 716a. A regulation groove 731b formed with a groove depth slightly larger than the protrusion height is provided.

When fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 to the base member 710, when selecting which position of the through hole 731a should be fastened and fixed in conjunction with the fastening portion 716, the ball receiving member 731 should be fastened and fixed to the bulging portion 710.
6a can be slid along the straight line in which the ball P8 (Fig. 14
4)) can be adjusted in its standby position (distance from the plunger 702). Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the operating handle 51
(see FIG. 86) can be easily adjusted.
Note that since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The launch rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, and includes a rolling plate portion 730a that is formed in a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape and extends diagonally upward to the left; It has mounting plate parts 730b and 730c hanging from the front and rear sides of the plate part 730a, and the mounting plate part 73
It is attached to the base member 710 with screws inserted into a plurality of attachment holes 732 (two in this embodiment) formed in 0b and 730c.

In addition, a rail guard 733 made of synthetic resin is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate parts 730b and 730c, and prevents noise and vibration caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball. suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and has a ball P8 (FIG. 146(b)).
) is configured to guide the ball P8 upward by contacting the front and rear two locations on the circumferential surface of the ball P8.

FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c) are front views of the ball firing unit 112a showing the ball sending status by the ball sending device 720 in chronological order. Note that from FIG. 144(a) to FIG.
In (c), illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 144(a), the switching device 740 is in the regulated state (the power supply to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). When this is the case, the regulating protrusion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the open end on the back side of the ball passing opening 724, and comes into contact with the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passing opening 724, thereby preventing the ball from flowing down from the open end on the back side. is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the permissible state (the state in which power is supplied to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protrusion 745 is retracted above the ball, and the flow restriction of the ball P8 is released, so that the ball P8 flows into the upper part of the guide slope 744. In this state, the ball P8 comes into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711, thereby restricting further flow down, and stays on the upper surface of the guide slope 744.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulating state again, so that the ball P8 riding on the guide slope 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. be done. Thereby, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the slope of the guide slope portion 744, and is guided to the firing rail 730.

Note that the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144(c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144(a), so even in the state shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball entering the ball passage opening 724 The flow of water is regulated. Therefore, balls can be supplied to the launch rail 730 one ball at a time. Note that the balls P8 entering the ball passing opening 724 are balls supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 86), and are balls stored in the upper tray 17. be.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a falling plate portion 724a. A lower blade part 725b having an upper side that almost runs along the upper surface, and a notch with an acute angle at the tip formed between the lower blade part 725b and the same plate as the proximal plate of the lower blade part 725b. Upper blade part 72 extending from
5c is mainly provided.

The upper blade part 725c is formed such that its tip is inclined more toward the back side than the lower blade part 725b, and its lower side projects upwardly more than the flow plate part 724a. Note that the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c slopes downward toward the base end (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b slopes upward toward the base end (left side). That is, the upper blade part 725c and the lower blade part 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The cut between the upper blade part 725c and the lower blade part 725b is for cutting a thread member such as a tassel thread fixed to the ball. Next, referring to FIGS. 146 and 147, the sphere P
How the thread Y8 is treated when the thread Y8 is fixed to the thread Y8 and enters the thread will be explained.

FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 146(b) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a.
147(a) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 147(b) is a partial top view of the ball firing unit 112a as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 147(a). FIG. 148 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG.
FIG. 12a is a partial front view of the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62. In addition, FIGS. 146 and 14
7, illustration of some constituent members of the ball firing unit 112a is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 146(a) and 146(b), the ball P guided to the launch rail 730
8 remains in contact with the lower left edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146(a)), and from this state, current is applied to the firing solenoid 701, causing the plunger 702 to protrude vigorously. , a firing force is applied to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is launched along the firing rail 730 (see FIG. 147(a)).

Now, with one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8, launch the ball P8, and with the ball P8 in the playing area, move the other end of the thread Y8 that was left at hand and pull the thread Y8. It is known that a fraudulent act is known in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning hole by loosening the ball.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut using the momentum of the ball P8. To be more specific, when the ball P8 is placed in the firing standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the falling plate part 724a in a posture that is pulled to the right as it goes toward the back side. (See Figure 146(b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, it passes under the falling plate portion 724a and reaches the launch rail 730.
When the thread Y8 moves as it is pulled by the rolling ball P8, the middle part of the thread Y8 moves along the upper surface of the falling plate part 724a, so that the upper blade of the thread Y8 projects above the falling plate part 724a. It will enter below the portion 725c, and will enter into the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

While the player is holding the front end (other end) of the thread Y8, a load is applied to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 due to the firing of the ball P8, so that the thread Y8 is is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade part 725b and the upper blade part 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). Thereby, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning hole.

In addition, if the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that sufficient tensile force will not be applied to the thread Y8 and the thread Y8 will not be cut, but in that case, the ball P8 will not reach the play area and The ball flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged into the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 will not pass through the winning hole, so it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of fraudulent activity in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning hole.

Next, the presentation operation unit 1000 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the performance operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the performance operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operating device 800 is visible from the upper frame of the center frame 86, and other differences The configurations of are substantially the same.

A production operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is disposed in the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The production operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and a forward/backward movement unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100.

The advancing/retracting operation unit 900 moves the petal operating device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advancing/retracting operation, that is, the operation of advancing inward of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the third The petal operating device 800 is connected to one end, and the other end is connected to the petal operating device 800. The end of the arm gear 9 is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100.
A drive-side arm member 910 that rotates when the driving force of a drive motor 921 is transmitted through 24, and a drive motor 92 that generates a driving force that drives the drive-side arm member 910.
1, a transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and a transmission means 920 that slides in the left and right direction in conjunction with the rotational movement of the drive side arm member 910. A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930, a thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding operation of the slide plate 930, and a back plate 1100 and a petal operating device on the left and right opposite side of the drive side arm member 910. 800, and a driven side arm member 950 in the form of a long plate.

Next, the structure of the petal motion device 800 will be explained. FIG. 153 shows the petal motion device 80
154 is a sectional view of the petal operating device 800 taken along the CLIV-CLIV line in FIG. 153. Note that in FIG. 154, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated with imaginary lines.

The petal operating device 800 is configured such that members such as petals 802 are supported on a support base 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the supporting base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petal 802, etc., and although its overall shape is hidden behind other members and is not shown in the figure, it is made of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. The device includes a plate-shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side to a position on the right side of the upper end of the central body portion of the support base material 801, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 extends to the front side through a narrow gap formed in the support base material 801. A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protruding portion.

An opening 8 is located at a position slightly below and to the left of the central motor 804 in the central main body portion of the support base material 801.
01P is drilled, arranged on the right side of the opening 801P, and extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes,
A screw insertion part 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion part 801S, there is a detecting arc plate 88 of a loose fitting device 880, which will be described later.
A donut-shaped recessed portion 801D that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which 0d can pass.
(see FIG. 152) is formed.

The central motor 804 of the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed.
An oil damper 805 is fixed below from the front side (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening a vertically elongated, generally elliptical area at the center. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally elongated upper part that constitutes an upper end area and a generally U-shaped lower part that constitutes an area below the upper part.

In this embodiment, the supporting base material 801 as a whole has a shape that extends slightly vertically, but since the petal operating device 800 is arranged to be movable vertically as described later,
The operating space can be reduced if the support base material 801 is formed into a vertically elongated shape rather than horizontally elongated.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are connected to a second gear 830G and a third gear 810, respectively, which are arranged concentrically so as to overlap at the position of the opening 801P, as described later.
Since they are interlockingly connected (linked) to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, they can be placed at any position on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G without interfering with each other. They are arranged on the right side via the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, respectively (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by concentrating the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800, which is supported in an attitude slightly tilted toward the front, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from sagging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base material 801 and the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base material 801 from increasing, and The driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base material 801.

FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. Note that in FIGS. 155 and 156, illustration of the support base material 801 is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin and are molded to imitate the shape of one of the five separate petals that make up a hibiscus flower in its blooming state. It is formed as a member and includes a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back side.

157(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, flat plate member 803, and slide member 820, and FIG. 157(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, flat plate member 803, and slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front face shape extending in the radial direction in the arranged state, and is curved so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer periphery (Fig. 15
(see 4).

Irregular depressions and depressions including many wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the periphery also has an irregular shape when viewed from the front. The five petals 802 do not have exactly the same shape as each other, and there are slight differences in unevenness, etc., but they are formed into roughly the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer periphery has a specific color (red) that is darker without forming a particular boundary with the inner area. It is colored.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a threaded portion 802S that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape and has a threaded hole inside, at two locations: near the outer periphery on the rear side of each petal 802 and at the center in the radial direction. There is.

The petal 802 is located closer to the rear side portion 80 than the rear side portion 802a, which is located on the rounded tip side (counterclockwise side in front view, right side of the paper in FIG. 157(a)) from the position where the petal 802 is fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803.
The front side portion 802b, which is disposed on the sharp-tip shape side (clockwise side in front view, left side in FIG. 157(a)) from 2a, is disposed on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is arranged closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

The front side part 802b of each petal 802 is stacked on the front side of the rear side part 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the rear side part 802a is stacked on the back side of the front side part 802b of the other adjacent petal 802. The petals 802 are arranged so that their tips on the inner circumferential side are concentrated toward the same center.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side part 802a and the front side part 802b are shifted from each other in the front and back, so that the rear side part 802a and the front side part 802 at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175)
b can be placed in a positional relationship that overlaps the front and back, so that the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathered position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) becomes noticeable. be able to.

In the arranged state, the five petals 802 as a whole have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear side surface with a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the flat plate member 803 has the five petals 8
They are long plate-shaped resin members that are separated from each other and are fixed to the 02 respectively.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front face shape extending from the center to the outer circumferential side in a generally rectangular shape in the arranged state, and further has a shape in which the outer circumferential edge portion thereof extends forward.

Also, near the opening S1 (near the inner periphery) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state.
A pair of threaded portions 803S extending rearward in a cylindrical shape and having a threaded hole therein are integrally formed at positions separated in the circumferential direction (the lateral direction of the flat plate member 803).

The threaded portions 803S are formed on both side walls in the circumferential direction (lateral direction) of each flat plate member 803 in a substantially flush position, and furthermore, a pair of threaded portions are formed along the both side walls of the flat plate member 803. A slide rib 803a that is perpendicular to the straight line connecting 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearward from the rear surface of the flat plate member 803 extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the circumferential surface of the threaded portion 803S. As such, it is formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the threaded portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157(b), the rear side of each flat plate member 803 has internal screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the threaded portions 802S of the petals 802, and the petals 802 on the front side.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw insertion portion 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 has a corresponding screw insertion portion 8 of the petal 802.
02S is abutted from the front and screws are inserted from the rear, thereby fixing each flat plate member 803 to the corresponding petal 802, respectively.

158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. Note that in the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are appropriately referred to. A slit member 810 is arranged on the rear side of the flat plate member 803, as shown in FIGS. 155 and 156.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a plate-like member made of resin and has a front face shape in which five similar shaped parts are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is bored in the center part. As shown in FIG. 159, a generally cylindrical front circumferential wall portion 812 and rear circumferential wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend in both front and rear directions from the periphery of the circular opening 811.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 156. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 has cylindrical holes in the front and rear, at two adjacent locations out of five locations equally spaced in the circumferential direction and at one location in the middle of the three locations excluding those two locations. A screw-in part 813S that extends and has a screw hole inside is integrally formed, and the positioning boss 81
3a is extended. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer radial direction at five locations corresponding to the threaded portions 813S and the positioning bosses 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

The slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815, as shown in FIG. Each of the central slits 814 is formed to extend linearly further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, the center slit 81
4 extends along a direction D12 inclined at an angle θ11 (approximately 15° in this pachinko machine 8010) in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The both-side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight interval between them.

In this way, groups of three slits, the central slit 814 and the two-sided slits 815 on both sides thereof, are formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72° intervals). Note that each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) in front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In this embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost double-sided slit 815 in the set of three slits, that is, two corners on the small diameter side among the four corners of the three slits, are the double-sided slits. It has a generally rectangular shape and extends slightly in the direction of extension of 815 (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extending portion (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side ends of the flat plate in which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side ends of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815. is provided with a circular arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

As a result, the rigidity of the flat plate in which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed is enhanced by the arc plate 816. Therefore, the central slit 814 and both side slits 81
It is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate on which 5 is formed in the circumferential direction and the axial direction.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the central slit 814 and both side slits 815
The five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are arranged inwardly to accommodate the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815, since each of the five sets extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. , are arranged more densely, and this also allows the slit members 81
0 has been made more compact.

In other words, if five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are circular openings 811
In the case where it is arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 as described above, than when it is arranged and formed so as to extend radially along this radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11. In this case, the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 can be laid out more densely, and the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slide member 820 is arranged in the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. Slide member 8
As shown in FIG. 157, reference numeral 20 is a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, and the thickness is reduced at both ends of the slide member 820, and the tip is formed into a semicircular shape when viewed from the front. A central portion that is thicker than the production portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 formed in the extending portion, and a front view from the center of the slide member 820. It includes a guide pin 822 that is protruded from the side and inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 that is fixed so as to protrude from the center of the slide member 820 toward the back side and pass through it back and forth. .

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is arranged so that the extending direction and the longitudinal direction of the three slits, the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersect at right angles. and the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, in the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 810,
Threaded portion 803S of flat plate member 803 is inserted from the front side. In the fully fitted state, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes very slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and are screwed into the threaded portions 803S of the flat plate member 803 and fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is moved to the flat plate member 8 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween.
It is fixed to the rear side of 03. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is inserted almost along the corresponding outer edges of the both side slits 815 of the slit member 810. It is inserted without any gaps.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held in the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is held by the guide pin 8
The slide rib 803a restricts the slide movement so that the slide moves in a constant outward direction without rotating around the center 22.

160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and central motor 804, and FIG.
161(a) and 161(b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. Note that in FIG. 161(a), illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. In addition, Figure 16
0 and 161, reference is made to FIGS. 155 and 156 as appropriate.

A rotating plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached as described above. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disc having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side, and a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side of the rotary plate 830, and this peripheral wall
It is formed integrally with the rotary plate 830 so as to extend along the surface direction of the rotary plate 830 in a closed loop shape that is elongated when viewed from the front.

The extending height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extending height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The inner width of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight clearance of play. The ridge corner at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed to be rounded.

The guide rail 832 extends from a position in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831.
It extends clockwise in the front view along a direction approximately halfway between the tangent and the normal line of the pivot opening 831, and then extends in an arc shape further clockwise in the front view from the middle direction. It extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 while being curved (see FIG. 175(a)).

The circumferential wall of the guide rail 832 at the end on the side of the pivot opening 831, that is, at the end on the center side, is formed to be integrally continuous with the circumferential wall at the circumferential edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end thereof protrudes toward the front side from the front end of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and a total of five guide rails 832 are arranged at equal intervals around the pivot opening 831. It extends outward from the periphery in a spiral shape.

As shown in FIG. 161, on the rear side surface of the rotating plate 830, a second gear 830G is integrally formed, extending rearward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the shape of a peripheral wall and having teeth on its outer periphery. The second gear 830G is arranged to mesh with the first gear 804G and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 154, the rotary plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear end portions of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832, respectively (see FIG. 174(c)).

Since the outer circumferential surface of the rear circumferential wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, it is not linear but linear relative to the inner circumferential surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830. As a result, the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted onto the rear circumferential wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is smoothly rotatably supported.

As shown in FIG. 161(a), a second gear 830G is further provided on the rear side of the second gear 830G.
A third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically and arranged to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G, and the pivot opening 81
Around the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156), screw insertion holes 810b are provided at positions corresponding to the three screw insertion holes 813S in the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156), and screw insertion holes 810b are provided at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a. A positioning hole 810c is formed in each.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted onto the rear side peripheral wall part 813 of the slit member 810.
The positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 156) is inserted into the positioning hole 810c to determine the position, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 810b into the threaded part 813S (see FIG.
56)).

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G serves as a retainer to prevent the rotation plate 830 from coming off. is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to come off.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a central shaft rotation device 850 is disposed from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotation device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is loosely fitted to be rotatable around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG.
63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape with a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder cut away along the axial direction, and a shaft portion 852 of the shaft portion 852. The shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

The center portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a lumen portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 back and forth. Around the lumen part 856 on the front side of the flange 855, there are two front screw holes 857 on the left and right sides with the lumen part 856 in between, and a front screw part 857 having a screw hole inside. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore in the displaced position and is bored toward the back side, and two support protrusions 859 that are cylindrical and extend slightly short toward the front are each integrally formed. . The front end of the front threaded portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

The inner circumferential surface of the lumen part 856 has a columnar shape extending along the axial direction of the shaft part 852 so as to be parallel to two opposing locations, extending further rearward from the rear end of the shaft part 852, and extending into the interior. A rear screw portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Furthermore, a rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from both rear screw-in portions 853 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, an LED board 861 is mounted on the front side of the central shaft member 851.
is placed. The LED board 861 is a substantially disk-shaped board with a slightly smaller diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED board 861 at positions corresponding to the front threaded portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

Insert and position the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861, and insert the screw into the central shaft member 8 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861.
By screwing into the front screw part 857 of 51, the LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

In addition, an insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and has a size that allows the threaded portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 to be inserted therein.

On the front side of the LED board 861, as shown in FIG. L.E.
D865 are each fixed in position and emit light toward the front.

Near the outer periphery of the front and rear sides of the LED board 861, horizontal LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at multiple locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is supposed to be done. Note that the lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED board 861 are arranged concentrically and alternately with the forward-facing LEDs 865. A connector connecting portion 867 is arranged and fixed to the rear side of the LED board 861 so as to face rearward.

A center decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED board 861. Center decorative member 868
is made of a resin material that has a specific color (yellow) but is almost transparent, extends from a long plate-shaped base to the back side in a cylindrical shape, and has a screw hole in the center into which a screw can be inserted. A pair of threaded portions 869 are provided.

The threaded portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861. L.E.
The insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is inserted into the holding part 858 of the flange 855 with the D board 861 in between.
The center decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855 by abutting the threaded part 869 that has passed through from the front side, and by screwing a screw into the threaded part 869 from the back side of the flange 855. Thereby, the center decorative member 868 functions as a stopper for the LED board 861 to come off.

The loose fitting device 880 includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner circumferential surface with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer circumferential diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. a large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed from a flanged cylindrical shape and having an outer circumferential surface with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front side circumferential wall portion 812 of the slit member 810; It mainly includes a main body cylindrical member 883, which is a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882, and is rotatably fitted into the small diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter cylindrical member 882.

The main body cylindrical member 883 has integrally threaded parts 883S extending in a cylindrical shape from front to back and having a screw hole inside at two places out of four places equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical part. A positioning boss 883a is formed and extends from the tip edge of a location where the threaded portion 883S is not formed among the four locations described above.

The main body cylindrical member 8
83 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 has a rib-like projection in the outer radial direction with a projection length similar to that of the screw portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a at a circumferential intermediate position of the four corresponding locations, and a rib-shaped projection in the axial direction. A sliding rib 88 extending over the
3b is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 includes a decorative member 884 that is formed with a larger outer shape than the LED board 861 and covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149); A back cover 886 is fastened and fixed near the diameter, and forms a bottomless cup shape with the outer circumferential side rising up toward the front side from the fastened portion, and also contacts the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the back side and is fastened and fixed. , is arranged.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in this pachinko machine 8010) on the front and back surfaces, thereby giving the side surfaces a mirror finish. Therefore, for example, by reflecting the light from the horizontal LEDs 866 disposed on the back side of the LED board 861 near the outer periphery, a light emission effect can be performed.

The decorative member 884 is a member that produces light emission by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 disposed on the LED board 861, and has the shape of a hibiscus flower and transmits light in a specific color (red). a front side plate portion formed from a transparent resin material, and a rear side plate portion formed from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, the peripheral wall of which forms a disk shape on the back side thereof and which stands up on the back side. An opening 885 is formed in the central portion with a size that allows the central decorative member 868 to be inserted therethrough.

The main body cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is allowed to rotate relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G arranged on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a fourth gear 880G having a slightly smaller diameter than the third gear 810G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically.
It meshes with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that are rotatably supported by the support base 801 and mesh with each other.

One gear of the intermediate gear 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear that meshes with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G is the intermediate gear 8
08 in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and the pivot opening 888
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 880b are formed at positions corresponding to the two screw-in parts 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883, and positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a. There is.

The fourth gear 880G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G fitted onto the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and is positioned over a positioning boss with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. 883a (see FIG. 163) into the positioning hole 880c, and insert a screw (not shown) through the screw insertion hole 880b into the threaded part 883S (see FIG. 16).
(see 3).

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G acts as a retainer to prevent the slit from coming off. The member 810 is held by the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 so as not to come off.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d extending toward the back side in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. In the detection arc plate 880d, plates of the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d has a donut-shaped concave portion 80 in the assembled state (see FIG. 154).
1D (see FIG. 152), and is detected by a photocoupler type detection sensor 801C arranged to be able to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D. That is, in this embodiment, no matter which attitude the fourth gear 880G starts rotating, the detection arc plate 88
It is possible to detect the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0d (center angle 72°) (minimum angle 72°).
(2° detection can be performed, and rotation of 72° or more can be ensured by detection).

The assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be explained. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 on which the LED board 861 is fixedly arranged and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are fully inserted, their respective rear ends protrude slightly rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 that protrudes further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is attached to the supporting base material 801.
(see FIG. 152) for positioning, and insert the rear screw part 853, which also projects further rearward from the rear end of the shaft part 852, into the screw insertion part 801S of the support base 801. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting it into the insertion hole and fixing it with a screw.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the inner cavity 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to protrude forward from the support base 801, and as shown in FIG.
The rear side peripheral wall part 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted onto the outside, and the front side peripheral wall part 8 is fitted onto the large diameter cylindrical member 882.
12 is attached so that it fits externally.

At this time, the outer circumferential surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 has eight locations along the circumferential direction, including screw-in portions 883S,
Since the positioning boss 883a and the sliding rib 883b locally bulge out, the slit member 810 comes into linear contact with the inner circumferential surface of the rear peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810, not in a planar manner. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted onto the main body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, so that the slit member 810 is supported for smooth rotation.

FIG. 164 shows a petal operating device 800, a driving arm member 910, and a driven arm member 95.
165 is a front perspective view of the back plate 1100. FIG. The petal operating device 800 moves up and down (advances and retreats) by applying a load in the up and down direction from the driving arm member 910. In addition, in the explanation after FIG. 164, FIGS. 150 to 15
2 as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally elongated rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the innermost part of the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and is located at the lower left corner in front view. A support column 1110 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, a gear accommodating section 1120 that is recessed above the support column 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side, and a gear storage section 1120 that is aligned in the vertical direction at the left and right center position. A rail fixing part 1130 disposed in and a rail fixing part 1130
It mainly includes a support long hole 1140 that is formed as a long hole that slopes downward as it approaches the rail fixing part 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support column 1110 with the rail fixing part 1130 in between.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive side arm member 910,
In the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front end, there is a screw-in part 1111 which is a pair of holes arranged on the left and right and is formed so that a screw can be screwed into it, and a pair of upper and lower holes on the front side on the same plane as the tip edge of the screw-in part 1111. and a positioning boss 1112 extending to.

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a dogleg shape when viewed from the rear, and is circularly bored in the front-rear direction at one end and has a support column. 1110, a connecting convex portion 912 protruding from the front side in a stepped cylindrical shape at a position near one end of the elongated main body member; The petal operating device 800 is supported at the transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated hole shape from the bending point of the elongated main body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and at the other end of the elongated main body member. It mainly includes a support section 914.

The drive-side arm member 910 has an internal fitting convex portion 925 that is fitted into the transmission elongated hole 913 and a flange portion 926 that extends radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. Interlockingly, it rotates around the support column 1110.

The gear accommodating part 1120 is a recessed part in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is accommodated, and is composed of three circular recesses arranged in a row while slightly intersecting each other, and is arranged on the left end side and accommodates the motor gear 922. A first accommodating part 1121 and a second accommodating part 11 connected to the first accommodating part 1121
22, and a third accommodating part 112 which is disposed directly opposite to the first accommodating part 1121 with the second accommodating part 1122 in between and accommodates an arm gear 924 that is fitted to the drive side arm member 910.
3 and are mainly provided.

The rail fixing part 1130 is a part that supports the movement rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked one on top of the other and is supported so as to be able to slide up and down. It includes an insertion hole 1131 into which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the movement rail 1000R and positions the movement rail 1000R, and these are aligned vertically. placed on a line.
Due to the rigidity of the motion rail 1000R, the posture of the petal motion device 800 is maintained constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is a elongated hole that slidably supports the driven arm member 950, and is inclined at an inclination angle of approximately 50° when viewed from the front so as to descend toward the left. An extension wall 1141 is provided that extends to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven side arm member 950 is composed of a long bar-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the rear, and has one end protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the back side. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 that is slidably supported in the support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted into the supported convex portion 951, and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 while the collar is fitted into the support elongated hole 1140. As a result, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is made slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is made larger than the outer diameter of the supported elongated hole 114.
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, side base material 1000S, and second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, slide plate 930, and second effect member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is supported by the side base material 1000S so as to be slidable left and right through a plurality of supported long holes 931 (three in this embodiment) that are formed in the front and back direction in the form of long holes extending left and right, and It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the driving arm member 910 through a proximal elongated hole 932, which is provided on the left end and extends in the vertical direction and is bored in the front-rear direction, and is provided on the right end. It is connected to a second presentation member 940 through a distal end side insertion hole 933 that is bored in the front-rear direction.

The proximal elongated hole 932 has a stop part 932a formed at the upper end along a locus in which the connecting convex part 912 rotates around the support column 1110, and extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stop part 932a. It mainly includes a displacement part 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a cylindrical part arranged in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front on the left side of the back plate 1100 when viewed from the front, and has a threaded part 1151 at the tip into which a screw can be screwed. A fastening plate part 1001S, which is a plate-like member fastened and fixed to the support column part 1150, which is disposed at a position corresponding to the support column part 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. A support protrusion 1002S is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the back side in a positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement of the supported elongated hole 931, and a support protrusion 1002S is provided in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right corner in front view. Also, a shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second production member 940, an arcuate recess 1004S recessed in an arc shape co-centered with the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a center of the shaft support hole 1003S. A protruding strip 1005S protruding from the front side along an arc shape having the same center as
Mainly prepare for.

The support protrusion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar extends from the tip of the support protrusion 1002S.
and the support elongated hole 931, and in this state, a retaining screw is screwed into the tip of the support protrusion 1002S, thereby forming a part that supports the slide plate 930 in a slidable manner. Ru.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second presentation member 940, and the arcuate recess 1004S and the protruding portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational movement of the second presentation member 940. This is the part that Note that the protruding portion 1005S is formed at a protruding height such that it does not come into contact with the second presentation member 940 when it is in the normal position, but can come into contact with it when it is displaced from the normal position or is bent. be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body whose lower end is bifurcated and whose upper end is formed in a circular shape centered on the shafted support 941, and has a main body portion whose lower end is bifurcated and whose upper end is formed into a circular shape centered on the shafted support portion 941. A shafted support portion 941 that is protruded in a cylindrical shape and is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 1003S with a collar in between, and an auxiliary protrusion that is disposed close to the shaft supported support portion 941 and is provided in a cylindrical shape to the rear side. part 942 and
Mainly equipped with

The shafted support portion 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar, which has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and has a screw into which a screw is screwed at the tip. An entry portion 941a is provided (see FIG. 152). The shafted support portion 941 connects to the shaft support hole 1003 with the collar in between.
When a screw is screwed into the threaded portion 941a with a disk-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S arranged at the tip thereof, the lid member 94
5 acts as a stopper. Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is inserted into the distal end insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the distal end, thereby preventing it from coming off the slide plate 930. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second presentation member 940 are interlocked by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the distal end side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced near the center of the width of the circular concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the circular concave portion 1004S. Thereby, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary protrusion 942 contacts the arcuate recess 1004S and generates resistance, thereby suppressing the bending deformation.

This will be explained with reference to FIG. 165. The back plate 1100 includes three threaded portions 1161 into which screws can be inserted when the plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921 is fastened;
A detection sensor 1162 that detects a flange portion 926 extending radially outward within a predetermined angle range from the arm gear 924, and a collar that guides a coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800 are rotatably attached to the shaft. A shaft support 1163 to be supported, a cover support part 1164 arranged in a triangular shape when viewed from the front so as to be able to support the board cover 1000C at the lower right side of the long support hole 1140, and a board cover 10 arranged close to the cover support part 1164.
It mainly includes a wire stopper 1165 that is hidden in front view in 00C, and a threaded part 1166 into which a screw for fastening the board cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes threaded portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the board cover 1000C are screwed. The screw part 1006S is arranged with a slight distance from the second effect member 940 disposed at the end of movement in the movement direction of the second effect member 940 (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary protrusion 942 may break due to long-term use,
Even if the portion that restricts the rotation of the second production member 940 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is missing,
The screw portion 1006S can restrict displacement of the second effect member 940.

In this way, the board cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to each of the side base material 1000S and the back plate 1100, which are stacked in front and back and are fastened and fixed to each other. 1000C, side base material 1000S and back plate 11
00 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easier to suppress vibrations and displacements of the board cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S even when the heavy device called the petal operating device 800 is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910. I can do it.

Next, referring to FIGS. 168 to 173, the elevating and lowering operations of the petal operating device 800 by the advancing/retracting unit 900 will be explained. FIG. 169 is a front view of 1100, FIG.
71 and FIG. 173 are rear views of the petal motion device 800 and the forward/backward motion unit 900.

Note that FIGS. 168 and 169 illustrate a state in which the driving arm member 910 is disposed at the upper end of the movement range, and FIGS. 170 and 171 illustrate the connecting convex portion 912 of the driving arm member 910 (see FIG. 164 ) is arranged at a connecting position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the proximal elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910
The figure shows a state in which is placed at the lower end of the movement range.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, when the drive-side arm member 910 is disposed at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the drive-side arm member 910 is connected to the internal fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 151) and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when starting the drive motor 921, the inner fitting protrusion 9
Since there is a range in which only the drive motor 25 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 maintains its posture (a range in which it spins idly), the resistance at the time of starting the drive motor 921 can be reduced.

In FIGS. 170 and 171, compared to the states shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second presentation member 940 is maintained. That is, when the driving arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal operating device 800 operates before the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

From FIGS. 170 and 171, in the range of FIGS. 172 and 173, it can be visually recognized that the petal operating device 800 and the second presentation member 940 are interlocked by the driving side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 being interlocked. can be done.

Here, by moving the second presentation member 940 in such a manner that it extends toward the position where the petal operation device 800 was originally placed, it is as if the second presentation member 940 were moved to the petal operation device 800.
It can be visually recognized as if it is operating in accordance with 00.

Next, the collection and distribution rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 will be explained. 174(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174(b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174(c) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800. 174(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 175(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 175(b) is a front view of the rotating plate 830.
175(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 175(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176(b) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800.
176(c) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176(c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 with the central axis rotating device 850 omitted, and FIG. 176(d) is a front view of the petal operating device 800. 810 and a front view of the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 177(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 177(b) is a front view of the rotating plate 830.
177(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 177(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178(b) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800.
is a front view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178(c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 with the central axis rotation device 850 omitted, and FIG. 178(d) is a front view of the petal operating device 800. 810 and a front view of the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 179(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 179(b) is a front view of the rotating plate 830.
179(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 179(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operating device 800 is lowered by the lifting operation and is at the lowest position, it moves from the initial position (gathering position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to FIGS. 176 and 177.
The expansion operation (first operation) is performed through the expansion position shown in FIG. The structure is such that it can perform the operation (third operation) and return to the initial position (gathering position).

In the initial position (assembled position), as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide member 820
The slide pin 823 (see FIG. 157) is inserted into the central slit 81 in the slit member 810.
As shown in FIG. 174 and FIG. located in a cluster that collectively constitutes a hibiscus flower in bloom.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (gathering position) as described above, the central motor 804 causes the first
When the gear 804G is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view as shown by arrow A9 in FIG.
0 is rotationally driven in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear as shown by an arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, since the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall part 812 of the slit member 810 through the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance, it can be easily moved around the front peripheral wall part 812 with a small torque. Can be rotated. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted onto the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, as described above, the slit member 810 is Since it is braked in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, it is held so that it cannot rotate with a torque small enough to initially move the rotary plate 830 described above.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially the rotating plate 804G is rotated.
30 is rotated as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177).

When the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 175(a), the guide rail 832 on the front side rotates counterclockwise in the front view as indicated by the arrow A11.
Accordingly, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of pushing it outward along the radial direction while being guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is moved by the slit member 81 as shown in FIG. 174(d).
Since the slide pin 823 is regulated by the center slit 814 of 0, the slide pin 823 is linearly guided and moved from the inner end to the outer side along the center slit 814.

At this time, as the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, some torque is applied to the slit member 810, but this torque is exceeded by the braking force of the oil damper 805. While the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state, the slide pin 823 moves into the center slit 8 as the rotating plate 830 rotates.
14 to the outside in a straight line.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 begin an expanding operation in which they expand radially outward from the gathered position. In this expansion operation, the slit member 8
As described above, the ten central slits 814 extend along the direction D12 that is inclined at an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, as shown in FIG. A relatively large load will be applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward, but on the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 will be relatively fast due to this inclination.

That is, by tilting the central slit 814 counterclockwise in front view, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, thereby making it possible to more efficiently expand the petals 802.

Here, for example, if it is assumed that there is no inclination and the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 will be relatively small compared to the above case, but the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and furthermore, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined clockwise in the front view with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. In both cases, the decline will be even more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the center end along the direction D15 between the tangent and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. , after that, it extends outward while curving in an arc further clockwise in front view from the direction D15, and has a shape that extends outward in a spiral shape as a whole with the five guide rails 832. .

The more the guide rail 832 tilts clockwise in front view, the more the slide pin 82
As the load on 3 becomes smaller, the moving speed becomes slower. Furthermore, the guide rail 832
The more the slide pin 823 curves in an arc shape toward the clockwise side in front view from the direction D15, the more the slide pin 823
Both the reduction in the load on the vehicle and the reduction in movement speed become more noticeable.

That is, in the case of the central slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 was relatively large and the moving speed was relatively fast by tilting it in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereas the guide In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in front view and further curving in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side of the rotating plate 830 is formed into a groove shape, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, there is a risk that the slide pin 823 will deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. For this reason, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 passes through it, there is less risk of deviation.For this reason, it is possible to increase the moving speed of the slide pin 823 while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. It is composed of

In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 with the guide rail 832, defects such as deviation are prevented and reliability of power transmission is ensured.
14 to increase the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

After this, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the slide pin 823 is inserted into the central slit 81.
When reaching the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement in step 4 (see FIG. 178(d)), the five sets of petals 802 are radially expanded to the fully open position, and the expanding operation is completed.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move radially and discretely to positions that are continuously visible outside the decorative member 884 when viewed from the front. A petal 802 is arranged at. As a result, compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visible due to the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 174(b)), the flower can be seen integrally like a larger hibiscus flower (see FIG. 174(b)). 178(b)).

In this way, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and can no longer move outward, the slide pin 823
is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814, the rotary plate 830 cannot be rotated any further in the same direction by a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805.
Therefore, by stopping the operation of the central motor 804, the fully open state after the expansion operation is completed can be maintained.

After the above expansion operation is completed, rotational power is transmitted from the central motor 804 in the same direction as before to the rotating plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction in front view as shown by the arrow A12 in FIG. 178(d) together with the rotary plate 830. In this manner, after the expansion operation, the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a front view in a fully opened state, as shown by arrow A13 in FIG. 178(b).

At this time, if the center motor 804 is not stopped after the expansion operation and the rotational power is continued to be applied to the rotary plate 830, the expansion operation can be immediately continued from the rotation operation to the rotation operation without a pause. It can be migrated.

When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a front view in a fully open state as shown by arrow A13,
The decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) as shown by arrow A14 in FIG. 178(b). Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 884
Since the amount of movement (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotational speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotational speed.

After the above rotation operation is completed, the first gear 804G is operated by the central motor 804 in the opposite manner as before.
When rotated clockwise in the rear view as shown by arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b), while the slit member 810 is braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, first only the rotary plate 830 is rotated (see FIG. 179(b)). In b), as shown by arrow A15, it is rotated in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, thereby performing a converging operation in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned expanding operation.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement, to the inner end, which is the inner limit of movement in the central slit 814, and at the same time, the five sets of petals 802 move from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 at the center. They gather toward the target, return to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, return to the gathering state, and complete the gathering operation.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. The first gear 804 is activated again and the central motor 804 is activated again.
When G is rotated clockwise in the rear view as shown by arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b), the petal 802
, rotate clockwise in a front view in a concentrated state, as shown by arrow A16 in FIG. 174(b).

When the petals 802 rotate in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front in a concentrated state as shown by arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) as shown by arrow A17 in FIG. 174(b). Rotate to . Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 884
Since the amount of movement (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotational speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotational speed.

From this gathering operation to rotational operation, by controlling the central motor 804 as described above,
It may be possible to stop once and then shift after a pause, or it may be possible to shift immediately without a pause.

Here, in this embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected when the detection arc plate 880d passes the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), so there is no need to control the rotation angle of the central motor 804. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether the petal operation device 800 is performing a rotation operation.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage section 145 whose four sides are closed by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the ninth embodiment has been described. The unit 9140 has a notch 9145 in a wall portion forming a foul ball passage portion 9145.
b is formed, and the sheet metal member 9150 is configured to protrude along the notch 9145b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183.

FIG. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment, the passage forming unit 9140 has a different internal configuration of the foul ball passage part 9145, and a lower end and front part of the foul ball passage part 9145. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end of the door-side lower plate passage 9142, the shape of the lower end of the front door-side lower plate passage 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage section 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the back side in the lower curved inner part of the S-shaped path SL2. . The sheet metal member 9150 covers the cutout 9145b from above, and includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the top to the top of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the concave direction end of the S-shaped path SL2,
The depth of the recess is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 comes into contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) that is protruded from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) toward the back side, and the upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 comes into contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) that protrudes from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91). Constructed to withstand loads.

This thin plate blade part 9153 passes a thread Y8 through the foul ball passage part 9145 and pulls or loosens the thread Y8, thereby preventing fraudulent manipulation of the balls inside the gaming area and obtaining fraudulent profits. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage section 9145. Here, we will explain possible fraudulent acts.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 148. As described above, the ball firing unit 112a of the eighth embodiment
A cutting metal member 725 is disposed in order to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. This cutting metal member 725 is a member that uses the momentum of the ball to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball, but if the momentum of the ball is weak, the thread Y8 will be cut. Sometimes the ball was fired without any warning.

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, and is discharged to the lower tray 50. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

On the other hand, if we consider, for example, the case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P fixed to one end of the thread Y8
8 is launched weakly, and in a state where the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball socket 146, the thread Y9
When the ball P9 fixed to the other end of the ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the thread Y8 is placed on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the firing solenoid 701 side), so that the ball P9 is moved with force. Even if it is launched, the thread Y8 will not be cut by the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is launched with force, the ball P9 will reach the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The ball P8 launched in advance is in the foul ball passage section 1.
45, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, by grabbing the ball P8 stored in the lower tray 50 and moving the ball P8, a person committing fraud can pull or loosen the thread Y8, and thereby move the ball P9 into the winning slot. 63 (see Figure 2), etc., repeatedly, resulting in fraudulent profits being obtained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a fraudulent act is carried out using the thread Y8 with the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends as described above, a thin plate blade is provided in the foul ball passage section 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when the person committing the fraudulent act pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 is rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the thread Y8 and allowing the thread Y8 to be cut at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in this embodiment, a cutout 9145 that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed.
b is formed closer to the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side, so that the thread Y8 is placed inside the notch 9145b when the thread Y8 is pulled. , and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance force against upward load by contacting the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, from the thread Y8 to the thin plate blade part 915
Most of the load applied towards Y8 can be used to damage yarn Y8.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the recess depth of the notch 9145b is approximately the radius Ra of the ball P8, so the ball P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. This can prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, thereby improving the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is arranged lower than the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged by the discharged ball. In other words, the person who cheats is afraid that the cheating will be discovered, so the ball P
After holding the ball P8, keep the ball P8 close to your body (for example,
It is easy to commit fraudulent acts such as pulling or loosening the thread 8 by keeping it in a pants pocket (such as in a pants pocket). In that case, the state in which the thread Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower tray 50 (in contact with the upper surface) toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched through a position approximately a diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when the prize balls are paid out, the lower tray 5
When the ball ejected to the bottom plate 50 collides with the lower plate 50 and bounces around, the ball steps on the thread Y8 arranged on the front side of the ball guide opening 53, or hits the thread Y8, and bounces around the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1). ) flows down to the right and flows down through the bottom opening located behind the ball removal lever 52. That is, by arranging the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 above the lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 (by raising the upper limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower tray Passage section 9
The possibility that the ball discharged from 142 to the lower tray 50 will come into contact with the thread Y8 and damage the thread Y8 can be increased, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

Thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a which is inclined downward toward the right is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it easy to impart rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower tray 50 via the front door side lower tray passage section 9142.

As a result, the thread Y8 is
You can direct the ball towards. That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcefully impart a rightward velocity component (toward the foul ball passage section 9145 side) to the balls ejected to the lower tray 50 along the front-rear direction, so that among the ejected balls, It is possible to increase the proportion of balls stepping on or hitting the thread Y8.

In addition, fourthly, in this embodiment, the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 is formed by the ball guide opening 5.
The lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 occupies the remaining area (the left and right sides of the ball guide opening 53 occupies an area of approximately 1/3 of the width dimension), and a riding restriction step portion 9053a is formed at the boundary thereof.

As shown in FIG. 180, the climbing restriction stepped portion 9053a is formed between the right end (right end side) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as the lower bottom of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the far end portion disposed on the right side of the right inclined surface 9142a. It is configured as a flat part that connects the left end (left end side) of the lower bottom near the exit of the ball passage part 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the climbing restriction step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 allows the front door lower plate passage 91
42 and the foul ball passage section 9145 are communicated with each other. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 can be caused to flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, it is possible to easily bring the ball closer to the thread Y8.

Note that the vertical width of the climbing restriction step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.
Thereby, it is possible to restrict the ball that has rolled through the foul ball passage section 9145 and has come into contact with the riding restriction step section 9053a from riding up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the climbing restriction stepped portion 9053a is a part that allows the ball to pass in the left-right direction in the space V9 in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts it in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage section 145 whose four sides are closed by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 10140 is configured in such a manner that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming a foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 extends along the notch 10145c. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186.

184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. 184 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed diagonally from the top right, FIG. 185 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed diagonally from the top left, and FIG. 186 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed diagonally from the top left. A state viewed diagonally from below is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage section 10145.

That is, the foul ball passage section 10145 is a notch 10 that is recessed from the front side end of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the upper curved inner part of the S-shaped path SL2.
145c. The sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending toward the front side so as to cover the lower part of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the ends of the S-shaped path SL2 in the concave direction, and the concave depth is approximately twice the radius (diameter) of the sphere (see FIG. 180). Ru. In addition, the notch 10145c is provided with a through hole that is bored in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate part 10145d below the rolling plate part 10145d through which the ball is guided to the passage part 145a. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

In this embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is disposed inside the notch 10145c and has an external shape in front view of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. Auxiliary convex portion 1 that protrudes from the side surface of the back side toward the back side.
Equipped with 4d2. Note that the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is omitted from illustration in FIG. 186.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (approximately the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180)), so that the length in the front-back direction where the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is the same as that of the sphere. The radius is approximately the radius Ra of P8. Therefore, the foul ball passage section 101
Since the balls flowing down the ball P8 can be prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade parts 10153 and 10154, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade parts 10153 and 10154 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8. Therefore, the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

The protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the back side as it goes toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (as it goes toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width of the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 (front-back width) is
The closer it is to 5a, the wider it becomes. As a result, the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a is transferred to the thin plate blade portion 1.
It becomes easier to insert the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 into the gap on the back side where the protruding tips 14d3 and 0153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion that protrudes from the back side edge of the notch 10145c toward the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 and the part constituting the bifurcated blade part, the first thin plate blade part 10153
It extends from the right end of the front side edge to the left in a slightly upwardly sloping manner. As a result, an acute-angled recess 1015 with an acute deep recessed portion is provided between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154.
5 is formed.

Note that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members disposed for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute angle recess 10155 is arranged on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front side of the back side edge of the notch 10145c. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, the thread Y8 is allowed to enter the acute angle recess 10155, and the thread Y8
can be easily damaged.

In addition, since the second thin plate blade part 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged higher than the first thin plate blade part 10153, the thread Y8 that is pulled diagonally downward to the front side by the person who commits the fraud. can easily enter the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155.

A plate-shaped portion connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is a rolling plate portion 10145d.
The foul ball passage section 10145 is configured to be in contact with the lower surface of the foul ball passage section 10145 and to withstand an upward load generated from inside the foul ball passage section 10145.

The extending end on the lower end side of the inclined plate part 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex part 14d2 are arranged to face opposite sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage part 10145 bends in opposite directions. Ru. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in opposite left and right directions.

For example, a person who commits a fraudulent act may release the ball P8 that has come out of his hand and try to avoid the detection of his fraudulent act by allowing the ball P8 to flow backward through the foul ball passage section 10145 and be ejected through the playing area. However, according to the present embodiment, a load is applied to the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 in opposite directions to the left and right at the lower end of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the ball P8 flowing backward gets caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and remains there.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 remain inside the foul ball passage section 10145, and the thread Y8 remains inside the foul ball passage section 10145.
By lengthening the time that 8 is exposed in the gaming area, fraudulent activity can be discovered sooner.

Note that an adhesive member (glue, glue, etc.) may be placed in the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that has arrived at the hand of the cheater is cut, the thread will be glued to the adhesive member disposed in the acute-angled recess 10155, and the ball P9 will be in the gaming area. Since the thread is not ejected from the thread and remains in place, it is possible to hasten the discovery of fraud using the thread Y8.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball (foul ball) whose launch strength is weak and does not reach the game area is ejected to the lower tray 50, but the tray passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment A foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the tray passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is made of resin material so that it has the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. a tip member 206 formed and disposed proximate to the ball firing unit 112a;
2a, and a guide member 2062b that is formed up to near the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship that has a gap V11 having a width that allows the ball to flow down between the tip member 2062a and the guide member 2062a.

A foul ball passage 2062c is formed downstream of the gap V11 and communicates with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed at the right corner inside the main body side upper tray passage section 161. Foul ball passage 2
062c is formed with a width slightly larger than that through which one ball can pass, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above it.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main body side upper plate passage part 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower plate passage part 162 is disposed in the above embodiment, and the main body side lower plate passage part 162 is moved to the left. Formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are supplied to the upper tray 17 exclusively via the upper tray passage section 161 on the main body side. When the number of balls in the upper tray 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown), which is disposed on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 and protruding inside the ball flow path, is turned on by the load of the balls, and the dispensing device 133 is configured to stop discharging the ball.

That is, in the present embodiment, the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c also passes through the dispensing device 133 (
The balls discharged from the ball (see FIG. 87) are also supplied to the upper tray 17. Therefore, as described above, by gluing balls to both ends of the thread Y8 and passing one ball through the foul ball passage 2062c, the thread Y8
When considering the fraudulent act of letting a ball enter the gaming area along the foul ball path 2062c,
By applying the discharged balls to the thread Y8, the effect of damaging the thread Y8 can be produced regardless of the degree of accumulation of balls on the upper tray 17. Thereby, the thread Y8 can be easily cut at an early stage.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of outer rail 2062. In addition, in FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball prevention member 68 disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 will be referred to as appropriate.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fixed to the game board 13 with long metal screws B11 in such a manner that the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is placed on the front side.

Specifically, on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68, the guide member 2062b is hollow. A support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed in the cavity, which projects in a cylindrical shape from the back side of the guide member 2062b toward the front side, and has a threaded groove formed in the inner wall thereof into which the long screw B11 is threaded. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is attached to the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68 is placed in front of the closing plate 2062b4.
With b1 in contact, the elongated screw B11 is inserted into a through hole previously drilled as a mounting hole in the base member 68b1 and a through hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 in alignment with the through hole. is inserted through the guide member 2062b, and in this state is screwed into the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, whereby the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

Note that the upper surface and left surface of the closing plate 2062b4, which are the sides that contact the guide member 2062b, are formed so that the shape matches the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the front side surface in FIG. 189) is recessed to the extent that the guide member 20
It is formed as an inclined surface having the same slope as the increasing slope portion 2062d of 62b.

The increasing slope portion 2062d has a slope that slopes downward as it approaches the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface of the guide member 2062b that constitutes the outer frame of the game area. That is, the gradient increasing section 206
A straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a side along the plane 2d is located below the upper end of the surface (upper surface) that constitutes the outer frame of the play area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, the line L11 It intersects with the tip member 2062a at about 1/3 lower side).

With this configuration, when shooting a ball toward the game area, the slope increasing section 20
62d is retracted from the path of the ball, making it possible to avoid collision between the lower tip of the gradient increasing portion 2062d and the ball. On the other hand, when the ball that did not reach the game area flows backward, the upper end of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so the ball moves across the gap V11 from side to side. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball passes through the tip member 2062a and returns to the ball firing unit 112a side.

Between the front side surface 2062d1 of the gradient increasing portion 2062d and the closing plate 2062b4,
A cut 206 with a width (approximately 2 mm in this embodiment) that is smaller than the diameter of the ball and that allows the thread to enter.
It is recessed toward the back side to a position where 2b1 can be formed. Note that the notch 2062b1 is formed at a location where the path of the ball hit into the game area and the foul ball path 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side when viewed from the front includes, on the front side of the side surface 2062d1,
A semicircular cutout 2062b3 is provided on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 that is screwed into the support cylindrical part 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the cut 2062b1 is formed, so that, similarly to the method described above in the ninth or tenth embodiment, When a thread Y8 with balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c in a fraudulent act, the thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11.

That is, due to the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, when the thread Y8 is subjected to a load that is pulled at both ends, it is pressed against the long screw B11 located deep in the notch 2062b1 (see FIG. 190).
a)). In this state, the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, causing friction with the long screw B11, allowing the thread Y8 to be cut at an early stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. This can prevent the cut 2062b1 from being placed at the position where the shot ball contacts the outer rail 2062 (vertically below the center of the ball), so the cut 2062b1 can be prevented from colliding with the shot ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

In addition, a person who commits a fraudulent act by passing the string Y8, which has balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends, into the foul ball passage 2062c, must also pass the string Y8, which has balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends, into the foul ball passage 2062c. Since the end on the player's side (see FIG. 182) is pulled toward the front side to adjust the position of the ball P9 within the game area, the thread Y8 will be closer to the front side near the gap V11 closer to the player side. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c closer to the front side, it is possible to make it easier for the thread Y8 to enter the cut 2062c than when the cut 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

A button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion projecting downward is disposed in the cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pressed and operated with an extremely weaker load than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, the possibility that the button-type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes,
It is arranged so that it can be switched between N and OFF.

FIGS. 190(a) and 190(b) are partially enlarged front views of the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 190(a), the weight portion 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68
190(b), the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the weight portion 68a2 is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side due to the weight of the ball passing through the gate member 68a.
A state in which the opening/closing portion 68a1 side is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side is illustrated. Also,
In FIG. 190(a), the path of the thread Y8 used in the fraudulent act is illustrated for reference, and it is also illustrated that the button-type switch SW11 is turned on, and in FIG. 190(b), the button-type switch SW11 is turned on. It is illustrated that it is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), the return ball prevention member 68 provides only a slight resistance to the ball passing through, but provides enough resistance to stop the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not so. This is because the ball flows away due to its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening/closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. 190(b), the ball flows away immediately. Since the state shown in 190(a) is restored, next, the foul ball path 20
This is because the state shown in FIG. 190(a) can be restored by the time the ball is guided to 62c (0.6 seconds at the earliest).

On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 provides a large resistance to objects that do not flow away, such as balls, such as objects that advance while filling the passage, such as endoscopes. This structure is a measure against fraudulent activity.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows, reaches the inside of the game area, and attempts to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, You can bend the nails (not shown) installed on the game board 13, grasp the ball and put it into the winning hole, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning hole, or emit a laser from the tip. (cutting nails, etc.) Possible fraud.

FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that in FIG. 191, the external shape of a device such as an endoscope that is illegally invaded is illustrated with imaginary lines.

In this embodiment, when the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the downward direction of the ball, it is advanced while rejecting the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68. Become. Here, when transitioning from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight 68a2 is repelled by the distal end of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 190(a), the weight 68a2 is connected to the distal end of the endoscope. The insertion portion (elongated flexible portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2, and
2 will be maintained in the pushed up state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to exclude the opening/closing part 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end of the endoscope from advancing further into the interior.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the interior, it is impossible to prevent unauthorized use as it is. On the other hand, in this case, the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, so the button type switch SW1
Fraudulent acts can be detected early by controlling the alarm to sound when the switch 1 remains OFF for a predetermined period of time.

Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button-type switch SW11 is turned OFF occurs only at the timing when a foul ball passes (see FIG. 190(b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned OFF.
N (see FIG. 190(a)), the period during which the ball payout from the payout device 133 is stopped can be made as short as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.
On the other hand, if the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 is stopped.

Note that the member disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c does not need to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be any other movable member. However, as in this embodiment, the return ball prevention member 68
By arranging this, if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side disposed on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it can be replaced at an early stage. As a result, compared to simply purchasing a replacement member for the return ball prevention member 68 as an option, it has the effect of being able to prevent fraudulent activities even before replacement, and it saves the trouble of forgetting and searching for the storage location. This effect can be achieved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire structure of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported on a fixed shaft (the support member 68b may not be provided).

Furthermore, if the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent and replaced, whether or not the above-mentioned fraud prevention effect is achieved depends on the degree of damage to the return ball prevention member 68. , the person committing the fraud cannot know whether an exchange has taken place or not, and
Even if the item has been replaced, the degree of damage is unknown, so it is possible to maintain deterrence against fraudulent activity.

Next, the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the petal operating device 800 rotates only in the assembled position or the fully open position, but the petal operating device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even in the expanding position. It consists of aspects. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. Figure 192
As shown in FIG. 2, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment.
887, and a regulating portion 2888 protruding from the extending tip of the flange portion 2887 toward the back side. The loose fitting device 2880 in this embodiment is the loose fitting device 8 in the eighth embodiment.
80, the only difference is the back cover 2886, and the other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880.

The regulating portion 2888 is provided to protrude to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 is provided to protrude to a position where it can come into contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which a single flange portion 2887 and a single restriction portion 2888 are arranged, but they may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886.
Next, the functions of the flange portion 2887 and the restriction portion 2888 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

193(a) and 193(b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIG.
4(a) and FIG. 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. In addition, in FIGS. 193 and 194, operation examples of the petal operation device 2800 are illustrated in chronological order, and FIGS. 193(a) and 194(a), FIG.
) respectively illustrate the state at the same time.

In addition, in FIGS. 194(a) and 194(b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are shown in cross section for convenience, and in the same cross section, the pair of threaded portions 2803 of the flat plate member 2803
S is viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petal 802 whose posture changes due to the action of the regulating portion 2888 is shown in outline (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194(a), a pair of threaded portions 2803S disposed inside the both-side slits 815 have a threaded portion on the opposite side centered on the threaded insertion portion 803H. It includes an inclined surface 2803T that slopes away from 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is approximately 30° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides.
Formed at an angle. The effect that the regulating portion 2888 has on the petal 802 will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the regulating portion 2888 is disposed radially outward along the moving direction of the front part 802b of the petal 802 ( The rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in front view), the regulating portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 come into contact with each other, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

With the petal 802 receiving a load from the regulating portion 2888, when the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 resists the load. Therefore, change your posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 that is fastened and fixed to the petal 802 is in the normal state shown in FIG. , as shown in FIG. 194(b), the central slit 814
It is also possible to change the posture to an inclined posture that is inclined with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. petal 8
At 02, posture changes occur to the extent possible.

As the slide member 2820 and the petal 802 change their postures in this way, the regulating portion 28
While the load from 88 is deflected, the resistance between slide member 2820 and slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a), the slide member 2820 only has the narrow slide ribs 803a in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so that frictional resistance is suppressed.
The slide member 2820 is allowed to move smoothly in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815.

On the other hand, in the inclined position shown in FIG. 194(b), the slide member 2820 has the slide rib 803a with respect to the slits 815 on both sides, and the sloped surface 280 with the inner inner wall.
Since the 3Ts are brought into contact with each other (pressed against each other), the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than the slide rib 803a, the frictional resistance increases significantly. Incidentally, since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the both-side slit 815 from both sides in the lateral direction of the both-side slit 815, an increase in frictional resistance occurs regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. .

Therefore, in the inclined position shown in FIG. 194(b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815 in the longitudinal direction increases, the slide member 28
20 reaches the end of the slits 814, 815, the slide pin 823
The torque applied to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a value between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193(b),
Start rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 moves away from the regulating section 2888, the load applied to the petal 802 from the regulating section 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal motion device 2800. Note that in FIG. 195, FIG. 193 (
The state after the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state b) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated in the expanded position. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155) (clockwise direction when viewed from the front). Note that in the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is applied to the oil damper 805 (
(see FIG. 156), the petal 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions while maintaining the expanded position.

196(a), FIG. 196(b), and FIG. 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. Note that in FIGS. 196(a), 196(b), and 197, the movement of the petals 802 from the expanding position to the gathering position is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 196(a), the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 196(b),
The regulating portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the postures of the petal 802 and the slide member 2820 are returned to their normal postures.

Furthermore, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 from the slide pin 823. The rotational movement of 802 stops, and the petals 802 slide toward the gathering position.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to automatically rotate the petals 802 at the expanded position and then return them to the gathering position.

In addition, although the case where the front side part 802b of the petal 802 is expanded at the position where it comes into contact with the regulating part 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in front view), ), it is possible to avoid contact between the front side part 802b and the regulating part 2888, so it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petal 802 to the fully open position and rotate at the fully open position.

Further, the regulating portion 2888 may be placed in a position where it does not come into contact with the petals 802 in the concentrated position or the fully open position, or in a position where the regulating portion 2888 does not come into contact with the petals 802 rotating in the fully open position.
By slightly changing its posture, it can pass through the restriction part 2888 and be placed in a position where it can pass the load, thereby preventing the restriction part 2888 from interfering with the rotation of the petal 802 in the fully open position. can.

Further, as shown in this embodiment, by arranging the regulating section 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 when viewed from the front, the regulating section 2888 can be used as a part of the presentation device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulating portion 2888, the petals 802
When the petal 802 expands, it can be used as a mark to determine whether it will pass through a position near or far from the star-shaped pattern, and depending on the distance, the petal 802 will expand to the maximum and perform a rotational movement. It is possible to make a difference between whether to perform the rotation operation or to perform the rotation operation by expanding halfway.

For example, by performing a performance in which the expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. The pattern of the mold can function as a production part. Thereby, the regulating section 2888 can be used as a part of the production device.

Note that the regulating portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the back cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since there is no need to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from a design perspective, the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 contacts the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changes its posture, which may be used as a presentation effect (for example, a presentation indicating the magnitude of the expected jackpot). In this case, the meaning conveyed to the player can be changed depending on whether the petals 802 are simply rotating or are rotating (fluttering) while causing a slight change in posture due to contact with the regulating portion 2888. .

In this embodiment, the position where the petal 802 comes into contact with the regulating part 2888 is the tip position.
If the abutting position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of expansion when the petals 802 change their posture will change. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the regulating portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes its posture can be varied in a plurality of ways.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199.
In the twelfth embodiment, a case has been described in which the slit member 810 rotates along with the rotary plate 830 in the expanding position regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830, but a petal operating device in another example of the twelfth embodiment The slit member 3810 of No. 3800 is configured to be able to switch between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotary plate 830 and a case where the rotary plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

198(a), FIG. 198(b), FIG. 199(a), and FIG. 199(b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 chronologically illustrate an example of the operation of the petal operating device 3800 when the rotary plate 830 rotates clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 198(a). Also,
In FIGS. 198(a), 198(b), 199(a), and 199(b), the rotating plate 83
The arrangement and shape of the guide rail 832 of 0 is illustrated in phantom lines.

Note that when the rotary plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. The fact that the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 rotate together by exceeding the resistance caused by the rotation is similar to the twelfth embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are shown in cross section for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are shown in cross section in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view, the slide member 2820 receives a load from the guide rail 832 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830. Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) (see FIG. 198(b)). In this embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, 3815 are provided on the side that receives the sliding member 2820 that is displaced in this way.
b is formed.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the center slit 814 is formed on the wall portion on the clockwise side when viewed from the front among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the center slit 814.
Of the central recessed portion 3814a recessed in such a manner as to widen the width, and the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the both side slits 815 disposed on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front, the clockwise side when viewed from the front. A clockwise recessed portion 3815a is recessed in the wall portion so as to widen the width of both slits 815 in the lateral direction, and a radial direction of the both slits 815 is arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front. There are slits 81 on both sides of the wall extending along the wall on the clockwise side when viewed from the front.
It mainly includes a counterclockwise recessed part 3815b that is recessed in such a manner as to widen the width in the lateral direction of the main body 5.

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the clockwise recessed portion 3815a
It is arranged to face the slide rib 803a of No. 3.

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the central recessed portion 3814a
from the position facing the guide pin 822 to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (Fig.
8(a) lower side).

The central recessed portion 3814a has a deeper recess depth than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and a longer radial length than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is formed on the flat plate member 28 in the state shown in FIG. 198(a).
From the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of 03 to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (
198(a) (lower side).

The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b has a deeper recess depth than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and has a radial length longer than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise when viewed from the front will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the rotating plate 830
When the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 start rotating clockwise in front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move toward the lower right in FIG. 198(b)).

This releases the contact between the flat plate member 2803 and the counterclockwise wall portions of the both-side slits 815 when viewed from the front, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotary plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are brought into contact with the contact portion between the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the contact portion between the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the slit member). 199(a) and 199(b).
)reference).

Note that the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b have a deeper recess depth than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, so the above-mentioned slide member 2820 and flat plate member 28
The contact between the guide pin 822 and the central recessed portion 3814a and the threaded portion 280 during the rotation of 03
Contact between 3S and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is avoided.

Further, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are recessed to such a depth that the rotating tip portion (the left side portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not come into contact with the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the above-described rotation. The circumferential recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 becomes lower than the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. . As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 do not rotate together with each other.

As shown in FIG. 199(b), in the process of reaching a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of threaded portions 2803S (the longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are perpendicular to each other, when viewed from the front The sliding rib 803a on the radial center side accommodated in the both-side slits 815 on the clockwise side comes into contact with the walls of the both-side slits 815, so that the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are rotated from the front with the abutting portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that had entered the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a
moves toward the counterclockwise side in front view from the concave base end of the clockwise side concave portion 3815a.

That is, the state in which the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (FIG. 194)
(See (a)) Therefore, by continuously rotating the rotating plate 830 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center in the radial direction.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. It is possible to switch between the case where the rotary plate 830 rotates independently and the attitude of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

Thereby, the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) can perform operations that were impossible to realize in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change in the middle of the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 194(b) ), until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 280
3 and the rotating motion of the petal 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (rotating motion that rotates along with the slit member 3810) (FIGS. 195 and 196).
(a) and FIG. 196(b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation caused by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. (See FIG. 199(b)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise when viewed from the front, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 199(b)).
. That is, the rotational movement of the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (the rotational movement of rotating along with the slit member 3810) until the changed posture is restored. Can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation caused by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. 198(a)), the rotating plate 830 can be placed in any state (phase or attitude).
By rotating the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 clockwise when viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are assembled from the position of the flat plate member 2803 that matches the arbitrary state (phase or posture) and the petal 802 that is fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803. You can start moving towards the position.
As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (Fig.
93(a)) rotates during expansion (see FIG. 198(a)) and then moves toward the gathering position (see FIG. 197), the arrangement of the petals 802 is varied. Therefore, the operation of the petal operating device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the curved surface constituting the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate without an opening. However, the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment
A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the curved wall portion 8326 of the curved wall portion 8326. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

200, 201, 202(a), and 202(b) are front perspective views of the operating device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202(a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, FIG. 201 shows the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202(b) shows the tilting device 310 in the first state. A state in the middle of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operating device 8300 in this embodiment has a lower frame member 8300 in comparison with the operating devices 300 to 7300 in each of the embodiments described above.
The difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of 320 has not been explained yet, and the other configurations have almost been already explained in the operating devices 300 to 7300 in each of the embodiments described above.
Therefore, below, details of the lower frame member 8320 will be explained, and other configurations will be limited to some supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion arranged to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-back direction, and is bored in a substantially oval shape at the left-right center position. The first through hole 8326a on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400 has a cross-sectional shape of a horizontally long rectangle when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and corresponds to the slope of the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b are drilled along the bottom plate portion 321 and connect the top surface and the bottom surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at a plane position, and a pair of third through holes 8326b are drilled in the left and right corners with a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a through hole 8326c.

The purpose of each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c is to facilitate the downward passage of liquid such as the drinking water described above, and to facilitate the removal of a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300, which will be described below. It is a through hole having. For example, a coin-shaped foreign object may be caused by a player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is a nuisance and forcibly stops the operation of the tilting device 300, or by a player who is just curious, and the coin-shaped foreign object is inserted between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. Member 33
0 may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between the two.

Here, since the operating device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310.
By doing this, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, but at the same time, the gap V13
, there is a high possibility that a foreign object will be inserted into V14.

In particular, in this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end of the ring member BR1 (
14(b)), that is, the position supported by the upper frame member 330 is closer to the rear end, so that the longer the length of the tilting device 310 in the front-rear direction, the The structure is such that it is easily displaced (deformed) from side to side near the front end. Note that this positional deviation (deformation) includes, for example, positional deviation that takes advantage of looseness caused by adding up design errors that are incorporated from the design stage between members, and positional deviation that occurs by slightly deforming each member. (transformation) is included.

Therefore, during normal use, there is a gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides.
However, even if the design is such that the gap V13 is not large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 1 yen coin), the tilting device 310 may be displaced to either the left or right side (for example, to the left). In this case, the gap V13 created on the other side (for example, on the right side) is caused by the tilting device 310 during normal use.
A gap V1 having a size that is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the left and right sides of the upper frame member 330
3, which can be large enough to allow insertion of a coin-shaped foreign object.

That is, the gap V13 between the left and right upper frame members 330 of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign object (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1 yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is shifted to either the left or right, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted.

Further, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is also reduced by utilizing the play around the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14(b)) of the tilting device 310.
The gap V14 can be easily enlarged by applying a load toward the rear side to cause the gap V14 to be displaced (deformed), so that a coin-shaped foreign object can also be inserted into the gap V14.

In this embodiment, the gap V13 on either the left or right side between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is
Alternatively, if the tilting device 310 performs a tilting operation with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the longitudinal gap V14, the coin-shaped foreign object may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202(a) and 202(b), when the left and right walls of the tilting device 310 are configured in a shape that constricts inward from the left and right toward the center of the top and bottom, it is easy to fit the player's fingers. On the other hand, the coin-shaped foreign object fitted into the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202(a)) protrudes outward from above the constriction of the case body 311. A downward load is applied to the lower frame member 8320, making it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance will become excessive, and there is a possibility that a problem will occur in driving the tilting device 310. Further, when the coin-shaped foreign object rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the light transmittance of the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate, which may impede the light emission performance.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object gets caught inside and restricts the operation of the tilting device 310, it will be impossible to perform the intended performance with the operating device 8300, so the gap V13,
If it is discovered that a coin-shaped foreign object has been inserted into V14, it is desirable to remove it as soon as possible. However, if the lower frame member 320 does not have a through hole, it is necessary to remove the coin-shaped foreign object by using the operating device 300. It needed to be disassembled.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, so it is possible to remove coin-shaped foreign objects through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. The shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be explained below.

203(a) is a front view of the operating device 8300, and FIG. 203(b) is a front view of the operating device 8300.
3A is a side view of the operating device 8300 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG.
03(c) is a bottom view of the operating device 8300, and FIG. 203(d) is a bottom view of the operating device 8300.
) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 along the line CCIIId-CCIIId,
FIG. 203(e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 taken along the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line in FIG. 203(a).

The first through hole 8326a has the same horizontal center as the horizontal center of the vibrating device 5400, and is bored with a horizontal width larger than the horizontal width of the vibrating device 5400 (first housing portion 5431, see FIG. 58). Ru. Therefore, even if a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left-right center position of the gap V14, the liquid will be discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibration device 5400. Liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is connected to the extending portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 12).
(see). Therefore, if a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the gap V14 is on the top surface of the extension part 311h, the slope of the top surface of the extension part 311h (left and right when viewed in the vertical direction in the second state) The tilting device 3 is curved toward the
In the first state of No. 10, the slope D81 slopes downward toward the left and right center, and the tilting device 310
The coin-shaped foreign object can be easily removed through the first through-hole 8326a along the slope D82 (see FIG. 201) that slopes downward toward the front side.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be suppressed to the necessary minimum while making it easier to remove coin-shaped foreign objects, so the degree of freedom in designing the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be ensured more easily than in the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be widened left and right.

Note that in this embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is the same as that of the tilting device 310 in the first state.
A portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) is made larger than the size of the object assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object. That is, in this embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state has a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 m.
m].

Note that the first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is an LED device 341f
(See FIG. 25) This is a portion that transmits light emitted from the radiator. In this embodiment, the spherical shell portion 31
In this embodiment, except for 3a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 that are connected to the left, right, top, and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished (the mirror-finished members are fixed). The light passing through the spherical shell portion 313 is reflected.

With this arrangement, the first through hole 8326a is used to create a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In particular, by removing the resin member that weakens the amount of light through the first through hole 8326a, the center portion in the left and right direction can be viewed brightly.

Note that when a coin-shaped foreign object is placed in a position that partially blocks the first through-hole 8326a, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is smaller than the coin-shaped foreign object. It becomes weaker than when there is no foreign object (the coin-shaped foreign object becomes a shadow). In other words, it is possible to easily notice that the coin-shaped foreign object remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign object as clues, so that the coin-shaped foreign object can be removed from the lower frame without being noticed. Member 832
It is possible to reduce the possibility that the value continues to remain at 0. Note that this effect is achieved by the first through hole 832
The same applies not only to the case of visual recognition through 6a but also to the case of visual recognition through second through hole 8326b and third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b allows coin-shaped foreign objects that have fallen on the bottom plate 321 to be removed from the bottom plate 32.
It is configured as a through-hole that can be discharged in the direction along the surface of 1. Therefore, in this embodiment, the second through hole 8326 has a horizontal width of about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 has a size that can discharge the largest possible coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 500 yen coin). The width in the normal direction is approximately 2 mm.

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged near the left and right center of the bottom plate part 321, even after a coin-shaped foreign object has slipped down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate part 321, it can be easily removed. can remove coin-shaped foreign objects.

The second through holes 8326b are arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, so that, for example, liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing along the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through hole 8326b can be used for discharging the liquid to the outside.

The third through hole 8326c has a central axis arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (Fig.
3(a)), it is formed as a through hole through which a coin-shaped foreign object that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 can be removed while remaining in the upright state (posture).

That is, the length in the longitudinal direction of the third through hole 8326c needs to be formed to a size that allows coin-shaped foreign matter to be ejected when viewed in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction is approximately 30 [mm] when viewed along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and the width in the left and right direction is approximately 2 [mm].

When removing a coin-shaped foreign object, remove the covering cover 370 and remove the operating device 830.
0 in a front view (see FIG. 92), the operator can open the through holes 8326a to 8326c.
can be accessed. Note that the covering cover 370 is attached to the fastening portion 3 of the main body curved portion 371.
70a (see FIG. 91) is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with a screw inserted in the front-rear direction, and the hanging part 372 is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate in which the recessed part 15a is formed with a screw inserted in the vertical direction. Therefore, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws while the front frame 14 is open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign object that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

Note that the harness HN3 connected to the operating device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that opens outward to the right at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203(b)).
. Including each of the embodiments described above, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operating device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be removed, the screws connecting the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 can be removed, and the harness HN3 can be removed from the connector part 8353 to facilitate operation. Device 8300 can be removed from front frame 14. Therefore, if a replacement for the normal operating device 8300 is prepared, the operating device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be quickly replaced with a normal operating device 8300.

Thereby, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operating device 8300 and the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to normal operation, the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 can be restarted quickly.

Next, the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 204. In the eighth embodiment,
Although the case has been described in which the board support device 600 is in the fixed state and receives no load from the front frame 14, the board support device 600 in the fourteenth embodiment is arranged so that it can come into contact with the front frame 14 in the fixed state. The front frame 14 is disposed in such a manner that it receives a load from the front frame 14 via a longitudinally displacing member 2652. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

204(a) and 204(b) are partial sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. In addition, Fig. 204 (
In a), the front frame 14 is shown open to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and in FIG. 204(b), the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12. The condition is illustrated. Further, the shape of the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(a) and the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(b) are each simplified and illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment includes a load transfer device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 that is arranged to be able to vertically displace the front side of a plate part (a plate part arranged on the back side) that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 in the main body plate part 611; The vertical displacement member 2651
A front-rear displacement member 2652 disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower end of the front-rear displacement member 2652 and supported so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction; a locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the front-rear displacement member 2652;
52 from above and below so that it can be displaced at two places in the front and back, and which is fixed to the plate part 611a, and the support part 2654 and the locking part 2653 are in contact with each other, and the front side is moved to the front side by the front and rear displacement member 2652. a biasing member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies a biasing force toward the
Equipped with

The vertical displacement member 2651 can be switched between a state in which it is in contact with the torsion spring NBb when the board support device 600 is in a fixed state, and a state in which it is separated from the torsion spring NBb. That is, in the lower position shown in FIG. 204(a), it retreats from the torsion spring NBb, and in the upper position shown in FIG. 204(b) (a position displaced upward from the lower position), it comes into contact with the torsion spring NBb, Deform the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204(a), the upper end of the vertically displacing member 2651 is positioned at a position with a slight gap between it and the torsion spring NBb in the lower position. is set.

The longitudinal displacement member 2652 can be placed at a front position where it is pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204(a)), or placed at a rear position where it is pushed by the front frame 14. The rear position (see FIG. 204(b)) is configured to be movable.

Here, an inclined surface 2652a is formed at the rear tip of the longitudinal displacement member 2652, and the inclined surface 2652a slopes downward toward the tip. The inclined surface 2652a extends from the vertically downward position of the vertically displacing member 2651 with the longitudinally displacing member 2652 disposed at the front position to the vertically downward position of the longitudinally displacing member 2651.
52 is an inclined surface that is continuously connected to the vertically downward position of the vertically displacing member 2651 when the vertically displacing member 2651 is placed at the rear position.

The inclined surface 2652a is located at the front position of the longitudinally displacing member 2652.
The inclination angle and the forming range are set so that the vertically displacing member 2651 is at the lower position and the vertically displacing member 2651 is at the upper position at the rear position of the longitudinally displacing member 2652.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is placed in the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load becomes larger by the thickness in the front and back direction. be able to.

As a result, the load that the post-rotation claw member 640 applies to the game board 13 from the back side can be increased, making it easier to maintain the game board 13 in contact with the drooping back plate portion 621d of the pre-rotation claw member 620. This makes it easier to define the distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the back of the front frame 14 (the back of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14). Therefore,
The thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the downward flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board support device 600 in this embodiment are the same, and are to fix the game board 13. At the time of fixing, the board support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side with the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and fixes it by pressing it against the hanging back plate part 621d.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further compressed by closing the front frame 14, a spring with a lower elastic modulus is adopted as the torsion spring NBb compared to the spring adopted in the eighth embodiment. can do.

Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600, which is necessary when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600. Since it is possible to reduce the force resulting in
Workability can be improved.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. In the eighth embodiment,
The inverted cup part 178 is melted with heated piano wire, and harnesses HN1 to HN3 are stretched above the inverted cup part 178 to prevent fraud from penetrating into the interior.
Although the case has been described in which the fraud detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment detects that the inverted cup portion 178 is burnt out by the heated piano wire and attempts to detect fraud at an early stage, In addition, it is configured to detect the heat and prevent burnout of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

FIG. 205(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG.
205(b) and 205(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. In addition, Fig. 205 (
In b), the shape memory spring 2288 is shown maintained in the contracted shape, as shown in FIG.
5(c) shows a state in which the tensile shape (memorized shape) is restored by application of heat. In addition, in FIGS. 205(b) and 205(c), the fraud detection device 2280
281 is viewed in cross section at the middle position between the front and back.

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape with openings on the back side and the bottom side, and has an inverted cup portion 2.
178, and a back cover member 2282 that is attached from the back side so as to cover the back side opening of the main body box part 2281.
A space is formed between 1 and the back cover member 2282.

The main body box part 2281 is made of a metal material and extends from the lower right corner to the inverted cup part 217.
an extending portion 2283 that abuts the left side of the wall portion 2178a of 8; a narrowing portion 2284 extending from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner; and an upper end of the narrowing portion 2284 near the edge of the opening. It is accommodated in a protruding part 2285 that protrudes upward from the main body box part 2285 and a recess that is recessed from the back side of the left side wall of the main body box part 2281, with one end protruding outside the main body box part 2281 and the other end extending from the main body box part 2281. A first conductive portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the portion 2281 and a main body box portion 228
It is housed in a recess formed in the right side wall of 1 from the back side, one end protrudes outside the main body box part 2281, the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box part 2281, and the first conductor a second conductive portion 2287 formed with a length that can come into contact with the upper surface of the portion 2286; a torsion spring SP15 that generates a biasing force that presses the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286;
A shape memory spring 2288 is provided that rides on the upper surface of the narrowed part 2284, is supported by the protruding part 2285, and is disposed below the second conductive part 2287.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when detecting heat. In the first conduction section 2286 and the second conduction section 2287, one end of separate wires is connected to the outside of the main body box section 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wire is connected to the main controller. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, from the state where the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are in contact and conductive (see FIG. 205(b)), the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 205(b)). (see c)), the continuity is broken,
It is controlled to output an error signal when the disconnection of conduction is input.

When an error signal is output from the main control device, the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120) outputs a loud warning, the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) stops dispensing balls, etc., and other actions are continued. It is controlled in such a way that it is impossible to play games.

The details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 205(a) to 205(c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup part 2178 in this embodiment, the formation location of the wall part 2178a is shifted to the left compared to the eighth embodiment, and the extending part 2283 is formed between the inverted cup part 2178 and the elongated cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

Since the extension portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the elongated cover member 173, even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire will remain intact and cover the elongated cover 173. Penetration can be prevented.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the inverted cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and advances further is guided to the narrowed portion 2284 and reaches the shape memory spring 2288 disposed in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed from a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, and has the property of maintaining a deformed shape at low temperatures and returning to a pre-memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . Note that in this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288
The transformation temperature is set to about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178 (approximately 80°), and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205(c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated above the transformation temperature by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, and the second conductive part 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive part 2286 and the second conductive part The conduction with 2287 is broken and an error signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraud at an early stage.

The extending portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 toward the front side is inserted into the guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back cover member 2282 in an elongated shape in the vertical direction and in the front-rear direction, and extends toward the front side. overhang. After the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tensile state and returns to the low temperature state, the operator deforms the shape memory spring 2288 by pushing down the extension portion 2288a and returns it to the contracted state (see FIG. 205(b)). ) can be returned again. In other words, even after a fraudulent act is discovered, it can be used repeatedly in order to detect the fraudulent act early.

Next, the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 206. In the eighth embodiment,
Although the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the light guide member 540 is curved to cause a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides. The right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment includes concave portions having different shapes for each region. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) shows an upward concave shape recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing a portion 2543b, and FIG. FIG. 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically representing a downward concave portion 2543d recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 206(e) is a diagram of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the upward concave portion 2543e recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view. Note that in FIG. 206(a), illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 206(a), the light guide member 2540 is formed into a plate shape that extends straight in the vertical direction. Note that in this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) disposed on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically vertically in line according to the shape of the light guide member 2540.

Concave portions are formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment, but in this embodiment, the concave portions 254 are formed in each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530.
The shape of 3 can be changed.

That is, with the bottom of the curvature of the inner lens member 530 as a reference, a region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side, and a region CCVI arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side.
The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed by the region CCVId located below and on the inner lens member 530 side, and the region CCVIe located below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206(b), an upward concave portion 2543b is formed in the region CCVIb by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b has a flat surface on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the upper side and the back side. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult for the light incident on the lens to be reflected in the left and right directions at this position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543b refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(c), a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in the region CCVIc by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the back side. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult for the light incident on the lens to be reflected in the left and right directions at this position. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543c refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(d), a downward concave portion 2543d is formed in the region CCVId by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the back side, and is heated by heat press. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult for the light incident on the lens to be reflected in the left and right directions at this position. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543d refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light that is refracted by the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(e), an upward concave portion 2543e is formed in the region CCVIe by hot pressing a convex portion in the shape of dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the back side. A convex portion used for this purpose is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult for the light incident on the lens to be reflected in the left and right directions at this position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543e refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

Note that the concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as the eighth embodiment (45° inclination angle with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of approximately 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, from this part, the inner lens member 5
The light emitted to the outer lens member 30 or the outer lens member 550 is only slightly refracted vertically and travels substantially horizontally.

According to this embodiment, with the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the light travels toward the inner lens member 530 in a direction that collects the light, and the light travels toward the outer lens member 550 in a direction that spreads the light. can be done. That is, while the light guide member 2540 is formed into a flat plate shape, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides can be made different, so that the right panel unit 250
It is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emission performance while suppressing the horizontal width of 0.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the tilting device 310 is pressed downward, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the initial position may be a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force to return the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, so the torsion spring 3
15 can be made unnecessary.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 moves to the push-in end, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, it is possible to perform the effect of a "button that cannot be pushed"). can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the end of its operation (the end of the extending operation), due to the dimensions that create a slight gap between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320, the voice coil motor 352 It is preferable to arrange the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. Thereby, it is possible to suppress generation of impact noise due to collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is protruding in advance, and it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the player is in the "unpushable button" state only after pushing the tilting device 310. can.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the engagement rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be formed from a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, it is possible to change the position of the connecting pin 344d in the state where the first projecting portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other, so that the engaging rib 344c can be rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. Immediately after changing the attitude of the rotating claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises can be changed. Therefore, more operating states of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 can be formed than in the first embodiment.

In addition, by driving the disc cam 344 continuously rotating in the forward rotation direction, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the rising end can be sequentially switched). Thereby, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, deterioration of the drive motor 342 can be suppressed, while a complicated operation mode in which the raised position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched can be performed.

In the third embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 provides driving force to the tilting device 310.
Although the case where the operation timing of the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operation speed and the direction of the operation of the tilting device 310 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driving mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operating speed and direction of the tilting device 310. For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (
During the downward movement), the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a position where the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis, and just before the tilting device 310 reaches the end of pushing and begins to move upward. , the rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started. In this case, while the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be made smaller while the tilting device 310 is pressed down repeatedly, the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be increased when the tilting device 310 starts to move upward. .

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the housing member 543 is attached to the tilting device 310.
0 may be fixed and the vibration device 5400 may be operated within it. Tilt device 31
For example, when fixing the housing member 5430 to the base plate 5321,
The shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 can be changed by disposing the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 so that the convex leg portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321 when the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the pushing end. may be configured to change whether the weight member 5412 can come into contact with the housing member 5430 or not.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the tilting speed when operating the tilting device 310. Therefore, by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or higher, the flexible member 5420 A state in which the weight member 5412 contacts the housing member 5430 can be created by increasing the amount of deformation. That is, the player can feel the vibration not only when pushing the tilting device 310 to the end, but also when operating the tilting device 310 at high speed. It is possible to increase the variety of performances.

For example, when a player operates the tilting device 310, a message such as "Press the button" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying a message such as "Big chance!", it is possible to perform an effect that instructs the player how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, by setting whether or not the player presses the button (tilting device 310) in a specified manner as a condition for the vibration to be transmitted to the player,
It is possible to increase the player's desire to operate the button (tilting device 310) in a specified manner of pressing, and it is possible to prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

Note that the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 may be reversed in magnitude with the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 with force, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction caused by pushing the tilting device 310 with force.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the player can feel the vibrations generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing in the tilting device 310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the housing member 5430 when the tilting device 310 is not pushed in,
The weight member 5412 may be formed in such a manner that it cannot come into contact with the housing member 5430 on the condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of its movement. In this case, the tilting device 31
While it is possible to transmit vibrations to the player when 0 is not being operated and make the performance lively,
By stopping the vibration when pressing the button, it is possible for the player to change the presentation mode (
This creates a premium feeling in which only the player playing the machine can feel the changes in the presentation mode, excluding surrounding players. I can do it.

In addition, as a variation of the performance, there is a case where the player pushes the tilting device 310 so that the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they cannot come into contact with each other, and a case where the weight member 5
412 and the housing member 5430 can be in continuous contact with each other, but this can be achieved by changing the operating mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can occur depending on the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

In the fifth embodiment, the disk cam 5344 is deformed by tilting its axis, so that the disk cam 53
Although a case has been described in which a frictional force is generated due to the contact between the release member 346 and the release member 346, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate portion of the main body member 341 in which the shaft support hole 341b is bored partially protrudes in a direction approaching the disc cam 5344, and is configured in such a manner that it comes into contact when the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting its axis. It's okay. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a movable part, the frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the movable release member 346 is ensured to be larger than when the disc cam 5344 and the movable release member 346 are in contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both the board support devices 600 disposed above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to come into contact with the front frame 14, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to be able to come into contact with the front frame 14. For example, in the upper position, a portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board support device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 disposed in the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, when attaching the game board 13 to the board support device 600, the game board 13
Although a case has been described in which the vertical position of the image does not change, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side, and the front end thereof is connected to the board support device 60 in the released state.
0 may be arranged below the upper surface of the rear side extension plate 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board support device 600 from there, the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state. 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be lowered compared to the height when the game board 13 is fixed, so that the work of fixing the game board 13 can be made lower. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the foul ball passage section 145 is configured as a passage that bends left and right, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or it may be a combination of back and forth and left and right bends. In this case, the ball guide opening 5
It is preferable that a long path be formed in the front and back directly behind the ball 3, since the ball can be ejected smoothly. Furthermore, by creating a path that bends back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage section 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, thereby preventing interference between the firing path and the foul ball passage section 145. It can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface, but the light guide member 540 is not necessarily limited to this. for example,
The position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 appears dim. Further, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, curved portions and straight extending portions may coexist at the upper and lower positions.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a vertically curved path is formed by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of the bending of the path may be left or right, or a combination of up, down, left and right.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 contacts the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner surface 461Hi are connected to the back side wall portion 461H.
It is also possible to have a configuration in which they are separated by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. in this case,
Since the speaker connection wire 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner surface 461Hi, the resistance of the sandwiching causes a load on the speaker connection wire 453 in the direction of pulling the speaker assembly 450 outward. Even if the speaker connection wire 4
53 can be prevented from coming off from the speaker 451.

In addition, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha contacts the inner surface 461Hi and the back side wall portion 461H in the thickness direction within the range of the protrusion length corresponding to the concave depth of the wiring passage concave portion 464, but the protrusion length beyond that is abutted in the thickness direction. In terms of length, a step may be provided in the middle so that the inner surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H are spaced apart by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, a sufficient area is secured to form a double wall between the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H, and the speaker connection wire 453 can be held between the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the proximal body part 461B and the distal body part 461T correspond to the speaker chamber, and the intermediate body part 461M corresponds to the duct. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate body part 461M in the front-rear direction to the same level as the proximal body part 461B and the distal body part 461T, the proximal body part 461B, the intermediate body part 461
M and the tip side main body part 461T may jointly constitute a large speaker room.

Further, although the proximal body portion 461B has been described as having a larger volume than the distal body portion 461T, the size relationship may be reversed, or the volumes may be the same. speaker 45
1 may be located not only at the left and right ends, but also at the center in the left and right direction, or between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, each of the rib portions 467a to 4 constituting the passage forming ribs 467, 487
67e, 487a to 487e, the adjacent rib portions are arranged in the left-right direction (the direction connecting the proximal body portion 461B and the distal body portion 461T, the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491). Although the case where they do not overlap in view (direction intersecting the direction) has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portion 467d and rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap when viewed in the left-right direction. In this case, since the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze-like manner, for example, the front recessed portion 47
By inserting a thin metal wire such as a piano wire through the opening formed by 1 and the rear recessed portion 491, and making it difficult to commit a fraudulent act in which the tip of the wire enters the gaming area, and prolonging the time required for such a fraudulent act, It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts. In addition, suppression of fraud here refers to suppression of the fraud itself, or obtaining fraudulent profits through the fraud (successful in the fraud).
Examples include suppression of

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 is the second gear 830 of the rotating plate 830.
G and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 may be configured to mesh with each other. in this case,
Since the rotary plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be linked, the loose fitting device 880 can be rotated not only during the rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 but also during the expanding operation and the gathering operation. can. Thereby, the radial sliding movement of the petals 802 and the rotational movement of the decorative member 884 can be performed simultaneously, and the presentation effect can be improved.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract as the rotary plate 830 rotates, or it may be configured to rotate around an axis different from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 830.

In the eighth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the second effect member 940 operates due to the driving force being transmitted via the slide plate 930 that slides due to the operation of the drive side arm member 910, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal operating device 800 and the tip of the second presentation member 940, the second presentation member 940 can be operated based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. It's okay. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment described above, when the board support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated from each other above the opening/closing regulating part 159. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 may be configured to abut in the front-rear direction above the opening/closing regulating part 159. Also good. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 will be displaced to the front side (game (the right side of the board 13 is tilted toward the front side), the game board 13 is disposed facing the operation unit back member 155.
Since the portion is also displaced to the front side, it is possible to cause the operation section back member 155 and the game board 13 to interfere with each other. Thereby, the front frame 14 can be prevented from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board support device 600 arranged below the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board support device 600 arranged above the inner frame 12 6
00 is in a fixed state based on the relationship between the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13, which are arranged opposite to the lower board surface support device 600, and the board surface arranged above the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, it is possible to prevent the front frame 14 from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. As a result, the function of determining the state of the panel support device 600 installed above the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 is recessed to a position where it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 regardless of the state of the board support device 600 (
It may be configured so that the surface is chamfered. In this case, when the multifunctional cover member 171 formed from synthetic resin collides with the metal board support device 600, the multifunctional cover member 171
Since the risk of damage to the multifunctional cover member 171 can be reduced, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be used for a long period of time in other applications (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the eighth embodiment, a case will be described in which the right panel unit 500, from which the light irradiated onto the end face of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540, is arranged at the right end and front side of the front frame 14. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, one side of the right panel unit 500 may be configured to be switchable between being placed on the front side and the other side being placed on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate around an axis, the mode of light irradiated onto the center frame 86 can be switched. Furthermore, the mode of light irradiated onto the center frame 86 and the manner in which the center frame 86 is
By switching the correspondence with moving accessories that move inwardly, it is possible to diversify the performance.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged such that one side is placed on the front side and the other side is placed on the front side. Consider switching between when it is placed on the front side. Inner cover member 52
When the surface on the 0 side faces the movable accessory, the movable accessory placed opposite to the part corresponding to the top opening 524 (the part near the end) emits light, while the surface on the outer cover member 560 side emits light. When the surface faces the moving accessory, the moving accessory placed oppositely emits light over a wide area of the opening 565 (wider than the top opening 524). Therefore, by changing the attitude of the right panel unit 500 without changing the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting location of the moving accessory can be changed.

In this case, for example, the performance effect can be improved by moving the moving accessory in synchronization with the timing of the change in the light emitting location. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory, the surface on the outer cover member 560 side changes in size and changes so as to fit in the location corresponding to the top opening 524, while the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving accessory. At the timing when the right panel unit 500 faces, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (expand) in the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. Thereby, switching to change the location where light is emitted in accordance with the movement of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500, while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a that controls the light emission.

In addition, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the brightness is high, the amount of light is large, and the light is clearly emitted), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is focused. It is diffused (the brightness becomes lower, the amount of light becomes smaller, and the light emitted becomes fainter). Therefore, by changing the posture of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to
It is possible to change the light emitting mode.

Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving accessory or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is placed in front of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal) By changing the posture so that the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 is placed on the back side of the support plate 510, a beam-shaped (
It is possible to emit light over a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving accessory or liquid crystal while irradiating light in a narrow state. Thereby, it is possible to emit light in a wide range of positions away from the moving accessory and the liquid crystal, while causing only the details of the moving accessory and the liquid crystal to emit light.

In the ninth and tenth embodiments, the foul ball passage portions 9145, 10145
Although a case has been described in which the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sheet metal member may partially break due to the load from the thread Y8 and be so fragile that the broken part will fall, and a detection sensor may be placed at a position where the broken part passes through when it falls. Also good. In this case, due to the sheet metal member being detected by the detection sensor, a warning is issued and the launch of the ball is forcibly stopped in order to detect the cheating at an early stage. The profits gained by those who commit fraudulent acts (losses suffered by gaming machine halls) can be minimized.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve frictional force may be added. For example, the friction force may be improved by pasting a rubber sheet on the inclined surface 2803T, or by arranging a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810). The motion resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is in a posture inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, on the walls of the both side slits 815 that are arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T,
A recessed portion may be formed to allow the inclined surface 2803T to enter therein. In this case, since the inclined surface 2803T penetrates into the recessed portion, it is possible to improve the operating resistance.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, by changing the shape of the concave portions 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the traveling direction of the light is set as the direction in which the light is collected or the direction in which the light is spread. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 is
~CCVIe Since all of the lights are tilted upward, it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the eye level of a person walking to select a machine to play with. Thereby, the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Further, for example, areas CCVIc and CCV which are areas that emit light to the inner lens member 530
A downward concave portion 2543c may be formed in Ie, and an upward concave portion 2543b may be formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId, which are the regions from which light is emitted to the outer lens member 550. In this case, the light travels in the direction opposite to the player playing pachinko 8010, and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is slanted upward. On the other hand, the light that travels toward the player and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is tilted downward. Therefore, for example, by illuminating the balls stored in the upper tray 17 with light, it is possible to make the balls look glittering. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the players playing the game while improving the customer attraction effect of the pachinko machine 8010.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. for example,
Pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected jackpot value until you hit the jackpot once and hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. In addition to pachinko machines, we also offer arepachi, mahjong balls, slot machines,
It may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a gaming machine that is a combination of a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The display of identification information starts to fluctuate due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button), or
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the fluctuating display of the identification information stops and the display is fixed, and a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one. A slot machine that generates special games, and in this case, typical examples of game media include coins, medals, etc.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the control lever,
For example, the fluctuation of symbols is stopped due to the operation of a stop button or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. A special game is generated in which the player is given a large amount of balls into a saucer at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 287. Note that the first control example describes a control example with a partial configuration change from each of the above-described embodiments, and the detailed explanation of the same configuration as each of the above-described embodiments is omitted. is omitted.

FIG. 207 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 207, the game board 13 in the first control example has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , 77, a general ball entrance 63, a second ball entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, a sorting device 700, etc. are assembled, and its peripheral portion is attached to the inner frame 4 ( (see Figure 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The openings 710a of the general ball entrance 63, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the distribution device 700 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. , is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like. Further, although the details will be described later, inside the sorting device 700, a first ball entry port 64 and a right second ball entry port 640r into which a ball can enter are provided. The balls that have entered the opening 710a are sorted by the sorting device 700 to either the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r (see FIG. 208).

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 207.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and at the inside position of the outer rail 77, a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is installed. An arcuate inner rail 76 formed of The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 218) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (top left in FIG. 207) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 207) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37a and 37b each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 207). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 218), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this first control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display whether the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, or the right second ball entry port 640r. It is structured so that it can be used depending on the situation. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated, while the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 or the right second ball entry port. When winning 640r, the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , Indicates whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a guaranteed variable jackpot (jackpot A, C), a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot (jackpot B), or a missed symbol by the lighting state, and indicates the number of pending balls by the lighting state, A 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during jackpots and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in any of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The jackpot types determined here are 16R time saving 100 times jackpot (jackpot A), 16R probability variable odd number symbol jackpot (jackpot B1), 16R probability variable even number symbol jackpot (jackpot B2), and 2R probability variable jackpot (jackpot C). ing. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, "16R time saving 100 times jackpot" (jackpot A) means that the maximum number of rounds is 16 after the third symbol is announced as a jackpot by stopping and displaying the same even-numbered symbol. After a round of jackpot games, the game enters a low probability state and is in a time-saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). "16R Probable Variable Odd Number Jackpot" (Jackpot B1) means that the third symbol finally stops and displays the same odd number symbol, indicating that it is a jackpot, and after that, the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. This is a variable jackpot in which the player enters a high probability state after the jackpot and is in an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. "16R guaranteed variable even number pattern jackpot" (jackpot B2) means that a jackpot is announced when the third symbol finally stops and displays the same even number symbol, and after that the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. This is a probability-variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after the jackpot (until the next jackpot game is executed) and is in an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. "2R Probable Jackpot" (Jackpot C) means that the third symbol is finally displayed in a specific combination of symbols (chance), and then the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds. This is a guaranteed variable jackpot (until the next jackpot game is executed). In addition, in the case of jackpot C, the electric support state is not set after the jackpot game.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of Furthermore, the "electronic support state" in the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the lottery probability of the second symbol is set high and the fluctuation time of the second symbol is also set short. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, and the second entry point is increased. 640 refers to a game state in which it is easy for a ball to land a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During electric support (during electric support game state) and time saving during fixed change, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened. This will be changed and a longer time will be set than normal. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more easily than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 during electric support or time saving during a certain change, or in addition to changing the opening time, 1 A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in a winning turn than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is released with one hit. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times. In addition, during the probability change and time saving, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is released and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in one hit are not determined, and the second symbol is Only the winning probability may be changed to be higher than the normal winning probability.

A plurality of general ball entrances 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters the prize. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 has first symbol display devices 37a, 37b triggered by a winning (starting prize) in any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r. A third symbol display device 81 is configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the third symbol, and the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 is used as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays a second symbol is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, the center frame 86 protrudes to the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the third symbol display device 81, and prevents game balls from coming into contact with the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 238), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37a, 37b that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 238). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (see FIG. 207)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is used to display fluctuations. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the game state is in the electric support mode or in the time saving mode during the probability change than when the gaming state is in the normal mode. As a result, during the electricity support period and the time saving period during the probability change, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so it is possible to perform more winning drawings than during the normal period. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more opportunities to have the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640 in the open state. Therefore, during electric support and time saving during probability change, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, during the electric support during the probability change or during the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the open time or number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit, etc. If the state is such that it is easy for the ball to enter the ball entrance 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gates 67 are assembled to the game board in areas on both sides of the variable display unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board 13 among the balls shot at the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b mentioned above, and is also displayed by lighting on the second symbol holding lamp 84. Ru. The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided in four, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A distribution device 700 in which balls can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters a prize (enters the ball) through the opening 710a in the distribution device 700, the entered ball is alternately distributed to the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. It will be done. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, a first ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. As a result, a jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 218), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a. Furthermore, when the ball enters the right second ball entry port 640, the second ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, similar to the case of the right second ball entry port 640r. As a result of turning on the second ball entrance switch, a jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 238), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter a prize is provided at the lower side of the sorting device 700 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters the second ball entry port 640, a second ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is activated due to the turning on of the second ball entry switch. A jackpot lottery is made in the device 110 (see FIG. 238), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b. This second ball entry port 640 normally prevents game balls from entering the ball by regulating the entry of the game ball with the left and right electric accessory 640a configured in the shape of a feather standing upright (it is difficult to do so). ) configuration, and when the normal symbol (described later) hits, the electric accessory 640a rotates about 45 degrees outward in a certain movement pattern as an opening movement, forming an inverted figure eight. The game ball is guided to the second ball entry port 640 so that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry port 640.

Furthermore, the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r each pay out five balls as prize balls when a ball enters the prize, and the second ball entrance 640 pays out two balls as prize balls. It is also one of the winning slots where balls are paid out. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, Although the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640r is configured to be a different number, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640r are different numbers. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the winning ball 640 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r may be the same number.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

As mentioned above, during electric support and time saving during probability change, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter, so the variation of the second symbol The symbol "○" is more likely to be displayed on the display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change or time saving period, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened becomes longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640 compared to normal times.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640, so basically it is difficult for the ball to enter the opening 710a. A jackpot lottery is executed by entering the ball and sorting the entered ball to the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r.

On the other hand, during electric support or time saving during a change in probability, by allowing the ball to pass through either the left or right through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is likely to be in the open state, and the second ball entry port 640 is easily opened. Since the ball opening 640 is in a state where it is easy to win, the ball that enters the opening 710a is sorted to the first ball entry port 64 or the second right ball entry port 640r, and the second ball enters the opening 710a. The jackpot lottery associated with the ball entering the opening 640 also becomes easier to execute. Therefore, there are more opportunities for a jackpot lottery than during normal times, which is advantageous to the player compared to during normal times.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides information to the player depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is under electric support during a change in probability, whether it is under time reduction, or whether it is under normal operation). , the way the ball is launched can be changed. Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning at any of the first ball entry port 64, second ball entry port 640, and right second ball entry port 640r becomes a jackpot, a predetermined period of time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on to display a stop symbol for a jackpot, and the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot. , the occurrence of a jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 16 times (16 rounds) at the most. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when the LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37a, 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than one (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the distribution device 700 when viewed from the front. , for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

A pasting space K1 for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. pasted in the pasting space K1 can be attached to a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not land in any of the ball entry ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 640r are guided through the out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out port 66 is arranged below the sorting device 700.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 238). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 238). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (FIG. 255) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process (FIG. 254) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 253) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, touch sensor 290, setting switch 291, RTC 292, firing sensor 293, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. There is.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 238). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the sorting device 700 will be explained with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. As shown in FIG. 208, the sorting device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13. A channel portion through which the game ball that has entered the opening 710a flows down into the through hole formed in the game board 13, and a flow path portion through which the game ball that has entered the second ball entry port 640 flows down are housed. The base member of the sorting device 700 is configured to be screwed onto the game board 13 from the front side.

The winning member 730 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes the above-mentioned opening 710a located at the upper center in the left-right direction, an electric accessory 640a located below the opening 710a, and an electric accessory 640a located below the opening 710a. A through-hole (not shown) located on both sides in the left-right direction and formed through the front-back direction, and a lower through-hole (not shown) located below the through-hole and formed through the front-back direction. Formed primarily in preparation.

The distribution member 760 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a box-like body with an open front side. Further, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed to be inclined downward as it goes outward in the left-right direction from the substantially central position in the left-right direction. Further, both ends of the distribution member 760 in the left and right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

The sorting member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that are inclined downward from the center position in the left and right direction in a front view toward both left and right sides, a sorting member 762 that is disposed at the center of each of the inclined surfaces 761, and a sorting member 762. It is mainly formed with a ball throwing opening formed above the ball.

The distribution member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three protrusions 762a that protrude outward from its outer edge at 90 degree intervals around the axis, and are inserted into the inner side of the annular shape. A shaft portion 762b.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support for rotating the distribution member 762 around the axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted into the inner side of the ring of the distribution member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is held between the intervening member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is arranged to be rotatable about the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for distributing the ball alternately to the left and right inclined surfaces 761, one by one, when the ball is thrown after passing through the opening 710a, and is aligned with the direction in which the tip of the central protrusion 762a is located. The ball is thrown to the opposite side in the left and right direction. That is, the projection 762a in the center allows the ball thrown from the opening 710a to be thrown in the left-right direction. The projections 762a protruding from both ends restrict the displacement of the distribution member 762, and the weight applied when the ball passes displaces the direction in which the tip of the projection 762a at the center is located (the distribution member 762 The rotation of the distribution member 762 is regulated by the contact between the distal end surface of the projection 762a and the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the projection 762a at the center of the projection 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface, the guided ball collides with the projection 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a that has been displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface to restrict its displacement.

The inclined surface is the rolling surface of the path on which the balls distributed left and right by the distribution member 762 roll and are thrown (hereinafter referred to as the "third ball throwing path KR3"), and It is formed to slope downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls distributed left and right by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the slope 761 and are thrown (rolled) to the end of the slope 761 on the downward side.

The lower end of the inclined surface 761 is formed to be inclined in a direction approaching the intervening member so that the thickness of the rear side surface increases forward toward the end. As a result, the ball rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown to the end thereof is transferred to the first ball entry port 64 of the intervening member disposed in front of the distribution member 760 or the right second ball entry port 640r. can throw the ball to More specifically, the ball that has been distributed to the left side in the front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) into the first ball entrance 64. On the other hand, the ball that has been distributed to the right side in the front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (enters) into the right second ball entrance 640r.

The intervening member is formed into a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-mentioned variable prize winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a first ball entry opening 64 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the left side, and a first ball entrance hole 64 on the right side. It is formed mainly of a right second ball entry port 640r that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and these first ball entry ports 64.

The first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r are formed on the front side of both left and right end portions of the distribution member 760, respectively, and are formed on the back side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the space at both left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r. Therefore, the ball rolling on the upper part of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above passes through the first ball entry port 64 and is sent to the through hole of the winning member 730, and the right second ball entry port 640r. can be passed through and a path for throwing the ball to the through hole of the winning member 730 can be formed.

The distribution device 700 configured as described above throws a ball as follows. The ball entering from the opening 710a is thrown to the distribution member 760, and the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 throws the ball to the third ball throwing path KR3 in either the left or right direction. When the ball thrown along the third ball throwing path KR3 in the left direction reaches the end of the third ball throwing path KR3, it enters the inside of the first ball entry port 64 of the intervening member 750 disposed on the front side. The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4. Here, the game ball that has entered the first ball entry port 64 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 is detected.

On the other hand, when the ball thrown along the third ball throwing path KR3 in the left direction reaches the end of the third ball throwing path KR3, the right second ball entrance 640r of the intervening member 750 disposed on the front side The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4 inside the ball. Here, the game ball that has entered the second ball entry port 640 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second ball entry port 640r.

In this way, the game balls that have entered the opening 710a are distributed alternately to the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640 by the distribution member 762, so that they are evenly distributed to the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640. By allowing game balls to enter the right second ball entrance 640r, it becomes possible to uniformly generate reserved balls. Thereby, the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be generated equally, the number of reserved balls of one of them becomes the upper limit, and overflow that is not stored as reserved balls can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not change at the same time, but the structure is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to change at the same time. With this configuration, more games can be drawn in a shorter time and the results of the determinations can be displayed, making it possible to play games more time efficiently.

The third symbol is composed of main symbols of numbers "0" to "9". Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 238), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is configured so that the jackpot occurs after the fluctuating display ends. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not aligned.

For example, if the special symbol lottery result is "Jackpot B1", any of the odd numbered main symbols "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" will be stopped and displayed in a row. A variable display is performed. Moreover, if it is "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot B2", a variable display is performed in which any of the even numbered main symbols "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are aligned in a row. Further, in the case of a jackpot C, a chance number composed of a combination of "341" is displayed. Note that this chance combination is configured not to be selected if the lottery result is a loss. In this embodiment, the chance eye is configured to be displayed with a specific combination of third symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and special symbols different from the normal third symbols from 0 to 9 (for example, a golden fish symbol) are displayed. ) may be configured to display one or a combination of a plurality of characters, or may be configured to display characters such as "chance" for notification.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 to 217, the effect display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 209(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts, upper and lower, with the upper two-thirds being the main display area Dm that displays the third symbol in a variable manner, and the other half being the main display area Dm that displays the third symbol in a variable manner. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, the number of reserved pitches, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each of the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from the top to the bottom for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The approximate center of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the active line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided in a horizontally elongated manner below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an execution display area in which a holding symbol that is to be changed is moved and displayed when a holding ball that has been held in the main display area Dm is displayed in a changing manner (dynamic display). be. The pending symbol moved to the execution display area is displayed as a larger symbol than the pending symbol so that it can be identified that the variation of the corresponding special symbol is being executed. In addition, when a variation is executed, the lottery result of the special symbol being varied is indicated by changing the color of the symbol or the pattern of the symbol.

The small area Ds2 is the number of balls that have not been changed (pending balls) among the balls that entered the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, and the second ball entrance 640. This is an area for displaying the number of pitches and preview performance images. A character display area C is set in the small area Ds2, in which a preview performance image of the character is displayed when the number of reserved balls exceeds a predetermined number.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 209(b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, when displayed in a floating manner, in addition to the main symbol displayed in the center, the main symbols placed before and after it are also visibly displayed, so a maximum of 9 main symbols are displayed in total. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, the sub-area Ds1 displays an active pedestal pattern m0 indicating that the reserved ball corresponding to the special pattern in progress is moved and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 210 ( As shown in a), when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed, a circle symbol is displayed. Furthermore, among the reserved symbols (circle symbols) displayed in the small area Ds2, the circle symbol displayed on the leftmost side, which indicates that the most reserved order is first, is hidden, and then the small area A circle pattern having a larger diameter than the reserved pattern is displayed on Ds1. In this case, the pending symbols that were displayed in the small area Ds2 are moved to the position where the hidden leftmost pending symbol was displayed, and the pending symbols that are displayed next to each other are moved and displayed. be done. When the pending symbol moves to the small area Ds1 and is displayed as an active symbol, a predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol whose fluctuation is started, the selected fluctuation pattern, etc. The color and pattern of the symbol being executed are determined and displayed. With this configuration, the player can quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbol whose variation is started or the selected variation pattern based on the symbol being executed displayed in the small area Ds1, and the game You can improve your interest. Note that the symbol being executed displayed in the small area Ds1 is not limited to the effect of changing the color, pattern, etc. at the start of variation, but also the effect of changing the color, pattern, etc. during the period in which the special symbol is changing. For example, the timing when the third symbol changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, or the reach display mode (display mode where the left and right symbols are the same symbol and are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol is scrolled). It is executed at different timings, or when a specific effect (for example, when a predetermined movie effect is executed) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 209(b), in the small area Ds2, there is a first pending symbol pedestal m1 indicating that this is an area where a pending symbol indicating that the variation order is the first pending order is displayed. displayed on the left. On the right side of the first reserved symbol pedestal m1, there is a second reserved symbol pedestal m2 indicating that the reservation order is second, a third reserved symbol pedestal m3 indicating that the reservation order is third, and a reservation order. 4th reserved symbol pedestal m4 indicating that is the 4th, 5th reserved symbol pedestal m5 indicating that the pending order is 5th, 6th reserved symbol pedestal indicating that the pending order is 6th m6, the seventh reserved symbol pedestal m7 indicating that the pending order is seventh, and the eighth pending symbol pedestal m8 indicating that the pending order is eighth, are in a state where no pending symbol is displayed. is also displayed.

At the top of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, if a predetermined number or more of reserved symbols are not displayed, a reserved number suggesting symbol P is displayed, respectively. The reserved number-suggesting pattern P has a variable lid shape in which the character "5" indicating that the reservation order is the fifth is displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5. Similarly, the character "6" indicating that the reservation order is 6th is displayed on the upper part of the sixth reserved symbol pedestal m6, and the character "6" is displayed on the upper part of the seventh reserved symbol pedestal m7, which indicates that the reservation order is 7th. The variable lid shape is displayed with the character "7" indicating that it is the 8th reserved symbol, and the character "8" is displayed on the upper part of the 8th reserved symbol pedestal m8, indicating that the reserved symbol is 8th. It is made up of designs.

As shown in FIG. 209(b), when the number of pending symbols is 0, the pending number-suggesting pattern P spans the area from the fifth pending symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth pending symbol pedestal m8. The display is configured so that the player can recognize that the maximum number of pending symbols is eight, including the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, a maximum of 4 pieces are set for the first special symbol, and a maximum of 4 pieces are set for the second special symbol. In addition, in this control example, the maximum number is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the maximum number is not limited to that, and the maximum number is set by combining the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It may be configured such that overflow is suppressed from occurring.

A character display pedestal C1 is displayed on the right side of the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, indicating that this is an area where a preview character is displayed. With this configuration, even when the preview character is not displayed, the player can confirm in advance the area where the character will be displayed, and can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 210(a), when the third symbol (special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner in the main area Dm (during the variable display period of the special symbol), the first ball entrance 64 or the right When a game ball enters the second ball entry port 640r or the second ball entry port 640, if the number of reserved balls corresponding to the entered special symbol is less than the maximum value, the upper part of the pedestal display corresponding to the reservation order will be displayed. Pending symbols are displayed. FIG. 210(a) shows the display of pending symbols when the number of pending symbols is three.

As shown in FIG. 210(a), until the number of reserved balls is 3, the reserved number suggesting symbol P is displayed in the display area where the 5th to 8th reserved symbols are displayed. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 210(b), when the number of pending pieces reaches 4, the variable lid pattern in which the fifth pending item of the pending number suggestion pattern P is displayed is hidden and variably displayed. . By configuring this way, when the reserved symbols are displayed close to the variable lid symbol, they are hidden, thereby suppressing the problem in which the player mistakes the variable lid symbol for the reserved symbol and misunderstands the actual number of reserved balls. can. In addition, as shown in FIG. 210(b), when the number of balls on hold reaches four, not only the variable lid pattern in the display area for the fifth ball on hold is hidden, but also a girl is displayed in the character display area C. It is configured so that character designs are displayed.

The character displayed in the character display area C is configured to display a comment in a speech bubble indicating the number of balls remaining up to the maximum number of balls held, allowing the player to see the number of balls remaining up to the maximum number of balls held. The remaining number of items can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Specifically, when the number of balls on hold reaches 7, the words "1 more ball left" will be displayed in the comment display, and when one more ball is stored, the upper limit of the number of balls on hold will be displayed. This suggests that the eight reserved balls will be in a memorized state. With this configuration, the player can easily recognize the number of balls up to the upper limit of the number of held balls, and when the number of held balls is at the upper limit, the player can enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, right By entering a ball into any of the second ball entry ports 640r (ball entry port corresponding to a special symbol that is not in the holding upper limit), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an overflow that will not be held and stored.

In this control example, when game balls enter the opening 710a of the distribution device 700, the trapped game balls are alternately sent to the first ball entry port 64 (first ball entry port 64) by the distribution member 762 of the distribution device 700. 1 special symbol) and the second right ball entrance 640r (corresponding to the second special symbol). Thereby, the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are easily accumulated alternately and evenly. As a result, even if the total number of reserved balls (combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is seven, the player can play the game into the opening 710a without worrying about overflow. The game can be continued by letting the ball enter the ball.

Furthermore, when the number of balls on hold reaches the upper limit, the word "MAX" is displayed to indicate that the number of balls on hold up to the upper limit has been stored, and even though the number of balls on hold has reached the upper limit, the player cannot It is possible to suppress a problem in which the player continues to shoot game balls and an overflow of reserved balls occurs.

In FIG. 211(a), the fourth reserved ball is stored, and the result of the validity judgment determined by the pre-reading process (Z320: see FIG. 249) in the starting winning process (Z105) of FIG. 248, Information about the type of variation pattern to be selected is output as a winning command to the audio lamp control device 113, and based on that information, if it is determined that it is a jackpot or a losing super reach type, the player As a production to create expectations for a jackpot, the display mode of the reserved balls is displayed in a variable manner (for example, the white reserved symbol is changed to red), and the fifth variable lid symbol of the reserved number suggesting symbol P is also non-displayed. Display it as is without displaying it. Furthermore, an effect is performed in which a girl is displayed in the character display area C and the words "as is" are displayed to suggest that the number of reservations should not be increased any further. Here, when the fifth reserved ball is memorized, the word "OVER" is displayed in a speech bubble from the girl in the character display area C, as shown in FIG. 211(b), thereby preventing overflow. In both cases, a notification is made as if there was an overflow. As a result, it is possible to make the player look forward to the fluctuating display of the fourth held ball. It is possible to prevent players from firing and consuming game balls (game balls) wastefully.

As shown in FIG. 212(a), if the number of reserved balls from 0 to 4 is stored in a short period of time (for example, 5 seconds), at the timing when the fourth reserved ball is stored, The 5th and 6th pieces of the variable lid pattern P of the pending quantity suggestion pattern P are hidden, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, and the word "early" is displayed to indicate the pending period. Due to the short length, a notification is executed to suggest that the reserved number suggesting pattern P is being displayed in a specially variable manner. Normally, when there are 4 reserved balls, the fifth variable lid symbol of the reserved number suggestion symbol P is hidden, but within 5 seconds, 0 reserved balls are displayed. Since the number has increased to four, a special display rule has been established in which the fifth and sixth variable lid symbols are displayed as hidden. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the effect executed depending on the period of increase in the number of held balls or the interval at which held balls are stored, and the player can be notified that a predetermined number or more of held balls have occurred in a short period of time. can be easily recognized. In addition, in this control example, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P is configured to be different from normal, but the display mode of the variable lid pattern P is not changed, but the display mode of the reserved symbol (for example, The configuration may be such that the color, pattern, and shape of the reserved symbols are variable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 212(b), a variable display example of the variable lid pattern P in the time saving game state will be described. In the time-saving game state (the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is high), unlike the normal gaming state (the probability of deciding the winning or failing of the normal symbol is low), when the fourth reserved ball is stored, as shown in FIG. 212(b) As shown in , the fifth (m5) and sixth (m6) variable lid patterns P are hidden. Then, a girl character is displayed, and a message message is displayed in a speech bubble to urge the player to play the game so as to memorize up to the 6th reserved ball. In the time-saving gaming state, the probability of determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not is set to a high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is also set to a short time, so that the normal electric accessory (electric support) 640a is more likely to be set to the open state, It becomes easier for game balls to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. Therefore, during the time-saving game, overflow of reserved balls is likely to occur, so during the time-saving game, unlike during the normal game, many variable lid symbols P are hidden, and the upper limit of the reserved balls is 8. By encouraging the player to play the game so that the number of balls is 6, which is less than the number of balls, it is possible to have the player play the game in a way that prevents the held balls from being stored up to the upper limit and causing an overflow. can. In addition, in the time-saving game state, when the number of balls on hold reaches the fifth, the variable lid pattern P of the seventh (m7) is hidden, and when the number of balls on hold reaches the seventh, the variable lid pattern of the eighth (m8) is hidden. P is hidden.

In addition, in this control example, during the time-saving game, when the number of balls on hold is the fifth, the seventh variable lid pattern P is hidden, but this is not limited to this, and when there are up to six balls on hold, the seventh The eye and the eighth variable lid pattern P may be maintained in a displayed state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game in an attempt to generate six or more reserved balls.

In addition, when the 4th reserved ball is memorized, the 6th and 7th balls of the variable lid pattern will be hidden depending on the content of the winning command, and the girl will be encouraged to increase the number of reserved balls up to the 6th ball. It may be configured such that the characters "Enter up to 6" are displayed to suggest the following. In this way, by informing the player in advance of the type of jackpot game (probable variable win or regular win) as a bonus for players who put up to 6, the player is motivated to accumulate reserved balls. can be increased.

As shown in FIGS. 213(a) and 213(b), the type of girl displayed in the character display area C is configured to vary depending on the pre-read result of the stored reserved ball (information indicated by the winning command). has been done. In the example shown in FIG. 214(a), a girl character that is normally displayed when the number of reserved balls is 4 is displayed, and in the example shown in FIG. An example is shown in which a special girl character different from the usual one is selected and displayed based on the fact that the lottery result of the look-ahead result has a specific result when the eye reserved ball is memorized. There is. Here, the specific result is the result of winning a lottery to determine the type of girl that is different from the usual one, and if the pre-read result is a jackpot or a miss super reach, the probability of winning is set high. . With this configuration, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation for a jackpot based on the type of girl character displayed to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, with reference to FIGS. 214(a) and 214(b), the display mode when the number of reserved prizes reaches the maximum value and then an over-win is made will be described. In FIG. 214(a), when the number of pending items is stored up to the upper limit value, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C indicates "MAX" with a balloon comment indicating that the number of pending items is the upper limit value. characters are displayed. After that, if a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 and an overflow occurs, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C changes to the character J2. will be displayed, and the text "Overflow" will be displayed to indicate that there has been an overflow. In this manner, when an overflow occurs, by notifying the player that an overflow has occurred in an easy-to-understand manner, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring frequently.

In addition, in this control example, the type of character is displayed while being varied for the purpose of suppressing overflow, but if the purpose is to increase the profit of the game parlor, the displayed character type may be changed by causing overflow. Depending on the type and content of the comment, the results of the judgment of the special symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner, the pre-reading results of the stored reserved balls (results of judgment, etc.), and the current gaming state (normal gaming state or variable playing state) ) type of notification may be performed. With this configuration, by playing a game while generating an overflow, the player can enjoy various performances, and it is possible to generate an overflow that is disadvantageous to the player while enjoying it.

With reference to FIGS. 215(a) and 215(b), the display mode when the reach-for-win hold effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 215(a), when the fluctuation patterns (various types of normal reach, various types of super reach) that become the reach display mode are executed, a predetermined lottery (see Z2324 in FIG. 262) is executed, and the lottery When it is determined that the special holding effect is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 215, when the ready-to-reach display mode is selected, the display mode of the ready-to-reach holding effect is set. When the reach hold effect is executed, the 5th and 6th variable lid symbols P will be hidden regardless of the number of held balls, the girl character J1 will be displayed, and a balloon comment will say ``Save up to 6 balls.'' ” are displayed to suggest to the player to accumulate 6 reserved balls while the reach is changing.

As shown in FIG. 215(b), if you accumulate up to 6 reserved balls during the reach display, the even numbered symbol "6" will change to the odd numbered symbol "7", which is a symbol type that is advantageous to the player. Displayed as variable. Furthermore, the words "Good job" are displayed in a speech bubble from the girl character J1, and the color of the sixth reserved symbol is displayed in a variable manner (for example, from blue to red, etc.). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the shooting of the game ball to play the game even during the reach, and it is possible to increase the profit on the game parlor side.

In addition, in this control example, an example was shown in which the reach symbol is varied when the number of reserved balls reaches the specified number (6). In some cases, instead of changing the reach symbol to an odd-numbered symbol, a shoal of fish swimming from right to left is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the expectation of a jackpot is determined by the number and color of the fish. The system is configured to notify the user or to display a notice such as "Congratulations" indicating the result of the judgment.

With reference to FIGS. 216(a) and 216(b), the display mode in the lucky hold performance will be described. If a specific variation (a variation in which you win a preview lottery that executes a lucky retention effect) is being executed. If you hit the jackpot last time, remember the number of reserved balls when the reserved balls corresponding to that variation are memorized. , a mark pattern n6 as shown in FIG. 216(a) is displayed on the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the number of reserved balls, which corresponds to the mark pattern n6 "Aim for 6" from the girl character J1 in the character display area C. A notification is executed to urge the player to accumulate the reserved balls up to the reserved number. As shown in FIG. 216(b), when up to six reserved balls are memorized during the lucky reserved performance, the words "Good job" are displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22, the main display area Dm , characters (preliminary display mode) indicating that a special symbol that is changing and a variable probability jackpot will be given are displayed.

In this way, the system is configured to notify even the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot game. In this control example, the present effect is configured to be executed when there is a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is a miss, the judgment value of the obtained jackpot type will be used to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot if it is a jackpot. It may be configured such that the type is determined and the type is notified so that the player can expect a jackpot.

In addition, in the lucky hold effect, when the hold balls stored in the variable lid pattern P (5 to 8 hold) become a hit, the number of hold balls is memorized, and the next time the jackpot variation is executed, the lucky hold ball will be displayed. It is configured to be displayed as a pending number. By configuring this way, it is possible to make the player aware of how many holds were stored when the previous jackpot occurred, and the player can accumulate as many holds as possible and perform lucky holds. It is possible to cause the game to be played in such a way that the performance is easily executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 216(a), the reserved symbol has a number (number of reserved balls at winning time: 216) is added and displayed. This number of reservations at the time of winning is variable, when the reservation symbol is consumed (the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the reservation symbol has started), it slides to the reservation symbol display area with one lower variation order (variable) Even if the number is displayed, the same number will be displayed. With this configuration, even when a fluctuation starts, it is possible to check the number of reservations at the time of winning in that fluctuation.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the number of pending prizes at the time of winning the jackpot game executed during the jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance, etc.) will be displayed and notified by numbers, symbols, etc. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 217(a) and 217(b), a long-time win (a win game in which the electric accessory 640a remains open for a longer period of time than in a normal win), which is one of the win types of normal symbols. ) The display mode of the hold effect when the long open effect is executed will be explained. As shown in FIG. 217(a), when the long time winning of the normal symbol is won and the long time winning game is started, a comment "It's open" is displayed in the main display area Dm. This display notifies the player that a long winning game is in progress, and it is advantageous for the player to avoid firing the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance during the long winning game. It is possible to suppress the problem of missing an opportunity for a game ball to enter the ball opening 640r. Also, if a game ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r during this long winning game, the reserved symbol corresponding to that entry ball will be colored in a black color different from the normal time. Displayed as a pending symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to distinguish between held balls stored during a long-time winning game and held balls stored during other periods.

As shown in FIG. 217(b), when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol stored during the long-time winning game starts, it is synchronized with the start of the scrolling display of the third symbol. , the symbol of a treasure chest is displayed in the main display area Dm, the words "If the treasure box opens, it's a big chance!!" are displayed, and the treasure box is shown to open while the third symbol is changing, so that the symbol is changing. It is suggested to the player that there is a high expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a jackpot.

With this configuration, when a long-term hit with a normal symbol is executed, the performance of the reserved ball is changed, and the special performance is also performed during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball. Since the winnings are executed for a long time, the performance of the game can be greatly varied, and a game with a fresh feel can be provided.

Returning to FIG. 207, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a regular symbol lottery is being executed as the ball passes through the through gate 67, and stops after the variation is completed. As a pattern, a normal pattern (second pattern) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal pattern is shown in a lighting state.

More specifically, the second symbol display device 83 has a variable display that alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as the second symbol each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. It will be done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the "○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a is activated (released) for a predetermined time, As a result, the configuration is such that the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 mentioned above, and is also displayed by lighting on the second symbol holding lamp 84. The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided in four, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

Note that the variable display of the normal symbols (second symbols) can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this control example, as well as by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be held through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, as is the case with the first ball entry port 64 and the second right ball entry port 640r, but may be less than or equal to three times, or The number of times may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retention lamp 84 may not be lit.

A sorting device 700 is disposed below the variable display unit 80, and inside the sorting device 700, game balls that have entered the opening 710a are alternately sorted by a sorting member 762 into balls. A first ball entry port 64 and a second right ball entry port 640r through which a ball can enter are provided. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, the first ball entrance switch and the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. As a result, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn by the main controller 110 due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch and the second ball entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is displayed as the first one. 1 is indicated by the LED 37a of the symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r also serve as one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters each of them.

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls when balls enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is the same, but the number of prize balls is not limited to this, and the number of prize balls may be different. good. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, three prize balls are awarded, and when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r, four prize balls are awarded for the right second ball entrance 640r. The number of balls may be set to be larger than the number of prize balls for the first ball entrance 64.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 results in a jackpot, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined period of time (variable time) has elapsed so that the jackpot symbol stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (16 round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated a number of times set for the type of jackpot game to be executed (for example, 16 times (16 rounds) for jackpot A). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined time. A special gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may also be formed.

Pasting spaces K1 and K2 are provided at the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 for pasting certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a are guided to a ball ejection path (not shown) through an out port 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 218). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 218). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 performs special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 219, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters etc. are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the following operations.

To set the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special hit random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and a jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. Special hit type counter C2 to be used, stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbol (reach type, out of reach (out of reach length A, out of short A), out of reach type), variation pattern selection A variation type counter CS1 used for this, and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1 are used. Further, a normal winning random number counter C4 is used for drawing the normal symbols, and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 243), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 255). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved areas) for storing reserved balls of the 1st special symbol, and a reserved ball of the 2nd special symbol. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved area) for the purpose of A ball execution area is provided. Each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter according to the timing of ball entry into the first ball entrance 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, similar values are stored in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of ball entry into the second right ball entry port 640r.

In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4). The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing when the ball passes through any of the second entrance ports (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The special winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 957), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 957 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 957). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 957, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 957. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 255).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), for example, and is updated at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. The ball is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol jackpot random number counter C1. is determined to be a special symbol jackpot when it matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for times when the probability of the special symbol is low (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and when the probability is high that the probability of the special symbol becoming a jackpot is higher than when the probability is low (for the special symbol). It is divided into two types: one for the period when the symbol is in a high probability state, and the number of random numbers that will be a jackpot included in each type is set to be different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. Furthermore, what are the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221(a)) for when the probability of special symbols is high and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221(a)) for when the probability of special symbols is low? , is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits the jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the special winning type counter C2 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the value of the special winning type counter C2 is updated when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the appropriate timing.

Here, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if the special symbol is missed. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is missed.

On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in is the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the special win type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. . In this embodiment, four jackpot types are set: "Jackpot A", "Jackpot B1", "Jackpot B2", and "Jackpot C", and the special winning type counter C2 determines whether "Jackpot A", "Jackpot A", One of "jackpot B1", "jackpot B2", and "jackpot C" is determined. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The special winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 957. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that result in a special symbol jackpot when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the random numbers "0 to 2" are in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability times. 202a. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 3 out of a total of 958 random numbers, so the probability that a special symbol will be a jackpot is "3/958".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 27 random numbers that result in a special symbol jackpot, and the values "0 to 26" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. . In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 27 out of the total number of random numbers of 958, so the probability that the special symbol becomes a jackpot is "27/958".

In addition, in this embodiment, the random number value that results in a jackpot is stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability times, and the random number value that results in a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability times. In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set for each jackpot. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random number value for a jackpot regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random number value will be inputted from the outside and that a jackpot will be won illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value for a jackpot is changed depending on the situation (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state). By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will result in a jackpot for the special symbol, so it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. As shown in FIG. 222(a), the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type includes the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 and the A special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 that is referred to in correspondence with the lottery of the 2 special symbols is set respectively.

The special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 indicates that when the variation of the first special symbol stops and the lottery result in that variation is a jackpot, the special symbol set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol reserved ball execution area is selected. A judgment value for comparing (judging) with the value of the winning type counter C2 is stored in correspondence with the jackpot type.

FIG. 222(b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, when the random value in the acquired special win type counter is "0 to 39", the jackpot type is "jackpot A". Also, when the value was "40-75", the jackpot type was "Jackpot B1", and when the value was "76-79", the jackpot type was "Jackpot B2", "80-99". In each case, the jackpot type is set to "jackpot C".

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that four types of winnings (Jackpot A, Jackpot B1, Jackpot B2, Jackpot C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special winning type counter C2. has been done.

In addition, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the variation of the second special symbol stops and the lottery result in that variation is a jackpot. A judgment value for comparing (judging) with the value of the special winning type counter C2 is stored in correspondence with the jackpot type.

FIG. 222(c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this special drawing 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, when the random value in the acquired special win type counter is "0 to 39", the jackpot type is "jackpot A". Also, when the value was "40-87", the jackpot type was "Jackpot B1", and when the value was "88-91", the jackpot type was "Jackpot B2", "92-99". In each case, the jackpot type is set to "jackpot C".

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that four types of winnings (Jackpot A, Jackpot B1, Jackpot B2, Jackpot C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special winning type counter C2. has been done. In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type that is selected when the judgment result is a jackpot is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player can easily understand the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to generate interest in which lottery is being held. In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability variable jackpot where the probability variation is given for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same (60%), the probability variation percentage is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the gaming machine As a whole, it is possible to suppress the problem that the probability variation ratio is not constant. In addition, since the selection ratio of jackpot C in the second special symbol is set low, the probability that the 16R probability variable jackpot will be selected is set higher than that of the first special symbol, which is configured to be advantageous to the player. There is.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The above-mentioned stop type selection counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 determine rough display modes such as so-called short time off, long time off, normal reach, super reach, etc. Determining the display mode is specifically determining the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and detailed information of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 255) to be described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Note that the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 220b) that stores random values for determining the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations from the values (random values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is controlled by the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 221(b), the variation pattern selection table 202b includes a normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 used in a gaming state (normal gaming state) when the probability of determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not is low. , a time-saving variation pattern table 202b2 used in a gaming state (high-probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state) when the probability of correctness determination of the normal symbol is high is set. In addition, although it will be explained in more detail in the description of the selection of the variation pattern in the audio lamp control device 113 to be described later, the main control device 110 uses the judgment result, the number of balls on hold, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the rough content of the variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the variation time are determined, and a variation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224. FIG. 223 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the special symbol lottery results, and for each variation pattern, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter are set. A value of CS1 is assigned. In addition, when the result of the judgment is a win, each variation pattern is changed according to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d based on the value of the acquired special win type counter C2). is set. Further, if the result of the judgment is negative, a variation pattern is set for each of the number of balls held at the start of variation (either 1 to 4 or 5 to 8).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223, if the judgment result is a hit, and if the jackpot type is "Jackpot A", the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of reserved balls is (Regardless of No. 1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "51 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

When the jackpot type is "Jackpot B1" or "Jackpot B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 - 8 for the number of pending balls (in other words, regardless of the number of pending balls)" 60”, normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "61 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

When the jackpot type is "jackpot C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is either "0 to 250" for the number of balls held from 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of balls held) In this case, the super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected for the value "0 to 100" of the variation type counter CS1, and the super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected for the value "101 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. Jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected.

In this way, when the result of the judgment is a jackpot, a variation pattern such as normal reach or super reach, which has a long variation time, is selected regardless of the number of items on hold. Therefore, by executing a variation pattern with a long variation time, the player can expect that the result of the judgment will be a jackpot.

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment is incorrect, if the number of suspended balls is 1 to 4, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is between "0 to 209", the variation type counter When deviation length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of CS1 "0 to 198" and the value of stop type selection counter C3 is one of "210 to 239", the value of variation type counter CS1 is selected. If normal reach off A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "240 to 245", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is When Super Reach Out A (variation No. 9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "246 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " 0 to 198'', Super Reach Off B (variation No. 10) is selected.

In addition, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "0 to 209" for the number of held pitches from 5 to 8, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". , when short deviation A (variation No. 11) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "210 to 239", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "240 to 245", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super to "0 to 198". If out-of-reach A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "246 to 250", super reach occurs when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". Outlier B (variation No. 10) is selected.

In this way, if the result of the judgment is incorrect, the fluctuation pattern is set so that the fluctuation pattern with a small number of balls held (1 to 4) and a long fluctuation time is likely to be selected. By entering the game ball into the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r, reserved balls are likely to occur, and a period in which the fluctuation of special symbols is stopped occurs (no lottery game is played). The system is configured to suppress the problem of players becoming bored with the game due to the occurrence of a certain period of time. In addition, by setting the selection rate of normal reach and super reach low when there are many balls on hold, fluctuations in normal reach and super reach are executed when there are many balls on hold. It can make you expect that it will be a hit.

Next, referring to FIG. 224, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202b2. In the time-saving variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the special symbol lottery results, and for each variation pattern, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are set. The value is assigned. In addition, when the result of the judgment is a win, each variation pattern is changed according to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d based on the value of the acquired special win type counter C2). is set. Further, if the result of the judgment is negative, a variation pattern is set for each of the number of reserved balls (either 1 to 2 or 3 to 8) at the start of variation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 224, if the judgment result is a hit, and if the jackpot type is "Jackpot A", the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of reserved balls is (Regardless of No. 1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "91 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

When the jackpot type is "Jackpot B1" or "Jackpot B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 - 8 for the number of pending balls (in other words, regardless of the number of pending balls)" 100”, normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "101 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

When the jackpot type is "jackpot C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is either "0 to 250" for the number of balls held from 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of balls held) In this case, the super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected for the value "0 to 100" of the variation type counter CS1, and the super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected for the value "101 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. Jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected.

In this way, when the result of the judgment is a jackpot, a variation pattern such as normal reach or super reach, which has a long variation time, is selected regardless of the number of items on hold. Therefore, by executing a variation pattern with a long variation time, the player can expect that the result of the judgment will be a jackpot.

On the other hand, if the judgment result is incorrect, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "0 to 209" for the number of held pitches of 1 to 2, the change type counter When deviation length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of CS1 "0 to 198" and the value of stop type selection counter C3 is one of "210 to 229", the value of variation type counter CS1 is selected. If normal reach off A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is If super reach off A (variation No. 9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "240 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " 0 to 198'', Super Reach Off B (variation No. 10) is selected.

In addition, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "0 to 199" for the number of held balls from 3 to 8, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". , if short deviation B (variation No. 12) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is between "200 and 229", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is between "0 and 198". When normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "200 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super to "0 to 198". If out-of-reach A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "230 to 239", super reach occurs when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". Outlier B (variation No. 10) is selected.

Here, the fluctuation time (fluctuation period) in the fluctuation pattern of the short deviation B is configured to 2000 ms (2 seconds), which is shorter than the fluctuation time that can be selected in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1. There is. As a result, if the correctness judgment result is a miss and the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the miss short B is selected with a high probability, making it possible to make many changes in the special symbol in a short time. , it is possible to easily shorten the period until a jackpot is determined (the period between jackpots) and improve the efficiency of the game.

The normal winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 239). Further, when the normal winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every time a timer interrupt process is performed, and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the second ball entry opening (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. It is acquired when the ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The random number value for a normal symbol win is set by the normal win random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is If it matches the value of the random number that is a win set by the normal win random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol has won. In addition, this normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)) is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state), and for the probability of the normal symbol winning from the low probability period. It is divided into two types: one for high probability times (periods in which the normal symbols are in a time-saving state), and the number of random numbers that will be a jackpot included in each type is set to be different. Furthermore, the types of winnings for the normal symbols are set as normal winnings and long-term winnings, and the values of the normal winning random number counter C4 are set for each.

Here, in the normal game state (low probability game state) for a normal win with a normal symbol, and in the jackpot game state, the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is activated to the open state with an open time of 0.2 seconds is executed once. It's a win. In addition, during the time saving period and the probability variable period, the action of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state with an open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice to win. On the other hand, a long-time win is a win in which the action of operating the electric accessory 640a to the open state in a 2-second open time is repeated twice, regardless of the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a that is executed during the short time period for normal winnings and the variable probability period and the opening operation for long winnings are set to be the same, but the opening operation for long winnings is not limited to this. It may also be an opening operation. Specifically, the opening operation may be performed once for 3 seconds, for example. With this configuration, it is possible to make the ball enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r more easily when winning for a long time, and the fluctuation in the second special symbol during the normal game. The display can be easily executed, and the player can enjoy the changes in the game performance by the fluctuating display of the second special symbol in which a fresh preview display or the like is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 221(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is between 5 and 6, the normal winning of the normal symbol is achieved. It is determined that Further, if it is any one from 7 to 8, it is determined that it is a long-time win of the normal symbol. On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, if the value of the acquired normal win random number counter C4 is between 5 and 204, it is determined that it is a normal win of the normal symbol. In addition, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the configuration is such that the long-term hit of the normal symbol is not set, but when the probability of the regular symbol is high, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is the same as the long-term win, so it is normal. Even if it's a hit, it's virtually the same as a long-term win.

In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between when the probability of a normal symbol is low and when the probability of a normal symbol is high. Therefore, when the probability is low, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is operated and the frequency with which the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of game balls by the player and increase the profit on the game parlor side. On the other hand, in the short time period and the variable probability period where the probability is high, the electric accessory 640a can be given a chance to operate with a probability of "1/1.2", and the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance It is possible to increase the chances of hitting the ball into 640r. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's consumption of game balls and set a gaming state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game with the aim of playing the game with high probability, and can play the game for more time.

When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 8", it is determined that the win is won, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. The symbol "○" is displayed as a lighted symbol. Then, if the value of the random number counter C4 is "5 to 6" as a normal win, the electric accessory 640a is opened (opening operation) for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal win. In addition, in this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is released for "0.2 seconds x once"; The time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times". Further, if the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is "21 to 28", the right second ball entry opening 640r is opened for "2 seconds x 2 times" as a long winning.

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random numbers that result in a jackpot for the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204." These random numbers are stored in the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)) for high probability times. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/1.2".

When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display of the normal symbols. Executes for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the win is won, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. The symbol "○" is displayed as a lighted symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is released "twice for 2 seconds". In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, compared to when the probability is low for normal symbols, the time of the variable display becomes very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, and furthermore, the time of the variable display is very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, and furthermore, the second right ball entrance 640r Since the opening period becomes very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol hits, the second right ball entrance 640r is opened for "2 seconds x 2 times". The opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 3 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243). , are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 255).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 218, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 219, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags and counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 255) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 254). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 253) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 220(a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 includes the above-described special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221), fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 221(b)), In addition to the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)) and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 222(a) to 222(c)), a winning command table 202e is set. Further, although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 stores various data, programs, etc. necessary for the game in addition to the above-mentioned ones.

FIG. 225 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the winning command table 202e. The winning command table 202e is created by determining the determination result such as the variation pattern to be selected when the stored reserved ball starts to fluctuate in the pre-reading process (S320: FIG. 249) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. This is a table for determining winning commands corresponding to the results. As shown in FIG. 225, when the lottery result in pre-reading is a jackpot, a winning command corresponding to the determined jackpot type and the selected variation pattern type is determined. Thereby, it is possible to notify not only the variation pattern type and the success/failure determination result but also the jackpot type by the winning command, and more detailed information can be notified. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a loss, a winning command corresponding to each variation pattern type is determined. It should be noted that when the variation pattern types are Output Length A, Output Shortness A, and Output Shortness B, the same winning command "C100" is set in the winning command table 202e as all winnings.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 220(b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. , special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, open number counter 203g, long time open flag 203i, short time counter 203j, and variable execution. It has a flag 203k, a probability variable flag 203m, a jackpot medium flag 203n, a variable order storage area 203p, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas includes: Each value of a special win random number counter C1, a special win type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding area). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th reserved area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th area). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). A normal win random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is distributed to four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4). ) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas. That is, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, winnings stored in other holding areas Shift processing is performed to shift the data to a reservation area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d displays a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of pending pitches (the number of times of waiting) up to four times (fluctuating display performed on the display device 81). The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it reaches the maximum value of 4. 1 is added (see Z404 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see Z205 in FIG. 33).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved balls N in the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see Z206 in FIG. 33 and Z405 in FIG. 35). . The held ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts reserved balls based on the winning of the right second ball entrance 640r, and the other configuration is the same as the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203d. Therefore, detailed explanation will be omitted.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the main control device by a pending ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of balls held in the variable display held in 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the number of held pitches deviates from the actual fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received command for the number of held pitches.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 to a maximum of four times. This is a counter that counts up to The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 ( (See Z504 in FIG. 252). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (see Z406 in FIG. 250).

When the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (Z505 in FIG. 252). On the other hand, if the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67 and the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (Fig. 252 Z503: No).

The opening number counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of openings of the electric accessory 64c. The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric accessory 64c.

The long-time open flag 203i is a flag indicating that the game is open for a long time. This long-time open flag 203i is set to ON in the process Z429 in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 251) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In addition, in the process of Z403 in the normal symbol variation process (Z106: Figure 250), if a new normal symbol variation is started (after a long winning game is executed, the next normal symbol variation is started). set to off).

The time-saving counter 203j is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with normal symbols, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with normal symbols. If the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with normal symbols. The initial value of this short-time counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn in the main controller 110 and a special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving counter 203j.

The variation execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether to execute variation of the first special symbol or variation of the second special symbol. In this control example, the fluctuation is started according to the order in which the balls entered the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r (the order in which the balls were held and stored). Here, when the variation of the special symbol stops and the variation of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball starts, the variation execution determination process (Z204: FIG. 245) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is performed. Based on the order data of pending storage stored in the variation order storage area 203p, which will be described later, it is determined whether the variation stored next is pending data corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the corresponding variation execution flag 203k is set on according to the determination result (Z245, Z247 in FIG. 245).

The variable probability flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current gaming state is a variable probability gaming state. This probability change flag 203m is set when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is other than jackpot A in the process of Z1113 in the jackpot control process (Z1104: FIG. 256) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 ( Z1111:No), it is set to on. In addition, in the process Z220 in the special symbol variation process (Z104: FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to OFF when stopping the variable display of the special symbol that becomes a jackpot.

The jackpot flag 203n is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a jackpot game. This jackpot flag 203n is set to ON when the start of the jackpot game is set in the process Z221 of the special symbol variation process (Z104: FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In addition, in the process Z1114 of the jackpot control process (Z256: FIG. 256) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to OFF when the jackpot game ends.

The variation order storage area 203p is an area where the holding order is stored when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r and is stored as a held ball. In this control example, the variation of the special symbols is configured to be executed in the order in which they are stored, and one of the special symbols is not executed preferentially. In addition, in this control example, since the distribution device 700 is configured to alternately distribute the balls to the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r, the variation is started in the order in which the balls are held and stored. Therefore, even in the variation of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be executed alternately, and when only one of the reserved balls is consumed, the reserved ball of that special symbol will be It is possible to suppress the problem of overflow.

In the other memory area 203z, necessary flags, counters, storage data, etc. for other control processing executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 are set, but details thereof will be omitted.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc. (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 receives output from the various switches 208. and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 253) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and continuous preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the background mode displayed at the time of super reach. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the presentation.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls the display of error commands including the type of error. to the device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, a hold change selection table 222b, a hold effect mode selection table 222c, a hold lid range selection table 222d, and a hold lid command selection table. Table 222e, Hold lid color change selection table 222f, Lucky hold command table 222g, Background mode selection table 222h, Hold character selection table 222i, Hold character change table 222j, Speech bubble selection table 222k, Reach effect lottery table 222m, Reach start time A calculation table 222n and a lucky pending lottery table 222p are stored.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time and variation pattern type corresponding to the variation pattern command, and one variation pattern is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection (not shown).

The pending change selection table 222b is necessary for determining whether or not to display the pending symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a variable manner based on the received winning command, and for the performance to be executed according to the content of the change. This is a selection table for obtaining a pending change value.

FIG. 227(a) schematically shows the contents of this pending change selection table 222b. In the pending change selection table 222b, the value of the production counter 223h is assigned to the type of the received winning command, and the pending symbol in the sub-display area Ds is displayed to change according to the value (range) of the production counter 223h. A mode (see FIG. 211(a)) and a pending change value are set. The details of the acquired hold change value will be explained in the hold effect mode selection table 222c described later.

Specifically, if the winning command type is out of order, and the value of the production counter 223h is one of "0 to 180", the display mode of the pending symbol should not be changed from the normal pending symbol. is determined, and the pending change value obtains 0. If the value of the production counter 223h is one of "181 to 198", the display mode of the pending symbol changes from the white circle symbol (the normal display mode of the pending symbol) to the blue circle symbol (change A). It is decided to do so, and the pending change value acquires 1.

When the winning command type is out of normal reach and the value of the production counter 223h is one of "0 to 50", no change is determined and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is one of "51 to 100", change A is determined, and 1 is obtained as the pending change value. If it is one of "101 to 198", it is decided to change the white circle pattern to a green circle pattern and display it, and a pending change value of 2 is obtained.

When the winning command type is out of super reach and the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "0 to 30", no change is determined and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is one of "31 to 90", change A is determined and a pending change value of 1 is obtained. If it is one of "91 to 198", change B is determined and a pending change value of 2 is obtained.

When the winning command type is normal reach jackpot, if the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "0 to 20", no change is determined and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is one of "21 to 90", change A is determined and a pending change value of 1 is obtained. If it is one of "91 to 198", change B is determined and a pending change value of 2 is obtained.

When the winning command type is a super reach jackpot, if the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "0 to 10", no change is determined and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is one of "11 to 100", change A is determined and a pending change value of 1 is obtained. If it is one of "101 to 189", change B is determined and a pending change value of 2 is obtained. If it is one of "190 to 198", it is decided to change the white circle pattern to a red circle pattern and display it, and a pending change value of 3 is obtained.

In this way, by receiving a winning command, the color of the pending symbol will be changed and displayed depending on the content, so not only the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, but also the pending symbol that is being displayed will be retained and memorized. It is possible to predict the validity determination result corresponding to the pending symbol. In addition, since it is possible to notify the player in advance that the reach display mode will be reached when the variable display is displayed with change B, the player can be notified in advance that the special symbol will be in a reach display mode, so even if the special symbol is in a state before it changes, it will not be stored in the reserved memory. For example, the player can be made to expect the change to start, and even if a special symbol change that results in a miss is executed during that time, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. Furthermore, by setting a hold change value for each reach type, it is possible to develop a reach effect through different execution effects even for the same hold change, attracting players with unexpected effects. It is possible to attract.

The hold production mode selection table 222c is a table for selecting a plurality of modes prepared according to the hold change displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

FIG. 227(b) schematically shows the contents of this pending performance mode selection table 222c. In the hold effect mode selection table 222c, the hold effect mode is set according to the value (range) of the hold change value acquired in the hold change selection table 222b (see Z2404 in FIG. 266). Specifically, when the hold change value is "0", the normal mode is determined (selected) as the hold effect mode. Normal mode is a state in which all the pending symbols being displayed have not changed, and when the number of pending balls is 4 or more, the interval between the display range of the pending symbol and the variable lid symbol P is one. This is a mode in which the display is variably displayed (see FIG. 210(b)).

If the hold change value is one of ``1~2'', the preview A mode is determined (selected) as the hold effect mode. Notice A mode is a state in which any change (any of Change A to Change C) is set for the pending symbol being displayed, and when the number of pending balls is 4 or more, the pending symbol is This is a hold performance mode in which the symbol and the variable lid symbol P are displayed without any interval between the display ranges (see FIG. 211(a)). Strictly speaking, FIG. 211(a) is not a display mode representing the notice A mode, but is an example of a display mode of the pending performance mode of the notice B mode, which will be described later. In the notice A mode, the content of the displayed comment is different from the state shown in FIG. 211(a). In the notice A mode, when a reserved ball occurs after the reserved symbol whose color has been changed and the reserved symbol is displayed, one variable lid symbol P is also hidden accordingly (for example, the state of FIG. 211(a) When the number of reserved balls increases (occurs) by one, the variable lid symbol P with the letter 5 is hidden), and a comment indicating the level of expectation for a jackpot for the reserved symbol whose color is variable. The display is performed by a speech bubble. In this way, in the preview A mode, in order to make the game play so that a reserved ball is generated after the color of the reserved symbol is changed, every time a reserved ball is generated, a jackpot is given to the changed reserved ball. The system is configured to notify the level of expectation.

When the hold change value is "3", the preview B mode is determined as the hold effect mode. Notice B mode is when there is a change in the pending symbols being displayed, and when the number of pending balls is 4 or more, similar to notice A mode, there is a change (change A) in the pending symbols being displayed. , change B, change C) is set (state) and the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the display range of the reserved symbol and the variable lid symbol P are displayed without any interval. mode (see FIG. 211(a)), or a mode in which reserved symbols are displayed on the display range of the variable lid symbol P (see FIG. 211(b)).

With this configuration, not only can the color of the reserved symbol be changed, but also the display range of the variable lid symbol P can be varied by increasing or decreasing the number of reserved balls, and the result of the judgment can be predicted based on the content of the change. This expands the fun of playing games and attracts more players. In addition, unlike the preview A mode, this is a hold effect in which the player is forced to play the game so as not to generate any more held balls. Expectations can be heightened by focusing on the start of the change (dynamic display) of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

The holding lid range selection table 222d includes a plurality of data tables for acquiring holding lid range values necessary for setting the display range of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. It is set.

Here we will explain the special effects that occur during normal mode. The normal mode has special effects such as a short-term winning effect, a hold effect during reach, and a lucky hold effect.

A short-term winning performance is a performance that is executed when the time required for the number of reserved balls to go from 0 to 1 and then to 4 is less than 5 seconds. In the mode, the interval between the reserved lid symbol P and the reserved symbol is set to be one reserved ball (the reserved lid symbol P is displayed in a variable manner), but in the short-term winning performance, the interval between the reserved lid symbol P and the reserved symbol is set to be equal to one reserved ball. The number of pending lid symbols P is displayed in a variable manner so that the interval between each pending symbol P is 2, and the girl character J0 indicating that it is a short-term winning presentation is displayed. This is a performance that displays the comment "It's early." In the short-term winning performance, when the gaming state is in the normal state, no other special performance is being executed (the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 0), and the value of the number of pending balls changes from 0 to 1 or more. In this case, if the number of reserved balls reaches 4 before the short-term winning timer 223q that measures the elapsed time passes 5 seconds, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 (see Z2425 in FIG. 267). ) and starts execution (see FIG. 212(a)), and when the short-term winning timer 223q passes 5 seconds, the special effect status storage area is set to 0 (see Z2606 in FIG. 270), and the execution ends. It is.

The on hold performance during reach is a performance that sets a notice display mode that prompts the player to play the game so as to accumulate the number of pending items up to a predetermined number (for example, 6 in FIG. 215(a)) while the reach is changing. . When the variation type is reach, this on-reach pending effect is determined by lottery based on the reach effect lottery table 222m, which will be described later, and if execution is possible, the reach start time will be calculated, which will be described later. The value of the pending performance start timer 223r, which is set based on the variation type by the table 222n, becomes 0 after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and another special performance is executed at the timing when the reach performance starts. (the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 0), the execution is started by setting the special performance status storage area to 2 (see Z2327 in FIG. 262) (see FIG. 215(a)), and This is a performance that ends when the fluctuation ends.

The lucky hold effect is to memorize the number of held balls (held symbols) when they are memorized (displayed), and when it becomes a jackpot (specific judgment result), the held ball that became the jackpot will be displayed. A predetermined mark pattern (see FIG. 216(a)) is displayed in the reserved symbol display area corresponding to the stored number of reserved balls at the time the ball enters the entrance, and the reserved balls are accumulated up to that mark symbol. This is an effect that displays a preview display mode that urges the player to play the game. When you have accumulated pending symbols up to the mark symbol, as shown in FIG. 216(b), by pressing the frame button 22, you can change whether the current gaming state (probability variable gaming state (special gaming state)) or low probability gaming An effect is performed to notify the player of the current state (normal gaming state). In the lucky hold performance, when no other special effects are being executed (the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 0) and a jackpot is achieved as a result of the success/failure judgment of a past winning start, the value of the number of held balls is If the lucky pending storage value 223p, which is stored when is 5 or more, is stored, a lottery is made to determine whether or not the execution can be executed based on the lucky pending lottery table 222p, which will be described later. This is a performance that starts execution (see FIG. 216(a)) when the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is set to 3 (see Z2307 in FIG. 261), and ends when the next variation starts.

In this way, even in the normal mode where there are no pending changes, the pending effects related to the pending symbols can be adjusted based on the time interval of starting winnings, the number of pending balls during reach fluctuations, and the success/failure judgment results based on past starting winnings. Depending on the memory contents, various performances can be provided and the performance effect can be enhanced.

FIG. 228(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the reserved lid range selection table 222d. The reservation lid range selection table 222d includes a normal reservation lid range selection table 222d1, a notice A mode reservation lid range selection table 222d2, a notice B mode reservation lid range selection table 222d3, a short-term winning time reservation lid range selection table 222d4, and a reach-to-win effect. A holding lid range selection table 222d5 and a time saving holding lid range selection table 222d6 are provided.

The normal reserved lid range selection table 222d1 is a table used to obtain the reserved lid range value when the reserved production mode is the normal mode. FIG. 228(b) schematically shows the contents of the normal retention lid range selection table 222d1. In the normal reserved lid range selection table 222d1, reserved lid range values are acquired for the value (range) of the number of reserved pitches. In addition, the normal mode means that the special performance is not being executed (the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 0), and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability gaming state (low probability jackpot probability and non-time saving). When acquiring the pending lid range value (see Z2354 in FIG. 263) (game state)), and when acquiring the pending lid range value during the lucky pending performance (the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 3) (FIG. 263) (see Z2346).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved pitches is "0 to 3", a value of 4 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved pitches is "4", 3 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved pitches is "3", 2 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved pitches is "2", a value of 1 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "1", 0 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved pitches is "0", 0 is acquired as the reserved lid range value.

The preview A mode pending lid range selection table 222d2 is a table used to obtain the pending lid range value when the pending presentation mode is the preview A mode. FIG. 228(c) schematically shows the contents of the advance notice A mode reservation lid range selection table 222d2. In the preview A mode reservation lid range selection table 222d2, a reservation lid range value is acquired for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2351 in FIG. 263).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved pitches is "0 to 3", a value of 4 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved pitches is "4", 4 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved pitches is "3", 3 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved pitches is "2", 2 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved pitches is "1", 1 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved pitches is "0", 0 is acquired as the reserved lid range value.

The preview B mode pending lid range selection table 222d3 is a table used to obtain the pending lid range value when the pending presentation mode is the preview B mode.

FIG. 228(d) schematically shows the contents of the advance notice B mode reservation lid range selection table 222d3. In the notice B mode reservation lid range selection table 222d3, reservation lid range values are obtained for the value (range) of the number of reserved pitches and the value (range) of the reservation notice counter (see Z2349 in FIG. 263).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved pitches is "0 to 4" and the value of the reservation notice counter is "0 to 4", 4 is acquired as the reservation cover range value. When the value of the number of reserved pitches is "5 to 8", and the value of the reservation notice counter is "1 to 4", the reservation lid range value is obtained as 4, and the value of the reservation notice counter is "5". In the case of , the pending lid range value is 3, when the value of the pending notice counter is "6", the pending cover range value is 2, and when the value of the pending notice counter is "7", 1 is acquired as the hold lid range value, and when the value of the hold notice counter is "8", 0 is acquired as the hold lid range value.

The short-term winning hold cover range selection table 222d4 (FIG. 229(a)) is a table used to obtain the hold cover range value when executing the short-term winning effect. FIG. 229(a) schematically shows the contents of the short-term winning hold lid range selection table 222d4. In the short-term winning time retention lid range selection table 222d4, a retention lid range value is acquired for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2342 in FIG. 263).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved pitches is "4", 2 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved pitches is "5", 1 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved pitches is "6 to 8", 0 is acquired as the reserved lid range value.

The pending lid range selection table 222d5 during a ready-to-win performance is a table used to obtain a held lid range value in the case of a held performance during a reach. FIG. 229(b) schematically shows the contents of the hold lid range selection table 222d5 during reach performance. In the ready-to-reach performance holding cover range selection table 222d5, a holding cover range value is acquired for the value (range) of the number of held balls (see Z2344 in FIG. 263).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved pitches is "0 to 8", 2 is acquired as the reserved lid range value.

The time-saving hold lid range selection table 222d6 indicates that the special performance is not being executed (the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 0), the hold performance mode is normal mode, and the gaming state is the time-saving state (the value of the time-saving counter is other than 0). ) is a table used to obtain the hold lid range value.

FIG. 229(c) schematically shows the contents of the time-saving retention lid range selection table 222d6. In the time-saving reservation lid range selection table 222d6, a reservation lid range value is acquired for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2353 in FIG. 263).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved pitches is "0 to 6", 2 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved pitches is "7", 1 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved pitches is "8", 0 is acquired as the reserved lid range value.

With this configuration, the display range of the variable lid pattern P to be displayed can be changed in various ways according to the judgment of winning or not at the start of winning and the pending performance that is switched according to the type of variation. It is possible to express a production effect that increases participation.

The reserved lid command selection table 222e sets the display range of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved lid range value acquired in the reserved lid range selection table 222d. This is a table used to select commands for.

FIG. 230(a) schematically shows the contents of the pending lid command selection table 222e. The pending lid command selection table 222e sets a pending lid command to be sent to the display control device for the pending lid range value (range) acquired by the pending lid range selection table 222d.

Specifically, when the holding lid range value is "0", BF00 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P becomes the shortest display (see FIG. 214(a)). When the holding lid range value is "1", BF01 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P becomes 1 (only the area of holding 8). When the holding lid range value is "2", BF02 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P becomes 2 (area of holdings 7 to 8 (see FIG. 212(a))). When the holding lid range value is "3", BF03 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P becomes 3 (area of holdings 6 to 8 (see FIG. 213(a))). When the holding lid range value is "4", BF04 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P becomes 4 (area of holdings 5 to 8 (see FIG. 211(a))).

The setting of the hold lid command is performed in the hold lid setting process (Z2229) that is executed in the winning command reception process (Z2209) at the time of starting winning, and is executed in the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202) when the fluctuation starts. This is done in the hold lid setting process (Z2229). Therefore, the display of the variable lid pattern P can be changed by setting the display holding lid command based on the holding lid range value (see Z2355 in FIG. 263) every time the number of held balls changes.

The reserved lid color change selection table 222f displays the specified number of pieces (in the example shown in FIG. 211(a), This is a data table for determining a reserved cover pattern P corresponding to an area where the reserved symbol is displayed when more than 4 reserved balls are generated. The reserved lid pattern P determined by the reserved lid color change selection table 222f is normally (normally, it has a black frame with a transparent white interior, and a number indicating the number of reserved pieces corresponding to the reserved display area is displayed inside. It is displayed in a variable specific color (the internal color is transparent green) that is different from the displayed display mode. In the reservation lid color change selection table 222f, the sub-display of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the reservation notice counter 223g for recognizing the display position of the reservation symbol whose color has been changed, which will be described later, and the current number of reserved balls. This is a table for selecting a command for setting the range of color change of the reserved lid pattern P displayed in the area Ds.

FIG. 230(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the reserved lid color change selection table 222f. The reservation lid color change selection table 222f specifies a color change range for the value (range) of the reservation notice counter 223g and the value (range) of the number of reservation balls when the reservation presentation mode is the notice B mode. Then, a hold lid command is set (see Z2348 in FIG. 263) to change the display range of the variable lid pattern P from the normal white display mode to green according to the change range (see (b) in FIG. 211). do.

Specifically, if the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is one of "0 to 4", and if the value of the number of reserved pitches is one of "0 to 4", the reservation lid command is executed. Not set, no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF10 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5. When the value of the number of held balls is "6", BF11 is determined as the held lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of held balls is 5 to 6. When the value of the number of held balls is "7", BF12 is determined as the held lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of held balls is 5 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF13 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 8.

When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is "5" and the value of the number of reserved pitches is "5", the reservation lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF20 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 6.

When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", BF21 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 6 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF22 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 6 to 8.

When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is "6" and the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the reservation lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of held balls is "7", BF30 is determined as the held lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of held balls is 7. When the value of the number of held balls is "8", BF31 is determined as the held lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of held balls is 7 to 8.

When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is "7" and the value of the number of reserved pitches is "7", the reservation lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF40 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 8.

When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is "8" and the value of the number of reserved pitches is "8", the reservation lid command is not set and there is no color change range.

In this way, by changing the display mode in an area different from the pending symbols that were changed by determining the success/failure determination result of the previous winning (pre-reading determination), it is possible to further increase the attention of the player. At the same time, by allowing the player to freely judge the degree to which the number of reserved balls is increased depending on whether or not to stop the ball being launched, it becomes possible to enjoy a wide range of modes of reserved symbols and subsequent fluctuation notice performances.

The lucky reservation command table 222g is a table for selecting a command for varying the display mode of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the target number of reserved balls.

FIG. 231 schematically shows the contents of the lucky pending command table 222g. In the lucky hold command table 222g, when the lucky hold performance is in progress, the target hold ball number area is stored as the lucky hold memory value 223p, and the display hold lid command is set based on that value (Fig. 261). (see Z2306).

Specifically, when the lucky pending storage value 223p is 5, the pending lid command FB50 is determined, and the area of 5 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky pending storage value 223p is 6, the pending lid command FB51 is determined, and the region 6 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be surrounded by a circle (see FIG. 216(a)). When the lucky pending storage value 223p is 7, a pending lid command FB52 is determined, and the region 7 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky pending storage value 223p is 8, a pending lid command FB53 is determined, and the region 8 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be surrounded by a circle.

In this way, by notifying the number of pending balls that resulted in a jackpot in the previous start-up prize, the game becomes more interesting, and at the same time, if the number of pending balls is small (less than 5), the player is notified. It is possible to encourage people to win prizes, and it is possible to create a performance that improves operation.

The background mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting the background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the background mode storage area 223i. FIG. 232(a) schematically shows the contents of the background mode selection table 222h. In the background mode selection table 222h, a background mode is selected based on the value in the background mode storage area 223i.

Specifically, when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 0, background A (sea background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 1, background B (mountain background) is determined. If the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 2, background C (river background) is determined, and if the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 3, background D (city background) is determined. .

The reserved character selection table 222i selects the content (type) of the reserved character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the background, the reserved production mode, and the production counter 223h. This is a table for making selections (decisions).

FIG. 232(b) schematically shows the contents of the reserved character selection table 222i. The pending character selection table 222i selects pending characters based on the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, the pending presentation mode stored in the pending presentation mode storage area 223m, and the value (range) of the presentation counter 223h. The contents of are set (see Z2363 in FIG. 264). The reserved characters are J0, a girl with short hair (see Figure 210(b)), J1, a girl with tied hair (see Figure 213(a)), and J2, a girl with long hair (see Figure 213(b)). ), images that the player can easily identify are prepared, such as J3 being a blonde girl with long hair (not shown).

Specifically, when the background mode is "Background A", when the suspended production mode is "Normal mode", and when the value of the production counter 223h is between "0 and 150", J0 (see FIG. 210(b)) is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the production counter 223h is one of "151 to 189", J1 (see FIG. 213(a)) is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 213(b)) is determined as the reserved character. When the pending production mode is the "notice A mode" or the "notice B mode", J0 is determined as the pending character if the value of the production counter 223h is one of "0 to 50". If the value of the production counter 223h is one of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "100 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character.

When the background mode is "Background B", "Background C", or "Background D", and when the pending production mode is "Normal mode", the value of the production counter 223h is "0 to 150". In either case, J0 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "151 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the production counter 223h is one of "190 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character. When the pending production mode is the "notice A mode" or the "notice B mode", J0 is determined as the pending character if the value of the production counter 223h is one of "0 to 50". If the value of the production counter 223h is one of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "100 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character.

In this way, by determining the highly anticipated pending characters based on the difference between the pending presentation mode and background that have changed since the start of winning, the display mode of the highly anticipated pending presentation can be adjusted without spoiling the atmosphere of the background presentation. It becomes possible. In addition, the player can recognize highly anticipated previews based on the changes in the pending symbols and the changes in the pending characters.

In addition, the number of fluctuations executed as the game is played, the number of jackpots, the number of times super reach is executed, and the acquisition of symbols and characters with points displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the game performance. It is also possible to store history information such as the number of points obtained, and to change the selected character by taking this history information into account. With this configuration, the more the game is played, the selected character can be changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Furthermore, it may be configured to include an RTC (real-time clock) so that the selected character can be varied based on the date and time information. With this configuration, it is possible to change the selected character depending on the passage of time since the pachinko machine 10 was introduced, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

The pending character change table 222j changes the contents of the pending character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, including the background, pending production mode, current pending character, and production counter 223h. This is a table for selection based on.

FIG. 233 schematically shows the contents of the pending character change table 222j. The pending character selection table 222i includes the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, the pending production mode stored in the pending production mode storage area 223m, the current pending character in the display mode, and the value of the production counter 223h. For (range), the contents of the pending character to be changed are set. Change of the reserved character is selected when the number of reserved balls is at the upper limit and starts winning and becomes over-winning (Z2366: Yes), and the display character command is set (see Z2267 in Figure 264). . Also, if the selected character is different from the currently displayed reserved character, the character will be changed (variable), and if the selected character is the same as the currently displayed character, the reserved character will be changed. (variable)

Specifically, when the background mode is "Background A", when the pending production mode is "Normal mode", and when the current pending character is "J0", the value of the production counter 223h is " 0 to 180, J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "181 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character and changed. If the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 214(b)) is determined as the reserved character and changed. If the current pending character is "J1" and the value of the performance counter 223h is between "0 to 190", J1 is determined as the pending character and there is no change. If the value of the production counter 223h is one of "191 to 189", J2 is determined as the reserved character and changed. If the current pending character is "J2" and the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the pending character and there is no change. If the pending production mode is either "Notice A" or "Notice B", if the current pending character is "J0", if the value of the production counter 223h is one of "0 to 80" In this case, J0 is determined to be a reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "81 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character and changed. If the current pending character is "J1" and the value of the production counter 223h is one of "0 to 90", J1 is determined as the pending character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "91 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and changed. If the current pending character is "J2" and the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the pending character and there is no change.

If the background mode is "Background B", "Background C", or "Background D", if the pending production mode is "Normal mode", if the current pending character is "J0", , if the value of the production counter 223h is one of "0 to 150", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "151 to 199", J1 is determined as the reserved character and changed. When the current pending character is "J1", if the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "0 to 170", J1 is determined as the pending character and there is no change. If the value of the production counter 223h is one of "171 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and changed. If the current pending character is "J3" and the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the pending character and there is no change. If the pending production mode is either "Notice A" or "Notice B", if the current pending character is "J0", if the value of the production counter 223h is one of "0 to 50" In this case, J0 is determined to be a reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the production counter 223h is one of "51 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character and is changed. If the current pending character is "J1" and the value of the production counter 223h is one of "0 to 70", J1 is determined as the pending character and there is no change. If the value of the production counter 223h is one of "71 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and changed. If the current pending character is "J3" and the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the pending character and there is no change.

In this way, by over-winning, the reserved character is changed, so that the player can have a means to check whether the current number of reserved balls is correct or not, by over-winning, and this can increase interest in the game. can. In addition, the pending characters to be changed are set to have higher expectations after the change than before the change, and when the pending production mode is not in normal mode, the rate of pending characters to be changed is set to be high. Therefore, when there is a change in the pending presentation mode, the player can have a means to know the result of winning or failing by intentionally causing an over-win, and it is possible to provide gameplay that increases operation. becomes.

In the speech balloon selection table 222k, a plurality of data tables are set for setting speech balloon (comment) contents (see FIG. 211(a)) to be displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81.

FIG. 234(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the speech balloon selection table 222k. The speech balloon selection table 222k includes a normal speech balloon selection table 222k1, a notice A speech balloon selection table 222k2, a notice B speech balloon selection table 222k3, a short-term prize winning speech balloon selection table 222k4, a speech bubble selection table during reach performance 222k5, a lucky pending speech balloon selection table 222k6, A time-saving speech balloon selection table 222k7 is provided. Further, the contents of the balloon to be set are the contents of the comment displayed by the reserved character in the character display area C.

The normal speech bubble selection table 222k1 is used when the special performance is not being executed (the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 0), the pending performance mode is the normal mode (see FIG. 210(b)), and the gaming state is the normal state. , is a table used to obtain the contents of the balloon.

FIG. 234(b) schematically shows the contents of the normal speech balloon selection table 222k1. In the normal speech bubble selection table 222k1, speech bubble contents are acquired for the value (range) of the number of reserved pitches (see Z2393 in FIG. 265).

Specifically, if the value of the number of reserved pitches is one of "0 to 4", the content of the balloon is not obtained (see FIG. 210(b)), and if the value of the number of reserved pitches is "5", the content of the balloon is not obtained. In this case, YES is obtained as the balloon content, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", two more speech bubble contents are obtained, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", One more balloon content is acquired, and if the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", the balloon content is MAX (see FIG. 214(a)).

The preview A speech bubble selection table 222k2 is a table used to obtain speech balloon contents when the pending presentation mode is the notice A mode (see FIG. 211(a)).

FIG. 234(c) schematically shows the contents of the notice A balloon selection table 222k2. In the preview A balloon selection table 222k2, the contents of the balloon are acquired (see Z2390 in FIG. 265) in response to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the validity determination result of the winning information command.

Specifically, if the value of the number of held pitches is between "0 to 3", the content of the balloon is not obtained, and when the value of the number of held balls is "4", the validity determination result is not obtained. If it is a hit, the content of the balloon is ``Dokidoki'', and if it is a miss, the content of the balloon is ``DokiDoki''. When the value of the number of pending pitches is "5", if the result of the judgment is a hit, the content of the balloon will be "Expected" and if it is a miss, "Expected" will be retrieved. If the value of the number of pending pitches is "6", if the result of the judgment is a hit, the content of the balloon is expected to be 70%? is obtained, and if it is incorrect, the content of the balloon is expected to be 60%? is obtained. When the value of the number of pending pitches is "7", if the result of the judgment is a hit, the content of the balloon is expected to be 80%? is obtained, and if it is incorrect, the content of the balloon is expected to be 70%? is obtained. If the value of the number of pending pitches is "8", if the result of the judgment is a hit, the balloon content will be extremely hot! is retrieved and if it is out of place, something happens to the speech bubble content! is obtained.

Although configured in this way, the preview A speech bubble selection table 222k2 also refers to the value (range) of the performance counter 223h in addition to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the validity determination result of the winning information command, and selects the content of the speech balloon. Furthermore, it may be provided as a performance to express various expectations.

The preview B speech bubble selection table 222k3 is a table used to obtain speech balloon contents when the pending presentation mode is the notice B mode (see FIG. 211(b)).

FIG. 234(d) schematically shows the contents of the notice B balloon selection table 222k3. In the notice B balloon selection table 222k3, the contents of the balloon are acquired for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the reserved effect counter (see Z2388 in FIG. 265).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved pitches is one of "0 to 4", the content of the balloon is obtained as is (see FIG. 211(a)), and the value of the number of reserved pitches is "5". In this case, if the value of the pending effect counter is one of "0 to 4", OVER (see FIG. 211(b)) is obtained as the speech bubble content, and if the value of the pending effect counter is "5". In this case, STOP is acquired as the content of the speech bubble, and when the value of the number of pending pitches is "6", and the value of the pending effect counter is "0 to 5", the content of the speech bubble is obtained as OVER. If the value of the pending effect counter is "6", the speech bubble content is STOP, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "7", the value of the pending effect counter is "0 to 6". In any of the cases, OVER is obtained as the content of the speech bubble, and when the value of the pending effect counter is "7", the content of the speech bubble is determined to be STOP, and when the value of the number of pending pitches is "8", the content of the speech bubble is determined to be STOP. , the MAX value of the balloon content is obtained.

By configuring this way, it is possible to recognize winnings based on the contents of the speech bubble when a highly anticipated change in the reserved symbol occurs, and the number of reserved balls can be increased by continuing to launch the ball further than the current value of the number of reserved balls. It is possible to inform the player of the decision as to whether or not to increase the number of hits, thereby suppressing the occurrence of unnecessary hits, and making it possible to play the game efficiently. Further, even when a highly anticipated change occurs in the pending symbol, the settings for the contents of the balloon may be changed to allow the balloon to continue appearing.

The short-term winning speech bubble selection table 222k4 is a table used to obtain the contents of the speech bubble in the case of a short-term winning (see FIG. 212(a)).

FIG. 235(a) schematically shows the contents of the short-term winning speech bubble selection table 222k4. In the short-term prize balloon selection table 222k4, the contents of the balloon are acquired for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2382 in FIG. 265).

Specifically, when the value of the number of pending pitches is "4", the balloon content is early! (See FIG. 212(a)) is obtained and the value of the number of pending pitches is "5", the balloon content is very fast! is obtained and the value of the number of pending pitches is "6", the balloon content is super fast! is obtained and the value of the number of pending balls is "7", the balloon content is "Sonic Speed!" ! is obtained and the value of the number of pending pitches is "8", the balloon content is fast! ! ! is obtained.

With this configuration, the interval between starting winnings is short, and the player can recognize the degree to which the number of reserved balls has increased by the speech bubble of the reserved character, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The speech bubble selection table 222k5 during a ready-to-win performance is a table used to obtain the contents of a speech bubble during a ready-to-win performance (see FIG. 215(a)).

FIG. 235(b) schematically shows the contents of the reach effect speech bubble selection table 222k5. In the reach effect speech bubble selection table 222k5, the contents of the speech bubble are obtained for the value (range) of the pending effect counter and the value (range) of the number of pending balls (Z2384 in FIG. 265).

Specifically, if the value of the pending effect counter is "0", and if the value of the number of pending pitches is between "0 to 4", the balloon contents will be stored up to 6! (See FIG. 215(a)) is obtained, and in the case of "5", one more balloon content is obtained, and in the case of "6", OK is obtained as the speech balloon content, and "7 to 8" is obtained. ”, the balloon content is OVER, and if the value of the pending effect counter 223h is “other than 0”, and if the value of the number of pending pitches is “0 to 4”, OVER is obtained. , the contents of the speech bubble can be saved up to 6! is obtained, and in the case of "5", one more speech bubble content is obtained, and in the case of "6", the speech bubble content is "Good job" (see FIG. 215(b)), and "7" is obtained. ~8'', OVER is obtained as the balloon content.

With this configuration, by changing the speech bubble of the held character during the reach performance, when the number of held balls is small, it is possible to encourage the character to launch the ball, and when the reach performance is in progress, the speech bubble can be changed. By changing the game, you can play the game without getting bored.

The lucky pending speech bubble selection table 222k6 is a table used to obtain the contents of the balloon when the lucky pending effect is in progress (see FIG. 216(a)).

FIG. 236(a) schematically shows the contents of the lucky pending speech bubble selection table 222k6. The lucky pending speech bubble selection table 222k6 includes a lucky pending memory value 223p that is set as the lucky pending ball number (see Z2444 of Z268) when the winning result in the past becomes a jackpot. , the value (range) of the number of reserved pitches, and the value (range) of the reserved change value, the contents of the balloon are acquired (Z2386 in FIG. 265).

Specifically, when the value of the lucky holding memory value 223p is "5", when the value of the number of balls held is between ``0~4'', the holding change value is between ``0~3''. In either case, the content of the balloon is ``Aim for 5'', and if the value of the number of pending pitches is "5", if the pending change value is "0", the content of the balloon is ``OK'', If the pending change value is between "1" and "2", the balloon content is GOOD, and if the pending variation value is "3", the balloon content is "Good job", and the number of pending pitches is obtained. If the value is any one of "6 to 8", and if the pending change value is any one of "0 to 3", OVER is obtained as the content of the balloon.

If the value of the lucky holding memory value 223p is "6", if the value of the number of balls held is between ``0~5'', when the holding change value is between ``0~3'', , the content of the speech bubble is ``Aim for 6'' (see FIG. 216(a)), and if the value of the number of pending pitches is "6" and the value of the pending change value is "0", the content of the speech bubble is OK. If the pending change value is one of "1 to 2", the balloon content is determined to be GOOD, and if the pending change value is "3", the balloon content is determined to be "Good job". When the value of the number of reserved pitches is any one of "7 to 8" and when the reservation change value is any one of "0 to 3", OVER is obtained as the content of the balloon.

If the value of the lucky holding memory value 223p is "7", if the value of the number of balls held is between 0 to 6, and if the holding change value is between 0 to 3, then , the content of the speech bubble is set to 7, and if the value of the number of pending pitches is "7", if the pending change value is "0", the content of the speech bubble is OK, and the pending variation value is "7". 1 to 2, the balloon content is GOOD, and if the pending change value is 3, the balloon content is Good Job, and the value of the number of pending pitches is 8. ”, if the pending change value is between “0” and “3”, OVER is obtained as the content of the balloon.

If the value of the lucky holding memory value 223p is "8", if the value of the number of balls held is between ``0~7'', when the holding change value is between ``0~3'', , if the aim of the balloon content is 8, and the value of the number of pending balls is "8", if the pending change value is "0", the balloon content is obtained as OK, and the pending change value is " 1 to 2, the balloon content is GOOD, and when the pending change value is 3, the balloon content is Good job.

In this way, by changing the content of the balloon depending on the difference in the number of lucky reserved balls, the player can enjoy the game by aiming for the number of reserved balls that should win the prize. In this way, if the lottery result is a jackpot in the range of 5 pending balls to 8 pending balls, the display mode of lucky pending balls can be updated, so that you will not get bored. You can continue playing.

The time-saving speech bubble selection table 222k6 indicates that the special performance is not being executed (the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 0), the pending performance mode is the normal mode, and the gaming state is the time-saving state (the value of the time-saving counter is other than 0). This table is used to obtain the contents of the balloon.

FIG. 236(b) schematically shows the time-saving speech balloon selection table 222k7. In the time-saving speech bubble selection table 222k7, the contents of the speech bubble are acquired for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (Z2392 in FIG. 265).

Specifically, when the number of reserved pitches is "0 to 5", the content of the balloon is filled up to 6 (see FIG. 212(b)), and the number of reserved pitches is "6 to 7". In either case, OK is obtained for the balloon content.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the optimal number of balls on hold within a short period of time, and the player can understand the transition status of the number of balls on hold based on the notification mode. If you can maintain the optimal number of balls on hold, you can avoid situations where fluctuations are interrupted and the player is in a standby state, which makes time inefficient, or over-wins where the number of balls on hold exceeds the upper limit. This can be used as a criterion for efficiently playing games.

The reach-in effect lottery table 222m is a table for selecting whether to execute the reach-in pending display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 215(a)).

FIG. 237(a) schematically shows the contents of this in-reach performance lottery table 222m. In the reach-for-reach performance lottery table 222m, whether or not to execute the reach-to-reach performance is determined based on the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the performance counter 223h. (See Z2324 in FIG. 262) Specifically, if the value of the number of balls held is between "0 to 3", and the value of the production counter 223h is "0 to 99", if the value is "0 to 99", the ball is in reach. The pending performance is not displayed, and in the case of "100 to 199", the pending performance can be displayed during reach. When the value of the number of held balls is between "4 and 5", and when the value of the performance counter 223h is between "0 and 140", the display of the held performance during reach is not performed, and when the value of the performance counter 223h is between "141 and 199". ”, it is possible to display a hold effect during reach. When the value of the number of held balls is any one of "6 to 8", and when the value of the performance counter 223h is "0 to 199", the display of the held performance during reach is not performed. In this way, by setting the ratio of displaying the on-reach pending performance to be high when the number of pending balls is small, a performance that urges the player to accumulate pending balls is executed when there are few pending balls.

The reach start time calculation table 222n calculates the reach start time in the fluctuation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the executed reach display mode (display mode in which the symbols of the left and right symbol rows are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display) with the same third symbol). This is a data table for determining the start time (start period) for starting the hold performance during reach in the time (period) that becomes the display mode. In the reach start time calculation table 222n, a hold performance start timer is selected based on the execution possibility of the hold performance during reach (see FIG. 215(a)) acquired by the reach performance lottery table 222m and the variation type.

FIG. 237(b) schematically shows the contents of this reach start time calculation table 222n. The reach start time calculation table 222n sets a pending performance start timer based on the variation type when it is determined that the execution of the reach pending performance obtained by the reach performance lottery table 222m is possible (FIG. 262 (See Z2326).

Specifically, when the variation type is normal reach jackpot A, the pending performance start timer is determined to be 10000 ms, and when the variation type is super reach jackpot A, the suspended performance start timer is determined to be 10000 ms, When the variation type is super reach jackpot B, the pending performance start timer is determined to be 10000ms, and when the variation type is super reach jackpot C, the pending performance start timer is determined to be 12000ms, and the fluctuation type is super reach jackpot C. If it is a reach jackpot D, the pending performance start timer is determined to be 12,000 ms, and if the variation type is a super reach jackpot E, the pending performance start timer is determined to be 20,000 ms, and the variation type is normal reach out of reach A. In this case, the hold performance start timer is determined to be 10000ms, when the variation type is normal reach out B, the hold performance start timer is determined to be 10000ms, and when the fluctuation type is normal reach out C, the hold performance is The start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms.

The lucky pending lottery table 222p obtains whether or not the lucky pending performance (see FIG. 216(a)) can be executed based on the number of reserved balls and the performance counter 223h. FIG. 237(c) schematically shows the contents of this lucky pending lottery table 222p. In the lucky pending lottery table 222p, the feasibility of executing the lucky pending performance is obtained based on the value of the number of pending balls and the value (range) of the performance counter 223h (see Z2304 in FIG. 261).

Specifically, when the value of the number of held balls is between 0 and 2, and when the value of the performance counter 223h is between 0 and 99, the lucky hold performance is executed. is not performed, and if it is any one of "100 to 199", it becomes possible to execute the lucky hold effect. If the value of the number of held balls is between 3 and 4, and the value of the performance counter 223h is between 0 and 189, the lucky hold performance will not be executed and 190 to 199'', it becomes possible to execute the lucky hold performance. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any one of "5 to 8", and when the value of the performance counter 223h is any one of "0 to 199", the lucky reservation performance is not executed. In this way, by setting the ratio of performing the lucky reservation performance to be high when the number of reserved balls is small, a performance that urges the player to accumulate reservations is executed when there are few reservations.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 226(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. , winning information storage area 223f, pending notice counter 223g, performance counter 223h, background mode storage area 223i, SW valid time counter 223k, pending performance mode storage area 223m, special performance status storage area 223n, lucky pending memory value 223p, short-term winning At least a timer 223q, a hold performance start timer 223r, a sensor valid time counter 223s, a touch counter 223t, and a memory area 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a display of the first special symbol reserved in the main controller 110. This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) for special symbol fluctuation effects up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and the number of pending balls when receiving a prize information command or receiving a variable pattern command. Update according to the timing of increases and decreases.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable display of the second special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a. , when a winning information command is received by a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol, It is updated in accordance with the timing when the number of held pitches increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and updates the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. Unable to get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and counts the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223b. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when a starting winning is detected and the number of pending balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, a variable display in a special symbol is executed and the number of pending balls is subtracted. If so, a held ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 based on the held ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, either the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see Z2207 in FIG. 259). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved pitch number counter 223b, and , Sends a command for the number of reserved balls for display to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage. .

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls for display, the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 reserved The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved pitch number symbols corresponding to the value of the pitch counter 223b are displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As mentioned above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Its value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 also corresponds to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while being synchronized. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see Z2221 in FIG. 260), and the third symbol It is turned off when the variable display setting on the display device 81 is made (see Z2502 in FIG. 269). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (Z2102) of the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221. The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 controls the display control device 114 so that the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see Z2204 in FIG. 2590), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. It is turned off when the signal is turned off (see Z2506 in FIG. 269). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type) extracted from the received stop type command.

The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4 areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a starting winning for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry opening 640, a special winning random number counter C1 is acquired according to the starting winning. From each value of the special winning type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, various information (win or failure, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information notified by the winning information command (win/fail, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information is divided into four areas (first area to Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time.

In addition, in this first control example, the main control device 110 operates based on various information (win/fail, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn. Although a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting winning occurs, the various information predicted corresponding to the starting winning includes various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. and a setting means for setting a winning information command by adding a winning information command, and when receiving a winning information command, various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f and information included in the received winning information command are provided. A configuration may also be provided in which a discriminating means for discriminating whether the various information (winning information) matches or not. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is appropriately stored.

In addition, in this first control example, when a new starting winning occurs, a winning information command is set and the audio lamp control device 113 is notified. The timing of the notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing when the winning information command is set). For example, by providing a storage means to temporarily store the winning information command, in addition to the timing of starting a winning, the timing of notification is not limited to the timing mentioned above (the timing when the winning information command is set). (for example, at 5-second intervals), when the gaming conditions change (for example, when the gaming state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state, when a jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when special symbols start changing (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the winning information command is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform an effect (so-called pre-read effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, setting of performance modes such as changing the display color of reserved symbols is executed as a pre-reading performance. In this way, by executing various performances (pre-reading performances) based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, players can be informed about each reserved ball before the variable display starts. It can create a sense of expectation that it will be a big hit. It is also possible to perform long-term effects using multiple variable display periods.

The reservation notice counter 223g indicates that when the change of the reservation color of the reservation symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, the number of reservations changes (the display position of the reservation symbol whose reservation color has changed after the reservation balls are consumed). This is a counter for determining the position of the reserved symbol whose display color has been changed even if the display color has changed. The value of the pending notice counter 223g is 0 when the value of the pending notice counter 223g is 0 in the winning command receiving process (see Z2209 in FIG. 266) that is executed when the winning command of the special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 is received. In some cases (Z2403: YES), if the pending change value obtained from the variation type of the received special symbol winning command is other than 0 (Z2405: No) and there is a change in the pending symbols (see Figure 211(a)) ), the reserved ball value is set (see Z2406 in FIG. 266). For example, as shown in FIG. 211(a), if the value of the number of pending balls at the time of starting winning is 4, the pending notice counter 223g is set to 4. The set pending notice counter 223g is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol begins to fluctuate, and the subtracted value is 0 in the fluctuating pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) that is executed when the fluctuating starts. In the case (Z2225: YES), the above-mentioned pending performance mode is set to normal mode by setting the pending change value to 0 and clearing the pending performance mode storage area (Z2226).

The performance counter 223h is a counter used to select various performances. Each time the main process is executed, the value is incremented by 1 in the range from 0 to 198 and updated repeatedly. Specifically, the selection tables for various effects selected using the effect counter 223h include a pending change selection table 222b, a pending character selection table 222i (pending character), a pending character change table 222j (pending character), and a pending character change table 222j (pending character). There are a performance lottery table 222m (possibility of execution of hold performance during reach) and a lucky hold lottery table 222p (possibility of execution of lucky hold performance), and various performances are selected according to the value (range) of performance counter 223h.

In addition, when making these selections, the update range is set to a prime number (199) in order to avoid synchronizing the update cycle of the production counter 223h with other counters and timer values, so that the selection results may I try not to be biased by the selection results.

The background mode storage area 223i is a storage area in which numerical values necessary for determining the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored. Regarding the switching of the background display mode, in the frame button input monitoring/production process (Z2107), it is determined whether the demo screen is displayed in a standby state (Z2801), and if it is determined that it is in a standby state (Z2801: Yes) , it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802: Yes), the contents of the background mode storage area 223i are set by adding 1 (Z2804). When the display switching command corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2804) and the display switching command is sent to the display control device 114, the background image is displayed. Different background images that can be recognized by the player are prepared as background images, such as background A being the sea, background B being a mountain, background C being a river, background D being a city, etc.

The SW valid time counter 223k is a counter for counting the valid time (valid period) during which the operation can be performed in a presentation accompanied by pressing of the frame button 22, which is performed when a special symbol is changed or the like. In the SW effective time counter 223k, if the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No) in the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (Z2107), a fluctuation pattern that accompanies the pressing of the frame button 22 is set. If set (Z2803: Yes), the SW valid time is set (Z2804) based on the set variation pattern. If the set SW valid time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2801: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2802), and if the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: Yes), the SW valid time counter 223k is If the value of the valid time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2806: Yes), and if a preview performance is in progress (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is reset (set to 0) and the preview display command for display is issued. is set (Z2811), and a predetermined effect is executed.

The hold performance mode storage area 223m stores information for determining a plurality of hold notification modes prepared according to hold changes when executing a preview performance regarding hold symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. remembered.

The pending presentation mode storage area 223m is stored in the pending presentation mode storage area 223m when the pending notice counter 223g is set to 0 in the winning command receiving process (see Z2209 in FIG. 266) that is executed when the special symbol winning command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received. In the case (Z2403: Yes), the pending effect mode is set (Z2404) according to the value (range) of the pending change value acquired for the variation type of the received special symbol winning command. As mentioned above, if the hold change value is "0", the normal mode is set as the hold effect mode, if the hold change value is ``1~2'', the notice A mode is set, and if the hold change value is ``3'', the hold effect mode is set. In this case, the notice B mode is set.

The contents of the pending production mode storage area 223m are the values of the pending notice counter 223g, which is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol changes, in the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) that is executed when the special symbol starts changing. becomes 0 (Z2225: YES), the pending performance mode is changed to normal mode by setting the pending change value to 0 and clearing the pending performance mode storage area 223m (Z2226).

The special performance status storage area 223n stores information for determining the content of the special performance to be executed when the pending performance mode is the normal mode. As mentioned above, the special performances include the short-term winning performance (see Figure 212(a)), the on-reach performance (see Figure 215(a)), and the lucky retention performance (see Figure 216(a)). Yes, the special performance is executed according to changes in the special performance status storage area 223n. Note that the special performance status is a status (status data) for indicating (discriminating) the type of pending performance that is being executed.

In the short-term winning performance, if the gaming state is the normal state (Z2421: Yes) in the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed when receiving the winning command, the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 0. Yes (Z2422: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 4 (Z2423: Yes), and the short-term winning timer is counting the time (5 seconds) that has occurred since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0. When the value is other than 0 (Z2424: Yes), 1 is set in the special performance status storage area 223n (Z2425), and the short-term winning performance starts to be executed. On the other hand, during a short-term winning performance, in the short-term winning management process (Z2111), if the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes) and the short-term winning timer is 0 (Z2605: Yes), , the special performance status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2606), and the short-term winning performance ends.

The hold effect during reach is determined by the change type of the special symbol being a reach change in the hold effect setting process during reach (Z2228) executed during the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the change of the special symbol. (Z2321: Yes), the pending production mode is in normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and the value of the special production status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), according to the reach production lottery table 222m. If it is determined that the execution performance is possible (Z2325: Yes), the pending performance start timer 223r is set based on the variation type (Z2326), and the special performance status storage area 223n is set to 2 (Z2327). When the hold performance start timer 223r becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes) in the hold performance management process (Z2112) after time has elapsed, set a preview display command to perform the hold performance during reach (Z2706). By doing this, the reach-on-hold effect will start running. While the reach-for-win pending performance is being executed, the special performance status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2708) at the timing of the end of special symbol variation (Z2707: Yes), and the reach-to-reach pending performance ends.

The lucky pending performance is in normal mode (Z2302: Yes) when the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 0 in the lucky display determination process (Z2227) (Z2301: Yes), and the lucky pending storage value is is 0 (Z2303: Yes), and when the result of the execution performance drawn based on the lucky pending lottery table 222p is accepted (Z2305: Yes), 3 is set in the special performance status storage area 223n. (Z2307), and the lucky pending effect starts to be executed. While the lucky pending performance is being executed, at the start of the next variation after the start of the relevant performance, if the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227), The special performance status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2309), and the lucky pending performance ends.

The lucky hold memory value 223p is the winning time that corresponds to the held ball that was determined to be a jackpot when the judgment result of the winning information command output based on the timing of the start winning is determined to be a jackpot (pre-read judgment is made). This is a storage area where the value of the number of reserved pitches is stored. The lucky pending storage value 223p is stored when the winning lottery result is a jackpot (Z2442: Yes) in the lucky pending storage process (Z2408) executed during the winning command reception process (Z2209) executed at the time of starting winning. ), if the value of the number of reserved balls is 5 or more (Z2443: Yes), the value of the number of reserved balls is set in the lucky reserved memory value 223p (Z2444). Furthermore, as described above, when the hold effect mode becomes the lucky hold effect, the display hold lid command is set based on the lucky hold memory value 223p (see Z2306 in FIG. 261), and the lucky hold effect is displayed. (See FIG. 216(a)).

The short-term winning timer 223q is a timer for counting the elapsed time from when the value of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol goes from 0 to 1 or more until it becomes 4 or more. The short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds as a timer value when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 (Z2601: Yes), and when it is other than 0 (Z2601: No), the short-term winning timer 223q is set as a timer value until it reaches 0. The winning timer 223q is decremented by 1 (Z2602). As described above, when the pending performance mode becomes the short-term winning performance (see FIG. 212(a)), the short-term winning performance is displayed until the short-term winning timer 223q becomes 0. In this way, by performing the short-term winning effect using the remaining time (remaining period) of the short-term winning timer 223q, the shorter (earlier) the period until four prizes are won, the longer the execution period of the short-term winning effect becomes. It is possible to make the player realize how quickly it took to win four prizes.

Note that the short-term winning effect may be configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after four winnings have been won. This has the effect of making it easier for the player to recognize that he has won four prizes within five seconds.

The hold performance start timer 223r is a timer for counting the timing to execute the reach-for-win hold performance (see FIG. 215(a)), which is the performance related to the hold symbols, during the special symbol reach variation.

The pending performance start timer 223r determines when the variation type of the special symbol is a reach variation in the on-reach pending production setting process (Z2228) that is executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) that is executed when the special symbol variation starts. If there is (Z2321: Yes), the pending production mode is normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and the value of the special production status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the reach production lottery table 222m If the obtained execution performance is possible (Z2325: Yes), a timer value is set by the reach start time calculation table 222n (Z2326).

When the timer value is set in the pending performance start timer 223r, in the reach pending performance management process (Z2112), until the execution of the reach pending performance starts, if the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is not 2 ( Z2701: Yes), and when the pending performance start timer 223r is not 0 (Z2702: No), 1 is subtracted. Further, as described above, when the value of the timer after subtraction becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes), no other special effects are being performed, and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes). ), by setting a preview display command for performing a reach-for-win suspension effect (Z2706), the execution of the reach-to-reach suspension effect is started.

The sensor valid time counter 223s is a counter that counts the time during which detection by the touch sensor 290 is valid. When the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring/presentation process (Z2107), the sensor effective time counter 223s gives a notice. If the effect display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor effective time set for the preview effect is set in the sensor effective time counter 223s (Z2823). If the set sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0, it is subtracted (Z2824), and the detection of the touch sensor becomes valid during that time. Also, when the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes), the touch sensor is turned on (Z2825: Yes), and the value added by 1 (Z2826) to the touch counter 223t reaches the upper limit value. (Z2828: Yes) and is reset (Z2809).

The touch counter 223t is a counter for counting the number of times that the detection of the touch sensor 290 is turned on during the period in which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. The touch counter 223t determines whether the touch sensor 290 is activated when the sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring/presentation process (Z2107). If it is on (Z2825: Yes), it is added by 1 (Z2826), and if the added value is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), it is reset (Z2829).

The other memory area 223z is an area where various data, flags, counters, etc. in the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are set or stored.

The RAM 223 also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. Note that the command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 259) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and displays a variable display (fluctuation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. It controls the performance (direction). Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 238.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 238. FIG. 238 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. Thereby, the display control device 114 can be brought into a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying an address to outputting data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is canceled, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 made up of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the second predetermined location is the initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) that is executed after the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 275) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding the NOR type ROM 234d of extremely small capacity, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 242), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of this one frame image and the display process of the one frame image within the image display time of one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing the image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which has a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The final address (the final address of the storage source), the information on the transfer destination (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and it is possible to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b detects that the player starts playing the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 in a variation effect when the lottery result is selected by the main controller 110.

The MPU 231 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply section 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 274).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be explained. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 239). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen, a power-on fluctuation image with an "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and a power-on fluctuation image with an "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, are displayed during the fluctuation period. In the middle, the display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is determined. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", an image showing it will be displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuating effect has stopped, and if it is a "missing special symbol", an image showing it will be displayed after the fluctuating effect has stopped. It will then be displayed for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. I can do it.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, if the player starts playing the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected, the power-on variation image A power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the area 235b, and images indicating "○" and "x" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the time when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variable effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. I can do it.

Returning to FIG. 238, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 209), numbered from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the variable production has started on the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the right second ball entry port 640r, or the second ball entry port 640. First, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variable performance is not immediately started on the third symbol display device 81.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is permanently resident in the character pattern area 235e. Therefore, when changing the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead changes the character design from the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back side of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in the error message image area 235f in advance, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's image and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of images in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, round presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , ending effects, and demo effects are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss will finally be displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 is a winning hole from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, so the electric accessory is released as a jackpot with a normal symbol, and the ball enters the second ball. If it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball mouth 640, the number of prize balls will increase. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to reduce or the number of balls it has does not decrease even if it plays a game, so the player is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to decrease or the number of balls it has is You can get a feeling of expectation that you can get a jackpot with a special symbol even if you don't have one. Therefore, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demo performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with a starting prize is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 240. FIG. 240 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. If the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image is displayed on the back side of the sprite. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2,...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite is defined for each address, such as effects for expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, etc. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table.

If it is specified that any of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (undersea, beach, preparation period background, background dedicated to time production) is to be displayed based on the background type, the MPU 231 determines which of the backgrounds is selected by the player. The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified as time passes.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. However, instead of this, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are defined. It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information by the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuating performance that is being performed this time, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the example of FIG. 240 is the last address of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 242), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the process of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 241. FIG. 241 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each production, and as mentioned above, among the image data of sprites used in the production specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all of the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 241). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined in association with an address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 241 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 241, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 243), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 243, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 239 on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 (see Z3005 in FIG. 274). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see Z4705 in FIG. 285(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Z3301 in FIG. 276(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 276(b)) and a simple display setting process (see Z3308 in FIG. 276(b) Z3309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 283 to 284(b)) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see Z4601 in FIG. 285(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 285(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 286) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 242), which will be described later, is generated that describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and writes an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 242), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 242), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process (Z3303 in FIG. 283 ), pointer update processing (see Z4305 in FIG. 284(b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 242), and obtains the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 242 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Pattern 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite (design) is described for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and an obtained image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 uses the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to display the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 adjusts the image data according to the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 determines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and the character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (Character 1, Character 2, . . . , Pending pitch number symbol 1, Pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 276 (b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see Z4307 in FIG. 283). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see Z4809 in FIG. 286). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see Z4810 in FIG. 286). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j indicates a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Z4902 in FIG. 287).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and sends the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 276(b)) is executed (see Z4902 in FIG. 287).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

<About control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 243 to 256. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (Z101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. Store it in the corresponding buffer area.

Furthermore, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (Z103). Specifically, the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, each is 299 , 99, 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (Z104), and then, The starting winning process accompanying the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) is executed (Z105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 244 to 256.

After executing the starting winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (Z106), and a through gate passing process is executed as the ball passes through the through gate 67. (Z107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 251 and 252. After executing the through gate passage process, a firing control process is executed (Z108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (Z109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process starts the firing of the ball on the condition that the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the special symbol variation process (Z104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (Z104). This special symbol variation process (Z104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is used to display the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed in step 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (Z201). Here, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203n is on, and if it is on, it is determined that the jackpot is in progress. During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (Z201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If there is no special symbol jackpot (Z201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: No), acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reservations N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (Z203). . After obtaining the values of each counter, a variation execution determination process is executed (Z204). The details of the variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 245, but in this variation execution determination process (Z204), a process is executed to determine the special symbol that will be changed next.

Next, it is determined whether the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (Z204) is special symbol 1 (first special symbol) (Z205), and variation execution is performed on special symbol 1 (first special symbol). If so, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (Z206), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set ( Z207). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 258) to be described later. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved balls command through the process of Z207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z208). In the process of Z208, the data stored in the holding areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3. After shifting the data, special symbol 1 variation start processing is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display device (Z209). The special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 246. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209), processing such as selection of a variation pattern (variation period) necessary for starting variation of the first special symbol is executed.

In the process of Z205, if it is determined that the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (Z204) is not variation execution on special figure 1 (Z205: No), special figure 2 (second special It is determined whether or not variation is to be executed in the symbol) (Z210). Incidentally, if the variation of the special symbol 2 is not executed (Z210: No), that is, since the reserved ball is not stored in either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation is executed in the special symbol 2 (Z210: Yes), the same process as the above-mentioned process for the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is performed for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2.

Specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is subtracted by 1 (Z211), and the reserved ball that indicates the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation. Set a number command (Z212). The held pitch count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 258) to be described later. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved balls command through the process of Z212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (Z213). In the process of Z213, the data stored in the holding areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3. After shifting the data, special symbol 2 variation start processing is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display device (Z214). The special symbol 2 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 247.

In the process of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If the period has not elapsed (Z215: No), the display on the first symbol display device is updated (Z216), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z215, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (Z215: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z217). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol 1 variation start processing (Z209), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 246, or special symbol 2 variation start processing (Z214), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 247. When this special symbol fluctuation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , a special design lottery will be held. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a jackpot of the first special symbol, it is determined according to the value of the special win type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a jackpot A, a jackpot B1, a jackpot B2, or a jackpot C. If it is a jackpot of the second special symbol, it will be a jackpot A according to the value of the special winning type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a jackpot B1, a jackpot B2, or a jackpot C.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is lit in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B occurs, the red LED is lit. In case of jackpot C, the red LED and blue LED are turned on. In addition, if it is off, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of Z217 is finished, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (Z218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (Z218: Yes), a jackpot start is set (Z219), the probability change flag 203m is turned off, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is set to 0 (Z220). Thereafter, the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (Z221), a stop command is set (Z224), and this process ends. That is, during the jackpot game, a low probability game state is set, the electric support game state (time-saving game state) is also canceled, and a non-electric support game state is set.

On the other hand, in the process of Z218, if the current lottery result is outside the special symbol (Z218: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more (Z222), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is determined. If is greater than or equal to 1 (Z222: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (Z223), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0 (Z222: No), the process of Z223 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the variation execution determination process (Z204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (Z204). This variation execution determination process (Z204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is a process that is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. The production pattern (variation production pattern) of the variable production performed by the device 81 is based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether to execute the process.

In the variation execution determination process, first, initialization is performed by setting the variation execution flag 203k to off (value "0") (Z241), and data in the variation order storage area 203p stored in the RAM 203 is acquired. (Z242). Next, the data in the variation order storage area 203p is shifted (Z243). Next, it is determined whether the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (Z244). If the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (Z244: Yes), the variable execution flag 203k is set to variable execution in special figure 1 (Z245), and this process is ended.

In the process of Z244, if the data in the execution area is not a variation execution in special figure 1 (Z244: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is variation execution in special figure 2 (Z246), If it is a variation execution (Z246: Yes), the variation execution flag 203k is set to variation execution in the special figure 2 (Z247), and this process is ended. In addition, in the process of Z246, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is not a variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z246: No), this process is ended as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209). This special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209) is a process executed during the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is a process that is executed in the special symbol 1 variation process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" lottery (judgment) is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining a performance pattern (variable performance pattern) for a fluctuating performance to be performed.

In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209), first, each value of the special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained. (Z251). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in a variable probability period (high probability gaming state) (Z252). Note that the determination as to whether or not it is a variable probability period is executed by determining whether the variable probability flag 203m is on. This probability change flag 203m is set to ON based on the completion of the jackpot game based on jackpot B1, jackpot B2, and jackpot C. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the probability is changing (Z252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state, so the process moves to Z253. In the process of Z253, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221(a)), the lottery result to determine whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is determined. Acquire (Z253). Specifically, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 are compared one by one with the random number value of 958 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. As mentioned above, 27 random numbers from "0 to 26" are set as the random numbers for the special symbol jackpot in the variable probability gaming state (special gaming state), and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and these numbers are set. If the random numbers that result in a win match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Once the special symbol lottery results are obtained, the process moves to Z255.

On the other hand, in the process of Z252, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal gaming state with special symbols (Z252: No), the process of Z254 is executed. In the process of Z254, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (Z254). Specifically, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 are compared one by one with the random number value of 978 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. In the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), three random numbers from 0 to 2 are set as the random numbers that will result in a jackpot for special symbols, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random number that will result in a jackpot for these special symbols are set. If the numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Once the special symbol lottery results are obtained, the process moves to Z255.

In the process of Z255, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of Z253 or Z254 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the value of the obtained special win random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a are checked). (Z255), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (Z255: Yes), the value of the special hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of Z251 Based on this, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (Z256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of Z251 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, and the jackpot (jackpot) of four types of special symbols is determined. A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), the jackpot type is determined. As mentioned above, if the value of the special winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, time saving 100 times), and if it is in the range of "40 to 75". , determines that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variable odd symbol jackpot), and if it is in the range of "76 to 79", determines that it is a jackpot B2 (16R probability variable even symbol jackpot), and falls in the range of "80 to 99". If so, it is determined that it is a jackpot C (see FIG. 222(b)).

In the process of Z256, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are set as stop types in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined based on the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z257). When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z257, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, if the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250", it is normal reach. Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination of validity, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The audio lamp control device 113 determines the contents of the variable display mode (variation pattern) to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the validity determination result. The main control device 110 is configured to be able to switch to the out-of-reach display mode in the audio lamp control device 113 for the same variable time even if the out-of-reach display mode is displayed. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and the effects can be diversified.

For example, the variation patterns for misses include "miss (long time)", "miss (short time)", "miss normal reach", "miss super reach", and "miss special reach". ing. Various types of ``normal reach'' and various types of ``super reach'' are prescribed as common fluctuation patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C.

On the other hand, in the process of Z255, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of order (Z255: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (Z258). In the process of Z258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the removed symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (Z259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of Z258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is checked, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, normal reach, super Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as reach.

When the process of Z257 or the process of Z259 is finished, next, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of Z257 or Z259 (Z260). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of Z275 or the process of Z259 (Z261). When the process of Z261 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (Z104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 247, the special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214). This special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is a process executed in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" is performed (judgment), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining a performance pattern (variable performance pattern) for a fluctuating performance to be performed.

In this special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214), like the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209), firstly, the special symbol 2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b obtained by the process of Z271 is The respective values of the winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 are acquired (Z271).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in a variable probability period (high probability gaming state) (Z272). If it is determined that the gaming state is currently in a variable probability period (Z272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 displays the special symbol. Since it is in a variable probability state, the process moves to Z273. In the process of Z273, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (Z273). Specifically, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 are compared one by one with the random number value of 958 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. As mentioned above, 27 random numbers from 0 to 26 are set as the random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the value of the special win random number counter C1 matches these random numbers for the jackpot. In this case, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to Z275.

On the other hand, in the process of Z272, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a variable probability state (Z272: No), the process of Z274 is executed. In the process of Z274, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (Z254). Specifically, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 are compared one by one with the random number value of 978 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. Three random numbers from 0 to 2 are set as the random numbers that will result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches these random numbers that will result in a jackpot, the special symbol will be selected. It is determined that it is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to Z275.

In the process of Z275, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of Z273 or Z274 is a special symbol jackpot (Z275), and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (Z275: Yes), the display mode at the time of a jackpot is set based on the value of the special win type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z271 (Z276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z271 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, and the jackpot (jackpot) of four types of special symbols is determined. A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), the jackpot type is determined. As mentioned above, if the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, time saving 100 times), and if it is in the range of "40 to 87". , determines that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variable odd symbol jackpot), and if it is in the range of "88 to 91", determines that it is a jackpot B2 (16R probability variable even symbol jackpot), and falls in the range of "92 to 99". If so, it is determined that it is a jackpot C (see FIG. 222(c)).

In the process of Z276, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are set as stop types in order to stop display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, a fluctuation pattern for a jackpot is determined based on the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z277). When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z277, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is set. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, if the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250", it is normal reach. Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination of validity, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The audio lamp control device 113 determines the contents of the variable display mode (variation pattern) to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the validity determination result. The main control device 110 is configured to be able to switch to the out-of-reach display mode in the audio lamp control device 113 for the same variable time even if the out-of-reach display mode is displayed. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and the effects can be diversified.

For example, the variation patterns for misses include "miss (long time)", "miss (short time)", "miss normal reach", "miss super reach", and "miss special reach". ing. Various types of ``normal reach'' and various types of ``super reach'' are prescribed as common fluctuation patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C.

In the process of Z275, if it is determined that the special symbol is out (Z275: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (Z278). In the process of Z278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the removed symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, a variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (Z279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of Z278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is checked, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, normal reach, super Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as reach.

When the process of Z277 or the process of Z279 is finished, next, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of Z277 or Z279 (Z280). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of Z277 or the process of Z279 (Z281). When the process of Z281 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 248, the starting winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (Z105). This starting prize winning process (Z105) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243), and determines whether or not there is a winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning prize), and if there is a starting winning prize, This is a process for suspending the values indicated by various random number counters and pre-reading the lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the various random number counters.

When the starting winning process (Z105: see FIG. 248) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) or not (Z301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (Z302 ). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z303).

Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: No) or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (Z303: No), an over winning information command is set (Z304) and the process moves to Z309. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (Z303: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the pitch number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (Z305). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z306).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 255) to be described later. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command by the process of Z306, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt process mentioned above is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (Z307). In addition, in the process of Z307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, reservation area 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, reservation area 3 is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, reservation area 4 is set as the first area. Next, the special figure 1 is set at the bottom of the variation order storage area 203p (Z308), and the prefetching process (Z320) is executed. The prefetch process (Z320) will be described later with reference to FIG. 249.

Next, regarding Z309 to Z316, for each process of Z301 to Z320 explained above, the process for winning the first ball entrance 64 is that the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 wins. Since the same processing is executed except that the processing is changed in response to this, a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, when a game ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 are It is acquired and stored in the free holding area of the corresponding special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b.

In this way, for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640, the same special winning random number counter C1 and special winning type counter as for the first special symbol are used. By acquiring the values of C2, stop type selection counter C3, and fluctuation type selection counter CS1, it is possible to perform a lottery using the same random number for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The winning probability can be made constant even with the second special symbol.

After executing the process of Z308 or the process of Z316, a prefetch process (Z320) is executed. The details of the pre-reading process (Z320) will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 249 as described above. Based on the values of various counters acquired for the ball entering, processing is executed to determine in advance each lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the entry of the ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of variation. With this configuration, there is no need for a storage area to store the values of each counter until the fluctuation starts, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Alternatively, some of the counters (for example, only the variation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of variation. With this configuration, the counters related to the judgment of success or failure can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counters that are not related to the judgment of success or failure can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the prefetching process (Z320), which is one process in the starting winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing this prefetch processing (Z320).

In the pre-reading process (Z320), first, based on the value of the acquired special winning random number counter C1, a judgment is made as to whether or not it is correct at the start of the variation (Z351). In this judgment, the same process as Z255 in the above-mentioned special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209: see FIG. 246) and Z275 in the special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214: see FIG. 247) is executed. . In addition, this validity judgment (discrimination) at the start of variation (processing Z255 in special symbol 1 variation start processing (Z209: see Figure 246), Z275 in special symbol 2 variation start processing (Z214: see Figure 247) This corresponds to the prior judgment (pre-judgment) that is executed before the above process. Next, it is determined whether the determination result executed in the process of Z351 is correct (also referred to as a specific determination result) (Z352). If it is determined that the determination result is a hit (Z352: Yes), the fluctuation pattern type is acquired from the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 (discrimination). (Z353). Next, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a winning prize information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202e (Z354), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z352, if it is determined that the validity determination result is incorrect (Z352: No), a fluctuation pattern is selected from the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1. Get the type (Z355). Next, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a winning prize information command is set from the prize winning command table 202e (Z356), and this process ends.

In this way, before the fluctuation starts, the result of the validity judgment in advance is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time a held ball is established, so the voice lamp control device 113 The result of the judgment and the type of winning can be recognized in advance. Therefore, based on the winning command, the audio lamp control device 113 performs a preview effect that notifies the player of the result of the judgment on the held ball in advance (for example, changing the color of the held symbol to a color that notifies the result of the judgment on the held ball). It is possible to perform an effect such as outputting a notification sound to notify the result of the determination of the validity of the held balls. Moreover, since one winning command is output for each held ball every time a held ball is established, the audio lamp control device 113 can also recognize the formation of a held ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the normal symbol variation process (Z106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (Z106). This normal symbol variation processing (Z106) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243), and is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243), and is used to display the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 and the variation display associated with the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (Z401). When the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is controlled to open and close. This includes during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (Z401: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (Z401: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (Z402: No), the long-time open flag 203i is set to OFF (Z403), and the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203f (number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) (Z404). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (Z405), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (Z405: No), this process ends immediately. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (Z405: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (Z406).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (Z407). In the process of Z407, the data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (Z408).

Next, normal symbol variation start processing is executed (Z409), and this processing is ended. The normal symbol fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. dynamic display time), and if the result of the judgment is a win, a process of setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (operation pattern of the normal figure winning game) corresponding to the winning type, etc. Execute.

In the process of Z402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (Z410). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of Z437 or the process of Z438 of FIG. 251 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

On the other hand, in the process of Z410, if the variable time has not elapsed (Z410: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z410, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (Z410: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (Z411). In the process of Z411, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode is set by the process of Z427 or Z431 in FIG. 251, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be displayed as the second symbol. The device 83 is set to display a stopped display (lit display). On the other hand, if the drawing of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of Z435 in FIG. display). When the stop display is set by the process of Z411, when the second symbol display update process (see Z1007) of the main process (see FIG. 255) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 will be changed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of Z427, process of Z431, or process of Z435 in FIG. 251. In addition, in this control example, the "○" symbol is lit and displayed even in the case of a long-time win or a normal win. , "◎" if it is a long time win, "○" if it is a normal win).

Next, when the variable display being executed is started on the second symbol display device 83, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol fluctuation process is a normal symbol win? (Z412). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol win (Z412: Yes), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set to start (Z413), and this process ends. When the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of Z412, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see Z1005) of the main process (see FIG. 255) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set. The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of Z430 or Z434 in FIG. 251 are completed. In addition, in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: see FIG. 251) described later, the opening operation data of the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the winning type of the normal symbol is set, so in Z413, the winning type of the normal symbol The opening/closing control is configured to be set in accordance with the following. On the other hand, in the process of Z412, if the current lottery result is outside the normal symbol (Z412: No), the process of Z413 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, the normal symbol variation start process (Z408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation start processing (Z408). This normal symbol fluctuation start processing (Z408) sets the setting at the start of the normal symbol fluctuation that is executed during the normal symbol fluctuation processing (see Figure 251) that is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 243). This is a process to be executed.

It is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (Z421). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (Z421: Yes), the process moves to Z424. In the process of Z421, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (Z421: No), it is determined whether the probability is changing or the time is being shortened (Z422). If the probability is not variable or the time is not short (Z422: No), the process moves to Z424.

If it is a fixed change or time saving (Z422: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in a jackpot with a special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with a normal symbol. Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)), the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (Z423). Specifically, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal win random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)). As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is outside the normal pattern (see FIG. 221(c)).

In the process of Z424, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state with a normal symbol, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 obtained in the process of Z407 in FIG. , and the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)), the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (Z424). Specifically, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal win random number table 202c for low probability times (see FIG. 221(c)). As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a normal win with a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239". , it is determined that the symbol is outside the normal pattern (see FIG. 221(c)).

In this embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, it is configured such that the lottery of the normal symbol is less likely to become a win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to enter the specific winning hole 65a, so the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entering hole 640 is opened. This is to suppress as much as possible the ball that was intended to enter the specific winning hole 65a from entering the second ball entering hole 640. In addition, since the specific winning hole 65a is provided directly below the second ball entry hole 640, even if the ball enters the second ball entry hole 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the second ball entry hole 65a Many balls enter the ball entrance 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state, the number of balls held in the second ball entrance 640 reaches the maximum (four times).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained by the process of Z423 or Z424 is a normal symbol win (Z425), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (Z425: Yes) , the type of hit for the normal symbol is determined to be a long time hit (Z426). The winning type of this normal symbol is determined by comparing the value of the normal winning type counter obtained when passing through a through gate 67 (not shown) with a preset determination value. In this control example, the value of the normal win type counter is in the range from 0 to 198 and is updated repeatedly in synchronization with other special win type counter C2, and the value of the acquired normal win type counter is The configuration is such that if the number is between 0 and 3, it is determined to be a long-time win, and when it is between 4 and 198, it is determined to be a normal win.

If the type of win of the normal symbol is determined to be a long time win (Z426: Yes), a display mode for a long time win is set (Z427). In the process of Z427, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a long-term start command is set (Z428), and the long-term open flag 203i is turned on (Z429). Then, the process moves to Z430.

In the process of Z426, when it is determined that the winning type of the normal symbol is a normal winning (Z426: No), the display mode for normal winning is set (Z431). Next, it is determined whether the probability is changing or the time is being shortened (Z432). Then, if it is during the probability change or time saving (Z432: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (Z433). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (Z433: Yes), the process moves to Z434. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 as much as possible during a special symbol jackpot, even if the normal symbol is a hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is missed. The number of opening times and opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

In the process of Z433, if there is no special symbol jackpot (Z433: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 2. Set (Z430) and move on to the process of Z436. In the process of Z430, the opening number counter 203g is set to 2, and the opening time counter 203h is set to a value equivalent to 2 seconds.

In the process of Z432, if the probability is not changing or the time is not being shortened (Z432: No), the process moves to the process of Z434. In the process of Z432, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot with a special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set. It is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 1 (Z434), and the process moves to Z436. In the process of Z434, the opening number counter 203g is set to 1, and the opening time counter 203h is set to a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds.

On the other hand, in the process of Z425, if it is determined that the symbol is out of place (Z425: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (Z435). In the process of Z435, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process moves to Z436.

In the process of Z436, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (Z436), and if the probability is changing (Z436: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (Z437). , this process ends. On the other hand, if the probability is not changing in the process of Z436 (Z436: No), the variable time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (Z438), and this process is ended. In this way, except during jackpots of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of the variable display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and furthermore, Since the opening period of the second ball entry port 640 is extremely long, ie, "0.2 seconds x 1 time -> 2 seconds x 2 times", the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 easily.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening time and the number of openings in a long time win are the same as when the normal symbol hits in the variable probability state and the shortening time state, but the operation is not limited to this, and the opening time and number of openings in the long winning state are It may be configured to set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the through gate passage process (Z107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (Z107). This through gate passing process (Z107) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if a ball has passed, a normal hit random number is generated. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (Z502). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z503).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (Z503 :No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (Z503: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is Add 1 to the value (M) (Z504). Then, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (Z505), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of Z505, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (Z801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 254, a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when power is turned on to main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (Z902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 208) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (Z904), and if it is turned on (Z904: Yes), the process moves to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905), and if it is not stored (Z905: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to Z913 in this case.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (Z906), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (Z907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also moves to Z913. Note that, as described later in the process of Z1014 in FIG. 255, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (Z913). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed. In addition, if the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup error is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (Z915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to Z911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (Z905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( Z907: Yes), a status command is transmitted based on the long-time open flag 203i (Z908). Next, the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (Z909). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (Z910), and the process moves to Z911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of Z911, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various productions. Next, interrupts are permitted (Z912) and the process moves to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup processing will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an outline, each process of Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec period, and the counter update process of Z1010 and Z1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). (Z1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of Z101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command to In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 248) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning command set in the start winning process and the prefetch process (see FIG. 249) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 has been updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning apparatus 65 is executed (Z1004). The details of the jackpot control process (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 256.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is executed (Z1005). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process Z412 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 250), opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (Z1006). In the first symbol display update process, the variation is performed by the process Z257 or Z259 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 246), or the process Z277 or Z279 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 247). When a pattern is set, a variable display according to the variable pattern is started on the first symbol display device 37. In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off from the start of the variation until the variation time has elapsed. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is lit, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is lit, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, the red LED lights up.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process (Z1006), the process of Z257 or Z259 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 246), or the process of Z277 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 247) or When the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of Z279 ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is ended, and the process of Z256 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 246) is completed. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the process of , or the process of Z258, or the process of Z276 or Z278 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 247). Displays stoppage (lit display).

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device 83 (Z1007). In the second symbol display update process (Z1007), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of Z437 or Z438 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 251), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of Z410 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 250), the second symbol display update process is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The current variation display is finished, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process Z427 or the process Z431 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 251). (lit display).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (Z1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (Z1009: Yes), the process moves to Z1001, and the processes from Z1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (Z1009: No), within the time remaining until the predetermined time elapses, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process, The initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (Z1010, Z1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, 1 is added to the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of Z1002 (Z1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process Z1001 to Z1007 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special winning random number counter C1 (the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of Z1008, if information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 253 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after Z1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (Z1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and send it (Z1013). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (Z1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process of Z1008 is executed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game carried out in Z1001 to Z1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of Z1010 and Z1011 carried out within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. It can start from the process of Z1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Z1001, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is saved during the initial setting processing (Z901). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of Z1001. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 256, the jackpot control process (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (Z1004). This jackpot control process (Z1004) is executed in the main process (FIG. 255), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various effects according to the jackpot, and controls the special winning opening (jackpot). This is a process for opening or closing the opening port) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (Z1104: see FIG. 256), first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (Z1101). The process Z219 of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 244) is executed, and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set. If the special symbol jackpot is to be started (Z1101: Yes), the opening command is set ( Z1115), this process ends.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. sent towards. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening performance.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1108, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (Z1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being won (Z1102). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of Z1102, if the special symbol is not a jackpot (Z1102: No), this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1102, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (Z1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (Z1103). If it is the start timing of a new round (Z1103: Yes), the specific prize opening (large open opening) 65a is released (Z1104), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (Z1105). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio output during the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the audio ramp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1103, if it is not the timing to start a new number of rounds (Z1103: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106). Specifically, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of Z1106, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed (Z1107) and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the specific prize opening (large open opening) 65a is not satisfied (Z1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1108). Specifically, when a special game state (16 rounds or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out ends, it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending performance.

In the process of Z1108, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1108: Yes), an ending command is set (Z1109), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1108, if it is not the ending start timing (Z1108: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the jackpot (Z1110). The jackpot end timing is the timing when a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. If it is determined that it is not the timing to end the jackpot (Z1110: No), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1110, if it is determined that it is the timing to end the jackpot (Z1110: Yes), in the process of Z1111, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot A (Z1111). If the current jackpot type is jackpot A (Z1111: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203j is set to 100 (Z1112). Next, the jackpot flag 203n is set to OFF (Z1114), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is not jackpot A (Z1111: No), the probability change flag 203m is set to ON (Z1113), then the jackpot medium flag 203n is set to OFF (Z1114), and the current jackpot is returned. Finish the process.

<Control processing executed by audio lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 273. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 257, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (Z2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "momentary power outage"), and the Z2118 power-off processing (see Figure 258). ) is started during execution (Z2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 258, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see Z2115 in FIG. 258), it executes the power-off process Z2118. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of Z2118 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (Z2002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the Z2118 power was turned off. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (Z2003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written into a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of Z2006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (Z2003: Yes), the process moves to Z2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z2003: No), the process moves to Z2008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (Z2003: Yes), and the process moves to Z2004. On the other hand, the current startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the Z2118 power-off process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z2003: No), and the process moves to Z2208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (Z2002: Yes), the current startup processing is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of Z1318, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process shifts to Z2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of Z2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (Z2004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (Z2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (Z2005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (Z2007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of Z2008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (Z2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of Z2118 is executed (see Z2117 in FIG. 258). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the Z2118 power-off process is executed, so the reason why the Z2008 process is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of Z2118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (Z2009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (Z2010), the interrupt Set permission (Z2011) and proceed to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of Z2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process of Z2008 was started from Z2004 to Z2006 via the process of Z2006. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: No), skip Z2009, which is processing to clear the work area of RAM 223, move the processing to Z2010, set the initial value of RAM 223 (Z2010), and then set interrupt permission. (Z2011), and moves to main processing. Thereafter, it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (Z2012). In addition, this status command indicates whether the normal symbol is in a long-term hit based on the long-time open flag 203i in the process Z908 of the start-up process (see FIG. 254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. It is a command. In the process of Z2012, if it is determined that a status command has been received (Z2012: Yes), the long-time open flag 203i is set based on the received status command, and this process ends (Z2013). . Here, if the received status command indicates that a long time win is in progress, the long time open flag 203i is turned on, and if the received status command indicates that the long time win is not in progress, the long time open flag 203i is turned on. Set to off.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol is hitting for a long time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 side can also determine the state. I can do it.

Note that the reason why the clearing process of Z2009 is skipped is that when the process reaches the process of Z2008 from Z2004 via the process of Z2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of Z2004, If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, it is first determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main processing was started or the current processing of Z2101 has been executed (Z2101), and if 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (Z2101: No), the process moves to Z2113 without performing the processes of Z2102 to Z2112. In Z2101's processing, determining whether 1 ms has passed is because Z2102 to Z2112 are mainly processes related to display (direction), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of , Z2113, the variable display setting process of Z2114, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the process of Z2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the omission of receiving commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process of Z2112 in a short cycle, the commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of Z2101 (Z2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of Z2103 to Z2114 are sent to the display control device 114 (Z2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of Z2108, which will be described later (Z2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Z2104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step Z2105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of Z2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (Z2106). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is used as a command to control the display. device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process is performed in which a reservation lamp (not shown) is lit according to the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (Z2107). In this frame button input monitoring/production processing, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. Note that this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (Z2107) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 272.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is executed (Z2108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (Z2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of Z2109, the liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (Z2110), and the process moves to the process of Z2111. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of Z2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal presentation execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing of Z2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of Z2110 is finished, short-term winning management process is executed (Z2111). The details of this short-term winning management process (Z2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. ) is executed.

After executing the short-term winning prize management process (Z2111), the process of holding performance management process during reach (Z2112) is executed. The details of this on-reach holding effect management process (Z2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. Processing is executed to set a specific performance (notice performance) that informs the player that he/she will play the game so as to accumulate up to 100%.

When the process of Z2112 is finished, command determination process is executed (Z2113). This command determination process (Z2113) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 259. After executing the command determination process (Z2113), a variable display setting process is executed (Z2114). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. Note that details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 269.

When the process of Z2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (Z2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of Z2115 (Z2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (Z2117), and the power-off process is executed (Z2118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (Z2119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of Z2115 (Z2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (Z2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (Z2116: No), the process returns to Z2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the command determination process (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (Z2113). This command determination process (Z2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and, as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

In the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 259), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the first command received from the main controller 110 is read. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). If a variable pattern command is received (Z2201: Yes), variable pattern reception processing is executed (Z2202), and this processing ends. Details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 260.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2201, if a variation pattern command is not received (Z2201: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received (Z2203). If a stop type command is received (Z2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (Z2205), and this process ends. .

In the process of Z2203, if the stop type command has not been received (Z2203: No), it is determined whether or not the held pitch count command has been received (Z2206). When the number of reserved balls command is received (Z2206: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (Z2207). After that, this process ends. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2206, if the reserved ball number command is not received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not a special symbol winning command is received (Z2208). If a special symbol winning command is received (Z2208: Yes), winning command reception processing is started (Z2209), and this processing is ended. Details of the winning command reception process (Z2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 266, but based on the winning command output from the main controller 110, the judgment result of the pending special symbol, the variation type, etc. A pre-determination is performed to determine the pre-determination, and a setting process is executed for executing each of the pending effects determined to be executed based on the pre-determination result. On the other hand, in the process of Z2208, if the special symbol winning command is not received (Z2208: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 260, details of the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202), which is one process in the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 259), will be described. FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern reception process. In this variation pattern reception process (Z2113), detailed special symbol variation patterns (performance mode), preview display mode, pending notice display mode, etc. are set based on the received variation pattern command.

In the variation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 260), first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2221), and a variation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2222). Thereafter, a preview display command for display is set in the variation pattern (Z2223), and the value of the pending notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z2224). Here, the display preview display command is a command for instructing to display various preview performances (for example, comment previews, mini character previews, etc. that suggest the result of the judgment) determined based on the variation pattern.

When the process of Z2224 is finished, it is determined whether the value of the pending notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225). If it is determined that the value of the pending notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225), the pending change value is set to 0, and the pending performance mode storage area 223m is cleared (Z2226). Note that if the value of the pending notice counter 223g is 1 or more (Z2225: No), the process of Z2226 is skipped and the process moves to the process of Z2227. Next, a lucky display determination process (Z2227) is executed. With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 213(b), even when the color of the reserved ball is changed based on the pre-read discrimination result, the value of the reserved ball notification counter 223g is used to change the color of the reserved ball. The display position is changed according to the extinguishment, and after the change of the special symbol corresponding to the held ball whose color has been changed starts, the change stops and becomes hidden, and the held change value can also be set to the initial value of 0. Therefore, even when the color of the reserved balls is changed, the player can be correctly informed of the order in which the variable display of the reserved balls is started.

Here, with reference to FIG. 261, the lucky display determination process (Z2227) executed within the variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing this lucky display determination process (Z2227). In this lucky display determination process (Z2227), the number of reserved balls at the time of winning a jackpot in the past is determined, and a mark pattern (reserved effect) is set to be displayed in the display area corresponding to the number of reserved balls. Execute.

In the lucky display determination process (Z2227: FIG. 261), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2301). That is, it is determined whether the state is a normal state in which no special hold performance is being executed. If it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes), it is determined whether the normal mode is in effect (Z2302). If it is not in normal mode (Z2302: No), this process ends. In the process of Z2302, if it is determined that the mode is in normal mode (Z2302: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the lucky pending storage value 223p provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2303). If it is determined that the lucky pending storage value 223p is 0 (Z2303: Yes), this process is immediately ended. Here, when the value of the lucky reservation storage value 223p is 0, it indicates that the number of reservation balls at the time of winning of the special symbol determined to be a jackpot is not stored.

If it is determined that the value of the lucky pending memory value 223p is 1 or more (Z2303), it is determined whether or not the performance is possible based on the lucky pending lottery table 222p (see FIG. 237(c)) provided in the ROM 222. Acquire (Z2304). Here, in the lucky hold lottery table 222p, the process of obtaining the value of the effect counter 223h and determining whether to execute the lucky hold effect based on the judgment value of the effect counter 223h set corresponding to the current number of held balls. is executed.

Based on the process of Z2304, it is determined whether the lucky pending performance (execution performance) is executable (Z2305). If it is not possible (Z2305: No), this process is ended. If it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2305: Yes), a display hold lid command is set from the lucky hold command table 222g (FIG. 231) based on the value of the lucky hold memory value 223p (Z2306). ). Next, the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is set to 3 (Z2307), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2301, if it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2301: No), it is determined whether the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308). . That is, it is determined whether the lucky hold effect was executed in the previous variation. If it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes), the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is cleared (0 is set as the initial value) (Z2309), and the main processing is performed. end. Incidentally, in the process of Z2309, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2308: No), this process is directly ended. In this way, the lucky pending effect is set at the start of the variation, and is ended when the special effect status is set to the initial value at the start of the next variation. In addition, in this control example, the lucky hold performance is performed during a period in which the special symbol fluctuates once, but is not limited to this, and may be configured to be performed during a period in which fluctuations are performed multiple times. It's okay. The number of variations of the special symbol to be executed at the start of the lucky hold performance may be determined, and the change may end when that number of changes is executed, or a lottery may be performed to determine whether the lucky hold performance ends each time. The performance may be set to end when a winning lottery is executed, or when all reserved balls are used up, or when a demonstration display is performed.

Returning to FIG. 260, the explanation will be continued. After executing the lucky display determination process (Z2227), the ready-to-reach pending performance setting process (Z2228) is executed. In the hold during reach effect setting process (Z2228: Fig. 261), when a special symbol variation that becomes the reach display mode is executed, the hold during reach effect is executed to play the game so as to accumulate the held balls during the reach display mode. Executes processing for executing a performance (one of the special pending performances).

Here, with reference to FIG. 262, a description will be given of the ready-to-reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing this reach-on-hold effect setting process (Z2228).

In the reach pending performance setting process (Z2228: FIG. 262), first, it is determined whether the reach is changing (Z2321). If it is determined that the reach is not changing (Z2321: No), this process ends. If the reach is changing (Z2321: Yes), it is determined whether the change is in normal mode (Z2322). If it is determined that the mode is not the normal mode (Z2322: No), this process is immediately ended. If the variation is in the normal mode (Z2322: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special performance status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2323). That is, it is determined whether the state is a normal state in which no special pending performance is being performed. If the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 1 or more (Z2323: No), this process ends. Here, if the special performance status is 1 or more, it means that another special pending performance is being executed, so the determination of Z2323 is performed to prevent further pending performances from duplicating. . If the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the in-reach performance lottery table 222m (see FIG. 237(a)) executes the game based on the number of reserved pitches and the value of the performance counter 223h. Obtain whether or not the performance is possible (Z2324). Here, in the reach-for-reach performance lottery table 222m, a determination value of the performance counter 223h is set for the current number of reserved balls, and it is determined whether or not to execute the reach-for-reach performance.

Through the process of Z2324, it is determined whether the on-reach performance (execution performance) is executable (Z2325). If it is determined that the execution effect is not executable (Z2325: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the execution performance is executable (Z2325: Yes), the pending performance is determined from the reach start time calculation table 222n (FIG. 237(b)) based on the variation pattern type (variation type) of the special symbol. The value of the start timer 223r is set (Z2326), data indicating special performance status 2 is set in the special performance status storage area 223n (Z2327), and this processing is ended.

In this way, according to the reach pending effect setting process (Z2228), the variation pattern type (dynamic display mode type) that will be the reach display mode has been determined, and the state in which other special pending effects are not being executed is determined. If so, a lottery will be held to determine whether to execute the hold effect during reach, and by winning the lottery, the timing to start executing the hold effect during reach will be set, so the fluctuation of the special symbol that becomes the reach display mode will be changed. When the on-reach effect is started, the lower the number of balls currently on hold, the higher the frequency of execution is set, and it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the game ball launch during the reach, and the game store side Profit can be increased. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

Next, returning to FIG. 260, the explanation will be continued. After executing the hold effect setting process (Z2228) during reach, hold lid setting process (Z2229) is executed. In this pending lid setting process (Z2229), processing necessary for displaying the variable lid pattern P displayed in the sub-display area Ds is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 263, the hold lid setting process (Z2229) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing this holding lid setting process (Z2229).

In the hold lid setting process (Z2229: see FIG. 263), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 1 (Z2341). That is, it is determined whether a short-term winning effect (short-term winning pending effect), which is one of the special pending effects, is set. If it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2341: Yes), the short-term winning hold is set in the hold lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 228(a)) provided in the ROM 222. A pending lid range value is acquired based on the lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 229(a)) (Z2342). A display holding lid command is set based on the holding lid range value obtained in the process of Z2342 (Z2355), and this process ends. In this way, when the value of the special performance status is 1 and the short-term winning performance (see FIG. 212(a)) is set to be executed, the display range of the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the current reserved ball is By selecting and setting the value (display mode) from the short-term winning pending lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 229(a)), the display mode of the variable lid symbol P that is different from the normal time (normally, the display mode is It is possible to set a display mode in which the symbols are displayed with an interval of one reserved symbol or a rule of displaying the symbols with an interval of two reserved symbols.

As a result, if the period required for storing 1 to 4 reserved balls is within the predetermined period, the variable lid pattern P will be displayed according to a different rule from normal times, so the variable lid pattern The manner in which P is displayed also allows the user to recognize that the period required for storing the reserved ball is short. Therefore, the player can be induced to play the game so that the reserved balls are memorized more quickly, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Moreover, the interest in the game can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2341, if it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2341: No), it is determined whether the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2343). That is, it is determined whether the execution of the hold performance during reach is set. If it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2343: Yes), the reserved lid range selection table 222d5 during reach performance in the reserved lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 228) is (see FIG. 229(b)), the hold lid range value is acquired (Z2344). Based on the pending lid range value obtained in the process of Z2344, a display pending lid command is set (Z2355), and this process ends. Here, when the display control device 114 receives a display holding lid command indicating the holding lid range value acquired in the holding lid range selection table 222d5 during reaching effect, it indicates that it is the timing to execute the holding effect during reaching effect. By receiving a preview display command for performing a medium-holding notice performance, the variable lid pattern P is displayed in a variable manner in a display mode corresponding to the display holding lid command.

In this way, when it has been decided to execute the hold performance during a reach, a manner in which the display of the variable lid pattern P is varied is set, and the display form is set in accordance with the execution timing of the hold performance during a reach. Since the variable lid pattern P is displayed in a variable manner, it can be determined from the variable lid pattern P that a special hold performance different from the normal time has been executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2343, if it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2343: No), it is determined whether the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2345) . That is, it is determined whether execution of a lucky hold effect, which is one of the special hold effects, is set. In the process of Z2345, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 3 (Z2345: Yes), the normal reserved lid range selection table 222d1 (see Figure 228) in the reserved lid range selection table 222d (see Figure 228) is 228(b)), the hold lid range value is obtained (Z2344). Thereafter, the above-mentioned process Z2355 is executed, and this process ends. In this way, when the execution of the lucky hold effect (see FIGS. 216(a) to 216(b)) is set, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P (not displayed) is the same as the execution of the hold effect in the normal state. A display mode is set in which one reserved symbol is left open from the last reserved symbol.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2345, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2345: No), it is determined whether the mode is preview B mode (Z2347). That is, as shown in FIGS. 211(a) and 211(b), when there are four or more reserved balls and the color of the reserved symbol is variable, the player is advised not to let any more reserved balls enter the ball. Determine whether a hold performance is being executed. If it is the notice B mode (Z2347: Yes), a display indicating the color change of the variable lid pattern P is displayed based on the reserved lid color change selection table 222f (see FIG. 230(b)) provided in the ROM 222. Set the hold lid command (Z2348). Here, as shown in FIG. 211(b), the reserved symbols are displayed in variable colors, and the notice B informs the player that the game will be played in such a way as to restrict the number of reserved balls from increasing further. If more reserved balls are stored while a game is being played in the mode (the number of reserved balls is 4 or more), the variable lid symbol at the position where the variable lid symbol P and the displayed reserved symbol overlap Settings are performed to display P in a variable color (for example, green) that is different from the normal color. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that he/she played a game contrary to the notification mode in which the player was notified to play the game so as not to memorize the reserved balls.

After executing the process of Z2348, obtain the pending lid range value based on the advance notice B mode pending cover range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 228(d)), execute the process of Z2355 mentioned above, and proceed to the main Finish the process. According to the notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 228(d)), if there are 4 holding balls as shown in FIG. 211(a), the holding ball 5 is selected in the normal mode holding performance. It can be configured such that the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the position of the item is displayed according to a special rule such that a hidden pattern becomes a displayed state. As a result, in the preview B mode in which a hold effect is performed that instructs not to increase the number of held balls, the variable lid pattern P is used to make the player feel as if 4 held balls is the upper limit. can be set. Therefore, depending on the display mode of the variable lid pattern P, notification can be made such that the upper limit value of the reserved balls is variable.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2347, if it is determined that the mode is not the notice B mode (Z2347: No), it is determined whether the mode is the notice A mode (Z2350). That is, the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the color of the reserved symbol is set or set to be variable, and the variable lid symbol P is set to be different from the reserved symbol in the normal mode (normal state). It is determined whether a pending performance that is displayed without any interval is being executed.

If it is determined that the preview A mode is set (Z2351: Yes), the pending lid range value is acquired based on the preview A mode reserved lid range selection table 222d2 (see FIG. 228(c)). Z2351). Thereafter, the above-mentioned process Z2355 is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2350, if it is determined that the mode is not advance notice A mode (Z2350), it is determined whether or not the mode is being shortened (Z2352). Here, it is determined whether the time is being reduced or not based on the gaming state data attached to the variable pattern command output from the main controller 110. The fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 includes data on the type of fluctuation (out of reach, hit), as well as information on whether the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state (electric support gaming state) or a variable probability gaming state (high-speed gaming state). Data indicating whether the game is in a gaming state (with probability electric support) or a normal gaming state (gaming state without low probability electric support) is also output.

If it is determined that the time saving mode is in progress (the state in which the time saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state is set) (Z2352: Yes), based on the time saving holding lid range selection table 222d6 (see FIG. 229(c)). Then, the hold lid range value is acquired (Z2353). Thereafter, the above-mentioned process Z2355 is executed, and this process ends. In addition, during time saving (state with electric support), unlike the normal game state, when the number of reserved balls is from 0 to 6, the variable lid symbol P is the reserved symbol for the 7th reserved ball and the 8th reserved ball. Only the position where is displayed is displayed, and the number of reserved balls becomes 7, so the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the 7th reserved symbol is displayed becomes hidden, and the number of reserved balls becomes 8. As a result, the variable lid pattern P displayed at the position where the eighth reserved pattern is displayed is set to be hidden. As a result, during short time periods with electric support when the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in an open state, the variable lid pattern P is configured to be displayed less than in the normal game state, and in a state where a large number of reserved balls frequently occur. , an increase in the load of display control of the variable lid pattern P is suppressed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2352, if it is determined that the time is not being shortened (Z2352: No), that is, if it is determined that the normal mode is being held, the normal holding lid range selection table 222d1 (Fig. 228(b)), the hold lid range value is acquired (Z2354), the process of Z2355 mentioned above is executed, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 260, the explanation will be continued. After executing the pending lid setting process (Z2229), the pending character setting process (Z2230) is executed. In this pending character setting process (Z2230), a process for determining a girl character etc. to be displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 264, the pending character setting process (Z2230) executed within the variation pattern reception process (Z2202; FIG. 260) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing this pending character setting process (Z2230).

In the pending character setting process (Z2230), first, it is determined whether the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2361). That is, it is determined whether the normal mode, which is a normal state, is set as the state of the suspended performance. If it is determined that the value of the special performance status is not 0 (Z2361: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special performance status is 0 (Z2361: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls has changed from three to four (Z2362). Here, if the number of retained balls has changed from 3 to 4, even if one retained ball is consumed by starting a new fluctuation, the first ball entry port 64, which is the starting port, , the number of reserved balls was 3 by entering either the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b), the number of reserved balls is 4 (the total value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is 4). It is a state that is changing from state to state.

If it is determined that the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362: Yes), the contents of the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 and the set reserved production mode Based on the and performance counter 223h, a reserved character is selected from the reserved character selection table 222i (see FIG. 232(b)), a character command for display is set (Z2363), and this process ends. In this way, when the number of reserved balls reaches 4, the girl character type is determined by lottery based on the background mode selected in the character display area C and the set reserved production mode, and is set to be displayed. . Thereby, the displayed characters can be varied depending on the background type and the hold performance mode, and the hold performance can be made diverse. In addition to the configuration of this control example, the type of character to be determined may be configured to vary depending on the validity determination result of the special symbol being changed or the type of change pattern (for example, super reach, etc.). By configuring this way, if you set a character that has a high selection rate when the result of the judgment is a hit, you can use the special symbol that is changing or the one that is pending to be judged as a hit in advance depending on the character type. The player can recognize that the reserved balls that have been played are stored. In addition, if you set a character with a high selection rate when displayed in Super Reach depending on the character type, when that character is displayed, Super Reach, which is a fluctuating pattern with high expectations for a jackpot, will be executed. We can expect this to happen at an early stage.

Also, in this control example, the notice A mode and the notice B mode are set when the variation pattern type (for example, super reach type) has a high expectation of a jackpot based on the pre-read judgment, or when the result of the advance judgment is a jackpot. Since it is easy to play, by displaying the J2 character and the J3 character, the player can expect to execute the super reach type and that the result of the success/failure determination will be a jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls has not changed from three to four (Z2362: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than four (Z2364). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2364: Yes), a display character command for clearing the reserved characters is set (Z2365), and this process ends. In this way, since the character is set to be hidden at the timing when the number of balls on hold becomes less than four, it is possible to notify the player of the decrease in the number of balls on hold in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the process of Z2364, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 or more (Z2364: No), it is determined whether an over winning has occurred (Z2366). Here, whether or not an over winning has occurred is determined by determining whether an over winning information command is received from the main controller 110 when the starting winning exceeds the upper limit of the number of reserved balls. Ru. If it is determined that over-winning has occurred (Z2366: Yes), the pending character change table 222j changes based on the contents of the background mode storage area 223i, the pending presentation mode, and the presentation counter 223h. A reserved character is selected, a display character command is set (Z2267), and this processing is ended. Incidentally, if it is determined in Z2366 that no over-winning has occurred (Z2366: No), this process is directly ended. In this way, in this control example, when an over-win occurs, the character displayed in the character display area C is changed. As is clear from the pending character change table 222j (see FIG. 233), the character change is configured to be determined based on the currently set character. If the judgment result is a jackpot (hit) or a variable pattern type with a high expectation of jackpot, the J3 character, which is likely to be set, is selected in a state where the notice A mode or notice B mode, which is likely to be set, is determined. is configured so that characters other than J3 are not selected. In addition, if the J2 character is selected, or if the J0 or J1 character, which is difficult to select, is selected in the preview A mode or the preview B mode, the J2 or J3 character is selected. It is designed to be easy to use. In other words, it is configured such that it is possible to step up to J3, which has a high expectation level where jackpots and fluctuating pattern types with high expectations are selected, and by causing over-wins, players can enjoy the pending performance. It is configured so that it can be done. Changing this character corresponds to a benefit advantageous to the player.

Returning to FIG. 260, the explanation will be continued. After executing the pending character setting process (Z2230), the speech bubble setting process (Z2231) is executed, and this process ends. In this speech bubble setting process (Z2231), processing for selecting the content of a comment to be displayed in a speech bubble from the character displayed in the character display area C is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the balloon setting process (Z2231) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing this balloon setting process (Z2231).

In the speech bubble setting process (Z2231), it is first determined whether 1 is set as the value of the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2381). That is, it is determined whether the short-term winning suspension performance is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2381: Yes), the short-term winning speech balloon selection in the speech balloon selection table 222k (see FIG. 234(a)) provided in the ROM 222 is performed. The contents of the balloon are acquired based on the table 222k4 (see FIG. 235(a)) (Z2382). A display balloon command is set based on the contents of the balloon obtained after executing the process of Z2382 (Z2394), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2381, if it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2381: No), it is determined whether the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the hold performance during reach is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383: Yes), the content of the speech bubble is acquired based on the speech bubble selection table 222k5 during reach effect (see FIG. 235(b)) (Z2384), and the above-mentioned Z2394 Execute the process and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2383, if it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2383: No), it is determined whether the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385) . That is, it is determined whether the lucky hold effect is set. If the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385: Yes), the content of the balloon is acquired based on the lucky pending speech balloon selection table 222k6 (see FIG. 236(a)) (Z2386), and the process of Z2394 described above is performed. Execute and end this process.

In the process of Z2387, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2385: No), it is determined whether the preview B mode is set (Z2387). If it is determined that the preview B mode is set (Z2387: Yes), the balloon content is acquired based on the preview B balloon selection table 222k3 (see FIG. 234(d)) (Z2388), and the above-mentioned Z2394 The process is executed, and this process ends.

In the process of Z2387, if it is determined that the notice B mode is not set (Z2387: No), it is determined whether the notice A mode is set (Z2389). If it is determined that the preview A mode is set (Z2389: Yes), the balloon content is acquired based on the preview A balloon selection table 222k2 (see FIG. 234(c)) (Z2390), and the above-mentioned Z2394 The process is executed, and this process ends.

In the process of Z2389, if it is determined that the notice A mode is not set (Z2389: No), it is determined whether the time saving mode (time saving gaming state or probability variable gaming state) is set (Z2391). If it is determined that the time saving mode is set (Z2391), the content of the balloon is obtained based on the time saving speech balloon selection table 222k7 (see FIG. 236(b)) (Z2392), and the process of Z2394 described above is performed. Execute and end this process.

In the process of Z2391, if it is determined that time saving is not set (Z2391: No), the contents of the balloon are acquired based on the normal speech balloon selection table 222k1 (see FIG. 234(b)) (Z2393), The above-mentioned process Z2394 is executed, and this process ends.

In this way, it is controlled so that comments with corresponding contents are selected for each suspended performance mode, so that the comment contents matching the suspended performance mode can be displayed to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the winning command reception process (Z2209), which is one process in the command determination process (Z2113: see FIG. 259) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing this winning command reception process (Z2209). This winning command reception process (Z2209) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 259) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the winning command reception process (Z2209), winning information indicated by the received command is first set in the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2401). Next, based on the variation type of the received command and the obtained value of the performance counter 223h, a pending change value is acquired from the pending change selection table 222b (FIG. 227(a)) provided in the ROM 222 (Z2402). .

Next, it is determined whether the value of the pending notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2403). That is, it is determined whether the preview A mode or the preview B mode in which the color of the reserved symbols is changed is set. If the value of the pending notice counter 223g is not 0 (Z2403: No), the process of Z2404 to Z2406 is skipped and the process of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2403: Yes), the hold effect mode is selected from the hold effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 227(b)) based on the hold change value. (Z2404). Next, it is determined whether the pending change value is 0 (Z2405). If it is determined that the pending change value is 0 (Z2405: Yes), the process of Z2406 is skipped and the process of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reservation change value is not 0 (Z2405: No), the reservation notice counter 223g displays the current reservation ball value (special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b). total value) (Z2406).

When the process of Z2406 is finished, short-term winning determination process is executed (Z2407). The details of the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) will be described later with reference to FIG. If so), a process for setting execution of the short-term winning suspension effect is executed. Next, lucky hold processing is executed (Z2408). The details of the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. 268, but it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the lucky hold effect (whether the conditions are met), and if it is the execution timing, Set the execution of the lucky hold effect. Next, the above-mentioned pending lid setting process (Z2409), pending character setting process (Z2410), and speech bubble setting process (Z2411) are executed, and this process ends. Note that the holding lid setting process (Z2409) is the same as the content already explained with reference to FIG. 263, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Further, the balloon setting process (Z2411) is the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 265, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing this short-term winning determination process (Z2407). This short-term winning determination process (Z2407) is executed in the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 266) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the short-term winning determination process (Z2407), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability gaming state or a time-saving gaming state (Z2421). If it is determined that the game is in a variable probability gaming state or a time-saving gaming state (during time-saving) (Z2421: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the variable probability game state or the time-saving game state (Z2421: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2422). If it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2422: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2422: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 4 (Z2423). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 4 (Z2423: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 (Z2423: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is not 0 (Z2424). If it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is 0 (Z2424: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is not 0 (Z2424: Yes), the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is set to 1 (Z2425), and this processing is ended. In this way, when the period required until four reserved balls are established is less than 5 seconds, special performance status 1 is set, which indicates that execution of the short-term winning suspension performance is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing this lucky pending storage process (Z2408). This lucky pending storage process (Z2408) is executed during the winning command reception process (see FIG. 266) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the lucky reservation storage process (Z2408), first, the winning lottery result is obtained based on the contents of the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2441). Next, in the process of Z2441, it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a jackpot (Z2442). If it is determined that the acquired lottery result is not a jackpot (2442: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result is a jackpot (Z2442: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 4 or more (Z2443: No). If it is determined that there are four or more balls (Z2443: Yes), the value of the current number of reserved balls is set in the lucky reserved memory value 223p (Z2444), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current value of the number of balls on hold is 4 or less (Z2443: No), the process ends as is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the variable display setting process (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (Z2114). This variable display setting process (Z2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 269), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2501). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2501: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so Z2505. Move to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (Z2501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (Z2502), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation performance extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is Obtain from RAM 223 (Z2503).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2504). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process moves to Z2505.

In the process of Z2505, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2505). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (Z2505: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (Z2505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (Z2506), and the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is Obtain from RAM 223 (Z2507). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is directly set as the stop type of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 (Z2508), and the process moves to Z2509.

In the process of Z2509, a display stop type command is generated to notify the display control device 114 based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (Z2509). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the variable performance is controlled. After the process of Z2509 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the short-term winning management process (Z2111), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing this short-term winning management process (Z2111). In this short-term winning management process (Z2111), processing for measuring the period until four reserved balls necessary for determining whether or not to execute the short-term winning holding effect is executed.

In the short-term prize management process (Z2111), first, it is determined whether the current number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (Z2601: No), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is subtracted by 1 (Z2602). On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601: Yes), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds (Z2603), and the process moves to Z2604.

In the process of Z2604, it is determined whether the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604). That is, it is determined whether the short-term winning suspension effect has already been set. If it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605: Yes), the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2605), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z2604, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), or in the process of Z2605, it is determined that the number of reserved balls is greater than 4. If so (Z2605: No), the process of Z2606 is skipped and this process ends.

In this way, when the short-term winning suspension performance has already been set, the special performance status is set to 0 and set to the initial value based on the fact that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 balls. However, the special performance status is not limited to this, but the special performance status should be set to 0 at the timing when the execution of the short-term winning suspension performance is finished (when up to 4 suspended balls enter in less than 5 seconds and the remaining period has elapsed). It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, a description will be given of the hold performance management process (Z2112) during reach, which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing this reach-on-hold effect start processing (Z2112). In this ready-to-reach pending performance management process (Z2112), a process for determining the execution timing of the ready-to-reach pending performance and setting the display mode of the ready-to-reach pending performance at the execution timing is executed.

In the reach pending performance management process (Z2112), first, it is determined whether the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701). That is, it is determined whether the execution of the hold performance during reach is set. If it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2701: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the pending performance start timer 223r provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2702 ). If it is determined that the value of the suspended performance start timer 223r is 1 or more (Z2702: No), the value of the suspended performance start timer 223r is subtracted by 1 (Z2703). Next, it is determined whether the value of the pending performance start timer 223r calculated in the process of Z2703 is 0 (Z2704). If it is determined that the value of the suspended performance start timer 223r after the calculation is 1 or more (Z2704: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the suspended performance start timer 223r after the subtraction is 0 (Z2704: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705). If it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2705: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes), a preview display command indicating that the on-reach pending performance will be executed is set (Z2706). After that, this process ends.

In the process of Z2702, if it is determined that the value of the pending performance start timer 223r is 0 (Z2702: Yes), the timing at which the fluctuation time (variation period) of the special symbol that is fluctuating ends (the fluctuation period has elapsed) It is determined whether it is the timing to do so (Z2707). If it is determined that it is the fluctuation end timing (Z2707: Yes), 0 is set in the special performance status storage area 223n (Z2708), and then this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z2707, if it is determined that it is not the variation end timing (Z2707: No), this process ends. In this manner, the special performance status is set to 0 at the timing when the variation time of the special symbol that becomes the reach variation mode elapses, and the suspended performance is initially set to the normal mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 272, the frame button input monitoring/presentation process (Z2107), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (Z2107). In the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (Z2107), the depression operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and based on the depression, execution of a preview production or the like is set.

In the frame button input monitoring/presentation process (Z2107: see FIG. 272), first, it is determined whether a value greater than 0 is set in the SW valid time counter 223k as the SW (switch) valid time (valid period) (Z2801 ). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No), and if it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is set to a value larger than 0 (Z2801: Yes), it is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the SW valid time counter 223k (Z2802). Thereafter, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (Z2805). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2805: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is greater than 0 (Z2806). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2806: No), the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (Z2807). Next, a display switching command to a variable pattern corresponding to the background mode set in the process of Z2807 is set (Z2808). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. This sensor input processing (Z2813) will be described later with reference to FIG. 273.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2806, if it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is larger than 0 (Z2806: Yes), it is determined whether the preview performance is being executed (the preview performance is in progress). (Z2809). If it is determined that a preview performance is in progress (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2810), and a display notice indicating the preview performance determined by lottery is displayed. Set the command (Z2811). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, sensor input processing (Z2813) will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the sensor input process (Z2813), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring/presentation process (Z1307: FIG. 272) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In this sensor input processing (Z2813), the operation (input) state of the touch sensor 290 is determined, and based on the operation, execution of various effects etc. is set.

In the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 273), first, it is determined whether the sensor valid time counter 223s is set to a value greater than 0 (Z2821). That is, it is determined whether the operation (input) of the touch sensor 290 is valid. If it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No), it is determined whether a preview effect display using the touch sensor 290 is set (Z2822). If it is determined that the preview performance display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor valid time set for the preview performance is set in the sensor valid time counter 223s (Z2823), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z2822, if it is determined that the preview effect display is not set (Z2822: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2821, if it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223s is a value larger than 0 (Z2821: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is updated by subtracting the amount of time elapsed (Z2824). ). It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether the player has brought his/her hand or the like close to the touch sensor 290 and operated it (Z2825). If it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (Z2825: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is updated by adding 1 (Z2826), and a preview for display corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223t is displayed. Set the display command (Z2827). It is determined whether the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value set for the selected touch preview effect display (Z2828). If it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is reset to the initial value of 0 (Z2829). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is not the upper limit value (Z2828: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 272, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2801, if it is not in standby (Z2801: No), or if it is determined in the process of Z2802 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (Z2802: No), the SW valid time counter 223k It is determined whether the value of is 1 or more (Z2805). If the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 1 or more (Z2805: Yes), the SW valid time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2806). Next, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether a preview performance is being executed (preview performance in progress) (Z2808). If it is determined that a preview performance is in progress (Z2808: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2809), and a display notice indicating the preview performance determined by lottery is displayed. Set the command (Z2810). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. Note that the sensor input processing (Z2813) has already been described in detail with reference to FIG. 273, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z2808, if it is determined that the preview performance is not in progress (Z2808: No), the process ends after the already explained processes of Z2803 and Z2804 are executed. Furthermore, if it is determined in the processing of Z2807 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2807: No), the processing of Z2808 to Z2810 is skipped, and the sensor input processing (Z2813) already explained with reference to FIG. 273 is performed. Execute and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2805, if it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2805: No), it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern has been set (Z2811). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern has been set (Z2811: Yes), the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time counter 223k based on the set fluctuation pattern (Z2812), and sensor input processing (Z2813) is performed. Execute and end this process. In addition, in the process of Z2811, if the fluctuation pattern is not set (Z2811: No), the process of Z2812 is skipped, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends. Here, some variation patterns are set with effects using the frame button 22 and others are not set, and if no effect is set, "0" is set in the SW valid time counter 223k. be done.

<About control processing in display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 287. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 274, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is applied to the display control device 114 from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” depending on its hardware configuration. , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main process by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of a process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since this is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is canceled, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 made up of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (Z3001), and the display control device 114 is activated so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start.

Here, the boot process (Z3001) will be described with reference to FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing boot processing (Z3001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access, so if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (Z3101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (Z3102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of Z3101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of Z3102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of Z3102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently being stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (Z3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (Z3104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location in the program storage area 233a, that is, the process to be executed after this boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 275) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) (Z3105), the execution of the boot program is finished and the main boot process is ended.

In this way, by executing the boot process (Z3001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured with DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding the NOR type ROM 234d of extremely small capacity, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time. I can do it.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 275, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of Z3102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of Z3101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Z3101 then transfers a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the steps Z3102 and Z3102 multiple times, the steps Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, upon starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute processes Z3103 to Z3105 without performing processes Z3101 and Z3102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 274. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (Z3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 through the process of Z3003, the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 through the process of Z3004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. Turn on (Z3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 285(a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see Z4602 in FIG. 285(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276(b)), the simple command A determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 276(b)) and a simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 276(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), and the main control device 110 issues an instruction to start the variable performance through audio lamp control. If received via the device 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation production period, and a simple variation production is performed. I can do it. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Since it is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, it takes time to transfer the data, so the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, so that immediately after the power is turned on, for example, when the power is restored, To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process of Z3005, interrupt permission is set (Z3006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by the process of Z3006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276(a). FIG. 276(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Z3201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276(b). FIG. 276(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 242) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 276(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (Z3301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so instead of the power-on image shown in FIG. 239, the normal effect is displayed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (Z3302) is executed, and then a display setting process (Z3303) is executed.

In the command determination process (Z3302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 277.

In the display setting process (Z3303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (Z3302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (Z3304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (Z3303) or the simple display setting process (Z3309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (Z3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp control device 113, a continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the performance and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286.

Next, drawing processing is executed (Z3306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (Z3304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (Z3305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 242, and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 287.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (Z3307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of Z3307, for example, there is a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type (Jackpot A, Jackpot B1, Jackpot B2, Jackpot C) indicated by the display stop type command is created. It is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (FIG. 239) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (Z3308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (Z3309) is executed, and the process of Z3304 is executed. Move to.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (Z3302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282. First, FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (Z3302: Figure 277), as shown in Figure 277, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z3401), and if there is no unprocessed new command, (Z3401: No), the command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (Z3303) that the new command has been processed is set to on (Z3402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (Z3403).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z3404), and if it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (Z3404: Yes), the variation pattern Command processing is executed (Z3405) and the process returns to Z3401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (Z3405) will be described with reference to FIG. 278(a). FIG. 278(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing (Z3405: FIG. 278(a)), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in a data table. It is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z3501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In preparation for such a case, in the processing of Z3501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to actually display fluctuations that are longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Z3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the process of Z3501 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (Z3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of Z3503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can be judged.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Z3501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (Z3504), and the pointer is 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3505). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (Z3506), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of Z3505, data is changed from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3501. , extracts the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specifies the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, transfers data to the transfer data table buffer 233e through the process of Z3502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data has been set in the process of Z3504 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 277. In the process of Z3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (Z3404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (Z3406), If there is a display variation type command (Z3406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (Z3407) and the process returns to Z3401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (Z3407) will be described with reference to FIG. 278(b). FIG. 278(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (Z3407: FIG. 278(b)), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (Z3601), compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)) is executed, and displays it on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variable performance is finally set (Z3602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of Z3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. Set to off (Z3603). Thereafter, the process returns to Z3401 in FIG. 277.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , Z3602 offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) is described. In the above-mentioned task process (Z3304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stop symbol set by the process of Z3602 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by Z3603, and the specified stop symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Incidentally, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z3406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (Z3406: No), then it is determined whether there is a display preview display command among the unprocessed commands (Z3408). If it is determined that a preview display command for display has been received (Z3408: Yes), a preview effect display process is executed (Z3409). The details of the advance notice effect display process (Z3409) will be explained with reference to FIG. The setting of the preview display mode is executed to notify the player of a notice of a jackpot or a jackpot.

Here, the preview effect display process (Z3409) will be explained with reference to FIG. 279(a). FIG. 279(a) is a flowchart showing this preview effect display process (Z3409).

In the preview effect display process (FIG. 279(a), Z3409), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display preview display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z3701). A transfer data table corresponding to the set preview display data table to be displayed at a display timing based on the display timing of the preview display indicated by the received display preview display command is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (Z3702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z3703), and based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the variation time is sent to the time counter. 233h (Z3704), and initializes the pointer 233f to 0 (Z3705).

In this way, a preview display is set based on the preview display command for display outputted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if it were different display modes.

Note that in this embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the content and display timing of the preview display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to execute the selection of the preview display. You may.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table for preview is configured to be set, but the configuration is not limited to this, but the configuration may be configured such that the preview display is set and overwritten on the display data table that has already been set. good.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z3408, if it is determined that there is no preview display command for display (Z3408: No), it is determined whether there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (Z3410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (Z3410: Yes), mode switching processing is executed (Z3411). This mode switching process (Z3411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279(b), but based on the operation of the frame button 22, the process of switching to the display mode corresponding to the background mode is executed.

Here, the mode switching process will be described with reference to FIG. 279(b) (Z3411). FIG. 279(b) is a flowchart showing this mode switching process (Z3411). In the mode switching process (Z3411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3801). It is determined whether the special symbol is changing (Z3802). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (Z3802: Yes), the display data table buffer of the background mode corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is set to active (Z3803). On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (Z3802: No), the background data is changed and set to the background data corresponding to the received command (Z3804).

In this way, when the special symbol is changing, the display mode is switched to the changing pattern corresponding to the background mode. On the other hand, if the special symbol is stopped, the background of the display mode in the standby state is set to be displayed with the set background.

Note that the process of changing the background etc. in accordance with the background mode may be configured as follows.

A back image change flag that notifies the normal image transfer setting process of a change in the back image due to reception of the back image change command is set on. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back faces A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF, this back image change command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the set back image change flag is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the set back image discrimination flag. When the identified back image type is back B or back C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of back images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task process, if it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C should be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, then from the set back image discrimination flag, at that time The type of back image to be displayed is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. If it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, you may turn on the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first, or A back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the received back image command may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z3410, if it is determined that there is no display switching command (Z3410: No), it is determined whether there is a display holding lid command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a display holding lid command (Z3412: Yes), holding lid command processing is executed (Z3413).

Here, the hold lid command processing (Z3413) will be described with reference to FIG. 280. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing this hold lid command processing (Z3413).

In the hold lid command processing (Z3413: Figure 280), first, the display data table for the hold lid of the display effect corresponding to the received display hold lid command is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is Add it to the table and set it (Z3901). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d that is currently set as active). Ru. The added position is additionally set before the END data.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the reserved lid set in Z3901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set by the process of Z3901 is turned on, and at the same time, Data table discrimination flags corresponding to display data tables for other holding lids are set on (Z3903).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Z3901, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (Z3904 ), the pointer 233f is initialized to 0, and (Z3905) the process returns to the command determination process.

In addition, when a hold lid command is received, the display mode of the fluctuation pattern to be set corresponding to the added time is specified based on the time data indicated by the hold lid command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. to set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display formats in multiple modes, the display format after the addition time only needs to be set to the display format that corresponds to the set background mode. The control load on the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the settings are added to the display data table that has been set, but the configuration may be such that a new display data table is set.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z3412, if it is determined that there is no reserved lid command for display (Z3412: No), it is determined whether there is a reserved character command for display (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a pending character command for display (Z3412: Yes), pending character command processing is executed (Z3413).

Here, the suspended character command processing (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 280(b). FIG. 280(b) is a flowchart showing this pending character command processing (Z3415).

In the pending character command processing (Z3413: Figure 280), first, the display data table for the pending character of the display effect corresponding to the received display pending character command is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is Add it to the table and set it (Z4001). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d that is currently set as active). Ru. The added position is additionally set before the END data.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for reserved characters set in Z4001 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for reserved characters set by the process of Z4001 is turned on, and Data table discrimination flags corresponding to display data tables for other reserved characters are set to OFF (Z4003).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for reserved characters set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Z4001, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (Z4004 ), the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4005), and the process returns to the command determination process.

In addition, when a pending character command is received, the display mode of the variable pattern to be set corresponding to the added time is specified based on the time data indicated by the pending character command, the set variable pattern, and the background mode. to set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display formats in multiple modes, the display format after the addition time only needs to be set to the display format that corresponds to the set background mode. The control load on the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the settings are added to the display data table that has been set, but the configuration may be such that a new display data table is set.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no display pending character command (Z3414: No), it is determined whether there is a display balloon command (Z3416). If it is determined that there is a display balloon command (Z3416: Yes), the balloon command process is executed (Z3417).

Here, the balloon command processing (Z3417) will be described with reference to FIG. 281. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing this balloon command processing (Z3417).

In the balloon command processing (Z3417: Figure 281), first, a display data table for the balloon of the display effect corresponding to the received display balloon command is determined and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer. and set it (Z4101). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d that is currently set as active). Ru. The added position is additionally set before the END data.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the balloon display data table set in Z4101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the balloon set by the processing of Z4101 is turned on, and other data table discrimination flags are turned on. The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the speech bubble is set to OFF (Z4103).

Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the display data table for speech balloons set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Z4101, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (Z4104). , the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4105), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Furthermore, when a balloon command is received, the display mode of the fluctuation pattern to be set corresponding to the added time is specified based on the time data indicated by the balloon command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. , set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display formats in multiple modes, the display format after the addition time only needs to be set to the display format that corresponds to the set background mode. The control load on the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the settings are added to the display data table that has been set, but the configuration may be such that a new display data table is set.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 277. In the process of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no display balloon command (Z3416: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (Z3414), and if there is an error command, If (Z3414: Yes), error command processing is executed (Z3415), and the process returns to Z3415.

Here, details of the error command processing (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 282. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing (Z3415: FIG. 282), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (Z4201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (Z4202), and the error discrimination flag is set to OFF (Z4202). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of Z4201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of Z4202, and the corresponding error type is handled. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in process Z4202, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 277. In the process of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no error command (Z3414: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (Z3416), and the process returns to the process of Z3401.

In the process of Z3401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes) ), the processes Z3402 to Z3416 are executed again. Then, the processes from Z3401 to Z3416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of Z3416 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command judgment Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (Z3308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Only the type commands are extracted, and the processing corresponding to each command, such as the fluctuation pattern command processing (see Figure 278(a)) and the stop type command processing (see Figure 278(b)), is executed, and other For commands, processing is performed to discard them without executing the processing corresponding to the commands.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 278(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of Z3501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of Z3502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (Z3303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 283, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (Z4301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (Z4301: No), It is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination processing executed first, and the processing of Z4302 to Z4304 is skipped, and the process moves to processing of Z4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (Z4301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process that is executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (Z4302), Z4303 to Z4304 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of Z4303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303). If the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (Z4304).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 284(a). FIG. 284(a) is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (Z4401).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and drawing information such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. is determined for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of Z4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (Z4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 283. After the warning image setting process (Z4304) or in the process of Z4303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (Z4303: No), then the process moves to the process of Z4305.

In Z4305, pointer update processing is executed (Z4305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 284(b). FIG. 284(b) is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (Z4501). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of Z4501, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. (Z4502). As a result, if it is End information (Z4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (Z4503), and if it is a demonstration display data table (Z4503: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (Z4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (Z4505), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (Z4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( Z4506), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of Z4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (Z4502: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 284 and continues. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4306). In task processing, the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of Z4306, along with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (Z4307), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is less than or equal to 0 (Z4308). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (Z4308: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (Z4308: Yes), it means that the performance time of the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag is on or not. (Z4309).

As a result, if the final display flag is off (Z4309: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. setting (Z4310), and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (Z4311). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Z4312), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4313). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag indicating that the fixed display performance is in progress in the on state (Z4314), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (Z4315), return to V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Incidentally, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of Z4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (Z3304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by Z4315, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4309, if the confirmed display flag is not off but on (Z4309: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (Z4316). If the demo display flag is off (Z4316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (Z4317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4318). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Z4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4320), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration performance is in progress is set to ON (Z4321), and this process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the process of Z4316, if the demo display flag is on (Z4316: Yes), it means that the demo effect will be performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process will end. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (Z3309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image ends, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined period of time. A process is performed in which a display data table specifying that the image (FIG. 239) is to be displayed in a stopped state is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (Z3305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 285(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is The process is executed (Z4602), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the process of Z4601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (Z4601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Z4603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 286.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (Z4602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 285(b). FIG. 285(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (Z4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (Z4701), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (Z4701: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (Z4702). In the process of Z4702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of Z4702 that the transfer process has not finished (Z4702: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting is Finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (Z4702: Yes), the process moves to Z4703. Furthermore, as a result of the process in Z4701, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (Z4701: No), the process moves to the process in Z4703.

In the process of Z4703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (Z4703), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (Z4703: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (Z4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process of Z4703, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (Z4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (Z4705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)), the command judgment process is performed instead of the simple command judgment process (see Z3308 in FIG. 7276b) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 276(b)). (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 283 to 284(b)) are executed, so the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) (see Z4601: No in FIG. 285(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed using . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the normal image transfer setting process (Z4603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (Z4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (Z4305) of the previously executed display setting process (Z3303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (Z4801). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (Z4802), and if it is transfer data information (Z4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( Z4803), and further sets a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, to ON (Z4804), and proceeds to the process of Z4805.

Further, in the process of Z4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (Z4802: No), the process of Z4803 and Z4804 is skipped and the process moves to the process of Z4805. In the process of Z4805, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (Z4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (Z4805: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (Z4806).

In the process of Z4806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of Z4806 that the transfer process has not finished (Z4806: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting Finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (Z4806: Yes), the process moves to Z4807. Further, as a result of the process in Z4805, even if no image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (Z4805: No), the process proceeds to Z4807.

In the process of Z4807, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or not (Z4807), and if the transfer start flag is on (Z4807: Yes), there is image data to start transfer, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (Z4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of Z3603 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of Z4809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Z4807: No), this process ends.

In the process of Z4809, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809). The determination in the process of Z4809 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process of Z4809, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in Z4809, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (Z4810). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of Z4810, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (Z4811), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the displayed stop type information is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 is Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 287, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (Z3306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (Z3304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification rate, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter specification information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), a drawing list shown in FIG. 242 is generated (Z4901). That is, in the process of Z4901, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (Z3304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (storage source start address) is written as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (Z4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process of Z4902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (Z4903). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 276(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

Further, in the above control example, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

In the above control example, first, a command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and when the audio lamp controller 113 receives the command, the audio lamp controller 113 sends the command to the display controller 114. The command to be executed is determined, and the command is then transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In contrast, first, a command is sent from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines the command to be sent to the audio lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 may then send a command to the audio lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above control example, a case has been described in which the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, which is the transfer destination, is unused. If the image data is unused, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 as the transfer destination.

In this case, whether the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination is unused can be determined by checking that the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, that it is in use). a resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, that it is in use); ) may be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may perform this by checking the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors the signals sent and received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or the signals sent and received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236, and based on the state of the signals, the resident video RAM 235 It may be confirmed whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing or ends the access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 checks the driving state of the image controller 237 or receives a notification from the image controller 237 to determine whether the scanning is in a blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is not in use. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether it is not in use or not, so the determination can be easily made.

In addition, in this case, the MPU 231 stores transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, etc., the drawing of that sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for the video can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

Note that the process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed within the display main process or main process loop executed by the MPU 231. This allows the MPU 231 to perform the image data transfer process using the time when important processes in the display control device 114, such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, are not being performed. In addition, since command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are processes that are executed with priority over display main processing, etc., the MPU 231 can process image data without affecting command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above control example, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM using the addresses that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 have, but uses the addresses that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 have in common. Within the address system provided, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not have to directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) that it wants to access to the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area to the image controller 237, it is sufficient to simply specify an address set in the common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction that specifies the command. For example, in the drawing list sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, an address set in a common address system is simply used as information indicating the storage destination of sprite data without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected, but this is not necessarily the case. 237 may be provided. Further, a bridge circuit is provided to convert the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 to the input/output specifications of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Good too.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as is, and the NAND flash memory 234a can be used as is. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Note that even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, but the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this. may be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow readout speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the control example above, images can be displayed at the desired display time without any problems. be able to.

In the above control example, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231. However, this is not necessarily the case. Although not limited to this, a first program storage area may be provided in a memory configured with a non-volatile storage medium that can read data at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area may be stored in the first program storage area in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), etc. is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided therein, and the system reset is performed in the MPU 231. after release A part of the boot program to be executed first may be stored.

In the above control example, a first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in that area. Although the case where the memory is stored is not necessarily limited to this, the memory configured with a non-volatile storage medium that can read faster than the NAND flash memory 234a is stored on the internal bus (bus line 240). A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the first program storage area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), etc. is provided on the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided therein. A part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c. A case has been described in which the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read out from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read out from the buffer RAM 234c. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, when the MPU 231 specifies address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after canceling the system reset, whether the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has already been set in the buffer RAM 234c or Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the auxiliary production section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. I can do it.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified on the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the auxiliary production section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. I can do it. Furthermore, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 into the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237, but this is not necessarily the case. It may also be provided directly connected to line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to allow direct connection of the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected to the bridge circuit. RAM 235 can be easily provided in display control device 114.

In the above control example, the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may also be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, each of which stores image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected depending on the mode.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are constituted by a 1-port DRAM (one input/output port) is described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. A type of RAM may also be used. This makes it possible to simultaneously write and read data into and from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. For example, while reading image data from the normal video RAM 236 and drawing an image, data is read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to writing of image data.

Furthermore, in the above control example, a case has been described in which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured as separate memories, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM can be used as a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided so that the same contents as in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are stored in each area. In addition, when configuring a resident area and a normal area in one RAM, in order to prevent the input/output port of that memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area for read or write processing. , it is desirable to use a multiport type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be set as appropriate depending on the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside, image data corresponding to an image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is transferred to at least the resident display device. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above control example, a case has been described where part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made to reside therein, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You can.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the resident video RAM 235 continues to retain its contents without being overwritten while the power is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is to be significantly different based on a command received from the good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and continues to be held in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. You can leave it there. Also, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and transfers the read image data to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed while the image data is not being used (that is, during a period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer data information) to the image controller 237. The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). You may also do so.

Furthermore, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the transition image is updated using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out new image data to be resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Good too. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receives an instruction from the MPU 231 to transfer the image data to be resident, accesses the character ROM 234, reads new image data to be resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You can do it like this. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM judgment value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power is removed is stored, and the power is turned on. During the display main processing or main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power-on, before starting the transfer of main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 at power-on, check the RAM judgment value, If the RAM judgment value is a normal value, it means that the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally, so the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even if a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to an instantaneous power outage and the MPU 231 starts execution of display main processing or main processing, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally. If so, it is possible to prevent image data from being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 unnecessarily, and the time required to recover from a power outage can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by a character ROM 234a with a slow readout speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM judgment value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power outage, the time required to transfer the image data is Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start playing the game. Note that the RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Furthermore, instead of using this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237, but the buffer RAM 237a is not necessarily limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). Furthermore, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided within the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be set to a data capacity that allows the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 to be completed. As a result, image data can be reliably transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. .

In the above control example, a case has been described in which one buffer RAM 237a is provided, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the other buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. may be configured. Furthermore, one buffer RAM is divided into two or more areas, and while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area storing the image data is divided into two or more areas. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since the process can be performed by

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on main image. can do. During this time, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly and processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above control example, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. 235b, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, while displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, data from the character ROM 234 is displayed. Image data to be made resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly and processing can be simplified.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring the image data corresponding to The image may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. In addition, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to turn on the power. If the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. This allows image data to be transferred more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is being transferred; The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Good too. In addition, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the main image at power-on and the image data at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are transferred. By displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read out from the character ROM 234, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. This allows image data to be transferred more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button Although a case has been described in which the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the presentation mode of super reach are changed based on the operation command, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the audio lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and depending on the gaming state, for example, in accordance with a change in the gaming state. A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the back image and the performance mode of super reach according to the gaming state based on the back image changing command and the gaming state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image and the performance mode of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to the changed rear image or at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the changed production mode is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. , the rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, transfer data table, additional data table, and composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed back image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to transfer data information written in the transfer data table, composite data table, and display data table. You may. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image based on the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, or display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the original back image was stored is The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that the new back image is stored in the subarea, and the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored may be defined. Transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in a different area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so the processing by the display control device 114 is unnecessary. It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

Further, in the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the audio lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the audio lamp control device 113, an error command is sent to the display control device 114. Although a case has been described in which the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is inputted to the main control device 110, and the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A vibration error may be detected in the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be sent from the main control device 110 to either the audio lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further sends an error command notifying the error to the display control device 114. You can.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. If a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, thereby confirming that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 283). The warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 284(a)) when it is determined. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to send and receive error commands from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

Furthermore, in the above control example, a case has been described in which the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, a magnetic sensor may be attached to the back surface of the game board 13. Good too. This magnetic sensor is a sensor that detects the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the ball from intentionally entering the ball entrance by changing the flow of the ball due to the magnetic field of a magnet. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any one of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be conveyed may be sent from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114 via the audio lamp controller 113 or directly. In addition, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the audio lamp control device 113, when it is determined that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the audio lamp control device 113 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command indicating the error may be sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 114, image data corresponding to an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. Upon receiving an error command conveying a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 114, when the display control device 114 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 114 The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 or recognizes the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display control device 114 updates the character ROM 234. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that is resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to create the third symbol to notify the magnetic field error without delay. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by a player, the error message image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to immediately notify the player of the magnetic field error, thereby preventing the player from acting illegally. It can be suppressed.

When the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of part or all in one production is specified by an additional data table or display data table, in the additional data table or display data table, one The type of sprite that changes the color tone at that time, and the change after the change in that sprite, in correspondence with the address that represents the time that a frame's worth of images are displayed (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) as one unit. It may also define color information specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the color tone after the change in the sprite at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If color information is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information with color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Thereby, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one performance is defined by a display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type that should be newly displayed, and the new It may also specify drawing information of sprites to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 inputs the sprite type to be replaced and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, the various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed and the drawing information for that sprite may be included in the drawing list. This allows the image controller 237 to draw an image including a new sprite to be displayed.

Furthermore, in the above control example, a case has been described in which the display data table includes transfer data information of image data that is necessary when drawing an image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data that is necessary when drawing an image according to additional drawing contents defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional performance 1”, “additional performance 2”, etc.) for identifying the effects that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be added and displayed, it creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured as follows.

Thereby, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, according to the drawing list, before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, the effects to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of an image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, a wide variety of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, drawing contents corresponding to all the super reaches that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player Although we have explained the case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is specified, this is not necessarily the case.The drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach can be added to the display data table. You can. Thereby, the drawn content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all super reaches in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the data size of the display data table from increasing.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been explained, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table specifies the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an additional effect to be displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to that effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . In addition, the additional data table may specify not only the additional drawing content but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the additional drawing content. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect that should be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table. Compared to the case where drawing contents and transfer data information are respectively specified, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for each variation pattern indicated by a display variation pattern command, but this is not necessarily the case. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "Fluctuation start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Notice effect", "Normal reach", and "Super reach", and the display data table is displayed according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the variable performance, display data tables corresponding to the paper necessary for the specified variable performance are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You can do it like this. "Variation start-up," "high-speed fluctuation," "normal reach," etc. are often displayed in common for each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by dividing the variable performance into elements in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, it is possible to efficiently provide a data table.

In the above control example, a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table, and the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. For this purpose, a pointer may be provided.

In the above control example, a case will be described in which the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of images (every 20 milliseconds in the above control example) at which the drawing process ends. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display one frame of image. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that one frame of images is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is sent every time one frame of images is displayed. By sending , you can keep the time interval accurate without having to clock it.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed, and the image information developed first from the other frame buffer. has been described and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the case is not limited to this, and each time the image controller 237 receives a drawing list, the image controller 237 reads out the drawn image and sends it to the third symbol display device 81. may be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame worth of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed and to the third symbol display device 81. It is also possible to replace the frame buffer with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above control example, after the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the fixed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demo command (display demo command) is received, a demo display data table corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the final display data table corresponding to the final display performance may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. In addition, in this case, the final display effect is not executed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time the process ends, the final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, the final display performance can be continued to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the variable pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect changes the back image and stops displaying the third symbol consisting of the main symbol to which no numbers from "0" to "9" are attached. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol consisting of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Furthermore, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third symbol or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above control example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on main image area 235a. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235, and after the transfer is completed, when the power is turned on. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the power-on main image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly after the power is turned on, so that players, hall personnel, or when checking the operation of the pachinko machine 10 at the factory during manufacturing, etc. You can immediately confirm that the device has started operating without any problems by turning on the power.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command Based on this, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image stored in the power-on variation image area 235b. Note that it is desirable to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to more quickly display fluctuations using the power-on fluctuation image.

In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table indicate the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the content of the image that should be transferred at that time, corresponding to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds. Although the case where image data information (transfer data information) is defined has been described, the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, if the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays images at 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 has a frame rate of 1/30 Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display content every 1/30 seconds.

In addition, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn specified at each predetermined time interval, instead of specifying the sprite type itself, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified. It may also be something that stipulates. In order to read image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 reads the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. manages the addresses of Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval, the sprite can be displayed in association with each sprite type. Since it is no longer necessary to manage both the information specifying the character ROM 234 and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above control example, a stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and it is stored for each sprite whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and transfers the predetermined image data. is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. Information indicating the sprite type stored in the subarea of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above control example, when transferring image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of that sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. We have described a case in which the MPU 231 performs a process of determining whether or not the image data of a predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and disabling the transfer process. The image controller 237 may perform the processing. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is determined for each sprite whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be memorized. Further, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. In contrast, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which only the image data corresponding to "rear surface A" among the plurality of rear images is made to reside in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made to reside in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of a back image used in some super reaches may be made to reside in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the back image of a super leech that appears frequently or is expected to appear frequently reside in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times

In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table defines an image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case where the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. Information regarding the necessary sprite type is written in the table, and the MPU 231 instructs the image controller to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information written at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of that image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer the image to the video RAM 236 for use.

In the above control example, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes over time on the back surface C, which is the back image of the "island stage", was explained, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes over time, good. In addition, the back image is not only one that scrolls or changes color tone over time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears over time instead of the back image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above control example, the main control device 110 sends the information of various counters (special win random number counter C1, special win type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winnings notified to the audio lamp control device 113 to the pending ball number command. Although we have explained the case where it is included, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of various counters (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 by another command. You may notify.

In the above control example, when executing a variation effect, a case was explained in which a high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at high speed to such an extent that the player cannot see them, but instead of displaying this high-speed variation, , all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size to the extent that they are not visible, or each of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which the game board 13 is provided with one first ball entry port 64 that starts a special symbol jackpot lottery when a ball enters the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entry ports, each of which detects the entry of a ball independently and starts a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a ball being held at each first entrance, the number of held balls command that the main controller 110 sends to the audio lamp control device 113 indicates which first entrance the ball is being held. May contain information. Furthermore, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 sends to the audio lamp control device 113 when starting the variation may also include information indicating which first ball entry port the variation effect was held on hold for. good. As a result, in the audio lamp control device 113, a held ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a held ball number command is received, the first entered ball indicated in the held ball number command is If the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a fluctuation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decreased by 1, the number of balls held at the first entry port is You can count the number of balls held each time.

In the above control example, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved balls counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the number of reserved balls command is Although the case where the information is transmitted from the control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. This makes it possible to reduce the number of times the main controller 110 sends the number of pending commands to the audio lamp controller 113 and the number of times the audio lamp controller 113 receives the number of pending commands, so the main controller 110 and The control burden on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above control example, the winning balls into the first ball entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls held is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls, which is displayed in a variable manner based on winnings to the first ball entrance 64, can be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four can be displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured as follows.

Furthermore, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the symbols as identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81; The display may be performed by moving and displaying the symbols along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the display of fluctuating symbols; for example, one or more characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes with or without the symbol. This also includes the presentation and display that will be displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Here, the outline of the first control example will be explained. On the game board 13, a first ball entry port 64, a second right ball entry port 640r, and a second ball entry port 640 are arranged as starting ports (ball entry means, starting means), and the game ball enters the starting port. By entering either ball, a lottery (determination) of winning or losing is executed with a predetermined lottery probability. If the lottery result (determination result) is a win (specific determination result), a jackpot game (a bonus game advantageous to the player) is executed. A plurality of types are set for the jackpot game, and the benefits given to the player are set to differ depending on the type. For example, there are differences in the number of jackpot rounds, winning types in which a high probability gaming state (first special gaming state) is set after a jackpot game, and a time-saving gaming state (where the player's profit is smaller than the first special gaming state) after a jackpot game. The winning type, etc. for which the second special gaming state) is set is set.

The result of the judgment is based on the third symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the first symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the first symbol display device 37. After a variable display (dynamic display) is performed in a predetermined variable display period (dynamic display period), the player is notified of the determination result by stopping the display in a display mode for showing the result of the determination (determination result). . When a game ball enters the starting slot during the variable display period, the right to be drawn by lottery for the entered ball is stored as a reserved ball. The number of reserved balls is up to 4 for balls entering the first ball entrance 64 (first special symbol lottery), and up to four balls entering the right second ball entrance 640r and second ball entrance 640 (second special symbol lottery). The system is configured such that up to four balls in total are each stored as an upper limit value for each (symbol lottery).

When the reserved balls are stored, one reserved symbol (identification symbol, identification information) is displayed for each reserved ball. For reserved balls, before the special symbol indicating the lottery result corresponding to the reserved ball is displayed in a fluctuating manner, the correctness determination result (judgment result) determined at the start of fluctuation and the fluctuating display mode of the special symbol are displayed. (variation pattern type) is determined in advance. If the preliminary determination result is a specific determination result (for example, a hit or super reach type is determined), the color of the reserved symbol is displayed variable (variable to a specific display mode). When the color of the pending symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a special pending effect type is set depending on the set color and the like. As one of the special hold effects, when the color of the hold symbol changes, more hold balls are generated, or an overflow prize is generated in which more than the upper limit number of hold balls enter the starting hole, thereby creating a variable hold. A comment display (notice display mode, suggestion mode) indicating the expected degree of hitting the ball, the type of variation pattern to be executed, etc. is displayed (notice A mode). This allows the player to place more game balls into the starting slot, thereby increasing the profits of the game parlor. In addition, by inserting a game ball into the starting hole, a comment is displayed, and it is possible to determine the result of the judgment and the type of change based on the content of the comment. This can improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as one of the special holding effects, a holding effect (advance B mode) is set in which the game is performed so as to prevent the occurrence of held balls from a state where the color of the held balls is changed. In this holding performance, a variable lid pattern P is displayed in the display area where the holding pattern is displayed, and the position of the holding pattern that will be displayed when the variable lid pattern P is won next to the holding pattern whose color has been changed. By displaying this, the player is informed that the game will be played in such a way as to prevent the occurrence of held balls. Furthermore, content suggesting that the number of reserved balls should not be increased is also displayed by comment display.

In addition, the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is 4, and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is 4, and a total of up to 8 reserved symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (display area of the display means). The area in which the reserved symbols are displayed is secured and set in advance. In the area where the reserved symbols are displayed, a pedestal symbol is displayed at each position where the reserved symbol is displayed, and even if the reserved symbol is not displayed, it is possible to know that the reserved symbol is displayed in the area. Constructed in such a way that it can be identified. In the area where the 5th to 8th reserved symbols are displayed, four variable lid symbols P are displayed corresponding to the display positions of the reserved symbols even in normal times, and each variable lid symbol P is displayed in the area where the 5th to 8th reserved symbols are displayed. On the symbol P, a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved balls can be identified.

In this way, by displaying the variable lid pattern P, it is possible to determine that the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is 8 even when the reserved symbol is not displayed based on the numerical information of the variable lid pattern P. can do. Furthermore, by generating a reserved ball and displaying a reserved symbol, the display mode of the variable lid symbol P is also changed. In the holding performance that is the normal mode during normal times, the variable lid pattern P is variable so that when there are 3 held balls, the variable lid pattern P displayed at the position where the 5th held symbol is displayed is hidden. Then, in the same way, the 6th variable lid pattern P is hidden when there are 4 balls on hold, the 7th variable lid pattern P is hidden when there are 5 balls on hold, and the 8th variable lid pattern P is hidden when there are 6 balls on hold. The variable lid pattern P is changed so as to be hidden, that is, the variable lid pattern P is changed and displayed so that two reserved symbols are left open for three or more reserved balls. Ru. With this configuration, the display area of the reserved symbols can be shown to the player as being variable depending on the number of reserved balls.

Further, a special holding effect is executed in which the variable rule of the variable lid pattern P is changed depending on the period in which held balls occur, and the variable rule is changed depending on the type of change that is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that a special hold performance is being executed by the variable rule of the variable lid pattern P. Furthermore, the special pending performance is also set based on the validity judgment result of the pending pre-judgment, the variation type, the validity judgment result of the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, and the variation type being executed. By changing the variable rule of the variable lid pattern P, it is possible to expect a hit or predict the type of variation.

In this control example, even if the game ball is launched to the left or right side of the third symbol display device 81, the first ball entry port 64, the right second ball entry port 640r, and the second ball entry port 640 (electrically operated 640a is in an open state), the ball enters the ball in the same way, but the route is not limited to this, and the route that allows the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 easily, the first ball entry port 64, or the right second ball entry port 640r may be used. The arrangement of the nails may be set so as to form a flow path that is easy to form. With this configuration, it is possible to perform games such as performing a lottery with only the second special symbol or playing a game without letting the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640. Furthermore, as a performance, a performance that suggests to the player to enter the ball into the second ball entrance can be executed.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 324. The pachinko machine 10 in the first control example was configured so that the first special symbol and the first special symbol were alternately changed, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the first special symbol was given priority. This is different from the first control example in that the state to be varied and the order of the first special symbol and the first special symbol are changed depending on the gaming state. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 288, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 288 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example. In the first control example, a first ball entrance 64 and a second ball entrance 640 are installed inside the distribution device 700, and when a ball enters from the opening 710a, the distribution device 700 controls the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. Although the configuration is such that balls are sorted into the opening 64 and the second ball entry port 640, in this second control example, the distribution device 700 is not installed and the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are directly used. They differ in that they are configured to be installed. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the second control example>
Next, the electrical configurations of the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 293. In this second control example, the effect display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is partially changed and the content of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed from the first control example described above. The difference is that the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in this second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 291. In the first control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol were configured to be executed alternately as the special symbols in which the fluctuation is started, but in this second control example, the fluctuation is given priority from the second special symbol. The difference is that the changes have been made so that execution will occur.

FIGS. 289(a) and 289(b) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of special symbol fluctuations and continuous effects in this second control example. In this second control example, as shown in FIG. 291(a), when the special symbol fluctuation continues to be performed in the first special symbol, the effect display is continued as shown in FIG. 291(b). Execute. Continuous performance is a period set for multiple fluctuations. Further, this continuous performance can be extended based on winnings during execution of the continuous performance.

FIG. 291(a) is a diagram showing how the third symbol changes during continuous performance. As shown in FIG. 291(a), in the second control example, the pedestal symbol m0 during execution is displayed in the small region Ds1 of the sub display region Ds provided below the third symbol display device 81, and the small In the area Ds2, the first reserved symbol pedestal m1 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 and reserved symbols are displayed. Furthermore, characters G1 to G3 are displayed at the corners of the display area Dm. By performing a story-like performance using the characters G1 to G3, the player can easily recognize that a continuous performance is being performed. Furthermore, even during the continuous performance period, the background mode can be changed by the player operating the frame button 22. A detailed explanation of the background mode change during the continuous performance period will be described later with reference to FIGS. 290 and 292.

Next, the flow of performance when the second special symbol variation is executed during continuous performance will be explained. FIGS. 291(c) and 291(d) are diagrams showing the flow of performance when the second special symbol variation is executed during continuous performance. In this second control example, as shown in FIG. 289(c), when the second special symbol variation is executed during the execution of the first special symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 289(d), the first special symbol The continuous presentation period is interrupted, and a special presentation with a second special symbol variation is performed during the interruption period. Next, when the special performance period ends, the continuous performance period with the first special symbol is restarted.

FIG. 291(b) is a diagram showing how the continuous performance period is interrupted and the third symbol changes during the special performance period. During the special performance period, as shown in FIG. 291(b), the reserved balls are displayed in a variable red color. Moreover, shellfish K1, shellfish K2, and shellfish K3 are displayed in the display area Dm, and are displayed in a display mode having a story. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that it is the special effect execution period. Furthermore, a white pending symbol is displayed on the third pending symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth pending symbol pedestal m5, and the white pending symbol on the third pending symbol pedestal m3 moves to the small area Ds and becomes the active symbol. , the continuous performance period that was interrupted by the special performance period is restarted.

Next, the flow of performance when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous performance period will be explained with reference to FIGS. 289(c) and (d). In this second control example, even if the first special symbol is being varied, if the ball enters the second ball entry port 640, the second special symbol is preferentially executed. As shown in FIG. 289(c), while the continuous performance with the first special symbol is being executed, if there is a variation execution in special symbol 2, as shown in FIG. 289(d), the first special symbol The continuous performance during the variation execution is interrupted, and the special performance is executed while the variation execution is performed on the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 291(b), when a variation is executed in the second special symbol and a special effect is started, the number of reserved balls is configured to change color only during the special effect period. There is. In addition, shell-like characters K1 to K3 are displayed at the corners of the display area Dm to perform a story-like performance. With this configuration, it becomes easy for the player to understand that the continuous performance period has entered the special performance period, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game. Further, the continuous performance with the first special symbol being executed is interrupted at the same time as the start period of the special performance with the second special symbol, and resumed as soon as the special performance period ends. Specifically, the reserved balls on the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 are on standby in order to execute the interrupted continuous performance period. During the special performance period, the fluctuation execution from the execution pedestal symbol m0 to the second reserved symbol symbol m2 is completed, and the reserved ball of the third symbol reservation symbol pedestal m3 moves to the execution pedestal m0, and according to the special performance period. The interrupted continuous performance period will be resumed.

The relationship between continuous effects and background display will be described with reference to FIG. 290. FIGS. 290(a) to 290(c) are diagrams showing the effect display mode during special symbol variation and the flow of background display at that time. As described above, even during the continuous presentation period, the player can change the background by operating the frame button 22. In this second control example, when changing from a background mode in which a continuous effect is being executed to another background mode, a normal effect for the changed background mode is displayed.

FIG. 292 is a diagram showing the display mode when the background is changed during the continuous performance period. As shown in FIG. 292, in the display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the variation of the third symbol, the mountain mode is set as the background mode from the sea mode which was the period of continuous performance. As mentioned above, in the mountain mode, the normal effect of the mountain mode is displayed instead of the continuous effect, but if the player operates the frame button 22 and the background is changed to the sea mode again, the continuous effect for the sea will be restored. . In this second control example, when the sea mode is in the continuous performance period, "Continuous performance in sea mode is being performed!!" is displayed in the display area Dmb, indicating to the player that the sea mode is in the continuous performance period. It is structured so that it can be easily recognized. Further, in the display area Dma, the message "The background changes with the button PUSH" is displayed, allowing the player to easily recognize that the background can be changed even when the third symbol is changing.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 293. In this second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first control example described above, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed. There is a difference. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained with reference to FIG. 293(a). FIG. 293(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this second control example. This second control example differs from the first control example described above in that a continuous performance execution selection table 222aa is added.

The continuous performance execution selection table 222aa is a data table for determining (determining) whether to perform a continuous performance (FIG. 291(a)). In the winning information related process (see Z2255 in FIG. 300), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003 in FIG. 300: Yes), and the production setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to OFF. If there is one (Z5004 in FIG. 300: No), it is read out (Z5005 in FIG. 300) and used to determine the execution of continuous performance (Z5006 in FIG. 96).

This continuous performance execution selection table 222aa contains information corresponding to the value of one performance counter included in the performance counter group 223aa, the current number of reserved balls, and the special symbol lottery result included in the winning information received this time. It is stipulated whether or not to execute a continuous performance. Specifically, the higher the number of currently held balls, the more likely it is that the continuous performance will be executed, and the more likely the lottery result is that the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information received this time is a lottery result that indicates a jackpot, the more the lottery result is a miss. It is stipulated that it is easier to execute continuous effects than when it shows.

With this configuration, it becomes easier to execute continuous performances with a long execution period (the number of times the special symbol changes to be executed), and when the continuous performances are executed, it increases the expectation of a jackpot for the player. can be made to increase. Therefore, the player can play the game for a long time with heightened expectations for a jackpot, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, when the continuous performance ends, that is, when the variable performance corresponding to the winning information determined to execute the continuous performance ends (Z5102: Yes in FIG. 301), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value of the number counter 223a is read out (Z5104 in FIG. 301), and when it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (Z5105 in FIG. 301: Yes), it is configured to determine whether to execute the continuous performance again. Even in this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect with reference to the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa (Z5109 in FIG. 301).

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute the continuous performance even for a game ball that has newly won a prize during the execution of the continuous performance, so it is possible to increase the frequency at which the continuous performance is performed. In addition, since it is possible to make the period during which the continuous performance is executed longer than the maximum number of pending symbols (4) for special symbol 1, it is possible for the player to know which pending symbols the continuous performance is being executed for. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the game, and it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the game.

In addition, in this control example, the content of the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a continuous performance is specified as described above, but other contents may be specified. For example, the audio lamp control device 113 may be provided with a timer (for example, a real-time clock (RTC)) that measures the current time, and the rate at which continuous performances are executed may be changed in accordance with the timing content of the timer. may be specified.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the continuous performance to be executed during a predetermined period (for example, one hour from 10 a.m.) only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. With this configuration, even when the same continuous performance is executed, the degree of expectation for a jackpot varies depending on the timing (time) of the continuous performance, so that the player can play the game early. You can prevent yourself from getting bored with it. Furthermore, during the above-mentioned predetermined period, a guide notification means is provided to inform the player that the continuous performance will be executed only if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the remaining period (or elapsed period) of the above-mentioned predetermined period. It is preferable to provide a period notification means for notifying the period. Thereby, it is possible to make the player play the game while making him/her expect that the continuous performance will be executed.

In addition, means for determining the operation contents of the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player, and determining means for determining the firing status (or ball entering status) of the game ball are provided, and these determining means It may be specified that the rate at which continuous effects are executed is changed in association with the determination result, or the plurality of contents described above may be combined as appropriate, or each may be used individually.

Furthermore, in this control example, the stop command process (see FIG. 3017) is performed using the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa that is referred to when determining whether to execute a continuous performance in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300). However, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute a continuous performance, but when determining whether or not to perform a continuous performance by the winning information related processing (see Figure 300) and the stop command processing (see Figure 301). The configuration may be such that different selection tables are referred to. In this case, for example, the selection table referred to in the stop command process (see Figure 301) is more likely to be used for the special symbol jackpot when consecutive effects are executed than the selection table referred to in the winning information related process (see Figure 300). It is good to define the contents of the selection table so that expectations are high. As a result, the longer the period in which the continuous performance is continuously performed, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, and the more interesting the game becomes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 293(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the second control example will be explained. FIG. 293(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of this second control example. In this second control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, a production counter group 223aa, a continuous production flag 223ab, a continuous production flag 223ac, a continuous production interruption flag 223ad, a continuous production update area 223ae, The difference is that a performance number counter 223af, a performance setting prohibition flag 223ag, a setting prohibition cancellation flag 223ah, a time saving counter 223ai, a fluctuation number counter 223j, an operation invalidation flag 223ak, and a state storage area 223az are added. ing.

The performance counter group 223aa is composed of a plurality of counter means for performance. This production counter group 223aa is a plurality of counters used for selecting a variation pattern for production (variation pattern of the third symbol), selecting various preview productions, and the like. Each of the plurality of counters included in the performance counter group 223aa has a value in the range of 0 to 198 obtained from a random number generation IC (not shown) electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113. A random value is stored. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for generating random numbers must be an IC that can operate at an operating clock (for example, 1 MHz) that can at least update each production counter to a separate random value and make a determination. will be adopted.

The values of the plurality of counters included in this performance counter group 223aa are used to determine the performance variation pattern (variation pattern of the third symbol), whether or not continuous performance can be executed, and various types of preview performance, etc., which are executed by the audio lamp control device 113. The counter values are updated so that the counter values are not synchronized. The plurality of counters included in the performance counter group 223aa are composed of 1-byte loop counters that are updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time main processing 2 (see FIG. 298) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. (every 1 msec), update processing is executed to obtain a different value.

In addition, in this control example, when selecting multiple performances based on the value of the production counter, multiple production counters with different update values are used, so multiple productions are selected within one main process. Even in cases where the same counter value is referenced, the selected effects are prevented from being biased. However, for example, if multiple effects are selected in different processes within one main process, If it is desired to synchronize the modes, the same effect counter may be used to select the effect mode.

In addition, in this control example, multiple counters with different update patterns of counter values are used, but for example, a random value is calculated using the update value of one effect counter, and each effect is updated using that calculated value. It may be configured to select. With this configuration, the number of counters included in the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, among the updated values of the production counter, the value of the first lower digit, the value of the second lower digit, the lower one digit and the lower value of the value obtained by multiplying the value of the first digit by the value of the second digit. It is preferable to calculate each value so that it has no regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

The continuous performance flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the conditions for performing the continuous performance are satisfied, and is set to ON when the conditions for performing the continuous performance are satisfied. Specifically, in the winning information related processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 300), when it is determined that a continuous performance is to be executed (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes), or when the audio lamp control device 113 stops command processing ( (See Figure 301), when it is determined that a continuous effect is to be executed (Z5110: Yes in Figure 301), it is set to on (Z5111 in Figure 300), and the effect setting process (Figure When the continuous effect setting process (Z5306 in FIG. 305) is executed in Z5204 of 304), it is set to off (see Z5401 of FIG. 305).

In other words, this continuous performance flag 223ab indicates whether to execute a continuous performance based on the winning information included in the winning command output from the main control device 110 when a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64. is determined, and the fact that the determination result indicates that a continuous performance is to be executed is held until the next time when a variable display corresponding to the variation of the special symbol 1 is set.

In this control example, in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300), it is determined that a continuous performance is to be executed (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes), and with the continuous performance flag 223ab set to on (Z5008 in FIG. 300). ), the continuous effect is executed when the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed, but other configurations may be used. For example, if the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on, When the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed in the set state, a lottery will be held to determine whether or not to start a continuous effect in the current variable display, and the continuous effect will be started based on the lottery result. It may be configured to determine the variable display to start. With this configuration, the timing at which a new game ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the timing at which continuous production starts are made different (when a game ball enters the first ball entry port 64). After that, the continuous performance can be started with a variable display in which the continuous performance is not executed), and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the continuous performance.

Further, in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300), when it is determined that a continuous performance is to be performed, the performance corresponding to the variable display being executed may be changed to the continuous performance. With this configuration, the timing at which a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the timing at which the continuous performance starts can be brought closer to each other. This can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, in order to execute a continuous performance, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first ball entry port 64 voluntarily while the special symbols are changing (while the variable display is being executed), and the operation of the game can be increased. .

In addition, when changing the performance corresponding to the fluctuating display being executed to a continuous performance, the display content or elapsed period of the fluctuating display being executed is determined, and the conditions under which the performance can be changed (for example, the third symbol display device Only when the fluctuating display displayed in 81 is in a display mode that is difficult for the player to see (high-speed fluctuating), the performance corresponding to the fluctuating display being executed is changed to a continuous performance. It is best to configure it like this. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused due to a sudden change in the performance being executed.

Further, instead of changing the performance corresponding to the fluctuating display being executed to a continuous performance, a continuous performance may be added to the performance corresponding to the fluctuating display being executed and displayed. In this case, it is preferable to provide a display area exclusively for continuous effects. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused even if continuous performances are suddenly executed.

The continuous performance flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that a continuous performance is being performed, and is set to ON when the continuous performance is being performed. Specifically, in the effect setting process (see Z5204 in FIG. 30300) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303), the continuous effect setting process (see Z5306 in FIG. 304) is executed, and the continuous effect command for display is set. If so (Z5406 in FIG. 305), it is set to on (Z5408 in FIG. 305).

Then, it is referenced in the special effect setting process (Z5311 in FIG. 304) to set the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (Z5505 in FIG. 306), and in the stop command process (see FIG. 301), no further changes are made. If it is determined that the continuous performance will not continue (Z5106: No or Z5110: No in FIG. 301), it is set to off (see Z5116 in FIG. 301).

The continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the continuous performance is interrupted, and is set to ON when the continuous performance is interrupted. Here, we will briefly explain the phenomenon in which continuous performance is interrupted. In this control example, continuous performance is performed based on winning information regarding the first special symbol (special symbol 1), which is a special symbol variation that is substantially executed when the gaming state is a normal state (not a variable probability state or a time saving state). configured to run. In addition, in this control example, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is configured to be digested with priority over the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and a game card is placed in the second ball entrance 640a. The game performance (the type of special symbol variation to be executed) is made different between the probability change state and time saving state in which the ball is more likely to enter the ball and the normal state.

In addition, in this control example, in order to temporarily make it easier to receive the second special symbol (special symbol 2) even if the gaming state is in the normal state, some cases where the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win are An electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640a and regulating the game ball from entering the second ball entrance 640a is opened for a longer period of time (2 seconds) than normally (0.2 seconds). It is configured to execute a winning game.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640a while a continuous performance is being executed using a plurality of pieces of winning information regarding the first special symbol. A situation may occur in which the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the first special symbol. If such a situation occurs, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol will be executed even though the continuous performance is being executed based on the winning information of the first special symbol. However, there was a problem in that the content of the performance being executed and the lottery result of the special symbol were different, giving the player a sense of distrust.

Therefore, in this control example, when the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is performed while the continuous performance is being executed, the continuous performance that is being executed is interrupted and the first special symbol (special symbol 2) is changed. It is configured so that when the variation of special figure 1) is executed, the interrupted continuous performance is restarted. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the content of the performance being executed and the lottery result of the special symbol are different, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful.

This continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set when the continuous performance flag 223ac is set to ON in the special performance setting process (see Z5311 in FIG. 304) for setting the performance corresponding to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. If it is determined (Z5505 in FIG. 306: Yes), it is set to on (Z5507 in FIG. 306). Then, when the continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to ON, a "waiting" display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate that the continuous performance is interrupted (interruption display mode shown in FIG. 291(b)). (see Z5508 in FIG. 306). Then, in the production setting process (see FIG. 304), if the target special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (Z5301 in FIG. 304: Yes), it is set to off (Z5304 in FIG. 304). ).

By configuring in this way, during the execution of a continuous performance that is set for the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the fluctuation (lottery) is given priority over the first special symbol (special symbol 1). ) is started when the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is started, the continuous performance is interrupted, and the timing (special symbol 2) at which the variation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is executed is Since the interrupted continuous performance can be restarted at the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has ended, the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) can be resumed without being concerned with the fluctuation status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2). Continuous performances can be performed in response to the following.

In addition, if the continuous performance is interrupted based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the execution of the continuous performance, the player will be informed that the continuous performance has been interrupted. Since the system is configured to notify the player of the sudden end of the continuous performance, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the sudden end of the continuous performance, and to let the player play the game while expecting the continuous performance to resume. be able to.

The continuous performance update area 223ae is used to change the background of the display screen to "sea background" when the continuous performance is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous performance execution period, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous performance execution period. This is an area for storing data for internally updating the continuous effect when the background is changed from ``Mountain Background'' to another background (``Mountain Background'', ``River Background'').

As described above with reference to FIG. 87(a), in this control example, the continuous effect is performed only when “sea background (sea mode)” is selected as the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. configured to run. The background of this display screen can be set variably by the player operating the frame button 22. For example, the background of the display screen can be set variably by the player operating the frame button 22. When the player operates the frame button 22 during high-speed fluctuation), the background of the display screen can be changed to "sea background (sea mode)", "mountain background (mountain mode)" (see Figure 292), or "river background ( river mode).

Then, as a variable effect corresponding to the set background, a variable effect exclusive to each background or a variable effect common to a plurality of backgrounds is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the presentation mode of the variation presentation for showing the variation (lottery) result of the special symbol based on the display mode (background) that can be variably set by the player. It is possible to provide a variety of effects to the players, and it is possible to prevent players from getting bored with the games early.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the background of the display screen is set to be variable while the sea mode is set and a variable performance exclusive to the sea mode (for example, continuous notice) is being executed. Then, a process is executed to rewrite the display data regarding the variable effect so that the variable effect corresponding to the background after being variably set is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Therefore, if a player accidentally operates the frame button 22 during execution of a continuous performance and switches the background of the display screen from "sea mode" to "mountain mode", the display data related to the continuous performance will be erased. Therefore, even if the user operated the frame button 22 again to switch the display screen to the "sea mode", the continuous performance would not be executed, resulting in a reduction in the performance effect.

In order to solve such a problem, in this control example, a continuous effect update area 223ae is provided, and even if the background of the display screen is switched to a mode other than "sea mode" while the continuous effect is being executed, the continuous effect is updated. The execution data of is temporarily stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae, and after the background of the display screen is switched to a mode other than "sea mode" during the execution of the continuous effect, the background of the display screen is changed to "sea mode" again. The configuration is such that when switching to "mode", the remaining continuous effects can be executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous performance disappears due to an erroneous operation by the player.

In this continuous effect update area 223ae, in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 305), after determining the effect mode of the continuous effect (Z5403, Z5404 in FIG. 305), it is determined that the background mode is not "sea mode". (Z5405 in FIG. 305: No), display data regarding the determined performance mode is stored (see Z5409 in FIG. 305).

Then, when the background mode is switched to "sea mode" (Z2871: Yes in FIG. 308) in the effect return process (see FIG. 308) of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 307), the stored The stored information is referred to, and a display effect command corresponding to the stored information is set (Z2874 in FIG. 308). Thereafter, when the continuous performance ends, the information (display data indicating the performance mode) stored in the area is deleted (see Z5310 in FIG. 304).

The production number counter 223af is a counter for indicating the period (number of special figure fluctuations) during which continuous production is performed. When it is determined in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) that a continuous presentation is to be executed (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes), the performance number counter 223af is set to the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a corresponding to the received winning command. The value of is set (Z5010 in FIG. 300). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 304) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303), if it is determined that the counter value is larger than 0 (Z5305 in FIG. 304: Yes), a continuous effect is set. Continuous performance setting processing for this purpose is executed (Z5306 in FIG. 304).

The value of this performance counter 223af is decremented by 1 each time the continuous performance setting process (see FIG. 305) is executed (Z5407 in FIG. 305). With this configuration, the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on during the period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command that is determined to be executed as a continuous effect is executed by the winning information related process (see FIG. 300). The continuous performance can be executed using the period from the variable display executed in the set state to the execution of the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to be executed.

In addition, in this control example, the continuous performance is executed using the above-mentioned period, but other periods may be set as the period for executing the continuous performance. You may start a continuous performance by changing the performance mode of the fluctuating display being executed at the timing determined to be executed, or the first special symbol (special symbol 1 ) may be executed in a continuous manner when the number of fluctuations becomes two times. In addition, in a state where the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to on, when setting a new variable display display mode (when executing variable display setting processing 2), it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous effect. It may be configured such that an execution determining means is provided, and when the execution determining means determines that the continuous performance is to be performed, the continuous performance is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the continuous performance will start, and it is possible to provide a surprising performance.

The effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is a flag for preventing a new continuous effect from being set during the execution of the continuous effect, and is set to ON during the period when the continuous effect is being executed. This effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011 in FIG. 300) when it is determined in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) that continuous effects are to be executed (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON, the process of determining whether or not to execute continuous effects (processing from Z5005 to Z5007 in FIG. 300) in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) is skipped. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a new continuous performance from being set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from starting a new continuous performance while keeping an eye on the progress of the continuous performance, which would cause the player to feel dissatisfied. Then, in the stop command processing (see Fig. 301), if it is determined that the continuous performance has ended (the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to on) (Z5102: Yes in Fig. 301), it is set to off. (Z5103 in Figure 301).

In addition, in this control example, the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous performance is made based on the timing at which a new winning command is received, that is, the timing at which the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) is executed, as well as the timing at which the continuous performance is executed. The timing at which the stop command is received for termination, that is, when it is determined that the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to on (Z5102: Yes in FIG. 301) in the stop command processing (Z2259 in FIG. 301) configured to run. Therefore, in the stop command processing (see FIG. 301), it is also set to ON when it is determined that continuous performance is to be executed (Z5111 in FIG. 301).

The time saving counter 223ai is a counter for grasping the remaining number of times the time saving state is set (remaining number of variations of special symbols) when the time saving state is set as the gaming state. This time saving counter 223ai is set to a value (100 in this control example) corresponding to the number of time saving times to be set when a status command indicating that the gaming state has shifted to the time saving state is received from the main controller 110. , in the stop command processing (see FIG. 301), each time the time saving process (see FIG. 302) is executed when it is determined that the current gaming state is in the time saving mode (Z5101 in FIG. 301: Yes). 1 is subtracted (see Z5151 in FIG. 302).

Then, in the time saving process (see FIG. 302), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223ai is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 302), and if it is determined to be 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 302: Yes), the fluctuation The value of the number counter 223aj is set to 5.

The variation counter 223aj is a counter for grasping the number of variations of the special symbol after the time saving state ends. In this control example, when the gaming state is the normal state and the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed, the special effect (see FIG. 291(b)) is configured to be executed. ing. This is because a game ball enters the second ball entry port 640 and the second special symbol (special pattern 2) changes in the normal state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry port 640. It is intended to be given as a special benefit. However, when the gaming state is a time-saving state, that is, a state in which the game ball is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640 (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is easy to open), the special drawing 2 is reserved, and the The variation of the second special symbol corresponding to the reservation (special figure 2 reservation) may be executed in the normal state after the time saving ends. Even in such a case, if a special performance is executed, there is a problem in that the special performance will be performed frequently after the time saving ends, making it difficult to give the player a special feeling of the special performance.

In response to the above-mentioned problem, in this control example, the special effect is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol executed within a predetermined period after the end of the time saving. Specifically, a determination process is performed to determine whether the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the time saving ends has reached a predetermined number (5 times in this control example), and whether it has not reached the predetermined number (5 times). If it is determined that this is the case, the system is configured so that no special effects are set. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which special effects occur frequently after the time saving ends.

In addition, in this control example, the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the time saving ends is 5 times, that is, a value greater than the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is changed a predetermined number of times. Because it is set as , even if the time-saving state ends when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is at the upper limit, the special effect will be executed using the reserved balls of special symbol 2 obtained during the time-saving state. However, conditions other than the above-mentioned control example may be set as conditions under which the special effect is not executed. For example, if the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is A value smaller than the upper limit (4) (for example, 3) may be set as the predetermined number of times. With this configuration, if the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 has reached the upper limit at the end of the time saving, the special effect will be executed, so the player can be motivated to play the reserved balls of special figure 2. It is possible to save money and improve the performance of the game.

In addition, in this control example, a condition using the number of changes in the special symbol is set as a condition for not setting a special effect, but other conditions may be set, for example, after the time saving state ends. A measuring means for measuring the elapsed time may be provided, and the condition for not setting the special effect may be set that the elapsed time measured by the measuring means does not exceed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). By setting the conditions based on the elapsed time in this way, for example, if you end the game immediately after the time saving state ends (the time saving state ends and the game returns to the normal state, you can play the game without changing the special symbols). 2), it is possible to prevent the execution of the special performance from being restricted for the game played by the next player.

In addition, a gaming state determining means is provided to determine the gaming state at the timing when a game ball enters the second ball entering port 640, and the gaming state determining means determines whether a gaming ball enters the second ball entering port 640 during the time saving state. If it is determined that the ball has hit, the configuration may be configured to restrict (prohibit) execution of a special effect as a variable display for the ball.

This variation counter 223aj is a special function that controls (prohibits) the execution of special effects when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223ai is 0 in the time saving process (see FIG. 302) (Z5152 in FIG. 302: Yes). A value (5 in this control example) indicating the number of variations in the symbol is set (Z5153 in FIG. 302), and the value is subtracted by 1 each time variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 99) is executed. Then, in the special effect setting process for setting the special effect (see FIG. 306), the value of the variation counter 223aj is referred to, and if it is determined that the value is not 0 (Z5502 in FIG. 312: No) , the performance mode of the normal performance is set without setting the performance mode of the special performance (Z5510 in FIG. 312).

The operation invalidation flag 223ak is a flag for indicating a period during which an operation for switching the background of the display screen is invalidated, and is set to ON during a period during which the operation for switching the background of the display screen is invalidated. In this control example, as described above, the special effect is configured to be able to be executed while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the background of the display screen cannot be changed while this special effect is being executed. It is configured so that there is no such thing. With this configuration, the player may accidentally operate the frame button 22 during a period when a performance (special performance) that is difficult to perform is being performed. It is possible to prevent the background of the display screen from switching while the special performance is being executed.

This operation invalidation flag 223ak is set to ON when the performance mode of the special performance is set in the special performance setting process (see FIG. 306) (Z5504 in FIG. 306), and when the first special symbol is set in the performance setting process (see FIG. 304). When setting the variable production of (special figure 1) (Z5301 in FIG. 304: Yes), it is set to off (Z5302 in FIG. 304). While this operation invalidation flag 223ak is set to ON, the process of changing the background of the display screen (processing of Z2803 to Z2852 in FIG. 307) in the frame button input monitoring/presentation process 2 (see FIG. 103) is not performed. will be skipped.

The state storage area 223az is an area for storing state information for indicating the current gaming state based on the state command output from the main control device 110. Specifically, in command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 299), if it is determined that a status command has been received (Z2256 in FIG. 299: Yes), status information is stored (Z2257 in FIG. 299). In this control example, each piece of information stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to be erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. 10 is configured so that when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main controller 110 outputs a status command to indicate the current gaming status, so if the power is turned off (power outage) etc.), the gaming state can be appropriately determined on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

<About control processing by the main controller in the second control example>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 294 to 297. In this second control example, the special symbol variation process (Figure 244) is changed to special symbol variation process 2 (Figure 294), and the special symbol 1 variation start process (Figure 246) and special symbol 2 variation start process (Figure 247) are changed to special symbol variation process 2 (Figure 294). The points that the symbol variation start process 2 (Fig. 295), the start winning process (Fig. 248), the start winning process 2 (Fig. 296), and the prefetching process (Fig. 249) have been changed to the prefetching process 2 (Fig. 297) are changed. These are the main differences.

With reference to FIG. 294, special symbol variation processing 2 (Z154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 2 (Z154). In the special symbol variation processing 2 (Z256: FIG. 295) in the second control example, the processing of Z203 to Z214 is changed to the processing of Z330 to Z340, compared to the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 244) in the first control example. They differ in that they have been changed. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this special symbol variation processing 2 (Z256: FIG. 295), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (Z201). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (Z201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If there is no special symbol jackpot (Z201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. Otherwise (Z202: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (Z330).

Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 1 or more (Z331). If it is determined that the value is 1 or more (Z331: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (Z332), and the special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter changed by the calculation is A held pitch count command indicating the value (N2) of 203e is set (Z333). The held pitch count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 258) to be described later. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved balls command through the process of Z333, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z265). In the process of Z265, the data stored in the holding areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing 2 is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display device (Z340).

On the other hand, in the process of Z331, if it is determined that the acquired value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (Z331: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (Z335).

Next, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 or more (Z336). If it is determined that it is 1 or more (Z336: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (Z337), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is Set a held pitch count command that indicates the value (Z338). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio output during the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 201. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved balls command by the process of Z338, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z339). In the process of Z339, the data stored in the holding area 1 to holding area 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing 2 is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display device (Z340). The special symbol variation start process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 295. On the other hand, in the process of Z336, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is 0 (Z336: No), this process is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 295, special symbol variation start processing 2 (Z340: FIG. 295) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. In the special symbol variation start process 2 (Z340: FIG. 295) in this second control example, the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209: FIG. 246) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (214: FIG. 247) in the first control example The difference is that these processes are performed all at once. Since the processing content is the same as the first control example, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 296, the starting winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 296) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. The starting winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 296) in the second control example differs from the starting winning process (Z105: FIG. 248) in the first control example in that the processes Z308 and Z316 are not executed, and the process of Z320 The difference is that the processing is executed all at once by Z360 processing. Since the processing content is the same as the first control example, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 297, the prefetch process 2 (Z360), which is one process in the start winning process 2 (Z155) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the contents of this prefetch processing 2 (Z360).

In the prefetch process 2 (Z360), first, it is determined whether there is new winning information (Z361). If it is determined that there is no new prize winning information (Z361: No), this process is immediately terminated. If it is determined that there is new winning information (Z361: Yes), the special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, fluctuation type corresponding to the current winning from the special symbol reserved ball storage area Obtain each value of the counter CS1 (Z362). Next, among the determination results specified in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a hit determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 is acquired (Z363). Next, among the determination results specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d, the winning type determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired special winning type counter C2 is acquired (Z364).

Next, among the determination results defined in the stop type selection table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (Z365). Next, among the determination results specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, the fluctuation type determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is acquired (Z366). Next, winning information including hit determination result information indicating the acquired hit determination result, winning type information indicating the winning type determination result, stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and fluctuation type information indicating the fluctuation type determination result. The command is set (Z367), and this process ends.

<About the control process by the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 298 to 308. In this second control example, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (Z2107), which is one process in the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, is performed in contrast to the first control example. The main points are that processing 2 (Z2151) has been changed, command judgment processing (Z2113) has been changed to command judgment processing 2 (Z2152), and variable display setting processing (Z2114) has been changed to variable display setting processing 2 (Z2153). This is the difference.

With reference to FIG. 299, command determination processing 2 (Z2152) in main processing 2 executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process 2 (Z2152).

In command determination processing 2 (Z2152), it is first determined whether a variable pattern command has been received (Z2201). If it is determined that the command has been received (Z2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2251), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2252), and this processing ends. do. Note that the processes Z2203 to Z2207 are the same as those in the first control example, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, if it is determined in the process of Z2206 that the reserved pitch count command has not been received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether winning command information has been received (Z2253). When the winning information command is received (Z2253: Yes), winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2254). Next, winning information related processing (Z2255) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the winning information related process will be described later with reference to FIG. 300.

In the process of Z2253, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (Z2253: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (Z2256). If it is determined that a status command has been received (Z2256: Yes), status information indicating the gaming status corresponding to the received status command is stored in the status storage area 223az (Z2257), and this process ends.

In the process of Z2256, if it is determined that a status command has not been received (Z2256: No), determine whether a stop command has been received (Z2258). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (Z2258: Yes), stop. Execute command processing (Z2259). Details of the stop command processing (Z2259) will be described later with reference to FIG. 301. Next, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2260), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z2258, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2258: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 300, the winning information related process (Z2255), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning information related process (Z2255).

The winning information related process (Z2255) first stores the information of the received winning information command in the corresponding winning information storage area 223f (Z5001). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a is read out (Z5002). Next, it is determined whether the read value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003). If it is not 2 or more (Z5003: No), this process ends.

In the process of Z5003, if the read value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003: Yes), it is determined whether the production setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004). If it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004: Yes), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the performance setting prohibition flag 223ag is off (Z5004), the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa is read (Z5505), and execution of the continuous performance is determined (Z5006). Next, it is determined whether to execute continuous performance (Z5007). If the continuous performance is not to be executed (Z5007: No), this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, when executing a continuous production (Z5007: Yes), the continuous production flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read (Z5009), and the value of the read counter is It is set as the value of the performance number counter 223af (Z5010). Next, the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011), and this processing is ended.

With reference to FIG. 301, the stop command process (Z2259), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the contents of this stop command processing (Z2259).

In the stop command processing (Z2259), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the time saving mode (Z5101). If it is determined that the time is being shortened (Z5101: Yes), the time saving process (Z5115) is executed and the present process is ended. Details of the time saving process (Z5115) will be described later with reference to FIG. 302. On the other hand, in the process of Z5101, if it is determined that the time is not being reduced (Z5101: No), it is determined whether the setting prohibition release flag 223ah provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z5102). If the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is off (Z5102: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if the production prohibition release flag ah is on (Z5102: Yes), the production setting prohibition flag 223ag and the setting prohibition release flag ah are set to OFF (Z5103), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is set. (Z5104). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5105). If it is determined that the number is not 2 or more (Z5105: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5105, if it is determined that the value of the read counter is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a being 2 or more is stored as the winning information. Reading is executed from the storage area 223f (Z5106). Next, it is determined whether there is any jackpot winning information (Z5107). If it is determined that there is no jackpot prize (Z5107: No), the continuous performance flag 223ac is set to OFF (Z5116), and the process is immediately terminated. If it is determined that jackpot winning information is available (Z5107: Yes), the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa provided in the ROM 222 is read out (Z5108), and execution of the continuous performance is determined (Z5109). After executing the process of Z5109, it is determined whether it is the timing to execute a continuous effect (Z5110). If it is not the timing to execute the continuous performance (Z5110: No), the process of Z5116 described above is executed and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is the timing to execute the continuous performance (Z5110: Yes), the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5111), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a is read out (Z5112). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a corresponding to the jackpot winning is set as the value of the production number counter 223af (Z5113), the production setting prohibition flag 223ag is set on (Z5114), and this process is executed. finish.

Referring to FIG. 302, the time saving process (Z5115), which is one process in the stop command process (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time saving process (Z5115).

In the time saving process (Z5115), first, the value of the time saving counter 223ai provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z5151). Next, it is determined whether the value changed by the calculation is 0 (Z5152). If it is determined that the changed value is 0 (Z5152: Yes), the value of the variation counter aj is set to 5 (Z5153), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z5152 that the value of the time saving counter 223ai is greater than 0 (Z5153: No), the process of Z5153 is skipped and the present process ends.

With reference to FIG. 303, the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153), which is one process in the main process 2 (FIG. 298) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of variable display setting processing 2 (Z2153). The variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) in the second control example differs from the variable display setting process (Z2114) in the first control example in that processes Z5204 to Z5208 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z5202, the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (Z5203). Next, effect setting processing (Z5204) is executed. Details of the effect setting process (Z5204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 304.

Next, a display variation pattern command is set (Z5205), data in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted (Z5206), and it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 223aj is greater than 1 (Z5207). If it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223aj is greater than 1 (Z5207: Yes), the value of the variation number counter 223aj is subtracted by 1 (Z5208). In the process of Z5207, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223aj is 0 (Z5207: No), the process of Z5208 is skipped and the process moves to the process of Z5209.

With reference to FIG. 304, the effect setting process (Z5204), which is one process in the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing the contents of this effect setting process (Z5204).

In the production setting process (Z5204), first, it is determined whether the current variation is a variation in the first special symbol (Z5301). If the variation is in the first special symbol (Z5301: Yes), the operation invalidation flag 223ak provided in the RAM 223 is set to OFF (Z5302). Next, it is determined whether the continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5303). If it is determined that the continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5303: Yes), the continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to OFF (Z5304). On the other hand, in the process of Z5303, if it is determined that the continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to OFF (Z5303: Yes), the process of Z5304 described above is skipped.

After executing the process of Z5304, it is determined whether the value of the performance counter 223af is greater than 0 (Z5305). If it is determined that it is larger than 0 (Z5305: Yes), a continuous effect setting process (Z5306) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the continuous performance setting process (Z5306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 305.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5305, if the value of the performance counter 223af is 0 (Z5305: No), a variation pattern without continuous performance is determined (Z5307). Next, it is determined whether the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to on (Z5308). If the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to OFF (Z5308: No), this process is immediately ended. When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5308: Yes), the setting prohibition cancellation flag 223ah is set to ON (Z5309). Next, the information stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is cleared (Z5310), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z5301, if it is determined that the current variation is not a variation in the first special symbol (Z5301: No), a special effect setting process (Z5311) is executed. Details of the special effect setting process (Z5311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 306.

With reference to FIG. 305, the continuous effect setting process (Z5306), which is one process in the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306).

In the continuous performance setting process (Z5306), first, the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to OFF (Z5401). Next, it is determined whether the value of the performance counter 223af is 1 (Z5402). When it is determined that the value of the performance counter 223af is 1 (Z5402: Yes), the final mode of continuous performance corresponding to the special symbol lottery result is determined (Z5403). On the other hand, if the value of the performance counter 223af is other than 1 (Z5402: No), the continuous performance continuation mode is determined (Z5404), and the process of Z5405 is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the current background mode is set to sea mode (Z5405). If it is determined that the setting is sea mode (Z5405: Yes), a continuous performance command for display to indicate the determined performance mode is set (Z5406).Next, the value of the performance number counter 223af is subtracted by 1 (Z5407). ), sets the continuous performance flag 223ac to ON (Z5408), and ends this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the set mode is not the sea mode (Z5405: No), the determined performance mode is stored in the continuous performance update area 223ae (Z5409), and a display notification command indicating that continuous performance is on standby is sent. Set (Z5410). Thereafter, the above-described processes Z5407 to Z5408 are executed, and this process ends.

With reference to FIG. 306, the special effect setting process (Z5311), which is one process of the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311).

In the special effect setting process (Z5311), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the time saving mode (Z5501). If it is determined that the time is not being shortened (Z5501: No), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502). If it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502: Yes), the performance mode of the special performance corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5503), and the operation invalidation flag 223ak is set to ON. (Z5504).

Next, it is determined whether the continuous performance flag 223ac is set to on (Z5505). If it is set to on (Z5505: Yes), then it is determined whether the continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5506). If it is set to OFF (Z5506: No), the continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5507), and a display interruption command is set (Z5508). Next, a display performance command corresponding to the determined performance mode is set (Z5509), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z5501 that the time is being shortened (Z5501: Yes), or if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is not 0 in the process of Z5502 (Z5502: No), The performance mode of the normal performance corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5510), the process of Z5509 mentioned above is executed, and this process ends. In addition, in the process of Z5505, if it is determined that the continuous performance flag 223ac is off (Z5505: No), or if it is determined that the continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to on in the process of Z5506 (Z5506: Yes), the process of Z5507 to Z5508 described above is skipped, the process of Z5509 is executed, and this process ends.

Referring to FIG. 307, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 (Z2151) in the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 307 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 (Z2151). This second control example differs from the frame button input monitoring/presentation process (Z2107) of the first control example in that the process Z2851 and the process Z2852 are added. Other processing is the same as in the first control example, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

The process of Z2851 determines whether the operation invalidation flag 223ak is set to on (Z2851). When it is determined that the operation invalidation flag 223ak is off (Z2851: No), the same process as Z2803 to Z2804 of the first control example is executed, and then the effect return process (Z2852) is executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 308, the effect return process (Z2852) is one process in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (Z2151) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. I will explain about it. FIG. 308 is a flowchart showing the contents of the production return processing (Z2852).

In the effect return processing (Z2852), first, it is determined whether the set background mode is "sea mode" (Z2871). If the background mode is not "sea mode" (Z2871: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871: Yes), the performance mode stored in the continuous performance update area 223ae is read out (Z2872). Next, it is determined whether there is stored information (Z2873). If there is no stored information (Z2873: No), this process ends. If it is determined that there is stored information (Z2873: Yes), a display performance command corresponding to the stored performance mode is set (Z2874), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 307, the explanation will be continued. Performance return processing (Z2852) is executed, then sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation invalidation flag 223ak is set to on (Z2851: Yes), the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed and the present process ends.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example described above will be explained with reference to FIGS. 309 to 312. In the third control example described above, when the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) starts while the continuous production is being executed, the continuous production that is being executed is interrupted and the variation of the special symbol 2 starts. A configuration was used in which the continuous performance that had been interrupted was restarted when the first special symbol started changing after the end of the first special symbol. As a result, continuous performances can be executed in response to fluctuations in the first special symbol, and the continuous performance can be enjoyed until the end.

However, in the configuration of the second control example described above, if the continuous performance is interrupted, the continuous performance is always restarted after a predetermined period has passed (after the end of the special figure 2 variation), so it is difficult to determine whether the continuous performance will be restarted or not. Since it is not possible to make players' hearts flutter, there has been a need to further enhance the presentation effect. On the other hand, in this third control example, the interruption is determined based on the game content (the number of fluctuations of special figure 2) when the continuous effect is interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is the target of the continuous effect. It is configured to determine whether or not to restart the continuous performance in the middle, and to restart the continuous performance based on the result of the determination. With this configuration, even if the continuous performance is interrupted, it is possible to predict whether or not the continuous performance will be restarted while enjoying the special performance that is executed as the variable performance of special figure 2. The effect can be increased.

Furthermore, in this third control example, the continuous performance is easily restarted when the lottery result of the special symbol 1 that is the target of the continuous performance is a jackpot. Thereby, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the continuous performance will be restarted. Further, in the third control example, the smaller the number of special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of special performance executions) executed while the continuous performance is interrupted, the easier it is to restart the continuous performance. Thereby, when the period from when the continuous performance is interrupted to when it is restarted is short, the continuous performance can be easily restarted, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, if a long period of time has passed since the continuous performance was interrupted, and the lottery result of special drawing 1, which is the target of the continuous performance, is a loss, the player will not have unnecessary expectations for a jackpot. In order to do this, the continuous performance is configured to be difficult to restart.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 309. Figure 309 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification. This third control example differs in that a special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is added to the RAM 223 of the second control example described above. The other elements are the same as those in the second control example, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the second special symbol, and when the special effect setting process 2 (FIG. 312) sets the effect mode of the special effect, the value of the counter is 1 is added (Z5551 in FIG. 312), and the value of the counter is referred to in the continuous performance return process (see FIG. 311) in the performance setting process 2 (see FIG. 310) (Z5602 in FIG. 311). In the process of Z5602, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is smaller than 3 (Z5602 in Fig. 311: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is set to 0 (in Fig. 311). Z5603). On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol 2 variation counter 223ba is determined to be 3 or more (Z5602 in FIG. 311: No), that is, the 2nd special symbol variation is executed 3 or more times while the continuous performance is interrupted. If so, it is determined whether there is winning information indicating a jackpot in the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol (Z5605 in Figure 311), and if it is determined that there is no winning information (Z5605 in Figure 311: Yes) , the value of the performance counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606 in FIG. 311), and the process of Z5603 described above is executed.

That is, in the continuous performance return process (see FIG. 311), when resuming the interrupted continuous performance, if the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 executed during the interruption of the continuous performance is a predetermined number (3 times) or more. , Based on the lottery result included in the winning information of special drawing 1 at that time, it is determined whether or not to restart the continuous performance, and if the performance result of the continuous performance is a loss, the continuous performance is restarted. Since this will only disappoint the player, the value of the performance counter 223af is set to 0, so that the continuous performance is not restarted. As a result, if a long period of time has passed since the continuous performance was interrupted, and the lottery result of special drawing 1 that is the target of the continuous performance is a loss, the player will not have unnecessary expectations for a jackpot. In addition to being able to prevent the player from putting the player away, it is possible to create expectations for a big hit when the continuous performance is restarted, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

<About the control process by the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 310 to 312. This third control example differs from the second control example in that the content of the effect setting process (Z5204: Figure 304), which is one process in the variable effect setting process 2 (Z2153: Figure 303), is partially changed. Mainly different. The other processes are the same, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 310, the effect setting process 3 (Z5204), which is one process of variable display setting executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example, will be described. The effect setting process 3 (Z5204: FIG. 310) in the third control example is different from the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 304) in the second control example in that the process of Z5310 is not executed, and the special effect process (Z5311 ) is different in that the processing contents have been changed and continuous performance return processing (Z5351) has been added. Other processing is the same as the second control example, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The continuous performance return process (Z5351) will be described with reference to FIG. 311. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous performance return process (Z5351).

In the continuous performance return process (Z5351), first, reading of the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is executed (Z5601). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special figure 2 variation counter is less than 3 (Z5602). If it is determined that it is larger than 3 (Z5602: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is set to 0 (Z5603), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is less than 3 (Z5602: No), the winning information corresponding to the special figure 1 stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read out. (Z5604). Next, it is determined whether there is a winning prize in the read winning information (Z5605). If it is determined that there is no winning (Z5605: No), the value of the performance counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606), and then the process of Z5603 described above is executed and the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z5605, if it is determined that there is a winning prize (Z5605: Yes), the process of Z5603 is executed and the present process ends.

With reference to FIG. 312, special effect setting processing 2 (Z5320) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320: FIG. 312) in the third control example executes the process of Z5504 with respect to the special effect setting process (Z5311) in the second control example, and then sets the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba. The difference is that a process of adding 1 to the value (Z5551) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the fourth control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 313 to 324. The fourth control example differs from each of the control examples described above in that it includes an adjustment means that allows the player to adjust the volume of the pachinko machine 10.

First, with reference to FIG. 313, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 313 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 313, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example is different from the first control example described above in that it is provided with a volume button 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume. The other configurations are the same. Identical components will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the real-time clock (RTC) 292 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. The RTC 292 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and includes a real-time clock that can measure the current time. This RTC 292 has an input/output port, a device control section, and a register. Further, an RTC power source is connected to the RTC 292. This RTC power supply is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 292, which is different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC 292 even in a power-off state when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. For example, a button type battery is used as the RTC power source 353, and is configured to be able to supply power to the RTC 292 for at least three years.

An input/output port and a register are connected to the device control section of the RTC 292. The input/output port is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 so that they can communicate with each other. The device control unit controls the registers to perform various controls such as measuring the current time and writing data.

A register is a storage area that can temporarily store data and perform operations on stored data. The register includes at least a time register and a time information storage area.

The time register is a register for measuring the current time, and the register value is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 1/4096 seconds). Based on the clock information clocked in this clock register, it is determined whether or not it is the execution period of the time effect.

In this embodiment, the value of the clock register (timekeeping information corresponding to the current time measured by the RTC 292) is stored in the power-on time storage area of the RAM 223 based on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on. ) or the time information stored in the time information storage area. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the clock information stored in the time information storage area is stored in the power-on time storage area. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 122, the value of the time register (time information corresponding to the current time measured by the RTC 292) is stored in the power-on time storage area. .

As a result, the clerk at the hall can turn on the power of each pachinko machine 10 at the same time without pressing the RAM erase switch 122 at the opening time of the hall, etc., so that the pachinko machine 10 can grasp the elapsed time since the power was turned on. can be matched. Therefore, in each pachinko machine 10, the execution period of the time effect can be made to match. On the other hand, if you want to turn off the power to some of the pachinko machines 10 during the hall's business hours (for example, to cancel an error), press and hold the RAM erase switch 122 when turning on the power again. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the clock information stored in the time information storage area can be stored in the input time storage area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of the time performance from being deviated between the pachinko machine 10 whose power has been cut off and the other pachinko machines 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 314 and X, a display screen related to volume adjustment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 314(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 314(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the third symbol display device 81 in a standby state, and X(a) shows that the special symbol variation is executed after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. X(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen during the first special symbol change after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. be.

As shown in FIG. 314(a), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the return process of the control devices such as the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A comment "Please wait for a while" informing the user of the period up to this point is displayed as the returning display mode S1, and a volume gauge S2 is displayed to indicate the currently set volume. This volume gauge S2 is formed of a horizontally elongated gauge that visually displays the current volume, and a setting value display that numerically indicates the current volume on the right side of the gauge. In FIG. 314, the setting value is " 1" is displayed, and the gauge displays a diagonally shaded area corresponding to the set value "1". Although details will be described later, in this control example, the setting value "1" is set as the initial value of the volume setting value when the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 314(b), when the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b is pressed while the normal customer waiting screen is displayed, the volume gauge S2 and the volume switching display S3 are displayed. Ru. The volume switching display S3 includes a "switch" display to indicate that the volume can be switched, a volume reduction display mode S3a indicating that the volume will decrease when the left volume button 23a is pressed, and a volume reduction display mode S3a that indicates that the volume will decrease when the left volume button 23a is pressed. The volume increase display mode S3b indicates that the volume is increasing. With this volume switching display S3 being displayed, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted by pressing the left volume button 23a and the right volume button 23b.

Here, in conventional gaming machines, when performing a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, an act of illegally manipulating the control contents of the main controller 110 to aim for a jackpot), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily turned off. There are things that turn off and cheat. In order to make it easier to discover such fraudulent acts, some measures have been taken so that a loud sound is emitted when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

However, in recent years, there are many pachinko machines 10 that temporarily emit loud noises as a way to enhance the performance effect. There was a problem in that the staff at the amusement park failed to hear the message. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, from the time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the end of the first special symbol variation, the volume is lower than the minimum value of the volume setting range that can be variably set by the player. It is also configured so that a small sound is output. With this configuration, in a gaming machine that normally makes loud sounds during gaming, it is possible to create a situation that feels strange compared to the surrounding gaming machines by emitting a quieter sound than necessary. It is possible to make it easier to be discovered by the staff at the game hall.

In addition, in this control example, the player is not able to adjust the volume from the time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the first special symbol change is completed, so it is possible to prevent fraud. It is possible to prevent the player who has committed the act from operating the volume button 23 after turning on the power to adjust the volume of the Pachinko machine 10 so as to output the same volume as the surrounding Pachinko machines 10.

Specifically, as shown in X(a), the same volume gauge S2 as in FIG. 314(b) described above is displayed on the customer waiting screen after the power is turned on, and the volume switch display S3 is not displayed. It consists of In this way, although the volume is internally output smaller than the volume setting value "1", by displaying the volume gauge S2 corresponding to the volume setting value "1" on the display screen, it is possible to prevent fraud. It is possible to prevent a player who performs an act from seeing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and discovering that the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with anti-fraud measures.

Similarly, as shown in , the volume switching display S3 is not displayed, and the volume setting value cannot be changed by operating the volume button 23.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 316 to 318. Note that the same elements as those in each control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIG. 316. In the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth control example. The control examples described above are different from each other in that the volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) are provided, and are otherwise the same.

Next, with reference to FIG. 317(a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example will be explained. FIG. 317(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example differs greatly from the ROMs of the respective control examples described above in that a volume table 222ca is provided. Other elements are the same.

The volume table 222ca is a data table that defines volume settings that can be set by operating the volume button 23. Here, the contents of the volume table 222ca will be explained with reference to FIG. 318. FIG. 318 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the volume table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 318, the volume table 222ca includes setting values that can be set by operating the volume button 23 (setting values ``1'' to ``4''), as well as information on whether predetermined conditions are met after the power is turned on. A setting value (setting value "A") to be set when the device is in use is defined, and a predetermined setting value is set depending on the state.

Specifically, the set value "A" is set until the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) of the first rotation after the power is turned on is completed. When the setting value "A" is set, a sound with a loudness of 15 db (decibels) is output. Also, when the volume button 23 is operated and the setting value "1" is set, a sound of 30 db (decibel) is output, and when the setting value "2" is set, the sound is 75 db (decibel) loud. When the setting value "3" is set, a sound with a loudness of 85 db (decibels) is output, and when the setting value "4" is set, a sound with a loudness of 95 db (decibels) is output. Sound is output.

In this control example, the setting value "1" is set as the initial value after the power is turned on, but the initial value of the volume can be set in response to various conditions. For example, a flag may be set that is set to ON only when the power is turned on for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, and if that flag is set to ON, the setting value "3" is set as the initial value. Alternatively, the time when the power is turned on may be determined, and a different setting value may be set as the initial value based on the determination result.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 317(b). In this third control example, a setting volume storage area 223ca, a volume operation invalidation flag 223cb, and a volume change standby flag 223cc are added to the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example described above. They differ in some respects. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The set volume storage area 223ca is an area for storing (storing) the currently set set volume, which is set in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 320) of startup process 4 (see FIG. 319). The set values are stored (Z6003 and Z6004 in FIG. 320). Further, the setting value set in the volume setting process (see FIG. 322) of the main process 4 (see FIG. 321) of the audio lamp control device 113 is stored (Z6106 in FIG. 322).

The volume operation invalidation flag 223cb is a flag for indicating a period during which the change in volume (change in setting value) based on the operation of the volume button 23 is disabled. changes) are disabled. This volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set when it is determined in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 116) that the RTC time is during business hours (for example, from 10 a.m. to 10 p.m.) (Z6002 in FIG. 320). Yes), it is set to on (Z6005 in FIG. 320) and is referenced in the volume setting process (see FIG. 322) (Z6107 in FIG. 322). If it is determined in the process of Z6107 that it is set to on (see Z6107 in FIG. 322), the volume gauge S2 (see FIG. 314(a)) is displayed without displaying the volume switching display S3 (see FIG. 314(b)). ) is set (Z6110 in FIG. 322). Then, it is set to OFF in the volume related processing (see FIG. 324) executed in the stop command processing 4 (FIG. 323) (Z5122 in FIG. 324). That is, when the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to on when the special symbol fluctuation stops, it is set to off.

The volume change standby flag 223cc is a flag for indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23, and is set to on when the volume can be adjusted. It is something. In this third control example, when adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, it is first necessary to press the volume button 23 and display the volume switching display S3 on the third symbol display device 81. The volume is adjusted by operating the volume button 23 (left volume button 23a or right volume button 23b) while the volume switching display S3 is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the volume of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed even if the volume button 23 is pressed by mistake during a game.

Note that if the control state of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by executing a power-on operation with the RAM clear switch 122 operated (pressed) at power-on, the maximum operating setting It may be configured to output a sound effect indicating that the RAM has been cleared at a volume or at a volume higher than the maximum volume set by the operation. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud such as illegally clearing the RAM and aiming for a winning random value.

Further, in this control example, the game audio is output at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by the operation until the 1 fluctuation at the time of power-on is completed; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and after power-on, When the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by the operation, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to output the sound such as BGM and sound effects (sound for production). It may be configured such that a display indicating `` is displayed and the volume is maintained and output until the player operates the volume button 23 . With this configuration, when a game starts after the power is turned on, such as when a game parlor opens, the sound is output according to the previous player's volume setting (the previous day's volume setting), thereby increasing the volume. It is possible to suppress a problem in which the player is surprised by the output. Furthermore, by setting the volume to be lower than the minimum volume, it is possible to make the player aware of the low volume while preventing it from causing harm to the player, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23. You can notice that it is configured. Incidentally, regardless of when the power is turned on, by switching to the demo screen, the volume may be switched to a volume lower than the minimum volume, and the volume setting screen may be displayed. Furthermore, after the game has started (the special symbols have started to change), if the volume button 23 is not operated and the volume is set lower than the minimum volume, the special symbols that are being changed will be The display color on the volume setting screen (volume pattern and the pattern of the volume button (right operation increases volume, left operation decreases volume)) can be changed depending on the winning lottery results and the lottery results (read ahead results) that are stored in storage. It may also be configured so that the expected degree of winning is notified. With this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the game at a quiet volume until the level of expectation fluctuates or is stored on hold, and when the level of expectation increases, the volume can be increased to play the game.

<About the control process by the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 319 to Z324. This fourth control example differs from the first control example in that an initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added to the startup process, a volume setting process (Z2171) is added to the main process, and a sound editing/output process (Z2109) is added. The main differences are that additional processing is added, and that volume-related processing (Z5120) is added to the stop command processing, which is one processing within the command determination processing.

The startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 319. The start-up process in the fourth control example (FIG. 319) differs from the start-up process in the first control example (FIG. 275) in that an initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 320, the initial volume setting (Z2051), which is one process of the start-up process (FIG. 319) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing the contents of this initial volume setting (Z2051).

In the initial volume setting, first, the RTC calculation time is read (Z6001). Next, it is determined whether the current time is during business hours (Z6002). If it is determined that it is not during business hours (Z6002: No), the setting value 2 is read from the volume table 222ca provided in the ROM 222 and stored in the setting volume storage area 223ca provided in the RAM 223 (Z6003); This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is during business hours (Z6004), the setting value 1 is read from the volume table 222ca, stored in the setting volume storage area 223ca (Z6004), and then the volume operation invalidation flag 223cb is set to on. (Z6005), this process ends.

With reference to FIG. 321, main processing 4 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 321 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 4. The main process in the fourth control example (FIG. 321) differs from the main process in the second control example (FIG. 258) in that a volume setting process (Z2171) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 322, the volume setting process (Z2171), which is one process of main process 4 (FIG. 321) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing the contents of this volume setting process (Z2171).

In the volume setting process (Z2171), first, it is determined whether the volume button has been operated (Z6101). If it is determined that the volume button is not operated (Z6101), this process ends. When the volume button is operated (Z6101: Yes), it is determined whether the volume change standby flag 223cc provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (Z6102). If it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set on (Z6102: Yes), the setting value corresponding to the operation content is read from the volume table 222ca (Z6103). Next, a display volume change command for displaying a volume gauge corresponding to the read setting value is set (Z6104). Next, an audio setting command for indicating the read setting value is set (Z6105), the read setting value is stored in the setting volume storage area 223ca (Z6106), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6102, if it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to OFF (Z6102: No), it is determined whether the volume operation invalidation flag 223cb is set to ON (Z6107). If it is determined that the volume operation invalidation flag 223cb is set to OFF (Z6107: No), a display volume change command for indicating the volume gauge and adjustment display is set (6108). Next, the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to on (Z6109), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z6107, if the volume operation invalidation flag 223cb is set to ON (Z6107: Yes), a display volume command for indicating the volume gauge is set (Z6110), and this process ends.

With reference to FIG. 323, stop command processing 4 (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing the contents of this stop command processing 4 (Z2259). Stop command processing 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example differs from the stop command processing (FIG. 301) in the second control example in that volume-related processing (Z5120) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 324, the volume-related process (Z5120), which is one process in the stop command process 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing the contents of the volume related process (Z5120).

In the volume related processing (Z5120), first, it is determined whether the volume operation invalidation flag 223cb provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (Z5152). If it is determined that the volume operation invalidation flag 223cb is set to ON (Z5121: Yes), the volume operation invalidation flag 223cb is set to OFF (Z5122), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z5121, if it is determined that the volume operation invalidation flag is off (Z5121: No), the process of Z5122 is not executed and this process ends.

<About the fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 325 to 345. In this fifth control example, control processing regarding the operation of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 5) included in the operating device 300 (see FIG. 5) will be described. Note that only the differences with respect to the first control example will be explained, and the explanation of the same configurations will be omitted.

The fifth control example mainly focuses on the initial operation of the tilting device 310 and error processing during the initial operation when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and the control processing and error processing in the operation of the tilting device 310 during normal gaming. The process will be explained.

With reference to FIGS. 325(a) and 325(b), the display mode of an abnormality notification displayed when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. FIG. 325(a) shows that the tilting operation timer 223db, which will be described later, is set to 0 ( The abnormality notification display mode (error notification display mode) displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when the detection is not detected at the origin position even after the elapse of the initial operation period (when the initial operation is completed and the origin position is reached) FIG.

As shown in FIG. 325(a), based on the fact that the origin sensor of the operating device 300 does not detect that the tilting device 310 has moved to the origin position even after the operation period in which the initial operation of the tilting device 310 ends has elapsed. The text "Button return error A, please call an attendant" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to inform hall employees that an abnormality has occurred due to the initial operation of the tilting device 310. . In this control example, during the initial operation, if the tilting device 310 has not been moved to the home position at the end of the initial operation period, an error display as shown in FIG. 325(a) is displayed. There is. Further, although the details will be described later, there are cases in which the normal operation of the tilting device 310 may not be possible due to the player obstructing the operation of the tilting device 310 by, for example, pressing down on it with a hand or the like. In some cases, even if an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, the error is not displayed immediately, but the tilting device 310 is operated 4 times for every 3 changes of the special symbol. If an abnormality is continuously detected until the operation of the tilting device 310 is detected, an error is notified, so that the progress of the game can be stopped even if there is no mechanical abnormality. The structure is designed to suppress problems that would otherwise be a hindrance.

In addition, the error display at the time of initial operation is a display that can be identified as "button return error A" as shown in FIG. It is designed so that it can be easily determined.

As shown in FIG. 325(b), after operating the tilting device 310 in a game performance during normal gaming (during the game after the initial operation of the tilting device 310 is completed), the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position. When performing a movement operation, if the movement (movement) to the home position is not detected by the home sensor even after the movement to the home position is completed, an error will not be displayed immediately, but an error will be detected internally. Set the status to indicate the detected state, and then move the special symbol to the origin position every 3 changes. If you can move it to the origin position 4 times in a row, the 3rd symbol display device 81 main display area Dm displays the text "Button return error B, please call staff" to display an error message to inform players, hall employees, etc. that an abnormality has occurred in the tilting device 310. be done.

Here, by displaying characters such as "Button Return Error B" that are different from those used during the initial operation, it is possible to easily identify that an abnormality occurs during the normal game. In this way, in this control example, if the player is playing a normal game, the error display is executed by taking into consideration that the player is playing a game that interferes with the tilting motion 310. It is configured to suppress frequently occurring defects. Furthermore, when an error display is displayed during normal gaming and it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the tilting device 310, it is possible that the player is using a gaming method that interferes with the operation of the tilting device 310 for a long period of time. Therefore, an error operation of the tilting device 310 can be prevented at an early stage by having a hall employee or the like check the gaming method.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 328, the relationship between the operation of the tilting device 310, the variation of special symbols, and the touch sensor effect will be explained. FIG. 326 shows the period during which the tilting device 310 moves to the origin position (origin point This is a timing chart in an example in which the origin sensor does not detect the origin sensor even after the return is completed (period in which the return is completed).

When the fluctuation display of normal reach out A (variation time (variation period) 30000 ms) is determined, the value of the performance counter 223h is acquired and the judgment value "0 to 149" set in the operation performance selection table 222da described later is determined. If it matches the value of the obtained performance counter 223h, a tilting motion scenario A table 222db1 (see FIG. 333(a)), which will be described later, is determined. The tilting operation scenario A table 222 (see FIG. 333(a)) shows the position where the tilting device 310 is lowered to the position shown in FIG. 33 as a stirring operation after the tilting device 310 has risen to the highest position (see FIG. 32). and the highest position (see FIG. 32) are repeated at 0.5 second intervals, and then the operation of lowering to the origin position shown in FIG. 22 is performed (set).

If normal reach off A is executed, the third symbol will be in the reach display mode (the third symbols in the left symbol column and right symbol column are symbols of the same type) 18 seconds after the start of the special symbol variation (T1). The system will be temporarily stopped (stopped). In the ready-to-reach display mode, a symbol imitating the frame button 22 to suggest pressing the frame button 22 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 20 seconds after the start of variation of the special symbol. Here, it will be described later that the tilting operation 320 was pressed and the frame button 22 was pressed for 3.5 seconds from 23.3 seconds (T3) to 26.8 seconds (T4) after the start of the change of the special symbol. An operation valid period (T5) is set in which the detection is determined to be valid when the detection sensor 324 detects the operation.

As shown in FIG. 326 and FIG. 333(a), 18 seconds (18000 ms) after the start of the fluctuation of the normal reach deviation A (T1), the drive motor 342 rotates 210 degrees in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 22). By rotating stepwise, the disk cam 344 rotates 210 degrees clockwise from the origin position (the position shown in FIG. 22) and is moved to the cam removal position shown in FIG. 30 (operation pointer 1 (see FIG. 333(a)). ). Thereafter, the drive motor 342 is in a stopped state for 3 seconds (3000 ms) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 333(a))). After a 3-second stop period, the drive motor 342 rotates 20 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 30), and the disk cam 344 rotates 20 degrees counterclockwise to the unlocking position. (See FIG. 32) (see operation pointer 3 (FIG. 333) (a)).

Here, when moving from the cam release position to the lock release position, as already explained in the first embodiment, the release member 346 moves downward (counterclockwise) as shown in FIG. By being rotated, the rotary claw member 347 is rotated clockwise, the locking (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotary claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is rotated clockwise. It is raised by the urging force of In this case, the configuration is such that the voice coil motor 352 is also driven to provide assistance in the longitudinal direction to the tilting device 320, thereby increasing the lifting force and increasing the lifting speed. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and there is a standby period until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 333(a))). Thereafter, the drive motor 342 is driven 50 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32), so that the disk cam 344 rotates 50 degrees counterclockwise and moves 50 degrees downward from the highest position (see FIG. 32). It is moved to the rotated tilting downward position (see FIG. 33) (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 333(a))). Then, 0.5 seconds later, the drive motor 342 is driven 50 steps backward (clockwise in FIG. 33), thereby rotating the disk cam 344 50 degrees clockwise, and the tilting device 320 is turned again. It is moved to the highest position (see FIG. 32) (action pointer 6 (see FIG. 333(a))).

Then, 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 is driven again from the highest position to the lowered position (operation pointer 7 (see FIG. 333(a))), and 0.5 seconds later, from the lowered position to the lowest position. The tilting device 320 is driven to the raised position (operation pointer 8 (see FIG. 333(a))). Thereafter, the drive motor 342 is stopped for one second (operation pointer 9 (see FIG. 333(a))). When the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is completed, the production return operation process (Z2911: FIG. 340) is executed, and the driving is performed based on the origin detection operation A table 222d3 (see FIG. 334(a)), which will be described later. By driving the motor 342 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 32), the disk cam 344 is rotated counterclockwise, and a driving force is applied in the direction in which the tilting device 320 descends to the home position. is transmitted.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 326, the tilting device 320 is held and fixed at the highest position so as not to be lowered by the player. In such a case, as already explained in the first embodiment, the movable clutch 343c separates from the transmission gear 343b, causing the transmission gear 343b to idle, thereby causing the drive motor 342 to be driven. Also, the disc cam 344 is configured not to rotate.

Here, the detection sensor 324 detects that the drive motor 342 is at the origin position even if the tilting operation timer 223db (1900 ms) set in the origin detection operation A table 222db3 (see FIG. 334(a)) has elapsed. If not, the tilting operation status is set to "4" as data indicating an internal (abnormal state that is not notified to the outside) abnormality of the tilting device 310, which will be described later.

In this way, even if there is a possibility that the tilting device 320 cannot be returned from the highest position to the original position due to being held by the player, etc., the drive motor 342 (transmission gear 343b) can be controlled by the configuration of the movable clutch 343c. Damage to the drive motor 342, transmission gear 343b, etc. can be suppressed by causing the drive motor 342 to idle. Further, by configuring the tilting operation status to be able to determine whether there is an abnormality in the return-to-origin operation, it is possible to identify that there is an internal abnormality.

Next, referring to FIG. 327, when the effect of raising the tilting device 310 (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 326) is executed, even if the origin detection operation period (for example, 1900 ms) has elapsed, the origin sensor The control executed after the tilting operation status is set to "4" without being turned on will be described. FIG. 327 shows that when the tilting operation status is set to "4", a retry operation is executed to return the tilting device 310 to the origin position every time three variations of the special symbol (special symbol) are performed. 2 is a timing chart in the case where

When the tilting operation status is set to "4", a retry operation is performed in which the drive motor 342 is operated to move the tilting device 310 to the origin position every three fluctuations of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 327. be done. In this case, until the origin sensor is detected, the tilting operation status value must be maintained at "4" and the origin sensor must be turned on by retrying 4 times (4 times for every 3 fluctuations) in a row. , the error display shown in FIG. 325(b) is executed.

As a result, even if the effect of raising the tilting device 310 is executed and the origin detection operation of the tilting device 310 is executed, the player performs a game such as holding the tilting device 310 so as to prevent the operation, and the origin position is Even if an error occurs in which the movement is not made, the retry operation will be retried every time the special symbol change is executed a specified number of times (3 times), instead of immediately reporting the error like an error during the initial operation. However, if it is determined that the movement has not been continued to the origin position, an error message will be displayed to prevent the employees of the game parlor from frequently displaying errors due to pranks by players, etc. It is possible to suppress problems that cause troubles.

Next, referring to FIG. 328, when the tilting operation status is set to "4" and a preview effect using the touch sensor 290 is selected and executed, the touch sensor 290 is turned on. Control in the case where the origin detection operation (retry operation) is executed based on the timing at which the origin point is reached will be explained. FIG. 328 is a timing chart showing the operation of the tilting device 310 when the effect using the touch sensor 290 is executed. A preview effect is selected in which the special symbols begin to change and the operation of the touch sensor 290 is activated, the validity period of the touch sensor 290 is set, and the player places his or her hand over the top of the touch sensor 290. When the operation is executed and it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is turned on, the drive motor 342 of the tilting device 310 is driven to perform the origin detection operation. FIG. 328 shows a case where the driving of the drive motor 342 is stopped at the timing when the origin sensor is turned on, and the tilting operation status is set to "0". On the other hand, if the origin sensor does not turn on even after the origin detection period (for example, 3600 ms) has elapsed, the driving of the drive motor 342 is stopped and the tilting operation status remains set to "4". . As a result, the retry operation will continue to be performed every three fluctuations, and control for eliminating the abnormality in the tilting device 310 can be performed.

The player normally operates the firing handle with his right hand, and operates the touch sensor 290, frame button 290, etc. with his left hand. If the player is playing a game while holding the tilting device 310 so that it does not return to its original position, it is likely that the player is holding the tilting device 310 with his left hand, so the timing when the touch sensor 290 turns on By causing the tilting device 310 to perform the origin detection operation, the origin detection operation is performed with the tilting device 310 released from holding, and the tilting device 310 can be moved to the origin position. In addition, in this control example, the origin detection operation is configured to be executed at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, but the origin detection operation is executed only when the touch sensor 290 is turned on while the touch sensor of the firing handle is turned on. The origin detection operation may be configured to be executed to more reliably perform the origin detection operation in a state where the player's hold is released. In addition, the touch sensor 290 is not limited to the frame button 290, or the third symbol display device 81 may be used to execute a preview performance using both hands (for example, displaying characters such as "Raise both hands"). , it may be configured such that an effect is performed to read a three-dimensional code or the like with a mobile phone or the like, and the origin detection operation is performed during that period. Of course, it is also possible to use a sound to notify the user to use both hands.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 334. FIG. 329 is a block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in this fifth control example. In the fifth control example, a tilting device 310, a drive motor 342, a voice coil motor 352, and a detection sensor 324 are added to the first control example. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The tilting device 310 has the same configuration as that already explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 to 85, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The drive motor 342 is composed of a stepping motor, and is driven so that when the tilting device 310 is at the lower limit position, the tilting device 310 is released from being locked at the lower limit position so as to prevent it from rising. When the lock is released, the pachinko machine 10 is assisted by the vibration force in the front-rear direction of the voice coil motor 352, which will be described later and is driven in synchronization with the drive motor 342, and is raised to the highest position by the urging force of the spring. .

On the other hand, when the tilting member 310 is located at the highest position, the drive motor 342 rotates the tilting device 310 in the opposite direction to the upward movement, thereby moving the tilting device 310 downward to the original position. When the tilting device 310 is moved to the original position, the bottom plate portion 311a is locked by the rotary claw member 347 (see FIG. 22), and the tilting device 310 is prevented from rising.

The detection sensor 324 is made up of the transmission type detection sensor already explained with reference to FIG. 13, and is made up of a left side detection sensor 324L and a right side detection sensor 324R. In the regulated state, the left side detection sensor 324L is detecting the left side detection piece 311gL (ON state), and the right side detection sensor 324R is not detecting the right side detection piece 311gR (OFF state). This makes it possible to detect that the tilting device 310 has been moved to the lower limit position. Further, when the tilting device 310 is further pressed down by the player at the lower limit position, the right side detection sensor 324R detects the right side detection piece 311gR (ON state), and both the left side detection sensor 324L and the left side detection sensor 324L become ON state. , the configuration is such that it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been operated at the lower limit position by the player.

As a result, the tilting device 310 can be used in an effect that is pressed (operated) by the player not only when it is moved to the highest position, but also when it is regulated at the lowest position. It can be used for a variety of performances. For example, if the tilting device 310 is raised and pressed down, if the probability is set to be high during the fluctuation of a special symbol whose winning result is a hit, the tilting device 310 will increase the expectation level of the winning result. can be expressed.

The voice coil motor 352 is disposed on the back side of the tilting device 310, and when driven, it repeatedly vibrates the tilting device 310 from the back side to the front side. This is for executing an effect in which the player can feel vibrations when touching the tilting device 310. Furthermore, when the tilting device 310 rises, it rises due to the urging force of the spring against gravity, but the lifting force is weakened due to the own weight of the tilting device 310. However, by driving the voice coil motor 352 when moving up, A lifting force is applied by the vibration from the voice coil motor 352, and a problem in which the lifting force weakens due to its own weight can be suppressed.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 330. In this fifth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first control example described above, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed. There is a difference. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained with reference to FIG. 330(a). FIG. 330(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example. This fifth control example differs from the first control example described above in that an operation effect selection table 222da, a tilting motion scenario table db, an origin detection motion A table 222dcc, an origin detection motion B table 222dd, and a tilting initial motion table 222de are added. are doing.

The operation performance selection table 222da is a table for selecting operation data (operation content) for operating the tilting device 310 according to the variation type of the special symbol. FIG. 332(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation performance selection table 222da. In the operation performance selection table 222da, a determination value of a performance counter 223h is set which determines whether or not to perform an operation performance using the tilting device 310 with a predetermined probability depending on the variation type of the special symbol. The type of tilting motion scenario is set for the determination value for executing the operation performance. The tilting motion scenario includes an operation performance start time (operation performance start period) that is a timer value for determining the trigger for starting the operation performance of the tilting device 310 as the special symbol variation time elapses, and the tilting device 310 The timer value of the tilting operation timer 223db for setting the operation time (operation period) of A start period) and an operation valid end time (operation valid end period) which is a timer value for determining the end of the period during which the operation of the tilting device 310 is valid are set. That is, depending on the operation data selected from the operation performance selection table 222da, it is determined whether or not the performance using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and if it is to be executed, the start timing of the operation performance using the tilting device 310 and the timing when the tilting device 310 is used for the game. Setting of a validity period (T5) for validly determining the operation when the user presses the button is executed.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is "Normal reach jackpot A" or "Normal reach off A", the operation determines whether to obtain the value of the performance counter 223h and execute the operation performance. When it is determined that the operation performance is to be performed based on the performance selection table 222da (when the value of the acquired performance counter 223h is one of “0 to 149”), the operation scenario of the tilting device 320 is as follows. The tilting motion scenario A table 222bd1 to be described later is selected, the tilting motion timer 223db (T2) is set to 8800 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 341), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 18000ms, and the operation effect start time (T3) is set to 18000 ms. ) is set to 23,300 ms, and the valid operation end time (T4) is set to 26,800 ms.

In addition, if the variation pattern of the special symbol is "Super reach jackpot A" or "Super reach off A", the operation performance is determined by acquiring the value of the performance counter 223h and determining whether to execute the operation performance. If it is determined that the operation performance is to be executed based on the selection table 222da (if the value of the acquired performance counter 223h is between "0 to 149"), the tilting operation described later as an operation scenario of the tilting device is performed. The operation scenario B table 222bd2 is selected, the tilting operation timer 223db (T2) is set to 7900ms (Z2923 in Figure 341), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 38000ms, and the operation effective start time (T3) is set to 41500ms. is set, and the valid operation end time (T4) is set to 45900 ms. In this way, the execution operation of the tilting device 310 and the period during which the operation is valid are set in advance according to the variation type of the special symbol, and the operation is performed as time passes.

The tilting motion scenario table 222db includes the type of tilting motion scenario selected in the operation effect selection table 222da and origin detection motion tables A and B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the tilting motion scenario. A data table has been set for the settings.

FIG. 332(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the tilting motion scenario table 222db. The tilting motion scenario table 222db includes a tilting motion scenario A table 222db1, a tilting motion scenario B table 222db2, an origin detection motion A table 222db3, and an origin detection motion B table 222db4.

The tilting motion scenario A table 222db1 is a table in which the motion content in the tilting motion scenario A is defined, and can be selected when the variation pattern type is out of normal reach A or on normal reach A, and when the tilting device 310 is movable. operation data is stored. As described above, the tilting motion scenario A table 222db1 is set by lottery of the operation performance selection table 222da when the special symbol starts changing. FIG. 333(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting motion scenario A table 222db1. After the special symbols start changing, when the operation performance start time set in the operation performance selection table 222da is triggered, the operation of the tilting motion scenario A table 222db1 is started.

The operation of the tilting motion scenario A table 222db1 is to sequentially read the motion contents corresponding to the motion pointer from "1" for the required time corresponding to the elapse of the time of the tilting motion timer 223db (Z2953 in FIG. 343). ), the defined motion is performed until the motion pointer becomes "10" (tilting motion timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation performance start time is triggered (18000ms) after the special symbol starts changing, the motion data with the motion pointer being "1" (during 2100ms, 210 steps are moved in the backward direction) The release member 346 is rotated clockwise by the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344, and the second projecting portion 344c3 moves to the upper part of the release member 34 (see FIG. 30). (i.e., an operation in which the second projecting portion 344c3 is moved to the top of the release member 34 (see FIG. 30) without operating the rotating claw member 347), and becomes the cam removal position. Next, a standby operation is performed by executing the operation data whose operation pointer is "2" (stopped for 3000 ms). The motion data in which the motion pointer is "3" (moves 20 steps in the forward rotation direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the unlocking motion (the second projecting portion 344c3 rotates the release member 346 downward) is executed. , an operation of rotating the rotating claw member 347 to release the lock from the tilting device 320), the disc cam 344 is moved to the locking release position, and the tilting device 320 starts to rise.

Next, the motion data whose motion pointer is "4" (stops for 500ms) is executed, waits for the rise, and the motion data whose motion pointer is "5" (moves 50 steps in the forward rotation direction for 500ms). ) is executed, resulting in the position shown in FIG. 33, and the motion data with the motion pointer being "6" (50 steps of movement in the backward rotation direction for 500 ms) is executed, and the fanning motion is executed, resulting in the position shown in FIG. 32. The motion data where the motion pointer is "7" (moves 50 steps in the forward rotation direction for 500 ms) is executed and returns to the position shown in FIG. The movement in the backward rotation direction) is executed and the position shown in Fig. 33 is performed again, and the movement that is repeated twice from movement pointer ``4'' to ``8'' is regarded as a stirring movement, and the movement data with movement pointer ``9'' (for 1000 ms) is executed. (stop) is executed, and the stop is performed at the position shown in FIG. 32, and the operation pointer becomes "10" and the operation ends.

In this way, the operation of the tilting device 320 executed according to the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is such that the tilting device 320 is moved from the origin position to the highest position, and then the tilting device 320 is at the highest position. After performing the stirring operation, an operation of returning to the origin position is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 326, if the tilting device 320 is pressed and detected by the detection switch 324 for 3.5 seconds after the tilting device 320 starts rising, the detection is considered valid. The determination is made, and a specific preview performance (for example, a performance that notifies the expected degree of winning) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a sound effect matching the preview performance is also displayed from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 27. and the lamp lighting mode. After the tilting device 320 starts rising, if the player presses the tilting device 320 before the operation valid period (T5) of 3.5 seconds elapses, the tilting device 320 detects the origin. Before the return operation is performed by the operation A table 222db3, when the tilting device 320 is moved to the origin position by the pressing operation and is locked by the rotary claw member 347 and held at the origin position, the origin is detected. The operation based on the operation A table 222db3 is executed, and the disk cam 344 is moved to the initial position (origin position).

Note that if the tilting device 320 is held by the player in a raised position and the transmission gear 343b idles, the left side detection sensor 353L is turned ON, which determines the initial position and changes the position of the disc cam 344. A control operation is executed to return the to the origin position.

The tilting motion scenario B table 222db2 is a table in which the motion details in the tilting motion scenario B are defined, and stores motion data when the tilting device 310 moves when the variation pattern type is super reach A. As described above, the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2 is set by lottery of the operation performance selection table 222da when the special symbol starts changing. FIG. 333(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2. When the operation performance start time set in the operation performance selection table 222da is triggered after the special symbols start changing, the operation of the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2 is started.

The tilting motion scenario B table 222db2 sequentially reads the motion contents corresponding to the motion pointer from "1" for the required time corresponding to the elapse of the tilting motion timer 223db (Z2953 in FIG. 343). , the defined motion is performed until the motion pointer becomes "11" (tilting motion timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation performance start time is triggered (38000ms) after the special symbol starts changing, the motion data whose motion pointer is "1" (for 500ms, 50 steps are moved forward in the forward direction) movement) is executed, the lock is released, the movement data with the movement pointer "2" (stops for 3000ms) is executed, a standby is performed, and the movement data with the movement pointer "3" (stops for 200ms). 20 steps in the forward direction) is executed, the motion data with the motion pointer "4" (moves 20 steps in the backward direction for 200ms) is executed, and the motion data with the motion pointer "5" (moves in the backward direction) is executed. For 200ms, 20 steps are moved in the forward rotation direction) is executed, the motion data with the motion pointer being "6" (for 200ms, 20 steps are moved in the backward direction) is executed, and the motion pointer is "7". The motion data (moving 20 steps in the forward rotation direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the motion data with the motion pointer "8" (moving 20 steps in the backward rotation direction for 200 ms) is executed. The motion data where the motion pointer is "9" (moving 120 steps in the forward rotation direction for 1200 ms) is executed by repeating the motion of the pointer "3" to "8" three times as the stirring motion, and the position shown in FIG. 38 is executed. The operation data with the operation pointer set to "10" (stopped for 2000 ms) is executed, and the operation is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 38, and the operation pointer becomes "11" and the operation ends.

With this configuration, the tilting device 310 performs a fanning motion during the reach performance to prompt the player to perform an operation, and changes the fanning motion according to the type of variation, so that the tilting device 310 performs a fanning motion while the manipulation performance is being performed. In addition, by stopping the rising height (length) at different points, interest in the operation can be created, which can increase the interest of the game.

Note that in this control example, the type of tilting motion scenario is set in correspondence with the type of fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and tilting motion scenarios A and B are set depending on whether the judgment result is a hit or a miss. By allocating and setting the judgment value of the performance counter 223h, the selection rate may be set to be changed depending on the result of the judgment. With this configuration, for example, by executing a tilting motion scenario in which the probability of being selected is higher when the result of the judgment is a hit than when it is a loss, the player is informed of the result of the judgment. It can make you expect that it will be a hit.

In addition, as in the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2, a tilting motion scenario type is set in which the tilting motion is performed at the start of the motion, and then the tilting motion is moved to the origin position without raising to the highest position. Good too. By configuring in this way, for example, the tilting motion scenario B can be set to be more likely to be selected when the result of the determination is a hit, and when the result of the determination is wrong, the tilting motion scenario with only a fanning motion can be set. By setting it so that it is easy to be selected, it is possible to raise expectations for a jackpot by encouraging the selection.

The origin detection operation A table 222db3 stores the tilting device 310 at its original position (origin) when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 after the tilting device 310 performs the operation of the tilting operation scenario A. Operation data for this is stored.

FIG. 334(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222db3. Similar to the operation of the tilting motion scenario table, the motion data with the motion pointer set to "1" are sequentially performed until the motion pointer becomes "2" (the tilting motion timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the motion data for which the motion pointer is "1" (moves 190 steps in the forward rotation direction for 1900 ms) is executed, and the motion pointer becomes "2" and the motion ends.

The origin detection operation A table 222db3 is used when the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the valid operation period, and the tilting operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes). Or, if the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2961: No), set the value of the tilting operation timer 223db to 1900 ms and set 3 to the tilting operation status 223da based on the origin detection operation A table 222db3. By doing this (Z2959), in the performance back movement processing (FIG. 344, Z2911), the operation contents of the origin detection operation A table 222db3 are read (Z2974) until the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0, and the origin detection is performed. The return-to-origin operation is performed until the tilting operation timer 223db reaches 0 (Z2971: Yes) or the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No).

The origin detection operation B table 222db4 stores the tilting device 310 at its original position (origin) when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 after the tilting device 310 performs the operation of the tilting operation scenario B. Operation data for this is stored.

FIG. 334(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation B table 222db4. Similar to the operation of the tilting motion scenario table, the motion data with the motion pointer set to "1" are sequentially performed until the motion pointer becomes "2" (the tilting motion timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the motion data for which the motion pointer is "1" (moves 190 steps in the forward rotation direction for 1900 ms) is executed, and the motion pointer becomes "2" and the motion ends.

The origin detection operation B table 222db4 is used when the operation of the tilting operation scenario B table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the valid operation period, and the tilting operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes). , or when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2961: No). Based on the origin detection operation B table 222db4, by setting the value of the tilting operation timer 223db to 1900 ms and setting the tilting operation status 223da to 3 (Z2959), in the production return operation process (FIG. 344, Z2911), The operation contents of the origin detection operation B table 222db3 are read (Z2974) until the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0, and the origin is detected (Z2971: Yes) or the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No). ), the home return operation is performed.

The retry operation table 222dc stores operation data for repeatedly performing origin detection when the origin is not detected even though the origin detection operation is performed after the tilting device 310 performs the tilting operation scenario. has been done.

FIG. 334(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the retry operation table 222dc. Similar to the operation of the above-mentioned tilting motion scenario table, the retry motion table 222dc sequentially selects whether the motion pointer becomes "2" (the tilting motion timer 223db becomes 0) or not, starting with the motion data whose motion pointer is "1". The process continues until the origin is detected (Z2989: Yes).

Specifically, the retry operation table 222dc ends when the tilting operation timer 223db reaches 0 in the above-described origin detection operation (Z2973: No), sets the tilting operation status 223da to 4 (Z2975), In the retry operation process (Z2913) executed by setting the detection fluctuation counter 223dc to 3 (Z2976) and setting the detection check counter 223dd to 4 (Z2977), the special symbol fluctuation start timing (Z2981: Yes) , if the detection check counter 223dd is 1 or more (Z2982: Yes), 1 is subtracted (Z2983), and if the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), retry is performed based on the contents of the retry operation table. The operation time (900ms) is set in the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2985), the detection check counter 223dd is subtracted by 1 (Z2986), and if the value after the subtraction is 1 or more (Z2987: Yes), the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is Set to 3 (Z2988). Then, when the detection sensor 324 is not at the origin position (Z2989: No) and the tilting operation timer 223db is not 0 (Z2990: Yes), the corresponding operation content is read (Z2991), and the retry operation is performed using the tilting operation timer 223db. The process is continued until 223db becomes 0 or the detection sensor 324 reaches the origin position (Z2989: Yes). As shown in FIG. 327, the above operation is performed once every three times when the special symbol changes, and if the origin is not detected, it is performed up to four times.

The initial tilting operation table 222dd stores operation data for setting the initial operation of the tilting device 310 when the power is turned on.

FIG. 334(d) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the initial tilting operation table 222dd. In the tilting initial motion table 222dd, similarly to the tilting motion scenario table described above, the motion pointer becomes "2" and the tilting motion timer 223db is set to 0 (Z2931: Yes) in order from the motion data whose motion pointer is "1". This is continued until the origin is detected (Z2933: Yes).

Specifically, if the contents of the RAM are normal (Z2205: Yes) in the startup process (FIG. 335) executed when the power is turned on, the operation time (7200ms) is determined based on the initial tilting operation table 222dd. ) is set in the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2061), and the tilting operation status is set to 1 (Z2062), thereby starting the operation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 331, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third control example will be explained. FIG. 331 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third control example. In this second control example, with respect to the first control example described above, a tilting operation status 223da, a tilting operation timer 223db, a detection fluctuation counter 223dc, a detection check counter 223dd, a tilting operation flag 223de, and a press notification enable are set. The difference is that a timer 223df is added.

The tilting operation status 223da stores information for determining the operating state of the tilting device 310. The tilting operation status 223da is set to 1 (Z2062) when the initial operation setting of the tilting device 310 is performed in the start-up process (FIG. 335) executed when the power is turned on, and the tilting operation status 223da is set to the initial operation state.

The tilting operation status 223da determines the process to be executed according to the value of the tilting operation status 223da in the tilting device control process (Z2891) executed in the frame button input monitoring/production process 3 (Z2161). . Specifically, when the value of the tilting motion status 223d is "0" (Z2904: Yes), the operation performance setting process (Z2905) is executed, and the tilting motion is in a standby state waiting for the start of the operation. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "1" (Z2906: Yes), the initial tilting operation process (Z2907) is executed, and the initial tilting operation after the power is turned on is being executed. When the value of the tilting motion status 223d is "2" (Z2908: Yes), the process during operation performance (Z2909) is executed, and the tilting motion is in the state during the operation performance during special symbol fluctuation. When the value of the tilting motion status 223d is "3" (Z2910: Yes), the production return motion process (Z2911) is executed, and the tilting motion is in the process of returning after the scenario motion.

When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "4" (Z2912: Yes), a retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and the retry operation for detecting the origin of the tilting operation is being executed. If the value of the tilting operation status 223d is other than that (Z2912: No), the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "5" and the execution of this process ends, but the initial operation and return operation described above are not performed. This is an error state when the origin cannot be detected when the tilting operation is performed, but if an error state occurs, there will be no change in the tilting operation until the power is turned on again.

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905: FIG. 341), as described above, if the operation effect start time is triggered after the special symbol starts changing (Z2921: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 2. It is set (Z2922), and the tilting motion is in the state of operation performance during the special symbol fluctuation motion.

In the initial tilting operation process (Z2907: FIG. 342), the initial operation is set to 0 when the tilting operation timer 223db reaches 0 (Z2933: Yes) and when the origin is detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2933: Yes). Then, the tilting operation becomes a standby state, and when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2933: No), 5 is set and an error state occurs.

In the process during operation performance (Z2909: FIG. 343), when the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No), when the tilting operation flag is off (Z2957: No), and when the origin is detected by the detection sensor 324 ( Z2961: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and the tilting operation is in a standby state.

In the production back movement process (Z2911: FIG. 344), if the origin is detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: Yes), the tilting movement status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972), the tilting movement goes into a standby state, and this process end.

If the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2971: No) and the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 4, and the tilting operation is in the process of retrying. becomes.

In the retry operation process (Z2913: Figure 345), if the origin is detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2989: Yes) after the special symbol starts changing (Z2981: No), 0 is set in the tilting operation status 223da (Z2972 ), the tilting operation goes into a standby state, and if the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2989: No) and the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 5 ( Z2994), and the tilting operation becomes an error state.

The tilting operation timer 223db is a timer for counting the operation of the tilting device 310. When the power is turned on, the tilting operation timer 223db has an initial operation time set (Z2061). Each time the main process (FIG. 336) is executed, it is incremented by 1 and updated repeatedly.

In the standby state when the value of the tilting motion status is "0", an operation time is set according to the tilting motion scenario table (Z2923). When the value of the tilting operation status is "2" and the operation is being performed, the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No), and when the tilting operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes), the origin The time for the origin detection operation is set based on the detection operation table. When the retry operation is being executed when the value of the tilting operation status is "4", the retry operation time is set based on the contents of the retry operation table 222dc (Z2985).

The detection fluctuation counter 223dc is a counter that counts the number of fluctuations while the tilting device 310 executes a retry operation performed when the origin is not detected in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection fluctuation counter 223dc is configured to detect the tilting when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No) in the performance back movement processing (Z2911) that is executed when the value 223da of the tilting movement status is "3". When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 3 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is in the retry operation.

During the retry operation, if the detection check counter 223dd is not 0 (Z2982: Yes) at the timing of the start of variation of the special symbol (Z2981: Yes), it is determined that the retry operation remains, and the following determination process is performed. conduct. First, the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is subtracted by 1 (Z2983), and if the subtraction result is 0 (Z2984: No), it is determined that the fluctuation requires a retry operation, and the tilting operation timer is set based on the contents of the retry operation table. After the setting (Z2985) is performed, if the result of subtracting 1 from the detection check counter 223dd (Z2986) is not 0 (Z2987: Yes), it is assumed that the retry operation has not reached the specified number of times (maximum 4 times). , the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is set to 3 (Z2988).

The detection check counter 223dd is a counter that counts the number of times the tilting device 310 performs a retry operation when the origin is not detected in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection check counter 223dd detects the tilt when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No) in the performance back movement process (Z2911) that is executed when the value of the tilt movement status 223da is "3". When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), it is set to 4 (Z2976), and the tilting operation becomes a retry operation. Therefore, the retry operation is performed up to four times if the origin is not detected.

The tilting operation flag 223de indicates that when the tilting operation scenario A or the tilting operation scenario B is executed, the tilting device 320 is pressed down by the player and moved to the origin position during the valid operation period, and the rotating claw member is moved to the origin position. This is a flag indicating that it has been locked by 347. This tilting operation flag 223de is detected by the detection switch 324 when the tilting device 320 is pressed down during the valid operation period by the process Z2956 of the operation performance process (Z2909) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. is set to on when On the other hand, after the tilting operation flag 223de is determined to be on in the process of Z2957, the tilting operation status is set to 3, and after the origin return operation is executed, it is set to off (see Z2960).

The press notice valid timer 223df detects when the tilting device 320 is pressed down as a switch for production when the tilting device 320 is not moved upward (that is, when it is held at the origin position by the rotating claw member 347). This is a timer for determining a valid period for validly determining detection of the switch 324. This push-down notice valid timer 223df is activated based on the start timing of the valid period when a variation pattern is determined and a notice performance that uses the tilting device 320 as a switch for production is determined as a notice performance. Data corresponding to a predetermined validity period is stored. Incidentally, when data corresponding to the valid period is set in this push-down notice valid timer 223df (Z2877: see FIG. 337), the cam removal operation is executed. As a result, the sound of the cam being removed, the vibrations transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the player, etc. can create a sense of expectation that the tilting action scenario A table 222db1 will be executed. Further, the press notice valid timer 223df is updated by being decremented by 1 by press Z2873 (see FIG. 337).

<About control processing by the main controller in the fifth control example>
Next, control processing by the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 335 to 345. In this fifth control example, some processes of startup processing (Fig. 335) and main processing (Fig. 336) are added to the first control example, and frame button input monitoring/production processing (Z2107: Fig. 272) to frame button input monitoring/production processing 3 (Z2161: Figure 337), sensor input processing (Z2813: Figure 273) to sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: Figure 338), and retry processing during touch input (Z2860). : Fig. 339), tilting device control process (Z2891: Fig. 340), operation effect setting process (Fig. 341), tilting initial movement process (Z2907: Fig. 342), operation effect processing (Z2909: Fig. 343), effect back movement The difference is that processing (Z2911: Figure 344) and retry operation processing (Z2913: Figure 345) are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The startup process (FIG. 335) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 335. The start-up process in the fifth control example (FIG. 335) differs from the start-up process in the first control example (FIG. 257) in that processes Z2061 to Z2062 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the start-up process (FIG. 335) in this fifth control example, after executing the process Z2012 or the process Z2013, the initial tilting operation table 222de (see FIG. 334(d)) provided in the ROM 222 is Based on this, the tilting operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is set (Z2061). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is set to 1 (Z2062), and the main process (FIG. 336) to be described later is executed.

In this way, since the tilting operation status is set to 1 when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the tilting device 320 is executed by the tilting initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 342), which will be described later, when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the initial operation is executed and the game can be started with the player moved to the origin position. Further, although not shown in the figure, the disk cam 344 is operated by the initial operation and the left side detection sensor 353L is turned on, so that the step counter etc. are set to initial values, so that the drive motor 342 is activated. Control can be performed stably.

With reference to FIG. 336, the main processing (FIG. 336) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. In the main processing in the fifth control example (FIG. 336), the frame button input monitoring/performance processing (Z2107) is replaced with the frame button input monitoring/performance processing 3 (Z2161) in contrast to the main processing in the first control example (FIG. 258). ). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 337, frame button input monitoring/production processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 336) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example explain. FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 3 (Z2161).

In the frame button input monitoring/production processing 3 (Z2161: Figure 337), first, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is currently changing the special symbol for which execution of the press notice has been decided (setting the press notice). (Z2881). That is, it is determined whether execution of the press notification has been decided. If it is determined that the press notification is being set (Z2881: Yes), it is determined whether the press notification is valid (Z2882). That is, it is determined whether the press notice is being executed, and it is determined whether the press notice valid timer 223df is a value larger than 0. If it is determined that the press notice is valid (Z2882: Yes), the press notice validity timer 223df provided in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 and updated (Z2883). Next, the player presses the tilting device 320, and it is determined whether the detection switch 324 is on (Z2884). If it is determined that the tilting device 320 has been pressed (Z2884: Yes), a press preview mode command for display is set (Z2885), and the process moves to Z2890. In addition, in the process of Z2881, if the press notification is not being executed (Z2881: No), or in the process of Z2884, if it is determined that the button has not been pressed by the player (Z2884: No) , skips other processing and moves to Z2890 processing.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2882, if it is determined that the press notice is not valid (Z2882: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the press notice valid period, which is the start timing to execute the press notice ( Z2886). Note that the start timing of the press notice is determined by a start timer (not shown) set at the start of variation of the special symbol, and the value of the start timer (when updated to a specific value of "0").

If it is determined that it is the start timing of the valid period (Z2886: Yes), the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) determined as the value of the press notice valid timer 223df is set, and the cam release operation is performed for 2100 ms. The backward rotation operation of the drive motor 342 is set (Z2887). With this configuration, even if the tilting device 320 is pressed for advance notice that the tilting device 320 will not be moved upward, the cam release operation will always be performed, so that the player can expect that the upward effect will be executed.

Note that if it is not the start timing of the press notice validity period (Z2886: No), the process of Z2887 is skipped and the process of Z2888 is executed. Next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the press notice validity period (Z2888). Here, it is determined whether the value of the press notice validity period timer 223df is 0 or not. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the press notice validity period (Z2888: Yes), the value of the press notice validity timer 223df is reset and a backward rotation operation for 1500 ms is set as the origin return operation (Z2889). On the other hand, in the process of Z2888, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the validity period (Z2888: No), the process of Z2889 is skipped and the process of sensor input process 2 (Z2890) is executed.

Details of this sensor input processing 2 (Z2890) will be described later with reference to FIG. 338. Next, the tilting device control process (Z2891) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described later with reference to FIG. 340.

Referring to FIG. 338, sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338) in the fifth control example will be described. Sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: Figure 338) in the fifth control example does not execute the processes Z2826 to Z2829 in contrast to the sensor input processing (Z2813: Figure 273) in the first control example, and retries during touch input. The difference is that processing (Z2860) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The touch input retry process (Z2860) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 339. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the contents of the touch input retry process (Z2860).

In the touch input retry process (Z2860: FIG. 339), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is 4 (Z2861). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4 (Z2861: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2861: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is greater than 0 (Z2862). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2862: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2862: Yes), it is determined whether the detection sensor is detecting the origin (Z2863). If it is determined that the detection sensor is not detecting the origin (Z2863: No), the drive motor is set in the backward rotation direction by one step (Z2864), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection sensor is detecting the origin (Z2863: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2865), and this process ends.

The tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described with reference to FIG. 340. FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilting device control process (Z2891).

In the tilting device control process (Z2891: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2901). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2901: Yes), the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is subtracted by 1. Note that in the process of Z2901, if it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2901: No), the process of Z2902 is skipped and the process of Z2904 is executed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 0 (Z2904). When it is determined that the value of the tilting motion status 223da is 0 (Z2904), the operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and this process ends.

In this way, when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, if the tilting operation status indicating an error in returning to the origin of the tilting device 320 is "4", the retry operation for returning to the origin is executed. To make it easier to return the tilting device 320 to the origin by performing a retry operation for returning to the origin at a time when both hands are likely to be used (one hand is operating the firing handle, the other hand is operating the touch sensor 290). I can do it.

Here, with reference to FIG. 341, the operation effect setting process (Z2905), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (Z2905).

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905), it is determined whether the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921). If it is determined that the operation time has not reached the presentation start time (Z2921: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the operation performance start time has been reached (Z2921: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 2 (Z2922). Next, the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is set based on the tilting operation scenario table 222db provided in the ROM 222 (Z2923), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to OFF (Z2924), and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 340, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z2904 that the value of the tilting motion status 223da is not 0 (Z2904: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting motion status 223da is 1 (Z2906). If it is determined that the value of the tilting motion status 223da is 1 (Z2906: Yes), the tilting initial motion process (Z2907) is executed, and this process ends.

Referring to FIG. 342, the tilting initial operation process (Z2907), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial tilting operation process (Z2907).

In the initial tilting motion process (Z2907), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting motion timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2931). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2391: Yes), the operation contents of the initial tilting operation table 222de are read (Z2932: Yes), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z2931, if it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2933). If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2933: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2934), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2933: No), the tilting operation status is set to 5 (Z2935). Next, a tilting error A command is set as a display error command (Z2936), and this process ends.

In this way, when an error occurs when returning to the origin during the initial operation performed when the power is turned on, unlike during a game, by immediately displaying an error display (abnormality processing), it is possible to discover a malfunction in the tilting device 320 at an early stage. can.

Returning to FIG. 340, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2906, if it is determined that the value of the tilting motion status 223da is not 1 (Z2906: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting motion status 223da is 2 (Z2908). When it is determined that the value of the tilting motion status 223da is 2 (Z2908: Yes), the operation performance processing (Z2909) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 343, the operation performance process (Z2909), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation performance processing (Z2909).

In the operation performance processing (Z2909), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting action timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2951). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2951: Yes), it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223de provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2952). If it is determined that it is set to on (Z2952: Yes), this process ends. If it is determined that the tilting operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2952: No), the operation content corresponding to the tilting operation scenario table 222db is read out (Z2953). Next, it is determined whether the operation is valid (Z2945). If it is determined that the operation is not within the valid period (Z2954: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the operation is within the valid period (Z2954: Yes), it is determined whether or not a press is detected (Z2955). If it is determined that there is no press detection (Z2955), this process ends. If it is determined that a press has been detected (Z2955: Yes), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2956), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2951, if it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2951: No), it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223de is set to on (Z2957). If it is determined that the tilting operation flag 223de is set to on (Z2957: Yes), the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is set based on the origin detection operation B table 222dd provided in the ROM 222 ( Z2958). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 3 (Z2959), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to OFF (Z2960), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2957, if it is determined that the tilting operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2957: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2961). If the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2961: No), the above-described processes Z2958 to Z2960 are executed, and this process ends. Note that if it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2861: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 340, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2908, if it is determined that the value of the tilting motion status 223da is not 2 (Z2908: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting motion status 223da is 3 (Z2910). If it is determined that the value of the tilting motion status 223da is 3 (Z2910: Yes), a production back motion process (Z2911) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 344, the effect return operation process (Z2911), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the performance backtracking operation process (Z2911).

In the performance back movement process (Z2911), first, it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971). If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2971, if it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2971: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2973). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2973: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation B table 222dd is read (Z2974), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z2973, if it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2973: No), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 4 (Z2975). Next, the detection fluctuation counter 223dc provided in the RAM 223 is set to 3 (Z2976), the detection check counter 223dd is set to 4 (Z2977), and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 340, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2910, if it is determined that the value of the tilting motion status 223da is not 3 (Z2910: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting motion status 223da is 4 (Z2912). If it is determined that the value of the tilting motion status 223da is 4 (Z2912: Yes), a retry motion process (Z2913) is executed and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2912, if it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4 (Z2912), this process is directly ended.

Referring to FIG. 345, the retry operation process (Z2913), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the contents of the retry operation process (Z2913).

In the retry operation process (Z2913), first, it is determined whether it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981). If it is determined that it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2982). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2982: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2982: Yes), the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is subtracted by 1 (Z2983). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc changed by the calculation is greater than 0 (Z2984). If it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is greater than 0 (Z2984: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), the tilting operation timer 223db is set based on the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222dc provided in the ROM 222. (Z2985), and the value of the detection check counter 223dd is subtracted by 1 (Z2986). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd changed by the calculation is greater than 0 (Z2987). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2987: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2987, the value of the detection check counter 223dd sets the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc to 3, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2981, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2989). If it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2989: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2990). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2990: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation A table 222dc is read (Z2991), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in Z2990, if it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2990: No), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2992). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2992: Yes), this process ends. If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: No), a tilt error B command is set as a display error command (Z2993). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 5 (Z2994), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z2989, if it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2989: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is cleared (Z2995), and this process ends.

In addition, in the operation based on the tilting operation scenario A table in this control example, if the player presses down or presses down the tilting device 320 at the start of the operation, the rotating claw member 347 will immediately move even if the unlocking operation is performed. This causes a problem in that the tilting device 320 is locked and cannot be raised. To deal with this, the number of movable steps is set to 10 (forward rotation; required time 100 ms) as the movement data of the movement pointer 3 (see Figure 333(a)), which is the unlocking operation. By configuring the tilting device 320 to be maintained at the position shown in FIG. 31 and not performing a tilting operation, it is possible to configure the tilting device 320 to rise at the timing when the hand is released.

Furthermore, as another method, when the tilting operation status A is executed or when the unlocking operation is executed, the tilting device 320 is pressed down by the detection switch 324 or the top surface of the tilting device 320 is pressed down. Arrange the touch sensor, determine whether the touch sensor is on, and if it is on (if it is pressed), wait without performing any unlocking operation until it turns off. The unlocking operation may be performed at the timing when the lock is turned off. In addition, if the tilting device 320 is pressed down or if it is determined that the player is touching it, a display notification, audio, etc. will be displayed to prompt the player to take his hand off the tilting device 320 (to remove the obstruction to the player's upward movement). It may be configured so that the notification is made.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 346 to 370. In the first control example, when a jackpot A is executed in which the probability of winning or failing judgment is set to a low probability (electronic support is given up to 100 times) after a jackpot game, the even numbered symbols are displayed in a row, Although a jackpot A has been announced, in the sixth embodiment, when a jackpot A is executed, if a reserved ball that becomes a jackpot is stored among the reserved balls, the jackpot will be executed first. The stopping pattern of A and the performance during the jackpot are made to appear as if it were a jackpot B1 or jackpot B2, and the performance as if a high probability gaming state (probability variable gaming state) was set even after the jackpot game. This control example differs from the first control example in that it is executed. In addition, in the sixth control example, even when the third even-numbered symbol indicating jackpot A is displayed, it is actually a jackpot type in which a variable probability game state of jackpot B1 or B2 is set during the jackpot game. A plurality of promotion effects are set to notify the player, and at the start of a jackpot game, the type of promotion effect is determined by lottery, and the type of promotion effect to be executed thereafter is determined based on the execution content of the promotion effect (for example, whether or not there is promotion). This control example differs from the first control example in that the type of presentation is switched and set. Note that detailed explanations of the same points as in the first control example will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 346, an example of the stop display mode of the special symbol of the success/failure determination result of jackpot A in this control example will be described. In FIG. 346(a), the pre-reading result (pre-discrimination result) of the pending symbol h1 stored as the first pending ball is jackpot A, and the pending symbol h2 of the third pending ball displayed is This is an example showing a case where the prefetch result is also a jackpot A. In this case, when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h1 is executed, normally the even numbered symbols will be displayed in a row, but when the variation starts, the odd numbered symbols will be stopped and displayed. The display will be switched so that the That is, the same stop symbols as in the case where the special symbol variation resulting in the jackpot B1 is executed are displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 346(b), it suggests that a jackpot game will be executed in a short period of time, saying, "Super jackpot! Stay tuned for the next one!!" and a variable game state is set as if it were An announcement is made as if it were a jackpot. As a result, in reality, the reserved ball that becomes jackpot A is stored even when jackpot A is executed, so that even when jackpot A is executed, it is possible to perform an effect as if jackpot B1 was executed. This makes it possible for the player to feel that the rate at which the jackpot B1 is executed is higher than the designed value, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Referring to FIG. 347(a), the performance mode when the special symbol variation is executed in the time-saving gaming state (gaming state with low probability electric support) after the jackpot game in the example shown in FIG. 346 will be described. FIG. 347(a) shows the third game in the state where the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed in a state where the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot A is stored (reserved symbol h2). It is a figure showing an example of a display mode of pattern display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 347(a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the words "Super time in progress" are displayed when the game is in the variable probability game state even though it is in the time-saving game state. is displayed, and furthermore, the words "Jackpot expectation level is increasing" are displayed, indicating that the probability of success/failure determination is not actually set high, but that the expectation level is high. Thereby, the system is configured to suppress a problem that would significantly damage the trust of the players by giving false information to the players that is different from the actual information. In this way, the notification that is approximately similar to the variable probability gaming state can also be referred to as a pseudo notification mode.

FIG. 347(b) is an example showing a stop display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h2 that was reserved in FIG. 347(a). The reserved symbol h2 is the judgment result of the jackpot A, and since there is no reserved ball that will be a jackpot (either jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, or jackpot C) among the reserved balls, it is normal. In the same manner as above, the even-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed, and a notification indicating that the jackpot A is reached is executed.

FIG. 348(a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the time-saving gaming state is set after the jackpot game of jackpot A in the example shown in FIG. 347(b) is executed. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode. As shown in FIG. 348(a), the display mode indicating the time-saving game state is that the words "Chance (100 times)" are displayed and the time-saving game is displayed until the special symbol changes 100 times and stops. You will be notified that the game is set. Furthermore, each time the special symbol changes, the number (number of times) is decremented by 1 and displayed.

FIG. 348(b) is a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the jackpot game in jackpot B1 or jackpot B2 is executed. As a display mode suggesting that a variable probability gaming state is set, the words "Super time in progress (in variable probability)" are displayed to inform the player that the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, only a part of the display mode is different between the case where the time-saving gaming state is set with the reserved balls that will become a jackpot being stored and the case where the probability-variable gaming state is set. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the same character may be displayed (for example, only during super time). In addition, the game state is configured to be notified using the background color without displaying characters, and the time-saving game state is set in the variable probability game state and in the state where the reserved balls that will become jackpots are stored. , may be configured to be displayed in a similar color (for example, a red background color (probability variable gaming state), a pink background color (time-saving gaming state in a state where reserved balls that become jackpots are stored)). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think of the time-saving gaming state as if it were a variable probability gaming state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 349 and 350, the promotion effect executed during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be explained. FIG. 349(a) is an example of the display mode of the opening effect executed when the jackpot game is started. When the jackpot game is started, the words "Jackpot!! Start!!" are displayed until the specific prize opening 65a is opened to inform the player that the jackpot game has started.

FIG. 349(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in an over winning promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. The over-winning promotion performance is a condition for ending one round when 10 balls enter the specified winning hole 65a in one round, but based on the fact that 10 game balls enter the specified winning hole 65a, This is a performance in which a promotion performance is executed in which information regarding the jackpot type is notified based on the game ball winning a prize in a specific winning hole 65a during the period until the opening/closing door 65b is changed to the closed state.

In the over-winning promotion effect, the characters "Put the ball into the attacker and get the key!!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the user puts the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a (equivalent to the attacker) and gets the key. There is a display indicating that a symbol will be displayed (given to the player). Furthermore, by displaying the text "If you collect 11 keys, you have a chance to get a treasure chest!!", when you collect 11 keys, the promotion effect (over-winning promotion effect) shown by "Treasure Chest Chance!!" will be executed. The players are informed. Since one key is displayed each time a prize is won in the specific winning opening 65a, at the timing when 11 keys are displayed, it means that one over-winning has occurred. Therefore, when an over-win occurs, "Treasure Box Chance!!" will be executed. Here, in "Treasure Chest Chance!!", when the treasure box is empty and a treasure is displayed inside, the type of the jackpot game being executed is jackpot B2 or the above-mentioned jackpot ball is stored. The player is notified that the player has won a jackpot A (promoted) in the state where the player is in the game. Further, when no treasure is displayed in the treasure box, the type of jackpot game being executed is not notified. If a reserved ball that becomes a jackpot is not stored and the type of jackpot game that is being executed is jackpot A, the performance of notifying that the ball has been promoted is not executed. However, based on the fact that a reserved ball that becomes a jackpot is memorized during a jackpot game, a display mode (an effect in which a treasure is displayed in a treasure box) notifying that the player has been promoted is configured to be displayed. It's okay.

Next, with reference to FIG. 350, an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a mid-round promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described. FIG. 350(a) shows that when the mid-round promotion effect is selected, when a specific round (in this control example, the 5th round) comes, during the round game, "Promotion chance!! If you press the button and a school of fish appears, you will be lucky." !!” is displayed, it is suggested (notified) that a promotion performance will be executed during the round, and that information regarding the jackpot game type will be reported by pressing the frame button 22. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 350(b), the type of the jackpot game being executed is jackpot B2 or a jackpot in a state where the above-mentioned jackpot ball is stored. If A, a display mode in which a school of fish swims from the right to the left on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and it is announced that a high probability game state of "Probability GET!!" will be set after the jackpot game. be done. In addition, in the case of a jackpot A in a state where the reserved ball that becomes a jackpot is stored as described above, the words "DEFINITELY GET GET!!" are displayed to the player as if the probability-variable gaming state is set. Is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 351, an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described. FIG. 350(a) is executed after the jackpot game ends (the 16th round jackpot round ends (the closing condition for the specific winning opening 65a in the 16th round (10 balls won or 30 seconds elapse) is met)). This is an example of a display mode in a normal ending effect indicating the end of a jackpot game.

On the other hand, FIG. 351(b) is an example of a display mode in the ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. When the ending promotion performance is selected, at the end of the jackpot game (the jackpot round of the 16th round has ended (the conditions for closing the specific prize opening 65a of the 16th round (10 balls won or 30 seconds elapsed))) Later, during the period in which the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game to be executed is being executed, the words "LUCY!! Super chance time!!" are displayed, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed from the left to the right. A special display mode in which a school of fish (a school of fish) swims is displayed (a production mode different from the normal mode), and after a jackpot game, the probability change game state or the above-mentioned time-saving game state with the reserved ball that will become a jackpot stored is memorized. A display mode that suggests that is set is displayed.

<About the electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 352 and 353, control processing by the main control device 110 in this sixth control example will be described.

The ROM of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 352(a). This sixth control example differs from the first control example in that a promotion lottery table 222df is added. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the promotion lottery table 222df will be explained with reference to FIG. 352(b). FIG. 352(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this promotion lottery table 222df. The promotion lottery table 222df determines whether or not to notify promotion as an over-win promotion performance based on the value of the performance counter 223h acquired based on the occurrence of over-win to the specific winning hole 65a during the round. This is a lottery table for. Specifically, when the jackpot game type being executed is jackpot B2 or the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is on, which indicates that jackpot A is executed as if jackpot B2 was executed to the player. , if the value of the performance counter 223h is one of "0 to 59", a promotion performance indicating that the player has been promoted (in this control example, a performance in which a treasure is displayed in a treasure box) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 353, the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 353 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. In the 6th control example, with respect to the 1st control example, the winning fluctuation flag 223dg, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh, the big winning counter 223di, the promoted flag 223dj, the promoted performance type storage area 223dk, and the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm are set respectively. They differ in that they are added. Detailed descriptions of the same configurations as in the first control example will be omitted.

The winning change flag 223dg is a flag for determining that the special symbol change that results in a jackpot A is being executed without a reserved ball that results in a jackpot being stored. When this hit fluctuation flag 223dg is on, if the special symbol fluctuation display can be replaced at the timing when the pending ball that becomes a jackpot is newly stored by the winning command, the odd numbered symbol Processing for switching to a pattern is executed. Thereby, even if there is a change in the special symbol that results in a jackpot A, the player can be made to think that it is a jackpot B1.

The stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is used to win the replacement lottery executed with a predetermined probability if a reserved ball that becomes a jackpot is already stored when starting the variation of the special symbol that becomes a jackpot A. This is a flag for instructing to switch the stop symbol to an odd numbered double eye symbol. Based on the fact that this stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is on, when the special symbol starts changing, the odd numbered symbol is switched and set.

The big prize counter 223dj is a counter for counting the number of prizes won in the specific winning hole 65a during one round in the big winning game.

The promoted flag 223dj is a flag indicating that a promoted performance (a performance in which a treasure is displayed from a treasure box) has been executed in an over-win promotion performance executed during a jackpot game. With this flag, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the promotion effect is executed again even after the promotion effect has been executed.

The promotion performance type storage area 223dk is a storage area in which the type of promotion performance to be executed during the jackpot game is determined when the jackpot game is executed, and the type data of the determined promotion performance is stored.

The pseudo-probability variation flag 223dm causes the stop symbol of the special symbol to stop at the odd numbered symbol when the variation of the special symbol that results in jackpot A is started, and the reserved balls that become the jackpot are already stored. This is a flag indicating that the replacement lottery that is controlled to be displayed has been unsuccessful. A promotion performance is performed during the jackpot game, or a performance is performed as if the time-saving game state set after the jackpot game is set to a variable probability game state (see FIG. 347(a)).

<About control processing by the main controller in the sixth control example>
With reference to FIG. 354, the control processing by the main controller in this sixth control example will be described. The sixth control example is different from the first control example in that the jackpot control process (Z1004: FIG. 256) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 354). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 354, the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 354) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth control example will be described. The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004) in the sixth control example is different from the jackpot control process (Z1006: FIG. 256) in the first control example in that processes Z1120 and Z1121 are added. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z1110, if it is not the timing to end the jackpot (Z1110: No), it is determined whether a ball has entered the jackpot (Z1120). If there is a ball entering (Z1120: Yes), a ball entering command is set (Z1121) and the process ends. Note that if it is determined in the process of Z1120 that there is no incoming ball (Z1120: No), this process is directly ended. With this ball entering command, the voice lamp control device 113 can also determine the number of game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a during the round, and it is also possible to determine whether or not the player has won an over-win.

<About control processing by the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example>
Control processing by the audio lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 366. In this sixth control example, for the first control example, command determination processing (Z2113: Figure 259) is changed to command determination processing 3 (Z2113: Figure 356), and fluctuation pattern reception processing (Z2202: Figure 260) is changed to fluctuation pattern reception. Process 2 (Z2240: Figure 355), winning command reception process (Z2209: Figure 266), winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: Figure 358), variable display setting process (Z2114: Figure 269), variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) : Figure 365), frame button input monitoring/production processing (Z2107: Figure 272) has been changed to frame button input monitoring/production processing 4 (Z2107: Figure 366), and stop symbol switching processing (Z2450: Figure 357), Stop symbol change process (Z2460: Figure 359), Jackpot related command reception process (Z2280: Figure 359), Opening process (Z2282: Figure 360), Big winning ball process (Z2284: Figure 362), Round process (Z2286: Figure 360) 363) and ending processing (Z2288: Figure 364) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 355, command determination processing 3 (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (Z2113). Command determination processing 3 (Z2113) in the sixth control example is different from the command determination processing (Z2113) in the first control example by adding processes Z2279 and Z2280, and by changing processes Z2240 and Z2270. There is a difference.

In the process of Z2208, if it is determined that a special symbol winning command has not been received from the main control device 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main control device 110 ( Z2279). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 360. On the other hand, in the process of Z2279, if it is determined that no jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

With reference to FIG. 355, the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 355), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 354) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the contents of variable pattern reception processing 2 (Z2240). The variation pattern reception process 2 in the sixth control example differs from the variation pattern reception process in the first control example in that processes Z2430, Z2431, and Z2450 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of Z2226, it is determined whether there is a change in the gaming state (Z2430). Here, the gaming state is configured to be attached to a variable pattern command and output from the main controller 110. The gaming states are set to a low probability gaming state without electricity support (normal gaming state), a variable probability gaming state (with electricity support), and a time saving gaming state (gaming state with low probability electricity support). If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (Z2430: Yes), the corresponding gaming state is set in the background mode storage area 223i, a display state command is set (Z2431), and the process of Z2227 is executed. . On the other hand, in the process of Z2430, if there is no change in the gaming state (Z2430: No), the process of Z2431 described above is not executed and the process directly proceeds to the process of Z2227.

Referring to FIG. 357, regarding the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357) which is one process in the variation pattern reception process 2 (FIG. 356) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example explain. FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol switching process (Z2450).

In the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357), first, it is determined whether the current variation is a variation of jackpot A (Z2451). If it is determined that it is not a change in jackpot A (Z2451: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current change is a change in jackpot A (Z2451: Yes), it is determined whether there is another win in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452). If it is determined that there is another win (Z2452: Yes), the value of the performance counter 223h is acquired and a replacement lottery is executed (Z2453).

After executing the process of Z2453, it is determined whether the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454). If it is determined that the replacement lottery has not been won (Z2454: No), the pseudo-probability variable flag 223dm provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2455), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454: Yes), the stop symbol switching flag is set to ON (Z2456), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z2452, if it is determined that there are no other wins in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452: No), the winning fluctuating flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2457), and this process ends. .

In this way, if a reserved ball that becomes a jackpot is stored at the time when the change of the special symbol that becomes jackpot A starts, a lottery (discrimination) is performed to determine whether to replace the stopped symbol, and if it is replaced, a lottery ( If the determination is made, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh indicating that symbol replacement is to be executed is set to ON. On the other hand, if you are unsuccessful in the replacement lottery, the game stops and displays an even number of squares, starts a jackpot game, performs a promotion effect during the jackpot game, or checks whether the game is in a fixed game state after the jackpot game. A special notification such as this will be made.

Referring to FIG. 358, winning command reception processing 2 (Z2270: FIG. 358) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. The winning command reception process 2 (Z2270) in the sixth control example is different from the winning command reception process (Z2209: FIG. 266) in the first control example in that a stop symbol change process (Z2460) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 359, the stop symbol change process (Z2470), which is one process in the winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example, will be explained. do. FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol change process (Z2470).

In the stop symbol change process (Z2460: FIG. 359), first, it is determined whether the winning fluctuating flag 223dg provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (Z2461). If it is determined that the winning fluctuating flag 223dg is not on (that is, off) (Z2461: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning fluctuating flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2461: Yes), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a jackpot (Z2462). If it is determined that the received winning information command is not a jackpot (Z2642: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received winning information command is a jackpot (Z2462: Yes), the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2463). After executing the process of Z2463, it is determined whether it is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464). If it is determined that it is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: Yes), a display symbol replacement command is set (Z2465), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2464, if it is determined that the period is not a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: No), the process of Z2465 is not executed and the process ends.

In this way, even if the reserved ball that will become a jackpot is not stored at the time when the special symbol that becomes jackpot A starts to fluctuate, the reserved ball that will become a jackpot will be new during the subsequent fluctuation (during the fluctuation). If it is stored in the special symbol high-speed fluctuation period, the replacement of the stopped symbol (replacement of odd numbered symbols to squares) is executed. In this way, since it is limited to the period of high-speed fluctuation, it is possible to perform replacement without any discomfort.

Note that even if the high-speed fluctuation period has ended, the stopped symbols may be controlled to be replaced by performing effects such as sliding.

Referring to FIG. 360, the jackpot related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360) which is one process in the command determination process 3 (Z2113: FIG. 356) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example ) will be explained. FIG. 360 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related command reception process (Z2280).

In the jackpot related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360), first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (Z2281). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (Z2281: Yes), opening processing (Z2282) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the opening process (Z2282) will be described later with reference to FIG. 360.

Here, with reference to FIG. 361, the opening process (Z2282: Figure 360) which is one process in the jackpot related command reception process (Z2280: Figure 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. 361) will be explained. FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening process (Z2282).

In the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 361), first, the value of the performance counter 223h is acquired (Z2291). Next, based on the value of the performance counter 223h acquired in the process of Z2291, a promotion performance type is selected from the promotion lottery table 222df provided in the ROM 222 (Z2292). Next, an opening performance corresponding to the promotion performance type selected in the process of Z2292 is set by lottery (Z2293). Next, a display opening command corresponding to the opening effect set in the process of Z2293 is set (Z2294), and the process moves to the process of Z2295.

After executing the process of Z2294, it is determined whether the pseudo-probability variable flag 223dm is set to on (Z2295). If it is determined that the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set on (Z2295: Yes), it is determined whether there is a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296). If it is determined that there is a jackpot (Z2296: Yes), the gaming state is set to jackpot (Z2297), a display state command is set (Z2300), and this processing is ended. In the process of Z2295, if it is determined that Z2295 is off (Z2295: No), the process of Z2296 is skipped and the process moves to the process of Z2297. On the other hand, in the process of Z2296, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296: No), the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set to off (Z2298), and the gaming state is changed to the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm. The setting is made during the jackpot game which is in the off state (Z2299), the process of Z2300 mentioned above is executed, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 360, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2281, if it is determined that an opening command has not been received (Z2281: No), it is determined whether a ball entry command has been received (Z2283). If it is determined that a ball entry command has been received (Z2283: Yes), a big winning ball entry process (Z2284) is executed and the process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 362, the big winning ball processing ( Z2284) will be explained. FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big winning ball processing (Z2284).

In the big winning ball processing (Z2284: FIG. 362), first, the value of the big winning counter 223di provided in the RAM 223 is incremented by 1 (Z2311). Next, it is determined whether the promotion performance type is over winning (Z2312). When it is determined that the promotion performance type is not an over-win (Z2312: No), a big win command for display indicating the value of the big win counter 223di is set (Z2313), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion performance type is over winning (Z2312: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the big winning counter 223di is greater than 10 (Z2314). If it is determined that the value of the big winning counter 223di is smaller than 10 (Z2314: No), a big winning command for display indicating the value of the big winning counter 223di corresponding to the over winning presentation is set (Z2315), This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the big winning counter 223di is larger than 10 (Z2314: Yes), the value of the production counter 223h is acquired and the promotion lottery table 222df is generated based on the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm or the jackpot type. Then, a promotion lottery is executed (Z2316).

After executing the process of Z2316, it is determined whether the promotion performance has been won (Z2317). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z2317: Yes), a display grand prize command indicating the value of the grand prize counter 223di and the winning of the promotion effect is set (Z2318), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z2317: No), a display grand prize command indicating the discrepancy between the value of the grand prize counter 223di and the promotion effect is set (Z2319), and this process is executed. finish.

Returning to FIG. 360, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2283, if it is determined that a ball entry command has not been received (Z2283: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (Z2285). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (Z2285: Yes), round processing (Z2286) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 363, regarding the round process (Z2286) which is one process in the jackpot related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round process (Z2286).

In the round process (Z2286: FIG. 363), first, it is determined whether the promotion performance type is over-winning (Z2331). If it is determined that the promotion performance type is not an over-winning (Z2331: No), it is determined whether the promotion performance type is an ending (Z2332). If it is determined that the promotion performance type is not an ending (Z2332: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333). If it is determined that the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333: Yes), a display round command corresponding to the jackpot type or pseudo probability change flag 223dm is set (Z2334), and a SW valid time counter 223k corresponding to the round effect is set. A value corresponding to is set (Z2335), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2331 that the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2331: Yes), or if it is determined that the promotion effect type is ending in the process of Z2332 (Z2332 : Yes), or if it is determined in the process of Z2333 that the number of rounds is not 12R (Z2333: No), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (Z2336), and this process ends. .

Returning to FIG. 360, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2285, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z2285: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (Z2287). When the ending command is received (Z2288: Yes), the ending process (Z2288) is executed and this process ends. Details of the ending process (Z2288) will be described later with reference to FIG. 364. On the other hand, in the process of Z2287, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (Z2287: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (Z2289), and this process ends.

Referring to FIG. 364, regarding the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 364) which is one process in the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example explain. FIG. 364 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (Z2288).

In the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 364), first, it is determined whether the type of promotion effect is an ending (Z2371). If it is determined that the promoted performance type is not an ending (Z2371: No), it is determined whether the promoted flag 223dj provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (Z2372). If it is determined that the promoted flag 223dj is set to OFF (Z2372: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot B2 (Z2373). If the current jackpot type is jackpot B2 (Z2373: Yes), a display ending command indicating promotion is set (Z2375). On the other hand, in the process of Z2373, if it is determined that the jackpot type is other than jackpot B2 (Z2373: No), it is determined whether the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set to on (Z2374). If the pseudo probability variable flag 223dm is set to off (Z2374: No), a display ending command corresponding to the current jackpot type is set (Z2376). Note that in the process of Z2372, if it is determined that the promoted flag 223dj is set to on (Z2372: Yes), the process of Z2376 described above is executed. On the other hand, in the process of Z2374, if it is determined that the pseudo-probability variable flag 223dm is set on (Z2374: Yes), the process of Z2375 described above is executed. After executing the process of Z2375 or Z2376, the gaming state is set at the end of the jackpot (Z2377), a display state command is set (Z2378), and this process ends.

In this way, in this control example, the type of promotion performance is determined at the execution timing of the jackpot game. Then, if an over winning promotion effect has been determined, a determination is made as to whether or not the details of the promotion have been announced through the over winning promotion effect during the jackpot game, and if not, an ending promotion effect or an in-round promotion effect is performed. Processing to switch to is executed.

Thereby, even if the over winning promotion effect is determined, even if the frequency of balls entering the specific winning hole 65a is low, the promotion effect can be executed by switching to a different promotion effect.

With reference to FIG. 365, the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing the contents of variable display setting processing 2 (Z2114). In the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) in the sixth control example, the processes in Z2508 and Z2509 are not executed, and the processes in Z2511 to Z2515 are The difference is that . Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of Z2507, it is determined whether the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to on (Z2511). If it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to off (Z2511: No), the extracted stop type is set as is (Z2512), the stop type command for display is set (Z2513), This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2511, if it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511: Yes), a stop type is set in which the odd jackpot symbol is the stop symbol (Z2514). Next, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to OFF (Z2515), the process of Z2513 mentioned above is executed, and this process ends.

Referring to FIG. 366, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 4 (Z2107: FIG. 366) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 366 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 4 (Z2107). The frame button input monitoring/production process 4 (Z2107) in the sixth control example is different from the frame button input monitoring/production process (Z2107: FIG. 272) in the first control example without executing the processes Z2808 to Z2810. , Z2830, Z2831, and Z2840 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the process of Z2807, if it is determined that the frame button has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether the effect is being set (Z2830). If it is determined that the effect is being set (Z2830: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the set effect is set (Z2831), and sensor input processing is executed (Z2813). After executing the sensor input process, other SW processes are executed (Z2840), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2830 that the effect is not being set (Z2830: No), the processing of Z2803 to 2804 described above is executed, and the sensor input processing (Z2813) and other SW processing (Z2840) are executed. Execute and end this process.

<About control processing by the display control device in the sixth control example>
Next, control processing by the display control device 114 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 367 to 370. This sixth control example differs from the first control example in that the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 277) is changed to command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367). Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 367, command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) will be described. FIG. 367 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (Z3302). Command determination processing 2 (Z3302) in the sixth control example differs from the command determination processing (Z3302: FIG. 277) in the first control example in that processes Z3430 to Z3435 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z3408, if it is determined that there is no preview display command for display (Z3408: No), it is determined whether there is a symbol replacement command for display (Z3430). If it is determined that there is a display symbol replacement command (Z3430: Yes), a symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) is executed.

Here, the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) will be explained with reference to FIG. 368(a). FIG. 368(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431).

In the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431), first, the stop type table of the odd jackpot symbol is replaced and set (Z3441). Next, the stop type table and the stop symbol counter are compared to set the stop symbol (Z3442). Next, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the set stop symbol is set to ON (Z3443), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 367, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z3430, if it is determined that there is no display symbol replacement command (Z3430: No), it is determined whether there is a display status command (Z3432). If it is determined that there is a display status command (Z3432: Yes), a game status setting process (Z3433) is executed.

Here, the gaming state setting process (Z3433) will be explained with reference to FIG. 368(b). FIG. 368(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the gaming state setting process (Z3433).

In the game state setting process (Z3433), first, the game state indicated by the command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3451). Next, in the process of Z3451, a background color corresponding to the gaming state set in the background mode storage area 223i is set in the display data table (Z3452), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 367, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z3432, if it is determined that there is no display status command (Z3432: No), it is determined whether there is a display jackpot related command (Z3434). If it is determined that there is a jackpot-related command for display (Z3434: Yes), a jackpot-related display process (Z3435) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 369, the jackpot related display process (Z3435) will be described. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related display process (Z3435).

In the jackpot related display process (Z3435), first, it is determined whether a display opening command has been received (Z3461). If it is determined that a display opening command has been received (Z3461: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the opening corresponding to the command is set (Z3462), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the display grand prize command has not been received (Z3461: No), it is determined whether the display grand prize command has been received (Z3463). If it is determined that the display big win command has been received (Z3463: Yes), the big win process (Z3464) is executed and this process ends. Details of the big winning process (Z3464) will be described later with reference to FIG. 369.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3463, if it is determined that the display big winning command has not been received (Z3463: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds command has been received (Z3465). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (Z3465: Yes), a display data table for displaying rounds corresponding to the number of rounds of the command is set, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z3465, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z3465: No), it is determined whether a display promotion round command has been received (Z3467). If it is determined that a promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467: Yes), a display data table of a promotion round performance of the type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3468), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3467, if it is determined that the promotion round command for display has not been received (Z3467: No), it is determined whether the ending command for display has been received (Z3469). If it is determined that a display ending command has been received (Z3469: Yes), a display data table of the ending type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3470), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z3469, if it is determined that the display ending command has not been received (Z3469: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (Z3471), and this process ends.

Referring to FIG. 370, the big winning process (Z3464: FIG. 370), which is one process in the jackpot related display process (Z3435: FIG. 369), will be described. FIG. 370 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big winning process (Z3464).

In the big winning process (Z3464), first, in the process Z3463 of the big winning related display process (Z3435: FIG. 369), it is determined whether the received big winning command for display has won the promotion effect (Z3480). If it is determined that the promotion performance has been won (Z3480: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the winning performance and the number of prizes indicated by the received command is set (Z3481), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion performance has not been won (Z3480: No), it is determined whether the received command is a failure of the promotion performance (Z3482). If it is determined that the received command is a failure of the promotion effect (Z3482: Yes), a display data table of the number of wins indicated by the command and over-wins corresponding to the failure effect is set (Z3483), and this process is executed. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3482, if it is determined that the received command is not a promotion effect (Z3482: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command corresponding to an over winning effect (Z3484). If the received command is determined to be a command corresponding to the over winning effect (Z3484: Yes), a display data table of over winnings corresponding to the number of winnings indicated by the command is set (Z3485), and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of Z3484, if it is determined that the received command is not a command corresponding to the over winning effect (Z3484: No), it is determined whether the number of winnings indicated by the number of received commands is greater than 10 ( Z3486: No). If it is determined that the number of winnings is greater than 10 (Z3486: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the normal over winning presentation is set (Z3487), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z3486, if it is determined that the number of winnings indicated by the number of received commands is less than 10 (Z3486), this process is directly ended.

<Seventh control example>
Next, a seventh control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 371 to 379. In the first control example, there is a winning slot that triggers a lottery (variation) based on a first special symbol, and a lottery based on a second special symbol that is more likely to result in a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol. In addition to the prize opening that triggers the (variation), and the distribution device 700 that alternately puts balls into prizes, the electric accessory 640a is distributed if the second special symbol or normal symbol is won for a long time as a result of the determination of the validity of the symbol. It was configured to be open for a long period of time (2 seconds) to make it easier for balls to enter the second winning hole 640. When the long winning of the normal symbol is won, this effect is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, thereby prompting the player to win the ball into the second prize opening 640. It was configured to encourage players to play games (see FIG. 207).

In addition, in the second control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be controlled so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640, and during the normal state When the second special symbol starts to change, a special effect (see FIG. 291(b)) is executed to provide a special feeling to the player. Furthermore, in the second control example, the special effect is not executed for a predetermined period (5 variations of special symbols) after the end of the time saving state, even if the normal state is set as the gaming state. It was composed of As a result, when the predetermined number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol (maximum 4 balls) are secured (while the reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol secured during the time saving state are left), the execution is executed when the time saving state ends. It is configured such that the above-mentioned special effect is not executed in the second special symbol variation. This makes it possible to maintain the special feeling of the special performance.

On the other hand, in this seventh control example, when a winning result is won for a long time as a result of the normal symbol lottery, the game This control example differs from the first control example in that it is configured to execute a performance (long-time open performance) that suggests to the player that he or she has won a long-time winning lottery in a normal symbol lottery.

Further, this control example differs from the first control example in that the performance mode of the long-time open performance is configured to vary depending on the timing of winning the long-time winning result as a result of the normal symbol lottery. Note that detailed explanations of the same points as in each control example described above will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 371, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 371 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 371, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example causes the balls to flow down to the left side area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80, in contrast to the first control example described above. When playing a game (left-handed game), a character imitating a "fish" forms the surface of the game board 13 (or the surface of the game board 13 If the member is made of highly transparent acrylic resin, it is decorated (arranged) inside the game board 13 so that the player can easily see the guide display mode ZR1.

In addition, when playing a game (right-handed game) in which a ball is caused to flow down to the right side area (right side area) of the variable display unit 80, a "turtle" is used as a guide display mode ZR2 that serves as a guide for the position where the ball is to be launched. A character imitating a character is decorated (arranged) on the surface of the game board 13 (or inside the game board 13 if the member forming the surface of the game board 13 is made of highly transparent acrylic resin), and the The guide display mode ZR1 is configured to be easily visible.

With this configuration, the player can easily understand where on the game board 13 to aim the ball at to execute a right-handed game or a left-handed game. In addition, by decorating the surface of the game board 13 with characters (fish, turtles) for guiding right-handed games and left-handed games, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can show the player the game direction. When performing a performance (guidance performance) that guides a player (right-handed game or left-handed game), it is possible to perform a performance that is easy for the player to visually understand.

In addition, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example has an area (electric accessory If 640a is in the opening operation, the regulation nail ZK1 is planted so that the rate at which the ball flows down the second winning opening 640 (the winning area) is low. On the other hand, the difference is that the nails are installed so that when a right-handed game is played, the percentage of balls passing through the opening 710 of the distribution device 700 is reduced. With this configuration, a left-handed game (first game) that aims at the sorting device 700 and fluctuates (lotteries) the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and a left-handed game (first game) that targets the second prize opening 640 and 2. A right-handed game (second game) in which only the special symbols are varied (lottery) can be provided to the player.

Note that, similarly to the first control example described above, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is in a state where it is difficult to open, so the player inevitably If the player typically plays a left-handed game and the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a is in a state where it is easy to open, so the player will inevitably play a right-handed game. In addition, for example, even if the time saving state is set as the gaming state, if the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol has reached the upper limit (4 balls), no more right-handed games are allowed. Even if it were, it is not possible to acquire the reservation of the special symbol (the right to draw (fluctuate) the special symbol), so it is also possible to perform a left-handed game and play a game in which the reserved ball of the first special symbol is acquired.

Next, with reference to FIG. 372(a), in the present seventh control example, the effect mode displayed during the normal symbol fluctuation in the case where a winning is won after a long time of the normal symbol will be explained. FIG. 372(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode (long open performance) of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal symbol fluctuation where a winning is won in a long time. Note that the same elements as in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 372(a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "It will open soon" is displayed as a production (long opening production) suggesting that the long winning of the normal symbol has been won. are displayed, and an opening object mode Za2 imitating the electric accessory 640a to be opened and a guidance display mode Za1 imitating a "turtle" indicating the direction of play to be instructed to the player are displayed. As a result, the electric accessory 640a is opened to the player, so that the player can easily visually understand that the player is to play a right-handed game.

Further, when the long open performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. In addition, in this seventh control example, when the long opening performance is executed, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3, but instead of this configuration, for example, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. A determining means for determining whether the lottery result of the special symbol change is a lottery result advantageous to the player (big hit, small win, etc.), and a long opening effect and a third symbol based on the determination result of the determining means. A priority display determining means for determining which of the variable effects should be displayed with priority, and a display control means for controlling the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on the determination result of the priority display determining means. It may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give priority to displaying effects for showing game results that are advantageous to the player, and therefore it is possible to provide games that are easy for the player to understand.

In the above example, the effects determined to be displayed with priority (priority effects) are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the effects determined not to be displayed with priority (non-priority effects) are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. It is sufficient to display it in the reduced display area Za3, but in addition to that, for example, by preparing multiple reduced display areas with different areas, the non-priority display area can be displayed according to the game result indicated by the effect that has been determined to be a non-priority effect. It may be configured to vary the size of the area in which the effects are displayed. Furthermore, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured not to display the performance display that has been determined to be a non-priority performance.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example, a configuration is shown in which the display area of each performance (variable performance, long open performance) is varied based on the lottery result of the special symbol that is changing and the lottery result of the normal symbol that is fluctuating. In addition to that, for example, a reserved ball number determining means for determining whether the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) or more is provided, and based on the determination result of the reserved ball number determining means. The display area of the long open effect may be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 372(b), the production mode during a long winning game with normal symbols (during long opening) will be explained. FIG. 372(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during a long winning (long opening performance). Note that the same elements as in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 372(b), the word "OPEN" indicating that the long opening is currently in progress is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the opening object is modeled after the electric accessory 640a in the opening operation. Aspect Za2 is displayed in a display manner indicating an open state. Further, similarly to FIG. 372(a), a guidance display mode Za1 imitating a "turtle" is displayed to indicate the game direction to be instructed to the player, and a third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 373, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the long open performance is regulated will be explained. FIG. 373 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during a long winning period, when the long open performance is regulated. Note that the same elements as in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, in this seventh control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the long opening performance described above with reference to FIG. In a state in which it is difficult to get a ball into the second winning hole 640), when it becomes easier to get a ball into the second winning hole 640 (when winning a long time winning of the normal symbol), a state advantageous to the player (the first It is configured to reliably notify the player of a state in which it is easier to perform a variation (lottery) of the second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the special symbol.

In this case, in the normal state immediately after the time saving state ends, for example, in the state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit number (4), the normal symbol Even if a long winning is won, the long opening effect described above will be executed. In this way, in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit, even if the electric accessory 640a is opened long and multiple balls are entered into the second ball entrance 640, new reserved balls will be acquired. Therefore, there was a problem in that it was not possible to provide the player with the special feeling of a long open performance.

Therefore, in this seventh control example, for a predetermined period after the end of the time saving state (period until the special symbol variation is executed 5 times), even if the winning is won by the long time winning of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned It is configured so that the long open performance is not executed (the performance under the long open performance regulation is executed). Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the execution of the long open performance.

As shown in FIG. 373, in a state where the long open effect is regulated, the long open effect shown in FIG. Is displayed. Then, a guide display mode Za1 imitating a "fish" indicating a right-handed game is displayed as a game direction to be instructed to the player. In this way, even if you win a regular symbol for a long time in a state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the timing will be changed within a predetermined period (the special symbol changes 5 times after the end of the time saving state). By preventing the long opening performance from being executed within the period (period until execution), it is possible to reliably prevent the long opening performance from being provided to the player. can. In addition, immediately after the time-saving state in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is the main one ends, a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol are acquired again, so that the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is executed excessively. It is possible to prevent it from being put away.

In addition, in this control example, in order to suppress the long release performance from being executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is at the upper limit (4 balls), the period for regulating the long release performance (regulation period) is set. , after the end of the time saving state, the period is until the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed 5 times, but in addition to that, for example, the period after the end of the time saving state is a period of a predetermined time, that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol continues. The period may be set until the time required for the process to be executed five times has elapsed. Also, during the above-mentioned regulation period, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes less than a predetermined number (for example, 2 or less), the above-mentioned regulation period will be cleared and the long release effect will be executed. It may be configured as follows.

Furthermore, in this control example, the long open effect is regulated within a predetermined period after the end of the time reduction, but the long open effect may be regulated according to other conditions, for example, If the special symbol variation being executed has won a jackpot, if a continuous performance is set to span multiple special symbol variations, or if the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) If it is determined that the reserved ball contains winning information for winning a jackpot, etc., the long open performance may be regulated.

<About the electrical configuration in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 374, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. This seventh control example differs from the second control example in that a long open effect flag 223e1 is added. The other configurations are the same as the second control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, since the configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 211 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example are the same, various control processes related to the ball output of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example are the same as those in the first control example described above. is the same as On the other hand, various control processes (control example of the audio lamp control device 113) related to the production of the seventh control example are the same as the second control example except for the points mentioned above. Therefore, regarding various control processes related to ball dispensing, the same parts as in the first control example are given the same reference numerals, and their explanations are omitted, and regarding various control processes related to production, the same parts as in the second control example are the same. The description thereof will be omitted.

Since the fluctuation number counter 223aj has been described above in the second control example, a detailed explanation will be omitted, but when the time saving state ends, a predetermined value (5) is set, and the fluctuation display of the third symbol is set. This is a counter that is decremented by 1 when it is set (when a special symbol is changed). In this seventh control example, the long open performance is not executed until the value of the variation counter 223aj becomes 0.

The long open effect flag 223e1 is a flag for indicating that the long open effect is being executed, and when set to on, indicates that the long open effect is being executed. This long release effect flag 223e1 is set when a long time release command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received and when it is determined that the fluctuation number counter 223aj is not 0 (Z2904: No in FIG. 377). , is set to ON (see Z2907 in FIG. 377), and is set to OFF when a long winning end command of a normal symbol is received (Z2911 in FIG. 377).

<About control processing by the main controller in the seventh control example>
Next, control processing by the main controller in this seventh control example will be explained. The seventh control example is different from the first control example in that the normal symbol variation process (Z106: see FIG. 250) is changed to the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171: see FIG. 375). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 375, the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described. The normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171) in this seventh control example is different from the normal symbol variation process (Z106: see FIG. 250) in the first control example in that processes Z451 to Z453 are added. . Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 375, when the normal symbol fluctuation process 2 (Z171) is executed, the same processes Z401 and Z402 as in the first control example are executed, and in the process of Z402, it is determined that the normal symbol is not changing. If so (Z402: No), it is determined whether the long-time open flag 203i is set to on (Z451). As described above in the first control example, this long-time open flag 203i is set when it is determined that the normal symbol has been won for a long time (Z426: Yes) in the normal symbol fluctuation start process (Z408: Fig. 251). , is a flag that is set on (Z428).

In the process of Z451, if it is determined that the long-time open flag 203i is set to on (Z451: Yes), the long-term open flag 203i is set to off (Z403), and a long-time release end command is set. (Z452), the process moves to Z404. On the other hand, in the process of Z451, if it is determined that the long-time open flag 203i is not on (off) (Z451: No), the process of Z403 and Z452 described above is skipped and the process moves to the process of Z404. Then, the same processes Z404 to Z409 as in the first control example described above are executed, and the present process ends.

That is, as described above, the long-time open flag 203i is a flag that is set on from the timing when the variation of the normal symbol won in a long-time win starts until the long-time win ends.

In the processing of Z402, if it is determined that the current normal symbol is changing (Z402: Yes), the processing of Z410 to Z413 at the same position as the first control example described above is executed, and then the A medium command is set (Z453), and this processing ends. The long time command set in Z453 is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (FIG. 255) of the main control device 110. The audio lamp control device 113, which has received the long time winning command, creates a display command to indicate to the player that the current long time winning is in progress (long opening), and sends it to the display control device 114. do. Then, the display control device 114 displays an effect display indicating that the long opening is in progress on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 372(b)).

<About the control process by the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example>
Control processing by the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 376 and 377. This seventh control example differs from the second control example in that the command determination process 2 (Z2152: Figure 299) is changed to the command determination process 4 (Z2181: Figure 376), and the long opening effect process (Z2272) is changed. The difference lies in the additions. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 376, command determination processing 4 (Z2181) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 4 (Z2181). Command determination process 4 (Z2181) in the seventh control example differs from command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) in the second control example in that processes Z2271 to Z2277 are added.

Here, when command determination process 4 (Z2181) is executed, first, the same processes Z2201 to Z2209 as command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) of the second control example described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of Z2208 that a special symbol winning command has not been received (Z2208: No), then it is determined whether a long time winning related command has been received (Z2271), and if it is determined that it has been received. (Z2208: Yes), a long open effect process to be described later is executed (Z2272), and this process ends. In this long open performance processing (Z2272), processing for setting the display mode of the performance to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the normal symbol is won for a long time is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2271, if it is determined that no related command has been received for a long period of time (Z2271: No), Z2256 to Z2260 of the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) of the second control example described above are executed. Similar processes Z2273 to Z2277 are executed, and this process ends. In other words, in this control example, the main control device 110 is configured to receive a command set based on the lottery result of the normal symbol, and a predetermined command (indicating that the winning result has been won for a long time in the lottery of the regular symbol). When a command (indicating command) is received, an effect can be set to notify the player of this fact. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 377, the contents of the long release effect processing (Z2272) will be explained. FIG. 377 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long release effect processing (Z2272). This long opening performance processing (Z2272) is to execute processing for setting the performance mode of the long opening performance when winning a long winning of the normal symbol. , or within a predetermined period after the end of the time saving state), or the performance mode according to the operating state of the normal symbol (during fluctuation, during a winning game) is set.

When the long release production process (Z2272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the currently received long time win related command is a long time win release command (Z2901). This long time winning release command is a command that is set when the long time winning of the normal symbol is won in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 251) of the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of Z2901 that it is a long time winning release command (Z2901: Yes), then the current gaming state is extracted from the state storage area 223az (Z2902). Then, it is determined whether the extracted gaming state is in the time saving mode (the time saving state is set) or not (Z2903), and if it is determined that the game state is in the time saving mode (Z2903: Yes), the target for executing the long release effect is determined. Since the period is not reached, this process ends immediately.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2903, if it is determined that the time is not being shortened (in the normal state) (Z2903: No), then it is determined whether the fluctuation number counter 223aj is greater than 0 (or greater than 1) ( Z2904). A detailed explanation has been given in the second control example described above, so I will briefly explain this, but this variation counter 223aj is set to a predetermined number (5 ) is set and the value is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display setting process is executed, and is the period from the end of the time saving state until the special symbol fluctuation is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times). This is a counter that is referenced to determine.

In the process of Z2904, if it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223aj is not larger than 0 (is 0) (Z2904: No), that is, the variation of the special symbol is executed at least 5 times after the time saving state ends. If it is determined that the game is in a state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, this is the period in which the long open performance can be executed, so a long performance command for display is set (Z2906). , sets the long open effect flag 223e1 to ON (Z2907), and ends this process.

Here, the set display long effect command is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: FIG. 258) of the main process (see FIG. 258) of the audio lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display long effect command, it displays a display mode indicating the long open effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 372(a)).

On the other hand, in the process of Z2904, if it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223aj is larger than 0 (Z2904: Yes), that is, if the variation of the special symbol has not been executed 5 times since the end of the time saving state. If it is determined that there is, it is a period in which the long open effect cannot be executed while the normal state is set as the gaming state, so a left-handed long effect command for display is set (Z2905) and the main Finish the process.

Here, the set left-handed long performance command for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: FIG. 258) of the main process (see FIG. 258) of the audio lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display long performance command, it displays a display mode indicating that the long release performance is being regulated on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 373).

In the process of Z2901, if it is determined that the currently received long time hit related command is not a long time hit release command (Z2901: No), then it is determined whether a long time hit medium command has been received (Z2908). . This long time winning command is set after the start of opening/closing control of electric accessories is set in the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171: Figure 375) of the main controller 110, and during a long winning game. This is a command that indicates that

In the process of Z2908, if it is determined that a long time winning medium command has been received (Z2908: Yes), then it is determined whether the long open effect flag 223e1 is set to on (Z2909), and the long open effect flag is set. If it is determined that 223e1 is set to on (Z2909: Yes), a display long release command is set (Z2910), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2909, if it is determined that the long release effect flag 223e1 is not set to on (set to off) (Z2909: No), the process of Z2910 is skipped and this process ends. .

Here, the processing of Z2909 will be explained. In this seventh control example, similarly to the first control example described above, a winning lottery is performed at the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts (timing when the normal symbol fluctuation start process is executed), and the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning the winning. The operating mode (long release or not) is determined, and the long release command is set at that timing. Then, after the normal symbol fluctuation time (minimum 3 seconds, maximum 30 seconds) has elapsed after setting the long-time winning release command, set the normal symbol (second symbol) stop display, and then It is configured to start controlling the operation of the accessory 640a.

Therefore, a time lag of at least 3 seconds and at most 30 seconds occurs between receiving the long-term release command and the long-term medium command. In a state where the value of 223aj is larger than 0, a long time per release command is set, and thereafter, there is a possibility that a long time per release command is received at a timing when the value of the variation counter 223aj is 0.

In this seventh control example, in order to prevent a long release effect from being executed in accordance with the long release operation of the electric accessory 640a in such a state, the long release effect is set in the process when a long time release command is received. In a state where the release effect flag 223e1 is not set to ON, the display long release command is not set even if a long time winning medium command is received. With this configuration, for example, the display mode effect based on the display left hit long effect command (see FIG. 373) suddenly changes to the display mode effect based on the display long open command (see FIG. 372(b)). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to switching to (see).

Returning to FIG. 377, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2908, if it is determined that the command for long time use has not been received (Z2908: No), then it is determined whether the end command for long time use has been received (Z2911), and the command for ending long time use is determined. If it is determined that the long release effect flag 223e1 has been received (Z2911: Yes), the long release effect flag 223e1 is set to OFF (Z1912), the long release end command for display is set (Z1913), and this processing is ended.

In the process of Z2208, if it is determined that a special symbol winning command has not been received from the main control device 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main control device 110 ( Z2279). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 360. On the other hand, in the process of Z2279, if it is determined that no jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

<About control processing by the display control device in the seventh control example>
Next, control processing by the display control device 114 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 378 and 379. The seventh control example differs from the sixth control example in that command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) is changed to command determination processing 3 (Z3321: FIG. 378). Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 378, command determination processing 3 (Z3321: FIG. 378) will be described. FIG. 378 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (Z3321). Command determination process 3 (Z3321) in the seventh control example differs from command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) in the sixth control example in that processes Z3441 to Z3442 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z3408, if it is determined that there is no preview display command for display (Z3408: No), the process of Z3441 is executed. In the process of Z3441, if it is determined that there is no long release related command for display (Z3441: No), it is determined whether there is a status command for display (Z3432). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a long release related command for display (Z3441: Yes), long release related processing (Z3442) is executed.

In the long release related processing (FIG. 379, Z3442), first, a display data table for long release effect corresponding to the received display long release effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z6201). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for long open effect is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z6202).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z6203), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is generated. The time counter 233h is set (Z6204), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z6205).

As explained above, in this seventh control example, when the normal state (a state in which it is difficult to execute the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol) is set as the gaming state, the long-time winning of the normal symbol When winning, a long opening performance is executed during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, the electric accessory 640a remains open for a long time to the player, and the player can reliably play a game in which the second prize opening 640 receives a ball.

Furthermore, in this seventh control example, even if the normal state is set as the gaming state, the predetermined period after the end of the time reduction in which there is a high possibility that many reserved balls of the second special symbol have been acquired in the normal state. If it is within the range, execution of the above-mentioned long open performance is restricted. Thereby, it is possible to improve the quality of the benefit given to the player when the long open performance is executed (the benefit of easily securing the reserved ball of the second special symbol).

In addition, in this control example, in order to suppress the long release performance from being executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is at the upper limit (4 balls), the period for regulating the long release performance (regulation period) is set. , after the end of the time saving state, the period is until the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed 5 times, but in addition to that, for example, the period after the end of the time saving state is a period of a predetermined time, that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol continues. The period may be set until the time required for the process to be executed five times has elapsed. Also, during the above-mentioned regulation period, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes less than a predetermined number (for example, 2 or less), the above-mentioned regulation period will be cleared and the long release effect will be executed. It may be configured as follows.

Furthermore, in this control example, the long open effect is regulated within a predetermined period after the end of the time reduction, but the long open effect may be regulated according to other conditions, for example, If the special symbol variation being executed has won a jackpot, if a continuous performance is set to span multiple special symbol variations, or if the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) If it is determined that the reserved ball contains winning information for winning a jackpot, etc., the long open performance may be regulated.

Specifically, for example, in the process Z2903 of the long open performance process (see FIG. 377), after determining Z2903: No, a process is provided to determine whether the continuous performance flag 223ac is set to on, and If it is determined that the performance flag 223ac is set to on, it is preferable to configure the process to end without executing the long open performance. With this configuration, it is possible to provide an appropriate performance to the player without disrupting the priority order with other performances being performed.

Further, in the seventh control example, different gaming methods are displayed on the display screen depending on whether the long open performance is regulated or when the long open performance is executed. Specifically, when the long open performance is executed, a right-handed game is performed in order to win the ball to the second winning device 640, and when the long open performance is regulated, the distribution device 700 The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set to make the player play a left-handed game in order to win the ball. As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is at the upper limit (large), the left-handed game allows you to aim at the first winning hole 64 and the right second winning hole 640, and when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is small. This allows the player to play a game in which the player aims at the second prize opening 640 by playing the right-handed game.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the game board 13 is arranged so that the ease with which the ball flows down to the sorting device 700 and the second prize opening 640 is made different depending on the right-handed game and the left-handed game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by firing the ball weakly during a left-handed game, the ball can more easily reach the second prize opening 640, and the player can perform a strongly left-handed game. The game board 13 may be configured so that the balls can easily reach the distribution device 700. As a result, the game result can be greatly different by making a slight change in the operation of the firing device, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, although this seventh control example describes a configuration based on the control content of the main control device 110 in the first control example described above, the control of the main control device 110 used in the first control example described above is The content is not limited to the content, and the control content of the main controller 110 in the second control example, that is, the second special symbol may be used in a gaming machine of the type in which the lottery (variation) is executed with priority over the first special symbol. good.

In addition, at the end of the game state with electric support (low probability game state with electric support (time saving game state) or high probability electric support with electric support (variable probability game state)), if a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) of reserved balls are On the condition that it is stored for the second special symbol, the long-time winning performance of the normal symbol is prohibited (not executed), or the performance that prompts the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. It may be configured to switch to and execute the program. With this configuration, even when switching to the normal gaming state, if there are few balls reserved for the second special symbol, the long-time performance of the normal symbol can be executed, and the player can 2. It is possible to suppress the problem that deprives you of the opportunity to win a special symbol.

In addition, in this control example, when switching to the normal gaming state, the long winning performance of the normal symbol is not performed until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 5 times), or is configured to switch to a different effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the gaming state, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is more than a predetermined number (for example, 3 or more), the normal symbol can be switched to a different effect for a long time. It may be configured such that the winning performance is not performed or the winning performance is switched to a different performance from the normal time. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to play an advantageous game in accordance with the game condition. Furthermore, the conditions for not performing a long winning performance of the normal symbol or for switching to a performance different from the normal time are when a specific fluctuation pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (for example, , jackpot fluctuation pattern, or super reach fluctuation pattern). Alternatively, time information may be obtained from the RTC and a switching condition may be set if it is a specific time near closing (for example, 5 minutes before closing). The switching conditions may be set by combining the conditions listed in this control example.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the control example described above. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

A specific example of a gaming machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a slot machine is equipped with a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is not equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop switch, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Furthermore, the configurations of each of the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in combination.

Below, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, various invention concepts included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristics Group A> (Points where the player's pushing direction is from the back to the front)
In an operating device having an operating means that is pressed and operated by a player, the operating device has two states: a first state in a normal state, and a second state in which the operating means is placed in a position where the operating means is more protruding from the player than in the first state. 2 states, and includes an urging means for urging the operating means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the near side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being oriented toward the side.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a manner that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, since the effect is performed in a manner that increases the expectation of a jackpot for the player at the advance position, it becomes easier for the player to operate the operating means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , it was necessary to design the operation means to be highly strong. In this case, there are problems in that the operating means becomes heavier as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes larger.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when a push operation is performed in the second state, the push direction of the operating means is from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player can easily perform vertical linear motion. By creating a slippage between the player's hand and the operating means that cannot be fully operated, the force of the push can be released.

Furthermore, given the player's playing posture, when pressing and operating the operating means centering on the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force in the forward direction, so the force that the player applies to the operating means is naturally weakened. I can do it.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft located at a back side relative to the player, is configured to be tiltable up and down around the shaft, and has the operating means. A gaming machine A2 comprising a tilting means, the tilting means arranging the operating means to face the direction opposite to the player in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is arranged in a rotary manner, and the operating means is arranged to face the direction opposite to the player in the second state. It is possible to prevent the person from performing an operation of slamming the operating means.

In addition, by placing your hand near the shaft and tilting your hand using that position as a fulcrum, you can easily push the operating means, so you can provide a new method of push-in operation that is less prone to acceleration. , it is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the player's pressing operation.

The new push-in operation method is, for example, by placing the outer side of the little finger of the left hand near the shaft, placing the hand near the operating means with the palm facing up and down, and then pointing the thumb side toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating the device by tilting it down, and a method of operating the device by placing the tip of the middle finger near the shaft with the palm of the hand facing the operating device, then dropping the palm toward the operating device. be done.

A gaming machine A3, in the gaming machine A1 or A2, characterized in that in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is an up-down direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1 or A2, since the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, the second state is maintained while ensuring operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent damage caused by a pushing operation in such a state.

In the gaming machine A3, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is capable of automatic operation, and includes a driving means that generates a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device is generated when the player performs a push operation. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the game machine acts in a direction in which the game occurs, but does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is generated in the direction opposite to the player's operating direction. can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operations.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pushed in, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being subjected to a high load due to being pulled in the opposite direction by the player when retracting the button.

The gaming machine A4 is capable of forming a maintenance state in which the operation device is maintained in the first state or the second state, and includes a maintenance means operated by the drive means, and the drive means operates the operation device through the eccentric portion. It has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, and the rotating means can change the phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in a maintained state, In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move when the maintenance state is released is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the phase of the drive means can be changed while the maintaining means is in the maintained state, and in the phase after the change, the movement to cancel the maintained state is rotated. By using the biasing means, the movement width of the operating device can be changed by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operating modes by the urging means.

In gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases in accordance with the rotational speed of the rotating means. , A gaming machine A6 configured in such a manner that the operating means moves in accordance with the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the movement of the biasing means in the direction of the biasing force was caused only by the biasing force, so that the mode of movement was limited to one. Since the operating means can be added with a movement mode in which it moves by following the maintenance means, the types of movement modes of the operating means can be increased. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 includes a light emitting means disposed inside the operating device and emits light toward the player, and the second state is better than the first state. However, from a player's viewpoint, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machine A7 is provided with a light emitting means, and the light emitting means emits more light from the player's viewpoint in the second state than in the first state. The irradiation range of the light is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the light, improving the performance effect, and making it difficult to press the operating means without aiming. By adopting this aspect, it is possible to reduce the force required by the player during operation.

In gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and when the operating means moves toward and away from the display means, the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes. Features gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves towards and away from the display means, thereby creating a light emitting means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<Characteristics Group B> (The point is that the repulsion force during normal times is small while being able to respond to repeated hits)
In an operating device having an operating means that allows a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, the operating device has a first state and a second state in which the range of movement for the operation up to the terminal position is wider than that in the first state.
and a first driving means that generates a driving force to move from the second state to the first state, and a biasing means that generates a biasing force to move from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine B1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a second driving means that generates a driving force for moving the operating means from a first state to a second state in response to an operation by a player.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a way that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
(See Publication No. 8). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the force to return the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the automatic operation of the operating means is performed by the drive motor. However, in this case, the return of the operating means will be delayed, and if the player's operation is fast, the operating means will not be able to follow the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to perform repeated hitting operations. There was a problem.

According to the game machine B1, by setting the biasing force weakly, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. 2
By pushing back the operating means with the drive means, the return can be made faster, allowing the player to enjoy the repeated hitting operation.

The game machine B1 is provided with a continuous stroke determination means for determining whether or not a continuous stroke operation is being performed based on a sensor detection value of the stroke operation means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is activated based on the detection value of the continuous stroke determination means. A game machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive the game machine.

According to the gaming machine B2, it is determined whether or not to drive the second drive means based on the detection value of the repeated hit determination means, so that the player is not performing a repeated hitting operation (for example, a single press operation or a long press). The second driving means operates even when the player is performing an operation, etc.), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing his hand back.

The gaming machine B2 includes an end detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether the operating means is placed at the end position, and an end detecting means for detecting whether the operating means is placed at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position. A moving direction determining means, comprising a positional difference detecting means for detecting a positional difference, and a moving direction determining means for determining the direction of movement of the operating means from the time relationship between the detected value of the terminal end detecting means and the detected value of the positional difference detecting means. A game machine B3 characterized in that the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by is the direction from the end of pushing back to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determining means is the direction of returning from the push end to the first state, that is, when the player's hand moves away from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing when the player moves in the away direction, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second drive device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, thereby preventing a high load from being applied to the player's hand.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is constituted by a voice coil motor that vibrates in a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. Game machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively utilized to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

Any one of gaming machines B1 to B3 includes a support frame that supports the operating means, and the second drive means includes a drive motor that rotates the eccentric weight, and the drive motor is elastically supported by the support frame. and a supporting means, the supporting means having a driving force that increases the driving force for moving the operating means from the first state position to the second state position as the operating means approaches the terminal position. A gaming machine B5, wherein the eccentric weight abuts the support frame when the operating means is disposed at the terminal position, and generates a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By generating the drive force separately from the drive force, it is possible to adjust the drive force applied to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means based on the operation means being disposed at the terminal position, and comes into contact with the support frame. Game machine B6 is characterized by:

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is utilized. Thus, the drive motor can be moved in a direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the supporting means supporting the drive motor is moved in a direction away from the support frame (in a direction toward the operating means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operating means can be further increased.

<Characteristics Group C> (Points of using VCM as a braking device and vibration production device)
A detection sensor for detecting a position near a terminal position of the operating means, the detection sensor comprising a plurality of sensors, a measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from a detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measuring means a threshold value determination means for determining whether a measured value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold; and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, the threshold value determination means The driving force generated by the repulsive means increases when the measured threshold is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold than when the threshold determined by the threshold determining means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold. Characteristic game machine C1.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a way that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
(See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if emphasis is placed on the ability of the player to operate the device lightly, the operating resistance will be low and there is a risk that the operating device will be damaged by the player's operation, while if it is supported firmly, the movement of the operating device itself will be reduced. Although it is possible to reduce the speed and reduce the possibility of damage to the operating means, there is a problem in that the force required for operation by the player increases, making operating the operating means a burden for weak players. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is less than the threshold value can be reduced, and the operating means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repelling means can improve operability and prevent destruction.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, and when the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold, , before the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed and the operating means is placed in a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor,
A game machine C2 characterized in that the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor.

A gaming machine C3, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, wherein after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C1 or C2, the operation means is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other. While suppressing the generation of a large load at the moment of contact between the voice coil motor and the voice coil motor, the degree of braking of the operating means can be gradually improved, and the discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsion means is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operation means using spring elasticity. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation using spring elasticity, so even when the operating speed of the operating means is high, the driving force is generated without time delay. can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means determines that when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value, the value measured by the threshold value determination means is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold value. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that a movable region of an end of the repulsion means opposite to the side that comes into contact with the operation means is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means that is opposite to the side that contacts the operating means is narrowed, so that the operation of the operating means is reduced. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased.

<Characteristics Group D> (Prevents damage to the drive means by interrupting the transmission of drive force with the clutch)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means that generates a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, a release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, and the release means is configured to release the driving force when a load generated between the drive means and the operating means via the transmission means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a way that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
(See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the operating means is automatically operated for production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk of a large load being placed on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the release means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the drive means and the operating means via the transmission means exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if a player operates the operating means when the operating means is automatically operating, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected) and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and while driving in the first direction, A game machine D2 characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether it is being driven in the second direction.

Here, if it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depending on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the operating means is operated by a player when driving the driving means in an operating direction in which transmission of the driving force cannot be canceled, a large load may be generated on the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom of performance when operating the operating means to create a performance is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward, the locking member that locks the button is moved in the releasing direction, or the locking member that locks the button is moved in the releasing direction. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, the button can be operated in two ways (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the driving force must be interrupted in both cases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction, regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of movement of the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

An example of a method for releasing the transmission is to move the clutch in a direction that intersects the operating direction of the drive means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the direction of the rotation axis or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state where driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. and engagement teeth that transmit driving force when they are in mesh with each other. A game machine D3 is characterized in that it is configured to have a shape that tapers with respect to the abutment surface in a manner that tapers away from the contact surface.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the biasing means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the releasing means applies the driving force on the pressed contact surface in the engaged state. On the other hand, since both surfaces facing the operating direction of the drive means are provided with engagement teeth that taper in a manner that tapers away from the contact surface, the engagement between the engagement teeth causes the transmission means to be separated from the drive means. They can be separated from each other, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, a biasing force is constantly applied between the drive means and the transmission means, and when the transmission means separates from the drive means, the biasing force is applied in the operating direction of the drive means via the engaging teeth. load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the drive means between the state where the driving force is transmitted and the state where the transmission is released.

Note that the size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance does not completely disappear by separation, but is periodically restored. Thereby, when the player releases his/her hand, the button can begin to operate within a short period of time.

In other words, when the button is activated "as an effect", if the player is holding the button,
One phase of button operation has passed. If the player releases his/her hand in the middle, if the button moves from the end of that one phase, the period during which the button is stopped will be longer.
This eliminates the feeling that the player's burden has been lifted and they are ready to move on.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his/her hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to create the feeling that the player's load has been lifted and the player has started to move.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D3, the engagement surface between the transmission means and the release means is
A game machine D4 characterized in that it is formed of sawtooth shapes that engage with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage.
That is, when the distal end of the engagement surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means approach and separate, the transmitting means and the releasing means abut on that plane, and the transmitting means of the releasing means It is possible to suppress movement in the direction toward and away from the means from being stopped. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means is different depending on whether the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction or when the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 featuring the following.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D4, a plurality of operating modes of the operating means are provided, and the driving force transmission can be canceled without being limited to any one of the operating modes. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is such that when there is a difference between whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operating mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means is as follows. Similarly, gaming machine D6 is characterized in that its operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means, the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the drive means is the same. Since the operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by combining the difference in the operating mode of the operating means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the level of jackpot expectation, the player can be told how to operate the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operating mode of the operating means changes. can be watched over.

In addition, this difference in operating mode is caused by the difference in the operating direction of the driving means, so if the operating direction of the driving means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation level etc. without having to watch the operation of the operating means. I can do it. However, the driving means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from vibration sounds, etc., so it is not possible to confirm the operating direction of the driving means in advance, and the player cannot confirm the operating direction of the driving means in advance. can be made to monitor the operation of the operating means.

<Characteristics Group E> (Changes the position of the cam protrusion based on the rotation of the cam)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means that generates a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, a first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; , a biasing device that biases the operating device in a direction from the first position toward the second position, and an operating device that moves from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing device. terminating means for changeably forming a movement end of the first means, wherein the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means; a release load means for applying a load to the first means to release the engagement with the operating means, the release load means releasing the engagement, and the termination means at the end of the movement of the operating means; A game machine E characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.
1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operation means operated by a cam is fixed at a first position, and the fixation is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is used to extend the operation means. There is a gaming machine in which the amount of displacement of the extending operation can be changed by a terminating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the amount of displacement of the extending operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam when the lock is released, so the phase of the cam when the lock is released is varied. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation were operated by separate driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixation of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. Thereby, the terminating means can serve both as a driving means for changing the terminal position of the operating means and as a driving means for moving the release load means, so that the number of driving means can be reduced.

A gaming machine E2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1, the position of the release load means is changed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the position of the release load means can be caused to change based on the operation of the transmission means, so by detecting the amount of operation of the transmission means, the release load means can be changed by detecting the amount of operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detection means such as a position sensor for detecting the state of the load release means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

In addition, as a method for switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, there are two methods: a method of shifting the rotation period of the cam and the protrusion; , a method of de-synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion in other phases, etc.
Illustrated.

In the gaming machine E2, the load release means is configured to:
A gaming machine E3, which is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means, and whether or not the load release means and the transmission means operate synchronously is switched by the operation of the load release means.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not the synchronous operation of the load release means and the transmission means is performed, the synchronous state of the load release means and the transmission means can be changed without adding any members.

In the gaming machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotational axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means is provided with a rotating second rotating member. A game machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation periods.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but the rotation periods are different, so that the second rotating member is operated at a predetermined speed. A plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by coming into contact with the first means at a phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of terminal positions when the operation means is maintained at the first position, the action of the first means is released, and the operation means moves toward the second position. ,
You can expand the range of your performances. For example, it is possible to realize an effect in which the end position is gradually moved away from the first position or an effect in which the end position is gradually brought closer to the first position using the same configuration.

<Features Group F> (Vibration device supported by soft case)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device has a first position and a second position which the operating means reaches when the player performs an operation from the first position. In the gaming machine, the operating means is arranged at the first position, and the gaming machine includes a vibrating means having a vibrating part that vibrates, and a receiving means arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the vibrating part. When the operating means is placed in the second position, the vibrating section is in a separated state in which it cannot come into contact with the receiving means, whereas when the operating means is placed in the second position, the vibrating section is in a state where it can come into contact with the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 is characterized in that it is in a contact state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include an operating means that can be operated by a player, and a vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,
(Refer to Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the vibration means vibrates, regardless of whether the operating means is operated or not, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Or, if the vibration is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the gaming machine, then the vibration is transmitted immediately after the player operates the operating means.
It is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the hand from the operating means. In some cases, the vibration may not start in time before the player releases his or her hand, and there is a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating section comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is placed in the first position or is operated by the player and placed in the second position. Therefore, even when the vibrating section is made to vibrate continuously, the player can only feel the vibration when the player operates the operating means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibrating part is generated before the player presses the button, the vibrating part can be vibrated even before the player releases his/her hand, regardless of the manner of the player's operation. vibrations can be transmitted to people.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means is disposed in the separated state so as to overhang an area occupied by the operating means when it is arranged at the second position, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means changes to the abutting state by being moved out of the occupied area.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, thereby changing from the separated state to the contact state, so depending on the degree of movement of the operating means, The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating part can be changed,
The intensity of the transmitted vibrations can also be varied. Therefore, the effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration in response to the player's operation intensity can be performed by vibrating the vibrating means in the same way without any particular change in the driving mode.

A gaming machine F3, in the gaming machine F1 or F2, characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, positioning with respect to the receiving means can be performed while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means by the supporting means. Thereby, it is possible to separate the receiving means and the vibrating means, thereby preventing the transmission of vibrations, and also suppressing the displacement that occurs in the vibrating means during vibration.

A gaming machine F4 in the gaming machine F3, wherein in the contact state, the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating section.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating section and the receiving means come into contact. That is, by expanding and contracting the support means, momentum can be gained when the vibrating section moves in a direction approaching the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the support means has deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operation means,
A game machine F5 characterized in that the deformation resistance is lower than the deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, it is possible to finely set the direction in which the supporting means deforms when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means. can.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is small, the amount of expansion and contraction of the support means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating section and the receiving means can be made different. .

In addition, methods for varying the deformation resistance include a method in which rubber legs are extended along the operating direction of the operating means when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, and a method in which the supporting means surrounds the vibrating means. In the case of a rubber member, the rubber member is manufactured by two-color molding to change the deformation resistance in each direction, and the supporting means is a rail that guides the operating means to move along the operating direction. , a coil spring that biases the vibration means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like.

A gaming machine F6 in the gaming machine F3, wherein the portion that the vibrating section comes into contact with is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, vibrations are not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but through a receiving means that is a separate means from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmission means, and therefore it is possible to suppress a state in which a load is applied to the driving means. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

Furthermore, since vibrations can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hands of the player operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation due to being surprised by the vibrations during the operation.

The receiving means may be, for example, the part of the frame of the gaming machine near the upper tray where the game balls are supplied, or the edge of the glass frame, etc. Examples include parts that may be touched by hands, and housing parts that partially enclose operating means.

<Feature G group> (One-touch installation between cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) possible at the attachment part)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position; It is characterized by comprising: a driving means that generates a driving force for driving; and a transmission means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, and the transmission means includes a deformation part that elastically deforms due to overload. Game machine G1.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force to drive the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means. There are gaming machines equipped with (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2014-144218)
. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player and the driving means generates a driving force to drive the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmission means and the operating means,
There is a problem in that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the transmission means and the driving means, and there is a risk that these connecting portions will be damaged.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine G1, when an overload is applied to the operating device, the deformable portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, and the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, the driving means and the transmission means, etc. It is possible to alleviate the load applied to the connecting part.

In the game machine G1, the transmission means includes a rotatably supported cam member, the deformable portion constitutes a connecting portion of the cam member to the rotation shaft, and the elasticity of the deformation portion allows the transmission device to rotate to the rotation shaft. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of .

According to the gaming machine G2, the deformation portion serves as a portion that elastically deforms the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and as a portion that generates a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft.
Equipped with Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified due to the dual use of the function. For example, separate fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a protruding portion that is protruded parallel to the rotation axis, the protruding portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is caused by the cam member. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that the rotating shaft is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to configure the cam member and the protruding portion with one member, and there is a possibility that the number of members will increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is such that the rotating shaft is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is attached to the cam member. Compared to the case where the cam member is slid, the cam member can be easily constructed from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is higher than that of the rotational shaft in comparison with a first rotational direction in which the cam member is rotated around a straight line connecting the rotational shaft and the convex portion. A game machine characterized in that deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which the rotation is made about a straight line that is perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the convex portion and the extending direction of the rotating shaft. G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformable part different for each direction, the state after the deformable part is elastically deformed is better when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the protruding tip of the protruding portion can be displaced in a direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. This allows the protruding part of the cam member to be displaced along the direction in which the protruding part is intended to move, thereby alleviating the load generated between the protruding part and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformable part. can do.

The gaming machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the cam member changes its posture by elastically deforming the deformable portion, A game machine G5 characterized in that the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformable portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Since they come into contact with each other, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A game machine G6, which is any one of the game machines G3 to G5, and includes a detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is tilted relative to the shaft.

Here, in a situation where an overload is applied to the operating device and the operating means is not operating even though the driving means is in operation, for example, the displacement expected due to the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When detecting the occurrence of an overload based on the deviation between the two, it is necessary to drive the drive means for a predetermined period of time before detecting the occurrence of an overload. This period can be shortened as the interval between the detection means for detecting the displacement becomes smaller, but the smaller the interval between the detection means, the more complicated and expensive the configuration of the detection means becomes. Therefore, there has been a problem in that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of overload at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted relative to the shaft. In this way, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time as the detection means detects at least a portion of the cam member, without requiring the drive means to be driven for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detection means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Characteristics H group> (Ball with thread anti-rot structure)
In a gaming machine equipped with a foul ball passageway through which foul balls flowing back toward the firing device among the game balls fired into the gaming area can pass, the foul ball passageway not only allows passing of the falling game balls, but also allows the foul balls to pass through. A game machine H1 characterized in that it is equipped with a one-way obstruction means for obstructing the progress of an object flowing backward.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a thread cutting blade is installed inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper tray to the firing device, and the game ball connected with the thread is driven into the gaming area. There are game machines that have a function to prevent (cut the thread)
(See Publication No. 4179). However, in the conventional game machine described above, when the thread is fired, the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth, and the tension generated at that time cuts the thread. However, if the firing strength of the game ball is weak, the game ball may not cut the thread completely. The ball may be returned to the player as a foul ball.
For this reason, for example, a fraudulent tool with game balls connected to both ends of a string is prepared, and one game ball connected to one end of the string is fired at low firing strength, causing it to flow into the foul ball path and being returned to the player. By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the string into the playing area while grasping the one game ball that has been played, the string can be removed from the guide path and the ball can be passed through the foul ball path to the other side. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game ball and the other game ball are connected by a thread, an external load is applied to the thread connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball placed in the gaming area is connected to the other game ball. There was a problem that there was a risk that the government could manipulate the government and obtain fraudulent profits.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, even if a fraudulent act is performed that applies a load to the other game ball using the thread guided to the game area through the foul ball path, the one-way obstruction means However, by obstructing the movement of the thread in the backward direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate fraudulent profits.

A gaming machine H2 in the gaming machine H1, wherein the foul ball passage includes a bending part that bends a falling path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the game ball can rub against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut at an early stage.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending section is provided with a loading means on the inner corner side of the bend, which does not apply a load to the game ball flowing down, but applies a load to the object flowing backward.
.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H2, the load means can apply a load to an object (for example, a thread-like member) flowing backward.

The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the load means is disposed in a recessed portion having a width less than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. This can be prevented.

A gaming machine H5, which is the gaming machine H3 or H4, further comprising a regulating means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball path.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H3 or H4, the regulating means regulates the outward movement of the foul ball path of the loading means, so that the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball path is prevented. When a load is applied, the load applied to the member on the thread can be prevented from weakening due to the load means being deformed outward of the foul ball path.

Any of the gaming machines H1 to H5 is equipped with a receiving tray which is a tray where foul balls first arrive at the front side of the front door, and a payout which is a part that discharges game balls paid out from a payout device to the receiving tray. A gaming machine H6 characterized in that the ball discharge section is arranged above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines H1 to H5, the game ball paid out from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, so that the game ball can pass through the foul ball passage. If a fraudulent act is carried out in which the thread guided into the gaming area is used to apply a load to the other game ball, the player intentionally hits the game ball that is being paid out, applies a load, and reduces the durability of the thread. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the put-out ball ejection part, which is the part that ejects the game balls paid out from the pay-out device, is placed in the receiving tray, which is the tray where foul balls first arrive at the front side of the front door. , a gaming machine H7 characterized in that the foul ball passage is located below the lower end of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act was carried out in which the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball path was used to apply a load to the other gaming ball. In this case, the threads can be easily damaged by the game balls that are paid out.

<Characteristics Group I> (Structure of board pressure)
It comprises a gaming means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side facing the gaming means and capable of receiving the gaming means from the one side, and the receiving means is configured to accept the gaming means from the one side. The state changing means is capable of changing the gaming means from the unusable state to the usable state, the state changing means changing the gaming means from the unusable state to the usable state. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it comprises an approaching means that approaches the gaming means from the one side.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, the game board can rotate in a direction parallel to the front surface of the game board, and the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine that is equipped with a fixing means to do this (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the fixing means is configured to be able to change the state only after the game board is pushed into the operating position, so if the game board is not pushed in halfway, it is necessary to push it in again. There is a problem in that it becomes necessary to perform this repetitive work, which may reduce work efficiency.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state changing means is provided with the proximity means that approaches the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is brought into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is only half-hearted, by the proximity means coming into contact with the game board and applying a pushing force,
This has the effect that the game board can be pushed into the position where it is in use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side in response to a state change to an unusable state in which the gaming means is disabled. .

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, since the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, it is difficult to remove the gaming means. This has the effect of improving work efficiency.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retreats to the outside of the gaming means in response to setting the gaming means in an unusable state. Game machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1 or I2, since the proximity means retreats to the outside of the gaming means, it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of removing the gaming means, and it is possible to Since this is carried out in conjunction with making the means unusable, work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the gaming machine I4 is provided with abutting means that receives a load from the gaming device when the state changing means changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, the state changing means changes to the usable state when the contact means receives a load from the gaming means, so the operation of pressing the gaming means against the state changing means changes the state to the usable state as a series of steps. The state can be changed to.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported around one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means when the other side is approached, and the state changing means is A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is disposed on the other side of the gaming machine I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, by utilizing the width dimension of the gaming means,
A load can be efficiently applied to the contact means via the game means.

Any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5 is provided with a closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means, and the closing means is such that the state changing means makes the gaming means unusable. A gaming machine I6 characterized in that it is provided with a closing regulating part that makes it impossible to close the opening on one side of the gaming means when maintaining the state.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means changes the gaming means into a usable state depending on whether the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means remains in an unusable state.

<Characteristics Group J> (Inverted cup and harness band prevents piano wire from rattling)
It is equipped with a gaming means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side opposite to the gaming means and capable of receiving the gaming means from the one side, and the receiving means is configured to be connected to the gaming means. A gaming machine J1 comprising a placement means disposed on a path communicating with the outside, the placement means being configured to be able to suppress entry of objects from the outside at a plurality of locations.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a fraud prevention part to prevent fraudulent activities such as inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-
(See Publication No. 26573). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the fraud prevention section is located only at one location, and the effectiveness of fraud prevention is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, a placement means is provided in a path where there is a possibility that the piano wire may be inserted, and the placement means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at multiple locations, thereby preventing fraud. can improve the effectiveness of

In gaming machine J1, the arrangement means includes a first means for suppressing entry of a member from the outside at a first location, and a second means for suppressing entry of a member from the outside at a second location.
A gaming machine J2 characterized by suppressing the entry of members from the outside using a different method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means has a different method for suppressing the entry of members from the outside between the first location and the second location. Compared to the case where the number of members is increased, entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

Note that the method of suppressing intrusion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method may be used to prevent entry by blocking a route, or a method may be used to prevent fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm.

A gaming machine J3 in the gaming machine J1 or J2, wherein the arrangement means includes an intrusion regulating part formed in the shape of a cup that opens outward of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed in a cup shape, thereby making it possible to prevent the intruding member from further invading.

In the gaming machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting electrical wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry restriction part in the path from the outside to the gaming means. Features of gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J3, when an unauthorized person penetrates the access control part due to high heat, it is possible to detect changes in the wiring caused by the high heat (such as disconnection due to heat), thereby preventing external damage. The effect of suppressing the entry of members can be easily produced.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means removes the member that has entered from the outside.
A gaming machine J5 characterized in that it is provided with a dissolving means that guides the player to a dissolving area that is far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means guides the member entering from the outside to the elimination area far from the gaming means, so that the entry of the member entering from the outside is prevented. Even if the degree of damage increases, it is possible to prevent members entering from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Characteristics Group K> (Structure of a 5-layer decorative plate. Includes fraud prevention)
a first means and a second means that are arranged opposite to each other along a first direction and connected at least one side; and a first means and a second means arranged along the first direction between the first means and the second means. A gaming machine comprising a third means for connecting the first means and the second means, the connecting direction of the connecting portion being set in a second direction intersecting the first direction. The gaming machine K1 is characterized by the following.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, first means and second means are arranged opposite to each other and connected by at least one side, and the first means and the second means are disposed along the first direction between the first means and the second means. There is a gaming machine that includes a third means (for example, see Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-26573).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by existing methods such as adhesion or screw fixing, but when the first means and second means are connected, the load along the first direction is There is a problem in that the third means may be damaged because it is applied to three means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set in the second direction intersecting the first direction, so that the third means is set in the first direction. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the This can prevent the third means from being damaged.

In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes a connected means that is connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. A gaming machine K3, characterized in that the second means is displaced relative to the first means in an adjacent third direction and connected by fitting into each other.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the gaming machine K3 includes connected means that are connected to other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means. are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and The resistance to disassembly of the second means can be improved.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is arranged to be exposed to the outside in the gaming machine K3.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K3, since one side of the first means and the second means are arranged so as to be exposed to the outside, it is easy to check the state of the mating parts. be able to.
As a result, even if a fraudulent act occurs in which the fitting portion is destroyed and the first means and the second means are disassembled, the fraudulent act can be discovered more quickly.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of the fastening and fixing is the same direction as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction, so that the fastening The fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength.

In any of gaming machines K3 to K5, a light irradiation means that irradiates light toward the first means or the second means and is fixed to the connected means, and one of the first means or the second means. A gaming machine K6, characterized in that it is provided with a light guide means fixed to the member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiation means into the inside.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the first means, the second means, and the light guiding means from being misaligned.

The gaming machine K7 is characterized in that the gaming machine K6 is provided with abutting means that makes surface contact with the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means in a region where they face each other.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K6, a distance equal to the dimension of the abutting means can be maintained in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means. I can do it.
This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by a load in the opposite direction. I can do it.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guiding means from changing even if the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction when an unauthorized attempt is made to disassemble the first means or the second means. can do.

<Characteristics L group> (Point L of utilizing the curved light guide means. Points not yet reached)
comprising a light guiding means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed from the irradiation direction of light passing through the interior, and a projection means disposed opposite to the light guiding means and onto which the light passing through the light guiding means is projected; A gaming machine L1 characterized in that the projection means includes a concave facing portion disposed opposite to the concave surface portion of the light guiding means, and a convex facing portion disposed facing the convex surface portion of the light guiding means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a light guide plate that uniformly emits light entering from an end face (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, so in order to partially change the intensity of the surface-emitted light, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guiding means is constant, the projection target means has the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion. With the department,
The light emission intensity of the projection target means can be changed.

In the game machine L1, the projection means is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmissive material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is more difficult to transmit light than the concave facing portion. A gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light that passes through the convex opposing part, the light emitted from the light guiding means is focused on the concave opposing part. It is possible to improve the performance effect of the light production.

The gaming machine L2 includes a counter-projection means that is disposed on the opposite side of the projection means with the light-guiding means in between and projects the light that has passed through the light-guiding means, and the counter-projection means A gaming machine L3 characterized in that a portion of the light means facing the concave surface and a portion facing the convex surface of the light guiding means are made of a material having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, the portion of the counter-projection means that is arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide means and the part that is arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide means Since they are made of materials with substantially the same transparency, by allowing the same light to enter the light guiding means, it is possible to produce a light effect that is visually recognized through the projection means and a light effect that is visually recognized through the opposite projection means. can be made different.

<Characteristics Group M> (Bass reflex speaker arrangement structure)
a first means and a second means arranged opposite to each other and fixed to each other and forming an internal space in a fixed state; an acoustic means arranged so as to enter at least a part of the internal space; A gaming machine M1 comprising: a bending means that forms a bending path in an internal space.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of the front frame, and performances are performed using sounds output from the speakers (for example, JP 2016-1
(See Publication No. 6088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration waves traveling toward the back side of the speaker body are made to travel to the left and right center position of the gaming machine, and then are sent out to the outside of the gaming machine.
Although it is easy to create an effect that allows the player to hear bass sounds, there is a problem in that the path length of the vibration wave is determined by the left and right width of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending means forms a bending path in the internal space of the first means and the second means, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, the playing machine By canceling the left and right width restrictions, the vibration waves can travel an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means has a rib shape extending from at least one of the first means and the second means toward the other. A gaming machine M2, comprising a protruding portion that protrudes from the top, and a tip of the protruding portion comes into contact with the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means By bringing these into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluid such as vibration waves from passing through the gap in the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 includes an opening that connects the interior space to the outside, and the opening is a passage member that is passed between the interior space and the exterior through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is blocked by.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passage member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member, and, The wall constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passage member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

A gaming machine M4 in the gaming machine M3, wherein the opening is disposed closer to the sound means than the protrusion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, it is possible to prevent the wiring of the acoustic means from being pinched by the protrusion and disconnected. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, there is a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a performance means arranged below the support fastening means and performing a performance accompanying the game. A gaming machine M5, characterized in that the presentation means supports the support and fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support and fastening means is supported from below by the presentation means, so that the support and fastening means can be supported by weight without compressing the space used for presentation. things can be adopted.

<Characteristics Group N> (Movable unit, flower that rotates in reverse. Petals that stop midway)
a base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a displacement direction; A second displacement means switchable between a non-following state and a non-following state in which displacement occurs in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means.
and a third displacement means that is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means when at least the second displacement means is in the follow-up state. A gaming machine N1 characterized by comprising:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means is displaced in the direction of the expansion and contraction movement of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. When doing so, there is a game machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the direction of expansion and contraction of the first displacement means (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the directions of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, so the performance is slow and the performance effect is insufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the follow-up state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased compared to the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it includes a resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change a switching point between the follow-up state and the non-follow-up state. Game machine N2.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, there is a following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means due to the action of the resistance means, and a non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means relative to the first displacement means can be increased. Thereby, the performance effect can be improved.

The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means using the driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means can also be used. be able to.

A gaming machine N4 is characterized in that in the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means can be visually recognized by the player as having the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can also serve as a performance device.

The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that it includes a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially. Gaming machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that the first displacement means, When the attitude of either the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the attitude of the other members or means changes accordingly, so that the displacement resistance is prevented from increasing excessively. I can do it.

<Characteristics Group O> (Utilization of shell buttons and punch holes. Points not achieved)
In a gaming machine comprising a first means and an accommodating means configured to be able to accommodate the first means, the accommodating means is an opening that receives the first means when accommodating the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: a first opening; and a second opening having a width greater than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with operating means that can be operated by the player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-048970). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that if a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, the foreign object may remain inside and cause malfunction. .

On the other hand, since the gaming machine O1 is provided with a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the storage means and the first means, foreign objects are accommodated through the second opening. Means can be easily removed to the outside. This can prevent foreign matter from remaining inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the storage means includes a support section that supports the first means, and the second opening section is arranged on the opposite side of the support section with the first means interposed therebetween. Game machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support section.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the accommodation means includes a low water resistant part having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant part.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistance part. That is, the second opening can be used both for the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object and for the purpose of discharging liquid such as water.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings have a shape based on a shape projected in a different direction of the solid object. A game machine O4 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
Since the opening has a shape based on the shape of the solid object in a different direction, the solid object can be easily removed through the second opening.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the second opening is disposed closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the solid object partially blocks the second opening, the shadow of the solid object is visible to the player. can be done. This makes it possible for the player to notice that a solid object is inserted between the first means and the storage means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object continues to remain. .

<Feature P group> (G2 advance notice control)
A determination means for executing a determination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. In this case, in a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, an effect execution means that executes an effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and a plurality of effects a determining means for determining that the particular performance is to be performed by the performance execution means in response to the continuous dynamic display of the identification information; The gaming machine P1 is characterized in that it has an interrupting means for suspending the execution of the specific performance until a return condition is met based on the satisfaction of a specific condition.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have conventionally been known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting slot and display on a liquid crystal screen a variable performance or a jackpot performance according to the lottery results. In such performances, various patterns of performances are carried out, such as performances to create a sense of expectation among players and performances to increase the players' desire to participate in the game, in order to improve the interest of the game. . Some of these types of pachinko machines increase the interest of the game by providing players with a series of performances using multiple fluctuating performances by executing special performances for multiple consecutive fluctuating performances. A gaming machine that can improve the performance has been proposed (Patent document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of pachinko machine, etc., by executing multiple consecutive fluctuating effects, if the notification effects, etc. that should be executed during that time occur irregularly, the execution will be delayed, etc., and the player will not be able to play the game. There was a risk that a problem would occur where the content would be difficult to understand. The technical idea of the present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy for players to understand the contents of the game.

According to the gaming machine P1, even if the determining means determines that a specific effect is to be executed for each dynamic display of identification information a plurality of times, the specific effect is executed based on the establishment of a specific condition. Since the execution of the above is suspended until the return condition is met, even if the execution of a specific effect has been decided, the execution can be interrupted and necessary control etc. performed, making it easy for the player to understand. Easy games can be provided. In addition, since execution of a specific performance is restarted when the return condition is met, it is possible to notify the player that the specific performance has not ended midway through, providing an easy-to-understand performance to the player. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine P1, an operation means that can be operated by a player, a switching means that can switch and set a setting when the operation means is operated, and a setting based on the setting set by the switching means. A gaming machine P2 comprising: dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, the settings can be switched by the player operating the operating means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting, so that the gaming machine It is possible to change the dynamic display mode by user's operation, and it is possible to increase the variation of the dynamic display mode that is executed, which has the effect of suppressing the player from getting bored with the game early. There is.

The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the specific condition is established when the setting is switched by the switching device when execution of the specific performance has been determined by the determining device. Game machine P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P2, when the settings are switched by the player, a specific performance is interrupted and a dynamic display mode based on the settings switched by the player is displayed. This has the effect of suppressing a problem in which it is difficult to recognize that the setting has been changed, by allowing the player to start the specific effect in the same way even if the setting has been changed.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, an entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means which can acquire information based on the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and the acquisition means. storage means for storing the information acquired by the above, and the determination means executes the determination based on the information stored in the storage means. P4.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, information can be obtained by entering the game ball into the ball entering means by allowing the game ball to enter the ball entering means. This has the effect of increasing interest in the subject.

In the gaming machine P4, the ball entering means is provided with at least a first ball entering means and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the acquiring means is arranged such that the ball entering means is the first ball entering means. The first information can be obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the second information can be obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the dynamic display The means dynamically displays first identification information for indicating the determination result when the first information is determined by the determining means, and when the second information is determined by the determining means. is for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result, and the determining means performs the determination on the second information preferentially over the first information stored in the storage means. The specific condition is such that when the specific effect is determined to be executed for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is executed a plurality of times in succession, the second A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it is established when identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P4, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is executed multiple times in succession, the second ball entering Even if a ball enters the means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed with priority, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so the dynamic display of the second identification information is prioritized. This has the effect of making it easy for the player to recognize that the game has started.

In the gaming machine P7, the first ball entering means is configured to allow the game ball to enter the ball more easily than the second ball entering means when in the first gaming state, and the second ball entering means A gaming machine P8, characterized in that, when in a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, the ball enters the ball more easily than the first ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P7, in the first gaming state, since the game ball easily enters the first ball entering means, the first identification information is continuously moved. This has the effect of making it easier to display the target, making it easier to execute a specific performance many times, and improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic Q group> (G production)
A determination means for executing a determination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. In this case, in a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, a specific effect is executed for a plurality of consecutive dynamic displays of the identification information. A gaming machine Q1 characterized in that it has a performance execution means.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have conventionally been known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting slot and display on a liquid crystal screen a variable performance or a jackpot performance according to the lottery results. In such performances, various patterns of performances are carried out, such as performances to create a sense of expectation among players and performances to increase the players' desire to participate in the game, in order to improve the interest of the game. . (Patent document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-075741). In this type of pachinko machine, etc., there has been a need to further improve the interest of the game. The technical idea of the present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine B1, even if the identification information is dynamically displayed and does not result in a specific determination result, multiple identification information can be displayed as one dynamic display, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. .

In the gaming machine Q1, when the specific performance is being executed by the specific performance execution means, an interrupting unit suspends the execution of the specific performance based on the establishment of a specific condition until a return condition is satisfied; A gaming machine Q2 characterized in that it has the following.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the execution of the specific performance is interrupted until the return condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition, so that the player can know that the specific condition has been satisfied. This has the effect of being easy to demonstrate. In addition, when the return conditions are met, the execution of a specific performance is restored, so it is possible to prevent a problem in which a specific performance ends midway and the contents of the performance are left unfinished, which confuses players. effective.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a switching means that can switch settings when the operating means is operated, and the settings set by the switching means A gaming machine Q3 comprising: dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when dynamic display of the identification information is started based on.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the setting can be changed by the player operating the operating means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. , it becomes possible to change the dynamic display mode by the player's operation, and it is possible to increase the variation of the dynamic display mode that is executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine Q3, the specific condition is established when the setting is switched by the switching means when the specific performance is being executed.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q3, when the settings are switched by the player, a specific performance is interrupted and a dynamic display mode is displayed based on the settings switched by the player. This has the effect of suppressing a problem in which it is difficult to recognize that the setting has been changed, by allowing the player to start the specific effect in the same way even if the setting has been changed.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, an entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means which can acquire information based on the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and the acquisition means. A gaming machine Q5 characterized in that it has a storage means for storing the information acquired by.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, information is acquired when the game ball enters the ball entering means.The game ball enters the ball entering means. This has the effect of increasing interest in the subject.

A gaming machine Q6, which is characterized in that the gaming machine Q5 has a preliminary determination means that executes a determination before the determination means based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q5, since the preliminary determination is executed by the preliminary determination means, the determination result can be identified before the identification information is dynamically displayed. There is.

In the gaming machine Q5 or Q6, the ball entering means includes at least a first ball entering means and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the acquiring means The first information can be acquired when a game ball enters the ball means, and the second information can be acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entrance means, and the second information is acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entrance means. The target display means dynamically displays first identification information for indicating the determination result when the first information is determined by the determination means, and when the second information is determined by the determination means. In this case, the second identification information is dynamically displayed to show the determination result, and the specific condition is that the second identification information is dynamically displayed after the first identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine Q7 is characterized in that the game is established when the target is displayed.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5 or B6, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is executed multiple times in succession, the second Even if the ball enters the ball entering means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed with priority, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so the dynamic display of the second identification information takes priority. This has the effect of making it easy for the player to recognize that the game has started.

The gaming machine Q7 is configured to include a firing means that can fire a game ball by varying the firing force based on the player's operation, and a game ball that is fired with a first firing force by the firing means so that it can flow down. a first flow path configured to make it difficult for a game ball to flow down the first flow path, and configured to allow a game ball fired with a second launch force different from the first launch force to flow down. and a second flow path, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the second ball entry means is arranged in a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter. A game machine Q8 characterized in that the game ball is placed at a position where the game ball flowing down the second channel can enter.

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q7, there is an effect that the player can intentionally make it easier to satisfy a specific condition by adjusting the firing force of the game ball.

<Characteristics Group R> (If special figure 2 remains after the time saving ends, it will not shift to charge performance until 5 fluctuations)
a first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter at all times; and a second ball entry means which is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which entry is more difficult than the first state. , acquisition means capable of acquiring first information when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, and acquiring second information when a game ball enters the second ball entering means; , a storage means in which the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means are stored, and a determination that executes a determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on the display means, and when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; In the gaming machine, the second ball entering means is changed from the second state to the first state. a discriminating means for discriminating whether a specific condition is satisfied; a discriminating means for performing a performance to show a determination result by the discriminating means; a performance determining means capable of determining a specific performance as the performance to be performed by; a prohibiting means for prohibiting the performance determining means from performing the specific performance when a prohibition condition is satisfied; A gaming machine R1 characterized in that it has the following.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have conventionally been known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting slot and display on a liquid crystal screen a variable performance or a jackpot performance according to the lottery results. In such performances, various patterns of performances are carried out, such as performances to create a sense of expectation among players and performances to increase the players' desire to participate in the game, in order to improve the interest of the game. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a special period is set in which it is easier to enter the starting hole than usual, an effect is performed to announce that the special period will be executed either in advance or during the period. A gaming machine has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-229733). If there is a high possibility that a large number of balls are being held, such as immediately after the situation in which it is easy for balls to enter the starting hole has ended, the notification is made, thereby preventing notifications that are not advantageous to the player. As a result, there is a risk that a problem may occur in which the interest in playing the game decreases. The technical idea of the present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine R1, when the prohibition condition is satisfied, the specific effect indicating that the game ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second ball entering means is not executed. This has the effect that it is possible to execute a performance that meets the needs of the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the gaming machine R1, the second ball entering means has a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entry means is set to be more easily changed from the second state to the first state than the normal state. , the prohibition condition is set such that at least one condition is a first condition that is satisfied based on the setting of the normal state from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. Gaming machine R2 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1, a first condition based on the termination of a special state in which the game ball easily enters the second ball entering means is set as a prohibiting condition. Therefore, a large amount of second information is stored, and even if a game ball is entered into the second ball entry means, a specific effect is executed during a period when the profit to the player is low, thereby suppressing the problem of reducing the interest in the game. The effect is that it can be done.

In the gaming machine R2, the prohibition condition is such that when the normal state is set from the special state set by the state setting means, a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored in the storage means. The gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the second condition is set as at least one condition.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, when the special state ends, a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored, so that a large amount of the second information is stored. The prohibition condition is satisfied only in the memorized state, which has the effect of suppressing the problem of a specific performance not being executed and the player's interests being harmed even though the number of second information stored is small. .

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the determining means includes a specific first determination result that causes the second ball entering means to be varied in the first state for a first period, and a method that is longer than the first period. During the second period, the performance determining means is configured to be able to determine the specific second determination result to be changed to the first state, and the effect determining means is configured to determine the specific second determination result based on the determination of the specific second determination result. A gaming machine R4 is characterized in that it determines performances.

According to the gaming machine R4, by executing a specific performance in any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, it is possible to inform the player that the period is more advantageous, thereby increasing the interest of the game. be.

<Feature S group> (Volume control)
A gaming machine having a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, and a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to a player when a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means. , a sound output means capable of outputting sound as part of the performance executed by the performance execution means; and a volume output by the sound output means can be set based on an operation from outside the gaming machine. a first state in which the audio output device outputs audio based on the volume set by the volume setting device; and a first state in which the audio is outputted at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume set by the volume setting device. output control means for switching between a second state in which the output means outputs sound; and a return state in which power supply to the gaming machine is started from a power-off state in which the power supply for operating the gaming machine is cut off; A gaming machine S1, characterized in that it has an initial setting means for setting the second state when the current state is reached.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have conventionally been known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting slot and display on a liquid crystal screen a variable performance or a jackpot performance according to the lottery results. In such performances, various patterns of performances are carried out, such as performances to create a sense of expectation among players and performances to increase the players' desire to participate in the game, in order to improve the interest of the game. . Among this type of pachinko machines, a game machine has been proposed in which the volume of sound effects, voices, etc. output as effects can be varied and set by the player's operation or the settings of the game parlor (Patent Document: Publication No. 2011-200511). In this type of gaming machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that allows more suitable volume control. The technical idea of the present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can perform suitable volume control.

According to the gaming machine S1, when the power is turned on, the second state is set in which the output is made at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means, so that the power is turned on at the volume. This has the effect of allowing suitable volume control to be performed.

In the gaming machine S1, the second state is a state in which the volume is set to be lower than the lowest volume setting set by the volume setting means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1, in the second state, the volume is set to be lower than the lowest volume set by the volume setting means, so that when the power is turned on all at once, This has the effect of reducing noise in game parlors. A gaming machine S3 in the gaming machine S1 or S2, wherein the output control means continues to set the second state until the performance executing means finishes executing one performance.

According to the game machine S3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine S1 or S2, the second state is continuously set until the execution of the first effect is finished, so that the power supply is turned off during the period when the effect is not executed. Even if the power is turned on, there is an effect that it is possible to recognize that the performance was executed after the power was turned on by the volume of the first performance executed later.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, an initial state setting means is provided for setting the state of the gaming machine to an initial state on the condition that a predetermined operation is performed from the outside when the gaming machine is powered on. A gaming machine S4, wherein the audio output means outputs a predetermined notification sound at maximum volume when set to the initial state.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, it is possible to confirm that the gaming machine has been set to the initial state by the notification sound, and if the gaming machine is initialized illegally. This also has the effect of allowing fraud to be detected early.

<Feature T group> (Variable control of reserved symbol display area)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; and a determination that executes a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on the display means for a predetermined period of time to show the judgment result of the judgment means, and an identification means for showing the specific judgment result on the display means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when information is stopped and displayed, wherein the above information is stored in the storage means before being determined by the determining means. A symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol for each piece of information, and a display mode of an area in which the symbol is displayed on the symbol display means is varied in accordance with the number of the information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine T1 comprising: symbol display area variable means.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have conventionally been known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting slot and display on a liquid crystal screen a variable performance or a jackpot performance according to the lottery results. In such performances, various patterns of performances are carried out, such as performances to create a sense of expectation among players and performances to increase the players' desire to participate in the game, in order to improve the interest of the game. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting slot during a period when a variable performance is being executed, the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information, and the number of balls in the reserved ball information is stored. A gaming machine has been proposed in which is displayed on a display means (Patent document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, the display area where the held ball information is displayed becomes difficult to understand when the held ball information is not displayed. It was wanted. The technical idea of the present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine T1, the display mode of the area in which the symbols are displayed is varied depending on the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means, so that the number of pieces of information stored in the memory means varies depending on the display mode of the display area in which the symbols are displayed. This has the effect of providing an easy-to-understand gaming machine by making it easy to recognize the number of pieces of information.

In the gaming machine T1, the symbol display means displays area information indicating that the symbol is displayed even when the symbol is not displayed, and the symbol display area variable means A gaming machine T2 is characterized in that the area information is displayed in a variable manner.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, the area information is displayed in a variable manner depending on the number of stored information, so area information matching the number of symbols to be displayed is displayed. This has the effect of making it easier to understand.

A gaming machine T3 in the gaming machine T1 or T2, wherein the symbol display means displays identification information that allows identification of an upper limit number of the information that can be stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the upper limit number can be recognized by the identification information, and the game can be prevented from being played in such a way that the upper limit number is exceeded and the acquisition condition is satisfied. .

In the gaming machine T3, the identification information is set to be hidden when the upper limit number of symbols are displayed.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T3, the identification information is hidden when the upper limit number of symbols is displayed, so that it is suppressed from interfering with the display of the symbols. This has the effect of making the design easier to identify.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T4, a period determining means for determining a period in which a predetermined number of the acquisition conditions are met, and a display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed according to the period determined by the period determining means are provided. A gaming machine T5 comprising: rule changing means for changing display rules to be varied.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines T1 to T4, a display rule that varies the display mode of the area in which symbols are displayed is varied depending on the period until a predetermined number of acquisition conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the period during which the acquisition condition is met by changing the display mode, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T5, the symbol display area variable means displays the first display mode until a first number of symbols are displayed, and when the number exceeds the first number, the symbol display area variable means changes to the first display mode. A gaming machine T6 is characterized in that the game machine T6 displays a variable display in a second display mode different from the above.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines T1 to T5, the first display mode is displayed until the first number is displayed, so the acquisition condition is maintained until the first number is exceeded. This has the effect of increasing the player's desire to accomplish the goal and increasing the interest in the game.

<Characteristics U group> (cancellation of pending quantity display)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; and a determination that executes a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on the display means for a predetermined period of time to show the judgment result of the judgment means, and an identification means for showing the specific judgment result on the display means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when information is stopped and displayed, wherein the above information is stored in the storage means before being determined by the determining means. a symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol for each piece of information; and a display mode variable means for varying a display mode displayed on the symbol display means based on a period during which a predetermined number of the information has been acquired by the acquisition means. A gaming machine U1 characterized in that it has the following.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have conventionally been known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting slot and display on a liquid crystal screen a variable performance or a jackpot performance according to the lottery results. In such performances, various patterns of performances are carried out, such as performances to create a sense of expectation among players and performances to increase the players' desire to participate in the game, in order to improve the interest of the game. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting slot during a period when a variable performance is being executed, the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information, and the number of balls in the reserved ball information is stored. A gaming machine has been proposed in which is displayed on a display means (Patent document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display format in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. The technical idea of the present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine U1, the display mode displayed on the symbol display means is changed depending on the period until a predetermined number of pieces of information are acquired, so that the player is not interested in the period until a predetermined number of pieces of information are acquired. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine U2 in the gaming machine U1, wherein the display mode changing means varies the display mode in the display area in which the symbols are displayed based on the period.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1, the display mode of the display area where the symbols are displayed is changed based on the period, so you can also check the period while checking that the symbols are displayed. It has the effect of being recognizable.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the display area in the symbol display means in which the symbol is displayed has a suggestion mode that suggests that the symbol is the area to be displayed, even during a period when the symbol is not displayed. A game machine U3 characterized in that display settings are made.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the suggestion aspect is displayed even during a period when no symbols are displayed, so that it is possible to quickly confirm that the information has been acquired. There is an effect.

A gaming machine U4 in the gaming machine U3, wherein the display mode variable means varies the suggestion mode in accordance with the period.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U3, the suggestion mode is varied in accordance with the period required for storing a predetermined number of pieces of information, so the frequency at which information is stored depending on the suggestion mode is This has the effect of being able to confirm.

In the gaming machine U3 or U4, the suggestion mode is displayed in a regularly variable manner based on the number of displayed symbols, and the display mode variable means is configured to display the suggestion mode in a manner that varies regularly based on the number of displayed symbols, and the display mode variable means changes the suggestion mode according to the period of time. A gaming machine U5, characterized in that the game machine U5 is characterized in that the display is changed to a special suggestion mode different from the suggestion mode corresponding to the number of the symbols present.

According to the game machine U5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine U3 or U4, the frequency of information acquisition can be confirmed by the special suggestion mode, and the suggestion mode changes regularly and irregularly. This has the effect that you can play the game while enjoying the situation.

<Characteristics Group V> (Holding Navigation)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; and a determination that executes a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on the display means for a predetermined period of time to show the judgment result of the judgment means, and an identification means for showing the specific judgment result on the display means. A gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, wherein the information before being determined by the determining means is stored in the storage means. A game machine V1 characterized in that it has a performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance based on a number or more stored.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have conventionally been known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting slot and display on a liquid crystal screen a variable performance or a jackpot performance according to the lottery results. In such performances, various patterns of performances are carried out, such as performances to create a sense of expectation among players and performances to increase the players' desire to participate in the game, in order to improve the interest of the game. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting slot during a period when a variable performance is being executed, the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information, and the number of balls in the reserved ball information is stored. A gaming machine has been proposed in which is displayed on a display means (Patent document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display format in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. The technical idea of the present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine V1, a specific effect is executed when a predetermined number or more of information is stored in the storage means, so that it is possible to create interest not only in the determination result but also in the number of stored pieces of information. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine V1, an advance determination means executes a determination on the information stored in the storage means before the determination means makes a determination, and the performance execution means performs a determination in advance by the advance determination means. A gaming machine V2 characterized in that it has a performance determining means capable of determining the type of the specific performance based on a determination result.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1, the type of specific performance is determined based on the preliminary determination result, so that the identification information is stored before being dynamically displayed by the specific performance. This has the effect of making it possible to suggest the determination result of the information that is available, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine V2, gaming machine V3 is characterized in that the type of the specific performance is determined based on period information corresponding to a period until a predetermined number of the information is stored by the storage means. .

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V2, the type of specific performance is determined based on the period information corresponding to the period until a predetermined number of information is stored in the storage means. This has the effect of being able to identify the frequency with which information is stored due to presentation.

Any of the gaming machines V1 to V3 includes a history information storage means for storing game history information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the specific performance is based on the history information stored in the history information storage means. A gaming machine V4 characterized in that the type of the specific performance is determined based on.

According to the gaming machine V4, the type of specific performance is determined based on the game history information in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines V1 to V3, so the type of the specific performance can be changed by continuing the game. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of players getting bored with the game early.

A gaming machine V5 in any of gaming machines V1 to V4, wherein the specific performance is continuously executed until the number of the information stored in the storage means becomes a specific number or less. .

According to the gaming machine V5, in any of the gaming machines V1 to V4, a specific effect is continued until the number of pieces falls below a specific number, so the player has to play the game so that the stored information does not fall below a specific number. This has the effect of motivating people.

In any of gaming machines V1 to V5, a symbol display means displays a corresponding symbol for each of the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means; A gaming machine V6, characterized in that it has a symbol display area variable means for changing the display mode of an area in which the symbols are displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the number of the information contained therein.

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines V1 to V5, the display mode of the area where the symbols are displayed is changed according to the number of stored information, so that the information is not stored. This has the effect that the numbers can be easily identified.

<Characteristics W group> (Lucky number)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; and a determination that executes a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on the display means for a predetermined period of time to show the judgment result of the judgment means, and an identification means for showing the specific judgment result on the display means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when information is stopped and displayed, wherein the above information is stored in the storage means before being determined by the determining means. a symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol for each piece of information; and, when the information is stored in the storage means, a symbol display means for displaying a symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means at the time when the information is stored; A number information storage means storing number information corresponding to the number of pieces stored with the information before being determined by the determination means, and executing a specific performance based on the number information stored in the number information storage means. A game machine W1 characterized in that it has a performance execution means capable of performing.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have conventionally been known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting slot and display on a liquid crystal screen a variable performance or a jackpot performance according to the lottery results. In such performances, various patterns of performances are carried out, such as performances to create a sense of expectation among players and performances to increase the players' desire to participate in the game, in order to improve the interest of the game. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting slot during a period when a variable performance is being executed, the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information, and the number of balls in the reserved ball information is stored. A gaming machine has been proposed in which is displayed on a display means (Patent document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display format in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. The technical idea of the present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine W1, when information is stored, number information corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored at the time the information is stored is stored for the stored information, and identification based on the number information is stored. Since the presentation is executed, there is an effect that the interest when the information is stored can be further improved.

In the gaming machine W1, the gaming machine W2 is characterized in that the specific performance is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined as the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W1, the specific performance is performed based on the number information stored for information determined to be a specific determination result, so that the specific performance is determined to be a specific determination result. This has the effect of making the player more interested in the number information at the time the information was stored, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine W2, the specific performance is executed in a manner that indicates an area in which the symbols corresponding to the number information stored for the information determined as the specific determination result are displayed. Gaming machine W3 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W2, when a symbol is displayed, it is possible to check the number information stored for information that was previously determined to be a specific determination result due to a specific performance. This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game in the expectation that the symbol will be displayed in the area indicated by the specific performance.

A gaming machine W4, which is one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, characterized in that the symbol is given a suggestion mode corresponding to the number information.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, a suggestion mode corresponding to the number information is attached to the symbol, so that when the number of information before being determined increases or decreases, This also has the effect that the number information at the time it was stored can be recognized in a suggested manner.

In any of the gaming machines W1 to W4, a type determining means for determining the type of the bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution unit, and the number information of the specific performance when the bonus game is being executed. and a notification means for notifying suggestive information suggesting type information corresponding to the type of the bonus game being executed based on the information being stored in the number of memories corresponding to the number of memories. A gaming machine W5.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines W1 to W4, suggestion information indicating the type of bonus game being executed is reported by storing information up to the number of memories corresponding to a specific performance. Therefore, the game can be made to memorize information even during the bonus game, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W5, the gaming machine W6 is characterized in that the type of the bonus game is difficult to identify from the identification information for indicating the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W5, it is possible to increase the value of the suggestion information by configuring the type of bonus game to be difficult to identify based on the identification information. be.

<Group X> (Charge effect derivative)
a first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter at all times; and a second ball entry means which is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which entry is more difficult than the first state. , acquisition means capable of acquiring first information when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, and acquiring second information when a game ball enters the second ball entering means; , a storage means in which the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means are stored, and a determination that executes a determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on the display means, and when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; In the gaming machine, the second ball entering means is changed from the second state to the second state. a discriminating means for discriminating whether a specific condition is satisfied; a discriminating means for performing a performance to show a determination result by the discriminating means; A game machine X1 characterized in that it has a performance determining means capable of determining a specific performance as a performance to be executed.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have conventionally been known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting slot and display on a liquid crystal screen a variable performance or a jackpot performance according to the lottery results. In such performances, various patterns of performances are carried out, such as performances to create a sense of expectation among players and performances to increase the players' desire to participate in the game, in order to improve the interest of the game. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., a movable member such as a blade shape that regulates the entry of balls into the starting port and releases the regulation when an opening condition is met to facilitate the entry of game balls. A game machine has been proposed in which a starting port is provided with a starting port (patent document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2011-229733). In the pachinko machine and the like described above, even if the opening condition is simply satisfied and the movable member moves, there is a risk that the player will become bored with the game. The technical idea of the present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the problem of players becoming bored with the game early.

According to the gaming machine X1, a player can easily determine that a specific condition has been established due to a specific performance, and plays the game with the expectation that not only a specific determination result but also a specific performance will be executed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine X2, which is the gaming machine X1, further comprising a prohibition means for prohibiting the performance determining means from determining a specific performance when an avoidance condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine X1, when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the specific performance is prohibited from being determined, so that it is possible to suppress the specific performance from being executed indiscriminately. effective.

In the gaming machine X1 or X2, a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entering means is set to be more easily changed from the second state to the first state than the normal state. and the avoidance condition is characterized in that at least one condition is set based on the fact that the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. A gaming machine X3.

According to the gaming machine X3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine X1 or X2, there is a high possibility that a large amount of second information is stored in the storage means at the timing when the special state is set to the normal state, so that the avoidance condition is By making it easier for the ball to enter the ball into the second ball entry means, it is possible to suppress the problem of excessive ball entry into the second ball entry means.

In gaming machine X3, the avoidance condition is that when the normal state is set from the special state set by the state setting means, the second information is stored in the storage means. A gaming machine X4 characterized in that at least one condition is set.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine X3, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of excessively storing the second information.

In any of the gaming machines X2 to X4, a firing means capable of firing a game ball by varying the firing force based on a player's operation, and a game ball fired by the firing means with a first firing force. A first channel configured to allow a ball to flow down the first channel, and a game ball launched with a second launch force different from the first launch force configured to make it difficult for a game ball to flow down the first channel. a second flow path configured to allow the ball to flow downward; the first ball entry means is disposed at a position where the game balls flowing down the first flow path can enter; The ball means is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the ball means flows down the game ball into the first flow path. A gaming machine

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effect exerted on any of the gaming machines X2 to X4, when the avoidance condition is satisfied, information suggesting that the gaming ball is caused to flow down into the first channel is notified, so that the gaming machine This has the effect of suppressing the problem that a player enters a game ball into the second ball entry means which has been changed to the first state.

<Y group> (Button pop-out control)
an operation means having an operation surface that can be operated by a player; a movement means for moving the operation surface of the operation means; and an operation control means for controlling the operation of the movement means; The moving means is configured to be capable of performing a first operation of moving the operation surface of the operating means in a first movement mode and a second operation of moving the operation surface of the operation means in a second movement mode different from the first movement mode. , the movement control means executes the first operation when a first condition is satisfied, and executes the second operation when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that it controls the operation of the gaming machine Y1.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have conventionally been known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting slot and display on a liquid crystal screen a variable performance or a jackpot performance according to the lottery results. In such performances, various patterns of performances are carried out, such as performances to create a sense of expectation among players and performances to increase the players' desire to participate in the game, in order to improve the interest of the game. . This type of pachinko machine, etc. is equipped with operating means such as switches that can be operated by the player, and by operating the operating means, the player can change the content of the variable performance being executed, or change the type of background. A gaming machine configured to be switchable has been proposed (Patent document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem in that the player quickly becomes bored with the game if the player simply operates the operating means. The technical idea of the present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine Y1, since the operation control means can move the operation surface of the operation means in different movement modes, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect using the operating means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine Y2 in the gaming machine Y1, wherein the moving means moves the operating surface of the operating means from a predetermined initial position to a specific operating position.

According to the gaming machine Y2, since the movement mode of the operation surface of the operation means until it is moved to a specific operation position can be varied by the operation control means, the process of movement of the operation surface of the operation means can also be controlled. can make people interested.

The gaming machine Y2 is characterized in that the moving means moves the operating surface of the operating means so that the moving period in the second action is longer than the moving period in the first action. Game machine Y3.

According to the gaming machine Y3, since the movement period can be varied depending on the control content of the operation control means, it is possible to make the player more interested in the process in which the operation surface of the operation means moves.

In gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the moving means includes a driving means that generates a driving force to move the operating surface of the operating means, and a transmitting means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. and the operation control means executes a plurality of drive controls on the drive means, and changes the operation content of the moving means depending on the content of the drive control executed. Characteristic gaming machine Y4.

According to the gaming machine Y4, the operation contents of the moving means can be varied by varying the contents of the drive control applied to the drive means. Therefore, the control content of the operation control means can be simplified.

In the gaming machine Y4, the driving means generates the driving force by a rotational movement, and the operation control means performs a first drive control for rotating the driving means in a first direction as the plurality of drive controls. and a second drive control for rotating the vehicle in a second direction different from the first direction, and the moving means is capable of performing the first drive control when the first drive control is performed by the control means. A gaming machine Y5, characterized in that the gaming machine Y5 executes one operation and executes the second operation when the second drive control is executed.

According to the gaming machine Y5, since the moving means performs different operations by rotating the driving means in different directions, it is possible to easily change the manner in which the operating surface of the operating means is moved.

A gaming machine Y6, which is characterized in that the gaming machine Y5 includes a speed variable means that can vary the rotational speed of the drive means.

According to the gaming machine Y6, since the rotation speed is varied by the speed variable means, it is possible to easily diversify the manner in which the operation surface of the operation means is moved, and the performance effect of the performance using the operation means can be varied. can be increased.

In the gaming machine Y6, the second movement mode is to move the operation surface of the operation means to the specific operation position according to the rotational speed of the drive means varied by the speed variable means. Characteristic gaming machine Y7.

In the gaming machines Y1 to Y7, a discriminating means executes discriminating when a discriminating condition is satisfied, and a privilege granting means provides an advantageous privilege to the player when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a predetermined discriminating result. , a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect for suggesting that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the predetermined discrimination result, and the moving means operates as the suggestion effect. A gaming machine Y8, wherein the operation control means determines the content of operation control according to the determination result of the determination means.

According to the gaming machine Y8, since the determination result of the determining means can be suggested by the manner in which the operation surface of the operation means is moved, it is possible for the player to pay close attention to the manner in which the operation surface of the operation means is moved. Become. Therefore, the performance effect of the performance using the operating means can be enhanced.

<Characteristics Z group> (Prevents buttons from popping out)
An operation means having an operation surface that can be operated by a player when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied, a condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined movement condition is satisfied, and a condition determination means that allows the predetermined movement to be performed. a moving means capable of moving the operating surface of the operating means from the storage position to the protruding position when a condition is satisfied; a movement control means for controlling the moving means; and a predetermined movement control means for the operating means. and a performance execution means for performing a performance based on an operation performed, wherein the moving means performs a first operation for moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position. and a second operation of moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position, and the movement control means is configured to be able to perform a second operation of moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position, and the movement control means is configured to perform a second operation of moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position, and the movement control means is configured to perform a second operation of moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position. The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that when the performance becomes executable, the first action is performed.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have conventionally been known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting slot and display on a liquid crystal screen a variable performance or a jackpot performance according to the lottery results. In such performances, various patterns of performances are carried out, such as performances to create a sense of expectation among players and performances to increase the players' desire to participate in the game, in order to improve the interest of the game. . This type of pachinko machine, etc. is equipped with operating means such as switches that can be operated by the player, and by operating the operating means, the player can change the content of the variable performance being executed, or change the type of background. A gaming machine configured to be switchable has been proposed (Patent document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem in that the player quickly becomes bored with the game if the player simply operates the operating means. The technical idea of the present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the game machine Z1, the movement control means causes the moving means to perform the first action regardless of whether or not the operating surface of the operating means is moved, so that the moving means operates to move the operating surface of the operating means. By knowing whether or not this is the case, it is possible to prevent the player from discovering this in advance, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, by performing the first action, it is possible to make the player expect that the second action will be executed.

In the gaming machine Z1, the moving means includes a driving means that generates a driving force for moving the operating surface of the operating means through a rotational operation, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. The movement control means includes a first drive control for rotating the drive means in a first direction as the plurality of movement controls, and a first drive control for rotating the drive means in a second direction different from the first direction. The moving means is capable of executing the first operation when the first drive control is executed by the movement control means, and the second drive control is executed. The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that it executes the second operation when the game machine is played.

According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Z1, it can be configured so that the operating surface of the operating means does not move even when the driving means is driven, and the position of the driving means can be changed from the operating surface to the operating surface according to the situation. This has the effect that it can be changed without moving it.

The gaming machine Z2 has a regulating means that is variable between a regulating state in which movement of the operation surface of the operating means by the moving means is restricted and a release state in which the regulation is released, and the control content of the movement controlling means is variable. The first operation executed by the moving means in response is an operation for changing the restricting means to the released state, and the second operation moves the operating surface of the operating means to the protruding position. Game machine Z3 is characterized by a motion.

According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Z2, the operation of the moving means is restricted by the regulating means. Then, the moving means is operated to vary the state of the regulating means in accordance with the control content executed by the operation controlling means. Therefore, even if the moving means is operated, it is possible to reliably control whether or not the operating surface of the operating means is moved.

In the gaming machine Z3, the transmission means includes a rotational member that can rotate in synchronization with the rotational movement of the drive means, and an action member that is connected to the operation means and is acted on by the rotational movement of the rotational member. and the rotating member has a protrusion that can come into contact with the action member, and the regulating means rotates the drive means in the first direction to cause the protrusion to contact the action member. A gaming machine Z4 is characterized in that it can be changed to the released state by making contact with the gaming machine Z4.

The gaming machine Z4 is characterized in that the regulating means does not change to the released state when the driving means is rotated in the second direction to bring the protrusion into contact with the action member. The gaming machine Z5.

The gaming machine Z5 is characterized in that the position at which the protrusion stops is the same when the first drive control is executed by the operation control means and when the second drive control is executed. Game machine Z6.

In the gaming machines Z1 to Z6, a discriminating means executes discriminating when a discriminating condition is satisfied, and a privilege granting means provides an advantageous privilege to the player when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a predetermined discriminating result. , a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect for suggesting that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the predetermined discrimination result, and the predetermined movement condition is determined according to the discrimination result of the discrimination means. A gaming machine Z7 characterized in that the following is true.

<Characteristics α group> (Over-winning at jackpot)
A discriminating means capable of executing a determination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discriminating result by the counter-obtaining means, and a display means on which the discriminating information for indicating the particular discriminating result is displayed. a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when displayed; a first bonus game in which a first bonus advantageous to the player is given as the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means; a second benefit game in which a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit is provided; and determining means capable of determining either of the following: is characterized by having a type determining means for determining a notification type from a plurality of types for notifying the player of notification information for notifying the type information of the bonus game being executed when the bonus game is executed. A gaming machine α1.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have conventionally been known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting slot and display on a liquid crystal screen a variable performance or a jackpot performance according to the lottery results. In such performances, various patterns of performances are carried out, such as performances to create a sense of expectation among players and performances to increase the players' desire to participate in the game, in order to improve the interest of the game. (Patent document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there has been a need to further improve the interest of the game. The technical idea of the present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine α1, when a bonus game is being executed, the notification type for suggesting the type of bonus game is determined from a plurality of types, so that the notification types are executed in a variety of ways, increasing the interest of the game. It has the effect of improving the

The gaming machine α1 includes a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the open state, and a variable ball entry means that can be changed from the closed state to the closed state as the bonus game. and variable control means for causing an open game by varying the variable ball entry means until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means in an open state, and the notification type is set such that the number of game balls exceeds the predetermined number. A gaming machine α2 characterized in that it includes at least a first notification type for notifying the notification information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine α2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine α1, it is possible to increase the value of entering more than a predetermined number of game balls into the variable ball entry means, and to improve the interest of the game. be.

In the gaming machine α2, the bonus game is to execute the open game a plurality of times, and when the first notification type is determined, based on the fact that the open game has been executed a predetermined number of times, A gaming machine α3 characterized in that it has a notification type switching means for switching to another notification type.

According to the gaming machine α3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine α2, even when the first notification type is determined, it is possible to switch to another notification type during the bonus game, so that the game ball exceeding the predetermined number can be switched to another notification type during the bonus game. This has the advantage that even when it is difficult to let the ball enter the ball, it is possible to switch to broadcast the broadcast information.

In the gaming machine α3, the notification type switching means switches to the other notification type on the condition that the specific notification information is not notified in the first notification type. α4.

According to the gaming machine α4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine α3, the notification type can be switched on the condition that specific notification information is not being notified, so it has the effect of suppressing the problem of duplication of notifications. .

<Characteristic β group> (Produces a normal hit as a definite variable hit)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; and a determination that executes a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. means, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on the display means for a predetermined period of time to show the judgment result of the judgment means, and an identification means for showing the specific judgment result on the display means. and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, the game machine having a bonus game executing means that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, based on the information stored in the storage means. and a preliminary determination execution means that executes a determination, and the information that is determined to be the specific determination result by the preliminary determination execution means when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means is stored. A gaming machine β1 characterized in that it has a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have conventionally been known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting slot and display on a liquid crystal screen a variable performance or a jackpot performance according to the lottery results. In such performances, various patterns of performances are carried out, such as performances to create a sense of expectation among players and performances to increase the players' desire to participate in the game, in order to improve the interest of the game. (Patent document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there has been a need to further improve the interest of the game. The technical idea of the present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine β1, when the bonus game is executed, if it is further determined that the bonus game will be executed after that, the specific performance is executed, so that the specific performance is not executed. This has the effect of increasing the expectations of the players and increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine β1, the bonus game includes a first bonus game in which a normal gaming state is set after execution, and a probability that the player will determine the specific determination result after execution is higher than in the normal gaming state. At least a second bonus game in which a special game state is set is set, and the specific performance is configured in a manner suggesting that the special game state is set. Game machine β2.

In the gaming machine β2, the identification information is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode as a stop-display mode indicating that the second bonus game is to be executed, and that the first bonus game is to be executed. If the information determined to be the specific determination result is stored, when the identification information is dynamically displayed, the stop display switching means can be configured to stop display in the specific stop display mode. Gaming machine β3 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine β, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine β2, even when the first bonus game is executed, the display is stopped in a specific stop display mode, so that it looks as if the second bonus game is being executed. It has the effect of making you think.

In the gaming machine β3, the stop display switching means stores the information that is determined to be the specific determination result when the identification information that causes the first bonus game to be executed is dynamically displayed. and the display mode is switched to the specific stop display mode based on the information determined to be the specific determination result being stored during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine β4.

According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine β3, the stop mode can be switched even after the dynamic display has started, so the effect is that the chances of displaying in a specific stop mode can be increased. be.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P8, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R4, S1 to S4, T1 to T6, U1 to U5, V1 to V6, W1 to W6, X1 to X4, Y1 to A gaming machine γ1 located in any one of Y8, Z1 to Z7, α1 to α4, and β1 to β4, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P8, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R4, S1 to S4, T1 to T6, U1 to U5, V1 to V6, W1 to W6, X1 to X4, Y1 to A gaming machine γ2 characterized in that in any one of Y8, Z1 to Z7, α1 to α4, and β1 to β4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P8, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R4, S1 to S4, T1 to T6, U1 to U5, V1 to V6, W1 to W6, X1 to X4, Y1 to A gaming machine γ3 in any one of Y8, Z1 to Z7, α1 to α4, and β1 to β4, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have conventionally been known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting slot and display on a liquid crystal screen a variable performance or a jackpot performance according to the lottery results. In such performances, various patterns of performances are carried out, such as performances to create a sense of expectation among players and performances to increase the players' desire to participate in the game, in order to improve the interest of the game. .
In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a game ball enters the starting slot during a period when a variable performance is being executed, the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information, and the number of balls in the reserved ball information is stored. A game machine has been proposed in which the following is displayed on a display means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075741).
However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the player's interest in playing games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 includes an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means. A determining means that executes a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and a dynamic display means that is capable of dynamically displaying identification information on the display means for a predetermined period of time to indicate the determination result by the determining means. and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the game is determined by the determination means. a symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol for each of the information stored in the storage means before being displayed; Display mode changing means for changing the displayed display mode.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the display mode changing means changes the display mode in the display area in which the symbols are displayed based on the period.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 suggests that in the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, the display area in the symbol display means in which the symbol is displayed is an area in which the symbol is displayed. The suggestion mode is set to be displayed even during a period when the symbol is not displayed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in which the display mode variable means changes the suggestion mode in accordance with the period.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a memory stored in the storage means. a determining means for executing a determination based on the determined information; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the means, and a symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol for each of the information stored in the storage means; and a display displayed on the symbol display means based on a period during which a predetermined number of the information has been acquired by the acquisition means. Display mode changing means for changing the mode.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display mode variable means varies the display mode in the display area in which the symbols are displayed based on the period.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the display area in which the symbol is displayed in the symbol display means, a suggestion mode indicating that the symbol is the area to be displayed is set to be displayed even during a period when the symbol is not displayed. It is.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display mode variable means varies the suggestion mode in accordance with the period.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
114 Display control device ( effect execution means)
226 audio output device (audio output means)
Z1004 Benefit granting means
Z2051 initial setting means
Z2171 volume setting means
Z6107 output control means

Claims (1)

A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
A gaming machine comprising a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to a player when a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means,
audio output means capable of outputting audio as part of the performance executed by the performance execution means;
a volume setting means capable of setting the volume output by the audio output means based on an operation from outside the gaming machine;
a first state in which the audio output means outputs audio based on the volume set by the volume setting unit; and a first state in which the audio output unit outputs audio at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume set by the volume setting unit. output control means for switching between a second state and a second state;
Initial setting means for setting the second state when a power-off state in which power supply for operating the gaming machine is cut off to a recovery state in which power supply is started to the gaming machine. death,
The gaming machine is
In the second state, it is possible to set a specific volume that is lower than the lowest volume set by the volume setting means,
During the period in the second state, a predetermined display mode can be displayed ,
During the period in the first state, a specific mode can be displayed to indicate that the volume can be changed by the volume setting means, and during the period in the second state, the specific mode can be displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being configured so that it is not displayed .

Images